Electrical Sector Solutions
Volume 9 OEM
Eaton Corporation
Electrical Sector
1111 Superior Ave.
Cleveland, OH 44114
United States
877-ETN-CARE (877-386-2273)
Eaton.com
© 2011 Eaton Corporation
All other trademarks are property
of their respective owners.
All Rights Reserved
Printed in USA
Publication No. CA08100011E / MSC
January 2011
Volume 9:
OEM
Volume 9—OEM Product Guide
Tab 1—Circuit Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T1-1
Tab 2—Motor Control and Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T2-1
Tab 3—Logic Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T3-1
Tab 4—Operator Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T4-1
Tab 5—Sensors and Limit Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T5-1
Tab 6—Machine Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T6-1
Appendix 1—Eaton Terms & Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-A1-1
9
Copyright
Dimensions, Weights and Ratings
Dimensions, weights and ratings given in this catalog are approximate and should not
be used for construction purposes. Drawings containing exact dimensions are available
upon request. All listed product specifications and ratings are subject to change without
notice. Photographs are representative of production units.
Terms and Conditions
All prices and discounts are subject to change without notice. When price changes
occur, they are published in Eaton’s Price and Availability Digest (PAD). All orders
accepted by Eaton’s electrical sector are subject to the general terms and conditions
as set forth in Appendix 1—Eaton Terms & Conditions.
Technical and Descriptive Publications
This catalog contains brief technical data for proper selection of products. Further
information is available in the form of technical information publications and illustrated
brochures. If additional product information is required, contact your local Eaton
Products Distributor, call 1-800-525-2000 or visit our website at www.eaton.com.
Compliance with Nuclear Regulation 10 CFR 21
Eaton products are sold as commercial grade products not intended for application in
facilities or activities licensed by the United States Nuclear Regulatory Commission
for atomic purposes, under 10 CFR 21. Further certification will be required for use of
these products in a safety-related application in any nuclear facility licensed by the
U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission.
WARNING
The installation and use of Eaton products should be in accordance with the provisions
of the U.S. National Electrical Code® and/or other local codes or industry standards that
are pertinent to the particular end use. Installation or use not in accordance with these
codes and standards could be hazardous to personnel and/or equipment.
Copyright ©2013 Eaton, All Rights Reserved.
These catalog pages do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment, nor to provide for
every possible contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance.
Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered
sufficiently for the purchaser’s purposes, the matter should be referred to the local Eaton Products
Distributor or Sales Office. The contents of this catalog shall not become part of or modify any prior
or existing agreement, commitment or relationship. The sales contract contains the entire
obligation of Eaton’s electrical sector. The warranty contained in the contract between the parties
is the sole warranty of Eaton. Any statements contained herein do not create new warranties or
modify the existing warranty.
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com i
Introduction
Eaton Corporation is a global leader in power distribution, power quality,
control and automation, and monitoring products.
At Eaton, we believe a reliable, efficient and safe power system is the foundation of every
successful enterprise. Through innovative technologies, cutting-edge products and our highly
skilled services team, we empower businesses around the world to achieve a powerful advantage.
In addition, Eaton is committed to creating and maintaining powerful customer relationships built
on a foundation of excellence. From the products we manufacture to our dedicated customer
service and support, we know what’s important to you.
Solutions
Eaton takes the complexity out of power systems management with a holistic and strategic
approach, leveraging our industry-leading technology, solutions and services. We focus on
the following three areas in all we do:
●Reliability—maintain the
appropriate level of power
continuity without
disruption or unexpected
downtime
●Efficiency—minimize
energy usage, operating
costs, equipment footprint
and environmental impact
●Safety—identify and
mitigate electrical hazards
to protect what you value
most
Using the Eaton Catalog Library
As we grow, it becomes increasingly difficult to include all products in one or two comprehensive
catalogs. Knowing that each user has their specific needs, we have created a library of catalogs for our
products that when complete, will contain 15 volumes. Since the volumes will continuously be a work
in progress and updated, each volume will stand alone. Refer to our volume directory, MZ08100001E,
for a quick glance of where to look for the products you need. The 15 volumes include:
●Volume 1—Residential
and Light Commercial
(CA08100002E)
●Volume 2—Commercial
Distribution (CA08100003E)
●Volume 3—Power
Distribution and Control
Assemblies (CA08100004E)
●Volume 4—Circuit
Protection (CA08100005E)
●Volume 5—Motor Control
and Protection
(CA08100006E)
●Volume 6—Solid-State
Motor Control
(CA08100007E)
●Volume 7—Logic Control,
Operator Interface and
Connectivity Solutions
(CA08100008E)
●Volume 8—Sensing
Solutions (CA08100010E)
●Volume 9—Original
Equipment Manufacturer
(CA08100011E)
●Volume 10—Enclosed
Control (CA08100012E)
●Volume 11—Vehicle and
Commercial Controls
(CA08100013E)
●Volume 12—Aftermarket,
Renewal Parts and Life
Extension Solutions
(CA08105001E)
●Volume 13—Counters,
Timers and Tachometers
(CA08100015E)—Available
in electronic format only
●Volume 14—Fuses
(CA08100016E)—Available
in electronic format only
●Volume 15—Solar Inverters
and Electrical Balance of
System (CA08100018E)
These volumes are not all-inclusive of every product, but they are meant to be an overview
of our product lines. For our full range of product solutions and additional product information,
consult Eaton.com/electrical and other catalogs and product guides in our literature library.
These references include:
●The Consulting Application
Guide (CA08104001E)
●The Eaton Power Quality
Product Guide (COR01FYA)
If you don’t have the volume that contains the product or information that you are looking for,
not to worry. You can access every volume of the catalog library at Eaton.com/electrical in the
Literature Library.
By installing our Automatic Tab Updater (ATU), you can be sure you always have the most recent
version of each volume and tab.
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Circuit Protection
Circuit Breakers
Rotary Disconnect Switches
Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders
1.1 Circuit Breakers
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T1-2
Series G Molded Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T1-5
Series G Motor Circuit Protectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T1-8
Series G Motor Protector Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T1-10
Universal Molded Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T1-13
QUICKLAG Type QC Miniature Circuit Breakers—
Cable-In/Cable-Out Type QC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T1-19
WMZ UL 489 Miniature Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T1-25
WMZS UL 1077 Miniature Circuit Breakers—
Supplementary Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T1-27
Series NRX Low Voltage Power Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T1-29
Magnum Low Voltage Power Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T1-32
1.2 Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T1-40
C350 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T1-41
1.3 Rotary Disconnect Switches
Open Rotary Disconnects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T1-42
Enclosed Rotary Disconnects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T1-58
For our complete product offering, see Volume 4—Circuit Protection, CA08100005E and
Volume 5—Motor Control and Protection, CA08100006E.
V9-T1-2 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.1
Circuit Protection
Circuit Breakers
Product Overview
Circuit Breaker Selection Guide
For our complete product offering, see Volume 4—Circuit Protection, CA08100005E.
Description
Series G
Molded Case Circuit Breaker
Universal
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
QUICKLAG® Type QC
Miniature Circuit Breakers
Page V9-T1-5 Page V9-T1-13 Page V9-T1-19
General Applications
Line protection—molded case switch, motor circuit
protection (combination tested with Eaton starters
and contactors) thermal-magnetic and electronic
trip units.
Line protection—feeder and branch thermal-
magnetic trip unit.
Used to provide branch circuit protection in
cable-in/out panel or DIN-Rail mount
applications.
Technical Data
Maximum current rating 2500A 600A 100A
Maximum voltage—AC 690 Vac 480 Vac 240 Vac
Maximum voltage—DC 250 Vdc 250 Vdc 80 Vdc
Poles 1, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3 QC = 1, 2, 3, 4
QCD = 1, 2, 3
QCR/QCF = 1, 2, 3
Max. interrupting capacities
See individual catalogs for
limitations and back-up
protection requirements.
Three-pole at 240V
E = 200 kA
J = 200 kA
L = 200 kA
Three-pole at 480V
E = 100 kA
J = 200 kA
L = 200 kA
Three-pole at 240V
G = 25 kA (480/277)
F = 25 kA
J = 35 kA
K = 35 kA
L = 35 kA
Three-pole at 480V
GI = 14 kA (480/277)
GD = 22 kA
F = 14 kA
J = 20 kA
K = 20 kA
L = 20 kA
65 kA at 240 Vac
5 kA at 80 Vdc
Approvals
UL® 489
IEC 60947-2
CE
CSA®
KEMA-KEUR
CCC
UL 489CE
IEC 60947-2
CE
CSA
UL 489
CSA 22.2
Environmental Data
Humidity Non-condensing 100% relative humidity Non-condensing 100% relative humidity —
Shock———
Vibration — — —
Operating temperature –20° to 70°C (–4° to 158°F) derating applies –20° to 70°C (–4° to 158°F) derating applies 40°C (104°F)
Dielectric strength Below 250A 6 kV
Above 250A 8 kV
Below 250A 6 kV
Above 250A 8 kV
1960 Vac (acc. to UL 489)
Insulation resistance 750 Vac 750 Vac —
Endurance/life 250A: EG, JG = 8,000 operations
630A: LG = 6,000 operations
250A: Gi = 10,000 operations
Fi = 8,000 operations
400A: Ji, Ki, Li = 6,000 operations
>10,000 operations
Approximate weight E Three-pole—2.88 lbs (1.04 kg)
J Three-pole—5.06 lbs (2.30 kg)
L Three-pole—12.36 lbs (5.61 kg)
G Three-pole—2.10 lbs (0.95 kg)
F Three-pole—4.5 lbs (2.0 kg)
J Three-pole—12.50 lbs (5.7 kg)
K Three-pole—11.50 lbs (5.2 kg)
QC Single-pole—0.36 lbs (162.8 g)
Two-pole—0.61 lbs (274.9 g)
Three-pole—1.14 lbs (518.3 g)
QCD Single-pole—0.43 lbs (195.3 g)
Two-pole—0.89 lbs (401.9 g)
Three-pole—1.34 lbs (605.6 g)
QCR Single-pole—0.22 lbs (97.9 g)
Two-pole—0.48 lbs (215.8 g)
Three-pole—0.70 lbs (315.6 g)
QCF Single-pole—0.24 lbs (109.9 g)
Two-pole—0.50 lbs (225.2 g)
Three-pole—0.74 lbs (335.1 g)
Mounting configuration Backpan, plug-in adapter, DIN-rail (E) Backpan, DIN-rail (G) Panel mount, front mount, 35 mm DIN-rail
mountable
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.1
Circuit Protection
Circuit Breakers
Circuit Breaker Selection Guide, continued
For our complete product offering, see Volume 4—Circuit Protection, CA08100005E.
Description
WMZ UL 489
Miniature Circuit Breakers
WMZS UL 1077
Miniature Circuit Breakers—
Supplementary Protectors
Page V9-T1-25 Page V9-T1-27
General Applications
Used to provide branch circuit protection in cable-
in/out DIN-Rail mount applications.
Used to provide overcurrent protection where
branch protection (for example UL 489 MCCB) is
already provided or not required. Replacement for
fuses used as supplementary protectors.
Te c h n i c a l D a t a
Maximum current rating 40A 63A
Maximum voltage—AC 480/277 Vac (240/415 Vac IEC) 480/277 Vac
Maximum voltage—DC 48 Vdc 65 Vac Single-pole
130 Vac Two-pole
Poles 1, 2, 3 1, 2, 3
Max. interrupting capacities
See individual catalogs for limitations
and back-up protection requirements.
10 kA UL/CSA;
15 kA IEC/EN 60947-2
IEC 240/415V 10 kA
UL/CSA 120V 10 kA
240V 10 kA
277V 6 kA
480V 6 kA
Approvals
UL 489
CE; IEC/EN 60947-2
CSA 22.2
UL 1077
CE; IEC/EN 60947-2; IEC/EN 60898
CSA 22.2 235
Environmental Data
Humidity Acc. IEC 60068-2 (25° to 55°C/
77° to 131°F, 90–95% RH)
—
Shock Acc. IEC 60068-2-27
(40g half sine wave for 10 ms—3 axes)
(15g half sine wave for 20 ms—3 axes)
—
Vibration Acc. to IEC 60068-2-6
5–100 Hz/1.0 mm/0.7g (3 axes)
—
Operating temperature 30°C (86°F) —
Dielectric strength 1960 Vac (acc. to UL 489) —
Insulation resistance 100M ohms at 500 Vdc —
Endurance/life >20,000 operations —
Approximate weight Single-pole—0.27 lbs (121.0g)
Two-pole—0.53 lbs (242.0g)
Three-pole—0.80 lbs (363.0g)
Single-pole—0.26 lbs (120.0g)
Two-pole—0.54 lbs (244.9g)
Three-pole—0.83 lbs (376.5g)
Mounting contribution 35 mm DIN rail mountable 35 mm DIN rail mountable
V9-T1-4 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.1
Circuit Protection
Circuit Breakers
Circuit Breaker Selection Guide, continued
For our complete product offering, see Volume 4—Circuit Protection, CA08100005E.
Description
Series NRX
Low Voltage Power Breakers
Magnum
Low Voltage Power Breakers
Page V9-T1-29 Page V9-T1-32
General Applications
Solution for where space is at a premium or when
equipment dimensions are critical when upgrading
or retrofitting current systems. Offering the power
and performance of a power breaker in the compact
size of a molded case breaker. With its reduced
weight and compact dimensions, you can mount
two times as many feeder breakers and reduce the
overall enclosure density up to 50%.
Enables comprehensive solutions to meet and
exceed the unique and wide-ranging requirements
of today’s global power distribution systems.
Designed and engineered for ultimate custom
configuration and application flexibility in metal
enclosed switchgear and power distribution
enclosures.
Technical Data
Maximum current rating 630–1600A 800–6300A
Maximum voltage—AC 220–690 Vac Up to 690 Vac
Maximum voltage—DC — —
Poles 3, 4 3, 4
Max. interrupting capacities
See individual catalogs for limitations
and back-up protection requirements.
65 kAIC at 480 Vac
Max. withstand capacities 42 kAIC
200 kA at 480 Vac
Max. withstand capacities
100 kAIC
CL fuseless 200 kA at 635 Vac with integral limiters
Approvals
UL 1006 Component
UL 489 Component
IEC 60947-2
UL 1066
IEC 60947-2
KEMA
Environmental Data
Humidity — —
Shock — —
Vibration — —
Operating temperature –25° to 70°C –25° to 70°C
Dielectric strength — —
Insulation resistance — —
Endurance/life 10,000 electrical operations
20,000 mechanical operations
—
Approximate weight Three-pole breaker + cassette—85 lbs (39 kg)
Three-pole breaker—53 lbs (24 kg)
Four-pole breaker + cassette—104 lbs (47 kg)
Four-pole breaker—67 lbs (30 kg)
—
Mounting configuration Rear-connected, front-connected,
surface mounting, mounting bracket,
fixed, drawout breaker with cassette
Fixed or drawout with cassette rear-connected, front-
connected
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.1
Circuit Protection
Circuit Breakers
Series G Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Features
●Field-fit accessories
●Common accessories through 630A
●Space-saving footprint
●High-performance current limiting designs up to
200 kAIC at 480V
●Global ready: UL, CSA, CE, IEC, KEMA-KEUR listings
●Complete breaker includes frame, trip unit, standard
terminals and mounting hardware
Catalog Number Selection
Series G® Molded Case Circuit Breakers
EG Frame
Notes
1Available only as 125 and 160A sizes.
2Is not UL rated.
Frame
E
Performance
600Y/347 480 415 240
B— 181825
E18 25 25 35
S22 35 40 85
H25 65 70 100
C35 100 100 200
KMolded case switch 1
Standard/Application
G = IEC/CE/UL/CSA
Amperes
016 2
015
020
025
030
032 2
035
040
045
050
060
063 2
070
080
090
100
110
125
Number of Poles
1 = One
2 = Two
3 = Three
4 = Four—Neutral 0% Protected
7 = Four—Neutral 100% Protected Trip Unit
FF = Fixed fixed
AF = Adjustable thermal
fixed magnetic
KS = Molded case switch
E G H 3 015 FF G
Terminations/Hardware
Terminals Mounting Hardware
M= Metric end caps
E= Imperial end caps
G= Line/load standard
B= Bolt-on
Metric
Imperial
Metric
—
V9-T1-6 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.1
Circuit Protection
Circuit Breakers
JG Frame
LG Frame
Note
1A = Arc reduction, L = Long, S = Short, I = Instantaneous, G = Ground.
J G S 3 250 FA G C
Frame
J
Performance
600 480 415 240
E18 25 25 65
S18 35 40 85
H25 65 70 100
C35 100 100 200
U50 150 150 200
X50 200 200 200
KMolded case switch
Standard/Application
G = IEC/CE/UL/CSA
Amperes
050
070
080
090
100
125
150
160
175
200
225
250
Trip Unit
AA = Adjustable thermal
Adjustable magnetic
FA = Fixed thermal
Adjustable magnetic
KS = Molded case switch
33 = 310+ electronic LS
32 = 310+ electronic LSI
35 = 310+ electronic LSG
36 = 310+ electronic LSIG
NN = Frame only (no trip)
Terminations/Hardware
Terminals Mounting Hardware
M= Metric end caps
E= Imperial end caps
G= Line/load standard
Metric
Imperial
Metric
Rating
Blank = 80% rated
C = 100% rated
Number of Poles
2 = Two
3 = Three
4 = Four—Neutral 0% protected
8 = Four—Neutral 0–60% protected
9 = Four—Neutral 100% protected
L G S 3 600 FA G C
Frame
L
Performance
600 480 415 240
E18 35 35 65
S25 50 50 85
H35 65 70 100
C50 100 100 200
U65 150 150 200
X65 200 200 200
KMolded case switch
Standard/Application
G = IEC/CE/UL/CSA
Amperes
250
300
350
400
500
600
630
Number of Poles
3 = Three
4 = Four—Neutral 0% protected
6 = Four—Neutral 60% protected
7 = Four—Neutral 100% protected
8 = Four—Neutral 0–60% protected
9 = Four—Neutral 0–100 protected
Trip Unit 1
AA = Adjustable thermal
Adjustable magnetic
FA = Fixed thermal
Adjustable magnetic
KS = Molded case switch
33 = 310+ electronic LS
32 = 310+ electronic LSI
35 = 310+ electronic LSG
36 = 310+ electronic LSIG
38 = 310+ electronic ALSI
39 = 310+ electronic ALSIG
NN = Frame only (no trip)
Terminations/Hardware
Terminals Mounting Hardware
M= Metric end caps
E= Imperial end caps
G= Line/load standard
W= Without terminals
Metric
Imperial
Metric
—
Rating
Blank = 80% rated
C = 100% rated
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-7
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.1
Circuit Protection
Circuit Breakers
Product Selection
Series G Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Approximate Dimensions are in Inches
EG Frame
JG Frame
LG Frame
Note
116, 32, 63A are not UL listed ratings.
Maximum
Continuous
Amperes at 40°C 1
Three-Pole 3 W x 5.5 H x 2.99 D Maximum
Continuous
Amperes at 40°C
Three-Pole 3 W x 5.5 H x 2.99 D
Fixed Thermal
Fixed Magnetic
Fixed Thermal
Fixed Magnetic
IC Rating: 25 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac IC Rating: 70 kAIC at 415 Vac, 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
15 EGE3015FFG 15 EGH3015FFG
20 EGE3020FFG 20 EGH3020FFG
25 EGE3025FFG 25 EGH3025FFG
30 EGE3030FFG 30 EGH3030FFG
35 EGE3035FFG 35 EGH3035FFG
40 EGE3040FFG 40 EGH3040FFG
45 EGE3045FFG 45 EGH3045FFG
50 EGE3050FFG 50 EGH3050FFG
60 EGE3060FFG 60 EGH3060FFG
70 EGE3070FFG 70 EGH3070FFG
80 EGE3080FFG 80 EGH3080FFG
90 EGE3090FFG 90 EGH3090FFG
100 EGE3100FFG 100 EGH3100FFG
125 EGE3125FFG 125 EGH3125FFG
Maximum
Continuous
Amperes
Three-Pole 4.13 W x 7 H x 3.57 D Maximum
Continuous
Amperes
Three-Pole 4.13 W x 7 H x 3.57 D
Magnetic
Range
Fixed Thermal
Adjustable Magnetic
Magnetic
Range
Fixed Thermal
Adjustable Magnetic
IC Rating: 25 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac IC Rating: 70 kAIC at 415 Vac, 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
70 350–00 JGE3070FAG 70 350–700 JGH3070FAG
90 450–900 JGE3090FAG 90 450–900 JGH3090FAG
100 500–1000 JGE3100FAG 100 500–1000 JGH3100FAG
125 625–1250 JGE3125FAG 125 625–1250 JGH3125FAG
150 750–1550 JGE3150FAG 150 750–1550 JGH3150FAG
175 875–1750 JGE3175FAG 175 875–1750 JGH3175FAG
200 1000–2000 JGE3200FAG 200 1000–2000 JGH3200FAG
225 1125–2250 JGE3225FAG 225 1125–2250 JGH3225FAG
250 1250–2500 JGE3250FAG 250 1250–2500 JGH3250FAG
Ampere
Rating
Three-Pole 5.48 W x 10.13 H x 4.09 D
Ampere
Rating
Three-Pole 3 W x 5.5 H x 2.99 D
Fixed Thermal
Adjustable Magnetic
Fixed Thermal
Adjustable Magnetic
IC Rating: 35 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac IC Rating: 70 kAIC at 415 Vac, 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
250 LGE3250FAG 250 LGH3250FAG
300 LGE3300FAG 300 LGH3300FAG
350 LGE3350FAG 350 LGH3350FAG
400 LGE3400FAG 400 LGH3400FAG
500 LGE3500FAG 500 LGH3500FAG
600 LGE3600FAG 600 LGH3600FAG
V9-T1-8 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.1
Circuit Protection
Circuit Breakers
Series G Motor Circuit Protector
Features
●Instantaneous only protector
●Designed for use in combination with motor starters
●Adjustable to motor FLA
●UL recognized component, File E7819 motor circuit protectors
Product Selection
Series G Motor Circuit Protectors
EG Frame—480 Vac, 600Y/347 Vac Maximum
Notes
1Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is required for an intermediate FLA value,
alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used.
2For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown.
3Settings above 10 x In are for special applications, where the ampere rating of the disconnecting means cannot be less than 115% of the motor full load ampere rating.
Continuous
Amperes
Cam
Setting
Motor Full Load
Current Amperes 1
MCP Trip
Setting 2
MCP
Catalog Number
Continuous
Amperes
Cam
Setting
Motor Full Load
Current Amperes 1
MCP Trip
Setting 2
MCP
Catalog Number
3 A 0.69–0.91 9 HMCPE003A0C 50 A 11.5–15.2 150 HMCPE050K2C
B 1.1–1.3 15 B 19.2–22.9 250
C 1.6–1.7 21 C 26.9–30.6 350
D 2.0–2.2 27 D 34.6–38.3 450
E 2.3–2.5 30 E 38.4–42.1 500
F 2.6–2.8 33 F 42.2–43.5 550
7 A 1.5–2.0 21 HMCPE007C0C 70 A 16.1–30.6 210 HMCPE070M2C
B 2.6–3.1 35 B 26.9–32.2 350
C 3.7–3.9 49 C 37.6–42.9 490
D 4.8–5.2 63 D 48.4–53.7 630
E 5.3–5.7 70 E 53.8–59.1 700
F 5.8–6.1 77 F 59.2–60.9 770
15 A 3.4–4.5 45 HMCPE015E0C 100 A 23.0–30.6 300 HMCPE100R3C
B 5.7–6.8 75 B 38.4–46.0 500
C 8.0–9.1 105 C 53.8–61.4 700
D 10.4–11.4 135 D 69.2–76.8 900
E 11.5–12.6 150 E 76.9–84.5 1000
F 12.7–13.0 165 F 84.6–87.0 1100
30 A 3.9–9.1 90 HMCPE030H1C 100 A 38.4–46.0 500 HMCPE100T3C
B 11.5–13.7 150 B 57.6–65.2 750
C 16.1–18.3 210 C 76.9–84.5 1000
D 20.7–22.9 270 D 31250
E 23.0–25.2 300 E 31375
F 25.3–26.1 330 F 31500
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-9
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.1
Circuit Protection
Circuit Breakers
JG Frame—600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum
LG Frame—600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum
Continuous
Amperes
MCP Trip Range
Amperes
MCP
Catalog Number
250 500–1000 HMCPJ250D5L
625–1250 HMCPJ250F5L
750–1500 HMCPJ250G5L
875–1750 HMCPJ250J5L
1000–2000 HMCPJ250K5L
1125–2250 HMCPJ250L5L
1250–2500 HMCPJ250W5L
Continuous
Amperes
MCP Trip Range
Amperes
MCP
Catalog Number
600 1250–2500 HMCPL600L6G
1500–3000 HMCPL600N6G
1750–3500 HMCPL600R6G
2000–4000 HMCPL600X6G
2250–4500 HMCPL600Y6G
2500–5000 HMCPL600P6G
3000–6000 HMCPL600M6G
V9-T1-10 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.1
Circuit Protection
Circuit Breakers
Series G Motor Protector Breakers
Features
●Eliminates need for separate overload relay
●Can be used with contactor to eliminate need for overload
relay and still create manual motor control
●Meets requirement for motor branch protection, including:
●Disconnecting means
●Branch circuit short circuit protection
●Overload protection
●UL 489 listed, IEC60947-02 rated
●Phase unbalance, phase loss protection and high load alarm
●Optional pre-detection trip relay
Product Selection
Series G Motor Protector Breakers
For pre-trip alarm option, order Style Number 5721B31G02.
JG Frame Motor Protector Circuit Breakers,
250A Maximum Rated Current
LG Frame Motor Protector Circuit Breakers,
630A Maximum Rated Current
Note
1630A is not a UL listed rating. 600A is the maximum UL or CSA rating for LG breaker.
Continuous
Amperes
35 kAIC
Catalog Number
65 kAIC
Catalog Number
50 JGMPS050G JGMPH050G
100 JGMPS100G JGMPH100G
160 JGMPS160G JGMPH160G
250 JGMPS250G JGMPH250G
Continuous
Amperes
50 kAIC
Catalog Number
65 kAIC
Catalog Number
250 LGMPS250G LGMPH250G
400 LGMPS400G LGMPH400G
600 LGMPS600G LGMPH600G
630 1LGMPS630G LGMPH630G
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-11
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.1
Circuit Protection
Circuit Breakers
Accessories
Field Fit Kit Catalog Numbers
Multiwire Connectors Ordering Information (Package of 3)
High SCCR ratings are available for Power Distribution blocks
with Series G MCCBs. See Ta b 6 3 .
Terminal Shields
Interphase Barriers (Package of 2)
Flex Shaft Handle Mechanisms
Universal Direct Handle Mechanisms
Notes
1Part number for JG and LG is ALM1M1BJPK.
2Part number for JG and LG is ALM2M2BJPK.
3Part number for JG and LG is AUXALRMJPK.
4110–125 Vdc, 50/60 Hz.
5380–600 Vdc, 50/60 Hz.
Description Pole Location
Frame—
EG, JG and LG
Alarm Lockout
Make/break Right ALM1M1BEPK 1
2 make/2 break Right ALM2M2BEPK 2
Auxiliary Switch
1A, 1B Right AUX1A1BPK
2A, 2B Right AUX2A2BPK
Auxiliary Switch/Alarm Lockout
—RightAUXALRMEPK 3
Shunt Trip—Standard
120 Vac Left SNT120CPK 4
240 Vac Left SNT120CPK 4
12 Vdc Left SNT012CPK
24 Vdc Left SNT060CPK
48 Vdc Left SNT060CPK
380–600 Vac Left SNT480CPK 5
Undervoltage Release Mechanism
110–127 Vac Left UVR120APK
208–240 Vac Left UVR240APK
24 Vac Left UVR024APK
24 Vdc Left UVR024DPK
48–60 Vdc Left UVR048DPK
12 Vac/Vdc Left UVR012CPK
48–60 Vac Left UVR048APK
120 Vdc Left UVR125DPK
220–250 Vdc Left UVR250DPK
380–500 Vac Left UVR480APK
525–600 Vac Left UVR600APK
Maximum
Amperes
Wires per
Terminal
Wire Size Range
AWG Cu Frame
Kit
Catalog Number
125 3 14–2 EG 3TA125E3K
125 6 14–6 EG 3TA125E6K
250 3 14–2 JG 3TA250FJ3
250 6 14–6 JG 3TA250FJ6
Alarm Lockout
Auxiliary Switch
Shunt Trip
Undervoltage Release
Mechanism
Location
Number
of Poles Frame
IP30 Protection
Catalog Number
Line 3 EG EFTS3K
Line 4 EG EFTS4K
Line or load 2, 3 JG FJTS3K
Line or load 4 JG FJTS4K
Number of Poles Frame Catalog Number
3 or 4 EG EIPBK
3JGFJIPBK
4JGFJIPBK4
3 or 4 LG IPB3
Flexible Shaft Length in ft (m)
Breaker Frame
4 (1.2)
Catalog Number
7 (2.1)
Catalog Number
EG EHMFS04 EHMFS07
JG JHMFS04 JHMFS07
LG LHMFS04 LHMFS07
Frame
With Interlock
Catalog Number
Without Interlock
Catalog Number
Black Handle Color
EG EHMCCBI EHMCCB
JG JHMCCBI JHMCCB
LG LHMCCBI LHMCCB
Red Handle Color
EG EHMCCRI EHMCCR
JG JHMCCRI JHMCCR
LG LHMCCRI LHMCCR
Flex Shaft Handles
Universal Direct
Handle Mechanism
V9-T1-12 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.1
Circuit Protection
Circuit Breakers
High Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms (Complete Kit Includes Handle, Shaft and Mechanism)
External Accessories
Notes
1Compatible with three-pole and four-pole EG breakers only.
2Provision only.
3See Volume 4—Circuit Protection, CA08100005E, Tab 25, for bolt projection dimensions.
4Castell bolt mounting hole must be 10 mm.
5Requires two breakers.
Color
Rating Type
UL IP
EG Frame 1
Catalog Number
JG Frame
Catalog Number
LG Frame
Catalog Number
Black/blue 1/12/3R 20/54/55 EGHMVD06B JGHMVD06B LGHMVD06B
EGHMVD12B JGHMVD12B LGHMVD12B
EGHMVD24B JGHMVD24B LGHMVD24B
Red/yellow 1/12/3R 20/54/55 EGHMVD06R JGHMVD06R LGHMVD06R
EGHMVD12R JGHMVD12R LGHMVD12R
EGHMVD24R JGHMVD24R LGHMVD24R
Black/blue 4/4X 66 EGHMVD06BX JGHMVD06BX LGHMVD06BX
EGHMVD12BX JGHMVD12BX LGHMVD12BX
EGHMVD24BX JGHMVD24BX LGHMVD24BX
Red/yellow 4/4X 66 EGHMVD06RX JGHMVD06RX LGHMVD06RX
EGHMVD12RX JGHMVD12RX LGHMVD12RX
EGHMVD24RX JGHMVD24RX LGHMVD24RX
Description Fit Type
Frame
EG JG LG
Non-padlockable handle block Field EFHB — —
Padlockable handle block Field EFPHB — —
Padlockable handle block off-only Field EFPHBOFF FJPHBOFF LBHPOFF
Padlockable handle lock hasp Field EFPHL FJPHL LPHL
Padlockable handle lock hasp off-only Field EFPHLOFF FJPHLOFF LPHLOFF
Kirk key interlock kit 23 Field — KYKJG KYKLG
Castell key interlock kit 34 Field — CTKJG CTKLG
Slide bar interlock 5Field EFSBI FJSBI LGSBI
Walking beam interlock Three-pole EG3WBI JG3WBI LG3WBI
Four-pole EG4WBI JG4WBI LG4WBI
Electrical operator 120/240 Vac MOPEG240C MOPJG240C MOPLG240C
125 Vdc MOPEG240C MOPJG240C MOPLG240C
Plug-in adapters Three-pole PAD3E PAD3J PAD3L
Four-pole PAD4E PAD4J PAD4L
Rear connecting studs Field EFRCSDL FJRCSDL 3P–LRCS3WK
EFRCSDS FJRCSDS 4P–LRCS4WK
EFRCSWL FJRCSWL —
EFRCSWS FJRCSWS —
Rotary Handle
Mechanisms
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-13
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.1
Circuit Protection
Circuit Breakers
Universal Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Features
●Universal design for both NEMA® (UL 489) and
IEC (IEC 947-2) standards
●Suitable for 50°C application
●Factory-sealed thermal magnetic trip unit
●Standard interrupting ratings
●Includes mounting hardware and terminals
Catalog Number Selection
Universal Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Universal Molded Case
Frame Size
Gi= Gi Frame
Fi= Fi Frame
Ji= Ji Frame
Ki= Ki Frame
Li= Li Frame
Number of Poles
Gi Frame
1 = Single-pole
2 = Two-pole
3 = Three-pole
Fi Frame
2 = Two-pole
3 = Three-pole
Ji Frame
3 = Three-pole
Ki Frame
3 = Three-pole
Li Frame
3 = Three-pole
Ampere Rating
Gi Frame
015 = 15 amp
020 = 20 amp
030 = 30 amp
040 = 40 amp
050 = 50 amp
060 = 60 amp
070 = 70 amp
080 = 80 amp
100 = 100 amp
125 = 125 amp
Fi Frame
015 = 15 amp
020 = 20 amp
030 = 30 amp
040 = 40 amp
050 = 50 amp
060 = 60 amp
070 = 70 amp
080 = 80 amp
100 = 100 amp
125 = 125 amp
150 = 150 amp
160 = 160 amp
175 = 175 amp
200 = 200 amp
225 = 225 amp
Ji Frame
250 = 250 amp
Ki Frame
300 = 300 amp
350 = 350 amp
400 = 400 amp
Li Frame
500 = 500 amp
600 = 600 amp
630 = 630 amp
G 2 070
i
V9-T1-14 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.1
Circuit Protection
Circuit Breakers
Product Selection
Universal Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Three-Pole
Approximate Dimensions are in Inches
Universal G Frame
Universal F Frame
Universal J Frame
Universal K Frame
Universal L Frame
Note
1Metric mounting hardware.
Description Amperes
Catalog
Number 1
3 W x 4-7/8 H x 2-13/16 D (optional DIN-Rail kit available
catalog number GDIN, package of ten)
15 Gi3015
20 Gi3020
25 Gi3025
30 Gi3030
35 Gi3035
40 Gi3040
45 Gi3045
50 Gi3050
60 Gi3060
Description Amperes
Catalog
Number 1
4-1/8 W x 6 H x 3-3/8 D 15 Fi3015L
20 Fi3020L
30 Fi3030L
35 Fi3035L
40 Fi3040L
50 Fi3050L
60 Fi3060L
70 Fi3070L
80 Fi3080L
90 Fi3090L
100 Fi3100L
125 Fi3125L
150 Fi3150L
175 Fi3175L
200 Fi3200L
225 Fi3225L
Voltage Interrupting Rating
380–415 18/5K
480/277 14K
Voltage Interrupting Rating
415 18/9K
480 20K
Description Amperes
Catalog
Number 1
4-1/8 W x 10 H x 4-1/16 D 225 Ji3225L
250 Ji3250L
Description Amperes
Catalog
Number 1
5-1/2 W x 10-1/8 H x 4-1/16 D 300 Ki3300L
350 Ki3350L
400 Ki3400L
Description Amperes
Catalog
Number 1
8-1/4 W x 10-3/4 H x 4.37 D 500 Li3500
600 Li3600
Voltage Interrupting Rating
415 25/13K
480 20K
Voltage Interrupting Rating
415 25/13K
480 20K
Voltage Interrupting Rating
415 25/13K
480 20K
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-15
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.1
Circuit Protection
Circuit Breakers
Accessories
Internal Accessories
Auxiliary Switch (Right-Pole Mounted) Bell Alarm (Right-Pole Mounted) Shunt Trip (Left-Pole Mounted) UVR (Left-Pole Mounted)
Add This Suffix to
Catalog NumberConfiguration
Add This Suffix to
Catalog Number Configuration
Add This Suffix to
Catalog Number Voltage Range Voltage Range
Add This Suffix to
Catalog Number
Universal G Frame
1NO/1NC A3 1 make/1 break B3 24 Vac S7 24 Vac 50/60 Hz T2
2NO/2NC A6 120 Vac S1 48 Vac 50/60 Hz T3
If both an auxiliary switch and bell alarm are required, add B13 to
the catalog number (right-pole mounted). Auxiliary switch and
bell alarm are 240V rated.
240 Vac S2 60 Vac 50/60 Hz T4
12 Vdc S3 120 Vac 50/60 Hz T1
24 Vdc S4 240 Vac 50/60 Hz T8
220 Vac 50 Hz T7
440 Vac 50 Hz T11
480 Vac 60 Hz T12
Universal F Frame
1NO/1NC A06 1 make/1 break B06 12–24 Vac/Vdc S02 12 Vac U02
2NO/2NC A13 48–127 Vac or
48–60 Vdc
S06 24 Vac U06
If both an auxiliary switch and bell alarm are required, add C05 to
the catalog number (right-pole mounted). Auxiliary switch and
bell alarm are 600V rated.
48 Vac/Vdc U38
208–380 Vac or
110–127 Vdc
S10 110–127 Vac U14
208–240 Vac U18
415–600 Vac or
220–250 Vdc
S14 380–480 Vac U22
525–600 Vac U26
12 Vdc U30
24 Vdc U34
125 Vdc U42
220–250 Vdc U46
Universal J Frame
1NO/1NC A06 1 make/1 break B06 12–24 Vac/Vdc S42 12 Vac U06
2 NO/2NC A13 48–60 Vac/Vdc S50 24 Vac U10
If both an auxiliary switch and bell alarm are required, add CO5 to
the catalog number (right-pole mounted). Auxiliary switch and
bell alarm are 600V rated.
110–240 Vac or
110–125 Vdc
S10 48–60 Vac U14
110–127 Vac U18
380–440 Vac or
220–50 Vdc
S14 208–240 Vac U22
380–480 Vac U26
480–600 Vac S18 12 Vdc T02
24 Vdc T06
48–60 Vdc T10
110–125 Vdc T14
220–250 Vdc T18
V9-T1-16 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.1
Circuit Protection
Circuit Breakers
Internal Accessories, continued
Auxiliary Switch (Right-Pole Mounted) Bell Alarm (Right-Pole Mounted) Shunt Trip (Left-Pole Mounted) UVR (Left-Pole Mounted)
Add This Suffix to
Catalog NumberConfiguration
Add This Suffix to
Catalog Number Configuration
Add This Suffix to
Catalog Number Voltage Range Voltage Range
Add This Suffix to
Catalog Number
Universal K Frame
1NO/1NC A06 1 make/1 break B06 12–24 Vac/Vdc S42 12 Vac U06
2NO/2NC A13 48–60 Vac/Vdc S50 24 Vac U10
If both an auxiliary switch and bell alarm are required, add CO5 to
the catalog number (right-pole mounted). Auxiliary switch and
bell alarm are 600V rated.
110–240 Vac or
110–125 Vdc
S10 48–60 Vac U14
110–127 Vac U18
380–440 Vac or
220–250 Vdc
S14 208–240 Vac U22
380–480 Vac U26
480–600 Vac S18 12 Vdc T02
24 Vdc T06
48–60 Vdc T10
110–125 Vdc T14
220–250 Vdc T18
Universal L Frame
1NO/1NC A06 1 make/1 break B06 12–24 Vac/Vdc S02 12 Vac U06
2NO/2NC A13 48–60 Vdc S06 24 Vac U10
If both an auxiliary switch and bell alarm are required, add CO5 to
the catalog number (right-pole mounted). Auxiliary switch and
bell alarm are 600V rated.
48–60 Vac S86 48–60 Vac U14
110–240 Vac S10 110–127 Vac U18
110–125 Vdc S42 208–240 Vac U22
380–440 Vac or
220–250 Vdc
S14 380–480 Vac U26
12 Vdc T02
480–600 Vac S18 24 Vdc T06
48–60 Vdc T10
110–125 Vdc T14
220–250 Vdc T18
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-17
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.1
Circuit Protection
Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
Note
1Only available as complete handle mechanism. Parts not sold separately.
Type 1/12 Universal Rotary
Ordering Information 1
Shaft Length
in Inches (mm)
Handle
Color
Complete
Catalog Number
Flange Flex Shaft
Type 1, 3R, 12 Versions
Universal G Frame
6 (152.4) Black GHMVD06B 3-ft length; order F0S03C
12 (304.8) Black GHMVD12B 4-ft length; order F0S04C
6 (152.4) Red GHMVD06R 5-ft length; order F0S05C
12 (304.8) Red GHMVD12R 6-ft length; order F0S06C
Universal F Frame
6 (152.4) Black FHMVD06B 3-ft length; order F1S03C
12 (304.8) Black FHMVD12B 4-ft length; order F1S04C
6 (152.4) Red FHMVD06R 5-ft length; order F1S05C
12 (304.8) Red FHMVD12R 6-ft length; order F1S06C
7-ft length; order F1S07C
8-ft length; order F1S08C
9-ft length; order F1S09C
10-ft length; order F1S10C
Universal J Frame
6 (152.4) Black JHMVD06B 3-ft length; order F2S03C
12 (304.8) Black JHMVD12B 4-ft length; order F2S04C
6 (152.4) Red JHMVD06R 5-ft length; order F2S05C
12 (304.8) Red JHMVD12R 6-ft length; order F2S06C
7-ft length; order F2S07C
8-ft length; order F2S08C
9-ft length; order F2S09C
10-ft length; order F2S10C
Universal K Frame
6 (152.4) Black KHMVD06B 3-ft length; order F3S03C
12 (304.8) Black KHMVD12B 4-ft length; order F3S04C
6 (152.4) Red KHMVD06R 5-ft length; order F3S05C
12 (304.8) Red KHMVD12R 6-ft length; order F3S06C
7-ft length; order F3S07C
8-ft length; order F3S08C
9-ft length; order F3S09C
10-ft length; order F3S10C
Handle Mechanisms
V9-T1-18 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.1
Circuit Protection
Circuit Breakers
Terminals and Termination Accessory Devices
Universal G Frame
Universal F Frame
Universal J Frame
Universal K Frame
Universal L Frame
Terminals (Included with Breaker) Optional Multiwire Lugs (Load End Only)
15–20 A 25–100A Three-Hole Version Six-Hole Version
14–2 AWG Cu/Al 10–1/0 AWG Cu/Al (3) 14–2 AWG
Order 3TA100G3K
(6) 14–6 AWG
Order 3TA100G6K
2.5–4 mm2 Cu/Al 4–50 mm2 Cu/Al
Terminals (Included with Breaker) Optional Multiwire Lugs (Load End Only)
10–20A 25–100A 110–225A Three-Hole Version Six-Hole Version
14–10 AWG Cu/Al 14–1/0 AWG Cu/Al 4–4/0 AWG Cu/Al (3) 14–2 AWG
Order 3TA150F3K
(6) 14–6 AWG
Order 3TA150F6K
2.5–4 mm2 Cu/Al 2.5–50 mm2 Cu/Al 25–95 mm2 Cu/Al
Terminals (Included with Breaker) Optional Multiwire Lugs (Load End Only)
70–250A Three-Hole Version Six-Hole Version
4–350 MCM AWG Cu/Al (3) 14–2 AWG
Order 3TA250J3K
(6) 14–6 AWG
Order 3TA250J6K
25–150 mm2 Cu/Al
Terminals (Included with Breaker) Optional Multiwire Lugs (Load End Only)
300–350A 400A Three-Hole Version Six-Hole Version
250–500 MCM AWG Cu/Al 3/0–200 (2) AWG Cu/Al (3) 12–2/0 AWG
Order 3TA400K3K
(6) 14–2/0 AWG
Order 3TA400K6K
120–240 mm2 Cu/Al 95–120 mm2 Cu/Al
Terminals (Included with Breaker) Optional Multiwire Lugs (Load End Only)
500A 600A Three-Hole Version Six-Hole Version
(2) 250–300 MCM Cu/Al (2) 400–500 MCM Cu/Al — —
120–150 mm2 Cu/Al 185–250 mm2 Cu/Al
Terminal/Termination
Devices
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-19
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.1
Circuit Protection
Circuit Breakers
QUICKLAG Type QC Miniature Circuit Breakers—Cable-In/Cable-Out Type QC
Features
For Cable-In/Cable-Out Panel Mount Applications
●Single-, two-, three- and four-pole options
●Built and listed to UL 489
●All products UL and CSA listed
●All products 10–100A are HACR rated
Catalog Number Selection
QUICKLAG Type QC Miniature Circuit Breakers—Cable-In/Cable-Out Type QC
Type QC Miniature Circuit Breakers
Product Selection
QUICKLAG Type QC 10,000 Ampere I.C. Thermal-Magnetic Breakers
Note: For non-automatic switches, see Volume 4—Circuit Protection, CA08100005E, Tab 24.
Notes
1Switching duty rated for 120 Vac fluorescent light applications only.
2For special low-magnetic breaker, order QC1015L1 or QC1020L1.
Continuous Ampere
Rating at 40ºC
Single-Pole, 120/240 Vac
Catalog Number
Two-Pole, 120/240 Vac
Catalog Number
Three-Pole, 240 Vac
Catalog Number
10 QC1010 QC2010 —
15 QC1015 12 QC2015 QC3015H
20 QC1020 12 QC2020 QC3020H
30 QC1030 QC2030 QC3030H
40 QC1040 QC2040 QC3040H
50 QC1050 QC2050 QC3050H
60 — QC2060 QC3060H
70 — QC2070 QC3070H
100 QC1100 QC2100 QC3100H
Ampere Rating
QC = QC breaker Ampere Rating
010 = 10 amp
015 = 15 amp
020 = 20 amp
025 = 25 amp
030 = 30 amp
035 = 35 amp
040 = 40 amp
045 = 45 amp
050 = 50 amp
055 = 55 amp
060 = 60 amp
070 = 70 amp
080 = 80 amp
090 = 90 amp
100 = 100 amp
Construction
H= 240V (two-, three-
and four-pole only)
QC 3 020 H
Number of Poles
1= Single-pole
2= Two-pole
3= Three-pole
4= Four-pole
V9-T1-20 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.1
Circuit Protection
Circuit Breakers
QUICKLAG Type QC Miniature Circuit Breakers—Cable-In/Cable-Out Type QCD
Features
For Cable-In/Cable-Out DIN-Rail Mount HVAC Applications
●Single-, two- and three-pole options
●Modular construction
●DIN mounted (symmetrical rail 35 in x 7.5 in DIN/EN 50 022)
●Flexible power feed connection: wire size, position
●Same breaker size for entire rating range
●Field-mountable accessories: finger-shroud proof, quick
connect terminals, jumper units
Catalog Number Selection
QUICKLAG Type QC Miniature Circuit Breakers—Cable-In/Cable-Out Type QCD
Product Selection
QUICKLAG Type QCD 10,000 Ampere I.C. Thermal-Magnetic Breakers
Continuous Ampere
Rating at 40ºC
Single-Pole, 120/240 Vac
Catalog Number
Two-Pole, 120/240 Vac
Catalog Number
Three-Pole, 240 Vac
Catalog Number
10 QCD1010 QCD2010 —
15 QCD1015 QCD2015 QCD3015H
20 QCD1020 QCD2020 QCD3020H
30 QCD1030 QCD2030 QCD3030H
40 QCD1040 QCD2040 QCD3040H
50 QCD1050 QCD2050 QCD3050H
60 QCD1060 QCD2060 QCD3060H
70 — QCD2070 QCD3070H
100 — QCD2100 QCD3100H
Breaker Type
QCD = QCD breaker Ampere Rating
010 = 10 amp
015 = 15 amp
020 = 20 amp
025 = 25 amp
030 = 30 amp
035 = 35 amp
040 = 40 amp
045 = 45 amp
050 = 50 amp
055 = 55 amp
060 = 60 amp
070 = 70 amp
080 = 80 amp
090 = 90 amp
100 = 100 amp
Construction
H = 240V (two- and
three-pole only)
QCD 3 020 H
Number of Poles
1= Single-pole
2= Two-pole
3= Three-pole
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-21
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.1
Circuit Protection
Circuit Breakers
QUICKLAG Type QC Miniature Circuit Breakers—Cable-In/Cable-Out
1/2-Inch Wide Types QCR, QCF
Features
When Space is at a Premium
●QCR: For DIN-rail mount cable-in/cable-out applications
●QCF: For front-mount through-the-door cable-in/cable-out
applications
●1/2 in (12.7 mm) wide per pole
●Three-position handle: ON, tripped (center), OFF
●Thermal-magnetic protection
●Single-, two- and three-pole
●10 kAIC at 120/240 Vac, 10–60A
●10 kAIC at 240 Vac, 10–30A
Catalog Number Selection
QUICKLAG Type QC Miniature Circuit Breakers—Cable-In/Cable-Out 1/2-Inch Wide Types QCR, QCF
Product Selection
QUICKLAG Type QCR Breakers 10 kAIC QUICKLAG Type QCF Breakers 10 kAIC
Interrupting Ratings 1234 Interrupting Ratings 123
Notes
1Standard breaker terminals are box type lugs.
2Breakers with “T” catalog number suffix are suitable for line and load side ring terminal connection (#10-32 plus/minus terminal screw provided).
3Breakers with “P” catalog number suffix are suitable for terminating two 10 AWG quick-connect type terminals per phase on breaker load side.
4Breakers with shunt trip (extra pole required on breaker right-hand side) are available on single-, two- and three-pole.
5All 15 and 20A single-pole breakers are SWD (switching duty) rated for fluorescent lighting applications.
660/75°C Cu/Al wire on all ratings except 60A, which requires Cu only conductor.
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40ºC
Single-Pole
120/240 Vac
Catalog Number
Two-Pole
120/240 Vac
Catalog Number
Three-Pole
240 Vac
Catalog Number
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40ºC
Single-Pole
120/240 Vac
Catalog Number
Two-Pole
120/240 Vac
Catalog Number
Three-Pole
240 Vac
Catalog Number
10 QCR1010 QCR2010 — 10 QCF1010 QCF2010 —
QCR1010T QCR2010T — QCF1010T QCF2010T —
15 QCR1015 5QCR2015 QCR3015H 15 QCF1015 5QCF2015 QCF3015H
QCR1015T 5QCR2015T QCR3015HT — — QCF3015HT
20 QCR1020 5QCR2020 QCR3020H 20 QCF1020 5QCF2020 QCF3020H
QCR1020T 5QCR2020T QCR3020HT — — QCF3020HT
25 QCR1025 QCR2025 QCR3025H 25 QCF1025 QCF2025 QCF3025H
— — QCR3025HT — — QCF3025HT
30 QCR1030 QCR2030 QCR3030H 30 QCF1030 QCF2030 QCF3030H
— — QCR3030HT — — QCF3030HT
35 QCR1035 QCR2035 — 40 QCF1040 QCF2040 —
40 QCR1040 QCR2040 — 50 QCF1050 QCF2050 —
45 QCR1045 QCR2045 — 60 6QCF1060 QCF2060 —
50 QCR1050 QCR2050 —
55 QCR1055 — —
60 6QCR1060 QCR2060 —
Breaker Type
QCR = QCD Breaker (rear mount)
QCF = QCF Breaker (front mount)
Ampere Rating
010 = 10 amp
015 = 15 amp
020 = 20 amp
025 = 25 amp
030 = 30 amp
035 = 35 amp
040 = 40 amp
045 = 45 amp
050 = 50 amp
055 = 55 amp
060 = 60 amp
Construction/Terminals
H= 240V (two- and three-pole only)
T= Ring or spade terminals
(10–30A only)
QCR 1 020 T
Number of Poles
1= Single-pole
2= Two-pole
3= Three-pole
V9-T1-22 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.1
Circuit Protection
Circuit Breakers
Accessories
Type QCR and QCF
Description Catalog Number
Steel mounting clip mounts QCR breaker if individual mounting is required. Quantity two
required for single- and two-pole and four required for three-pole breakers.
QCRMTGFT
Removable padlock device for single-pole QCR or QCF breaker. QCRFPL1P
Removable padlock device for multi-pole QCR or QCF breaker. QCRFPLMP
Padlock bracket assembly for QCR or QCF single- or multi-pole breakers (OFF only). QCRFLOFF
Padlock bracket for QCR, lock-off only. QCRPLOFF
QUICKLAG Type C Spacer QCRSPACER
QCR and QCF ring or spade lug terminals (10–30A ratings only). Factory installed line and load
side terminals each equipped with a #10-32 screw suitable for terminating one 10 AWG wire
with insulated ring or spade type terminal as shown.
Suffix “T”
QUICKLAG Type C
Spacer
QCR and QCF Ring or
Spade Lug Terminals
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-23
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.1
Circuit Protection
Circuit Breakers
QUICKLAG Type QC Miniature Circuit Breakers—Cable-In/Cable-Out
1/2-Inch Wide Types QCGF, QCGFEP
Features
For Cable-In/Cable-Out Panel-Mount Applications
●QUICKLAG ground fault circuit breakers, Class A GFCI:
●Built and tested to UL 943
●5 mA trip sensitivity
●QUICKLAG ground fault equipment protectors:
●Built and tested to UL 1053
●30 mA trip sensitivity
●All products UL and CSA listed
Catalog Number Selection
QUICKLAG Type QC Miniature Circuit Breakers—
Cable-In/Cable-Out Ground Fault and Equipment Protector Types QCGF, QCGFEP
Product Selection
Types QCGF and QCGFEP Thermal-Magnetic Breakers
Continuous Ampere
Rating at 40ºC
Single-Pole, 120/240 Vac
Catalog Number
Two-Pole, 120/240 Vac
Catalog Number
Ground Fault Circuit Breakers—5 mA Sensitivity
QUICKLAG Type: QCGF 10,000 Ampere I.C.
15 QCGF1015 QCGF2015
20 QCGF1020 QCGF2020
30 QCGF1030 QCGF2030
40 QCGF1040 QCGF2040
50 — QCGF2050
Ground Fault Equipment Protectors—30 mA Sensitivity
QUICKLAG Type: QCGFEP 10,000 Ampere I.C.
15 QCGFEP1015 QCGFEP2015
20 QCGFEP1020 QCGFEP2020
30 QCGFEP1030 QCGFEP2030
40 QCGFEP1040 QCGFEP2040
50 — QCGFEP2050
Breaker Type
QCGF = QC ground fault circuit protector
QCGFEP = QC ground fault equipment protector
Ampere Rating
015 = 15 amp
020 = 20 amp
025 = 25 amp
030 = 30 amp
040 = 40 amp
050 = 50 amp
QCGFEP 1 020
Number of Poles
1= Single-pole
2= Two-pole
V9-T1-24 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.1
Circuit Protection
Circuit Breakers
Accessories
Type QC Miniature Circuit Breakers
Notes
1See Page V9-T1-22 for QCR and QCF accessories.
2Can lock in ON or OFF position.
3Suitable for ground fault breakers.
Accessory 1Description Catalog Number
Handle locks:
Non-padlockable 2
QUICKLAG type P, B, C—single-pole QL1NPL
QUICKLAG type P, B, C—two-, three-pole QL23NPL
Handle locks:
Padlockable
QUICKLAG type P, B, C—single-pole QL1PL
QUICKLAG type C—single-, two-, three-pole QC123PL
QUICKLAG type C—single-, two-, three-pole (off only) QCD123PLOFF
Handle tie QUICKLAG handle tie—single-pole QL1HT
QUICKLAG handle tie—three-pole QL3HT
Mounting hardware QUICKLAG type C face mounting clip QCFCLIP
QUICKLAG type C face mounting plate—single-pole QC1FP
QUICKLAG type C face mounting plate —two-pole QC2FP
QUICKLAG type C face mounting plate —three-pole QC3FP
QUICKLAG type C face mounting plate and lock-off (off only)—two-pole 3QC2FPLOFF
QUICKLAG type C face mounting plate and lock-off (off only)—three-pole QC3FPLOFF
QUICKLAG type C base mounting clamp QCBCLIP
QUICKLAG base mounting plate—six poles total QC6BP
QUICKLAG type C base mounting plate, six-poles total—
heavy-duty screw-secured
QC6BPS
QUICKLAG type C (QCD) two-way jumper unit with cover QCDJ2
QUICKLAG type C (QCD) four-way jumper unit with cover QCDJ4
QUICKLAG type C (QCD) six-way jumper unit with cover QCDJ6
QUICKLAG type C (QCD) two-way jumper unit, no cover QCDJ2T
QUICKLAG type C (QCD) four-way jumper unit, no cover QCDJ4T
QUICKLAG type C (QCD) six-way jumper unit, no cover QCDJ6T
QUICKLAG type QCD finger protection attachment QCDFP
QUICKLAG type C DIN-rail adapter QCDINADAPT
Handle Locks
Handle Tie
Hardware
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-25
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.1
Circuit Protection
Circuit Breakers
WMZ UL 489 Miniature Circuit Breakers
Features
●UL 489 listed DIN-rail mounted miniature circuit breakers
up to 40A current rating
●Current limiting design provides fast short circuit interruption
that reduces let-through energy
●Thermal-magnetic overcurrent protection available with
C and D curve level of protection
●C curve—5–10X In—for medium inrush startup currents
●D curve—10–20X In—provides a magnetic range to allow
for high inrush levels
●Ring-tongue terminals available
●Complete line of accessories
Catalog Number Selection
WMZ UL 489 Miniature Circuit Breakers
WMZ UL 489
Ampere Rating
X0 = 0.5A
01 = 1A
X1 = 1.5A
02 = 2A
03 = 3A
04 = 4A
05 = 5A
06 = 6A
07 = 7A
08 = 8A
10 = 10A
13 = 13A
15 = 15A
16 = 16A
20 = 20A
25 = 25A
30 = 30A
32 = 32A
40 = 40A
Breaker Type
T= 10 kAIC
H= 14 kAIC
D= 10 kAIC/DC
Protective Curve
C = C curve (5–10X In)
D = D curve (10–20X In)
Terminal
T = Ring terminals
WMZ T 1 C 16 T
Number of Poles
1 = Single-pole
2 = Two-pole
3 = Three-pole
Breaker Type
WMZ = WMZ UL 489
circuit breaker
V9-T1-26 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.1
Circuit Protection
Circuit Breakers
Product Selection
WMZT UL 489 Circuit Breakers
WMZH UL 489 Circuit Breakers—14 kAIC
WMZH UL 489 Circuit Breakers with Ring-Tongue Terminals
WMZD UL 489 Circuit Breakers—10 kAIC at 125 Vdc per Pole
Note
1For ring-tongue terminals, ADD suffix “T” to above catalog number.
Ampere
Rating
C Curve (5–10X In Current Rating) D Curve (10–20X In Current Rating)
Single-Pole 1
Catalog Number
Two-Pole 1
Catalog Number
Three-Pole 1
Catalog Number
Single-Pole 1
Catalog Number
Two-Pole 1
Catalog Number
Three-Pole 1
Catalog Number
0.5 WMZT1CX0 WMZT2CX0 WMZT3CX0 WMZT1DX0 WMZT2DX0 WMZT3DX0
1WMZT1C01 WMZT2C01 WMZT3C01 WMZT1D01 WMZT2D01 WMZT3D01
1.5 WMZT1CX1 WMZT2CX1 WMZT3CX1 WMZT1DX1 WMZT2DX1 WMZT3DX1
2WMZT1C02 WMZT2C02 WMZT3C02 WMZT1D02 WMZT2D02 WMZT3D02
3WMZT1C03 WMZT2C03 WMZT3C03 WMZT1D03 WMZT2D03 WMZT3D03
4WMZT1C04 WMZT2C00 WMZT3C04 WMZT1D04 WMZT2D04 WMZT3D04
5WMZT1C05 WMZT2C05 WMZT3C05 WMZT1D05 WMZT2D05 WMZT3D05
6WMZT1C06 WMZT2C06 WMZT3C06 WMZT1D06 WMZT2D06 WMZT3D06
7WMZT1C07 WMZT2C07 WMZT3C07 WMZT1D07 WMZT2D07 WMZT3D07
8WMZT1C08 WMZT2C08 WMZT3C08 WMZT1D08 WMZT2D08 WMZT3D08
10 WMZT1C10 WMZT2C10 WMZT3C10 WMZT1D10 WMZT2D10 WMZT3D10
13 WMZT1C13 WMZT2C13 WMZT3C13 WMZT1D13 WMZT2D13 WMZT3D13
15 WMZT1C15 WMZT2C15 WMZT3C15 WMZT1D15 WMZT2D15 WMZT3D15
16 WMZT1C16 WMZT2C16 WMZT3C16 WMZT1D16 WMZT2D16 WMZT3D16
20 WMZT1C20 WMZT2C20 WMZT3C20 WMZT1D20 WMZT2D20 WMZT3D20
25 WMZT1C25 WMZT2C25 WMZT3C25 WMZT1D25 WMZT2D25 WMZT3D25
30 WMZT1C30 WMZT2C30 WMZT3C30 WMZT1D30 WMZT2D30 WMZT3D30
32 WMZT1C32 WMZT2C32 WMZT3C32 WMZT1D32 WMZT2D32 WMZT3D32
40 WMZT1C40 WMZT2C40 WMZT3C40 WMZT1D40 WMZT2D40 WMZT3D40
Amperes
Single-Pole
Catalog Number
Two-Pole
Catalog Number
Three-Pole
Catalog Number
C Curve (5–10X In Current Rating)
15 WMZH1C15 WMZH2C15 WMZH3C15
16 WMZH1C16 WMZH2C16 WMZH3C16
20 WMZH1C20 WMZH2C20 WMZH3C20
25 WMZH1C25 WMZH2C25 WMZH3C25
D Curve (10–20X In Current Rating)
13 WMZH1D13 WMZH2D13 WMZH3D13
15 WMZH1D15 WMZH2D15 WMZH3D15
16 WMZH1D16 WMZH2D16 WMZH3D16
20 WMZH1D20 WMZH2D20 WMZH3D20
Amperes
Single-Pole
Catalog Number
Two-Pole
Catalog Number
Three-Pole
Catalog Number
C Curve (5–10X In Current Rating)
15 WMZH1C15T WMZH2C15T WMZH3C15T
16 WMZH1C16T WMZH2C16T WMZH3C16T
20 WMZH1C20T WMZH2C20T WMZH3C20T
25 WMZH1C25T WMZH2C25T WMZH3C25T
D Curve (10–20X In Current Rating)
13 WMZH1D13T WMZH2D13T WMZH3D13T
15 WMZH1D15T WMZH2D15T WMZH3D15T
16 WMZH1D16T WMZH2D16T WMZH3D16T
20 WMZH1D20T WMZH2D20T WMZH3D20T
Amperes
Single-Pole
Catalog Number
Two-Pole
Catalog Number
C Curve (5–10X In Current Rating)
2WMZD1C02 WMZD2C02
3WMZD1C03 WMZD2C03
4WMZD1C04 WMZD2C04
5WMZD1C05 WMZD2C05
6WMZD1C06 WMZD2C06
7WMZD1C07 WMZD2C07
8WMZD1C08 WMZD2C08
10 WMZD1C10 WMZD2C10
13 WMZD1C13 WMZD2C13
15 WMZD1C15 WMZD2C15
16 WMZD1C16 WMZD2C16
20 WMZD1C20 WMZD2C20
25 WMZD1C25 WMZD2C25
30 WMZD1C30 WMZD2C30
32 WMZD1C32 WMZD2C32
40 WMZD1C40 WMZD2C40
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-27
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.1
Circuit Protection
Circuit Breakers
WMZS UL 1077 Miniature Circuit Breakers—Supplementary Protectors
Features
●UL 1077 recognized DIN-rail mounted supplemental
protectors up to 63A
●Current limiting design provides fast short circuit interruption
that reduces let-through energy
●Thermal-magnetic overcurrent protection available with
B, C and D curve levels of protection
●B curve—3–5X In—for maximum protection of control
circuit wiring from low-level short circuit faults
●C curve—5–10X In—for medium inrush startup currents
●D curve—10–20X In—provides a magnetic range to allow
for high inrush levels
●Ideal replacement for fuses that are applied as supplemental
protection
●Complete line of accessories
Catalog Number Selection
WMZS UL 1077 Miniature Circuit Breakers—Supplementary Protectors
WMZS UL 1077 Miniature Circuit Breakers
Product Selection
WMZS UL 1077 Supplementary Protectors
Ampere
Rating
B Curve (3–5X In Current Rating) C Curve (5–10X In Current Rating) D Curve (10–20X In Current Rating)
Single-Pole
Catalog Number
Two-Pole
Catalog Number
Three-Pole
Catalog Number
Single-Pole
Catalog Number
Two-Pole
Catalog Number
Three-Pole
Catalog Number
Single-Pole
Catalog Number
Two-Pole
Catalog Number
Three-Pole
Catalog Number
0.5 — — — WMZS1C00 WMZS2C00 WMZS3C00 WMZS1D00 WMZS2D00 WMZS3D00
1— — — WMZS1C01 WMZS2C01 WMZS3C01 WMZS1D01 WMZS2D01 WMZS3D01
2— — — WMZS1C02 WMZS2C02 WMZS3C02 WMZS1D02 WMZS2D02 WMZS3D02
3— — — WMZS1C03 WMZS2C03 WMZS3C03 WMZS1D03 WMZS2D03 WMZS3D03
4— — — WMZS1C04 WMZS2C04 WMZS3C04 WMZS1D04 WMZS2D04 WMZS3D04
5— — — WMZS1C05 WMZS2C05 WMZS3C05 WMZS1D05 WMZS2D05 WMZS3D05
6WMZS1B06 WMZS2B06 WMZS3B06 WMZS1C06 WMZS2C06 WMZS3C06 WMZS1D06 WMZS2D06 WMZS3D06
7WMZS1B07 WMZS2B07 WMZS3B07 WMZS1C07 WMZS2C07 WMZS3C07 WMZS1D07 WMZS2D07 WMZS3D07
8WMZS1B08 WMZS2B08 WMZS3B08 WMZS1C08 WMZS2C08 WMZS3C08 WMZS1D08 WMZS2D08 WMZS3D08
10 WMZS1B10 WMZS2B10 WMZS3B10 WMZS1C10 WMZS2C10 WMZS3C10 WMZS1D10 WMZS2D10 WMZS3D10
13 WMZS1B13 WMZS2B13 WMZS3B13 WMZS1C13 WMZS2C13 WMZS3C13 WMZS1D13 WMZS2D13 WMZS3D13
15 WMZS1B15 WMZS2B15 WMZS3B15 WMZS1C15 WMZS2C15 WMZS3C15 WMZS1D15 WMZS2D15 WMZS3D15
16 WMZS1B16 WMZS2B16 WMZS3B16 WMZS1C16 WMZS2C16 WMZS3C16 WMZS1D16 WMZS2D16 WMZS3D16
20 WMZS1B20 WMZS2B20 WMZS3B20 WMZS1C20 WMZS2C20 WMZS3C20 WMZS1D20 WMZS2D20 WMZS3D20
25 WMZS1B25 WMZS2B25 WMZS3B25 WMZS1C25 WMZS2C25 WMZS3C25 WMZS1D25 WMZS2D25 WMZS3D25
30 WMZS1B30 WMZS2B30 WMZS3B30 WMZS1C30 WMZS2C30 WMZS3C30 WMZS1D30 WMZS2D30 WMZS3D30
32 WMZS1B32 WMZS2B32 WMZS3B32 WMZS1C32 WMZS2C32 WMZS3C32 WMZS1D32 WMZS2D32 WMZS3D32
40 WMZS1B40 WMZS2B40 WMZS3B40 WMZS1C40 WMZS2C40 WMZS3C40 WMZS1D40 WMZS2D40 WMZS3D40
50 WMZS1B50 WMZS2B50 WMZS3B50 WMZS1C50 WMZS2C50 WMZS3C50 — — —
63 WMZS1B63 WMZS2B63 WMZS3B63 WMZS1C63 WMZS2C63 WMZS3C63 — — —
Number of Poles
1 = Single-pole
2 = Two-pole
3 = Three-pole
Protective Curve
B = B curve (3–5X In)
C = C curve (5–10X In)
D = D curve (10–20X In)
Ampere Rating
00 = 0.5A
01 = 1A
02 = 2A
03 = 3A
04 = 4A
05 = 5A
06 = 6A
07 = 7A
08 = 8A
10 = 10A
13 = 13A
15 = 15A
16 = 16A
20 = 20A
25 = 25A
30 = 30A
32 = 32A
40 = 40A
50 = 50A
63 = 63A
Breaker Family
WMZS = Supplementary protector
WMZS 1 B 10
V9-T1-28 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.1
Circuit Protection
Circuit Breakers
Accessories
WMZT UL 489 WMZT UL 489
Description Catalog Number
Two-pole contact or auxiliary contact/trip indicating contact WMZSAUXTRIP
Auxiliary contact WMZTAUX
Shunt trip 110–415 Vac WMZTST415
Shunt trip 12–110 Vac WMZTST110
Padlock hasp WMZPLK
Busbar—single-pole 6 terminals WMZT1P6T
Busbar—single-pole 12 terminals WMZT1P12T
Busbar—single-pole 18 terminals WMZT1P18T
Busbar—two-pole 6 terminals WMZT2P6T
Busbar—two-pole 12 terminals WMZT2P12T
Busbar—two-pole 18 terminals WMZT2P18T
Busbar—three-pole 6 terminals WMZT3P6T
Busbar—three-pole 12 terminals WMZT3P12T
Busbar—three-pole 18 terminals WMZT3P18T
Three-pole busbar shroud WMZT3PSHROUD
Extension terminal—35 mm (2–14 AWG) WMZT35EXT
Bus connector—conductors up to 50 mm2 (~1/0 AWG) WMZTBCON
Description Rating Catalog Number
Auxiliary contact—1 NO/1 NC 230 Vac WMZSAUX
Two-pole contact or auxiliary contact/
trip indicating contact
230 Vac WMZSAUXTRIP
Undervoltage release 115 Vac WMZSUVR115
230 Vac WMZSUVR230
400 Vac WMZSUVR400
Shunt trip 110–415 Vac WMZSST415
110–230 Vdc
Shunt trip 12–110 Vac WMZSST110
12–60 Vdc
Without Auxiliary Contacts
Busbar—Single-pole 57 terminals 80A WMZS1P57T
Busbar—Two-pole 56 terminals 80A WMZS2P56T
Busbar—Three-pole 57 terminals 80A WMZS3P57T
Busbar—Single-pole 57 terminals 100A WMZS1P57T25
Busbar—Two-pole 56 terminals 100A WMZS2P56T25
Busbar—Three-pole 57 terminals 100A WMZS3P57T25
Auxiliary/Trip Indicating Contacts
Busbar— Single-pole 37 terminals 80A WMZS1P37TAUX
Busbar— Two-pole 46 terminals 80A WMZS2P46TAUX
Busbar— Three-pole 48 terminals 80A WMZS3P48TAUX
Busbar— Single-pole 37 terminals 100A WMZS1P37T25AUX
Busbar— Two-pole 46 terminals 100A WMZS2P46T25AUX
Busbar— Three-pole 48 terminals 100A WMZS3P48T25AUX
Pin type incoming supply terminals
25 mm2 (~AWG 4)
—WMZSBCON
Bus incoming supply terminals
50 mm2 (14-1 AWG)
—WMZS50EXT
Busbar terminals cover — WMZSBBTC
Padlock hasp — WMZPLK
Fork connector—Two- and three-pole — WMZS3CAP
Fork connector—Single-pole — WMZS1CAP
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-29
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.1
Circuit Protection
Circuit Breakers
Series NRX Low Voltage Power Breakers
Features
●Rogowski coil does not saturate like iron core sensors, and
one sensor accommodates 200–1600A range. Never change
a sensor, and NO CTs are required
●Tension clamp secondary terminals—10A continuous rating at
600V meets UL/CSA/RoHS and UL-94 V0. Mounted directly to
fixed breaker or drawout cassette they reduce wiring and
provide clean, organized wiring schemes
●Breaker mounted communication modules for INCOM™,
Modbus® and PROFIBUS® mount directly to the cassette,
reducing the space and room required for communication
capability
●With the patent pending simple design of the fold-up
cassette, all items in a cassette are replaceable without
removing the cassette from the cell
●Plug-and-play accessories—no special tools needed.
Accessories come with plug and wires ready to install
Series NRX™ Low Voltage Power Breakers
V9-T1-30 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.1
Circuit Protection
Circuit Breakers
Catalog Number Selection
Series NRX Power Breakers (Exclusionary Rules Apply)
Note
1Contact Eaton for available voltages. Not all voltages are currently available.
Breaker Frame Size
N = Type NF, 630–1600A,
(70 mm pole spacing)
Standard, Mechanism, Device
S = UL 1066, stored energy,
power breaker
X = UL 489, stored energy,
insulated case breaker
E = IEC 60947-2, stored
energy, air breaker
Fault Current Rating
S4 = 42 kA at 480 Vac UL or 415 Vac IEC
S5 = 50 kA at 480 Vac UL or 415 Vac IEC
S6 = 65 kA at 480 Vac UL or 415 Vac IEC
Frame Rating (Amperes)
07 = 630 (IEC only)
08 = 800
10 = 1000 (IEC only)
12 = 1200 (UL only)
13 = 1250 (IEC only)
16 = 1600 (On NF: IEC only)
Poles, Phasing
3 = Three-pole, ABC
4 = Four-pole, NABC
Mounting Configuration
W= Drawout
B= Fixed mount rear connect, mounting bracket,
with secondary terminal row
R= Fixed mount rear connect, surface mount,
with secondary terminal row
T= Fixed mount front connect, surface mount,
cable connect, with secondary terminal row
F= Fixed mount front connect, mounting bracket,
bus connect, with secondary terminal row
S= Fixed mount front connect, surface mount,
bus connect, with secondary terminal row
Trip Unit
52 = 520 LSI, no ZSI
53 = 520 LSI, with ZSI
5G = 520 LSIG, no ZSI
5H = 520 LSIG, with ZSI
M2 = 520M LSI, no ZSI, 24 Vdc
M3 = 520M LSI, with ZSI, 24 Vdc
MA = 520M LSIA, no ZSI, 24 Vdc
MB = 520M LSIA, with ZSI, 24 Vdc
MG = 520M LSIG, no ZSI, 24 Vdc
MH = 520M LSIG, with ZSI, 24 Vdc
R2 = 520M LSI, no ZSI, 24 Vdc, with
Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System™
R3 = 520M LSI, with ZSI, 24 Vdc, with
Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System
RA = 520M LSIA, no ZSI, 24 Vdc, with
Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System
RB = 520M LSIA, with ZSI, 24 Vdc, with
Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System
RG = 520M LSIG, no ZSI, 24 Vdc, with
Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System
RH = 520M LSIG, with ZSI, 24 Vdc, with
Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System
SW = Non-auto switch
Rating Plug
(Amperes)
1= 200
2= 250
3= 300
4= 400
5= 500
6= 600
7= 630
8= 800
A= 1000
B= 1200
C= 1250
D= 1600
Shunt Trip 1
N= No shunt trip
A= 110–127 Vac/Vdc
R= 208–240 Vac/Vdc
L= 24 Vdc
H= 48 Vdc
Motor Operator 1
M= Manually operated
B= 110–125 Vac
W= 110–125 Vdc
T= 208–250 Vac
P= 220–250 Vdc
L= 24 Vdc
H= 48 Vdc
Spring Release,
Latch Check Switch 1
N= No spring release, no LCS
A= 110–127 Vac/Vdc, no LCS
R= 208–240 Vac/Vdc, no LCS
N S S6 08 3 W 52 8 A B A N 4 X N D X
UVR, Second Shunt Trip 1
N= None
A= 110–125 Vac/Vdc UVR
R= 220–250 Vac/Vdc UVR
1= 110–127 Vac/Vdc second shunt trip
2= 208–240 Vac/Vdc second shunt trip
Auxiliary, Switches,
Label Language 1
E = No auxiliary switches,
no label (parent)
2 = 2 Form C, English
4 = 4 Form C, English
Trip Indicator and Bell Alarm/OTS,
Secondary Terminal Blocks 1
N= No indicator, no OTS, secondary terminal blocks
per breaker options
X= Trip indicator provided, no OTS, secondary
terminal blocks per breaker options
Z= Trip indicator provided, 2 Form C OTS, secondary
terminal blocks per breaker options
M= Interlock trip indicator provided, no OTS,
secondary terminal blocks per breaker options
Y= Trip indicator provided, 2 Form C OTS, secondary
terminal blocks per breaker options
1= No indicator, no OTS, full complement secondary
terminal blocks
2= Trip indicator, no OTS, full complement secondary
terminal blocks
3= Trip indicator provided, 2 Form C OTS, full
complement secondary terminal blocks
4= Interlock trip indicator provided, no OTS, full
complement secondary terminal blocks
5= Interlock trip indicator provided, 2 Form C, full
complement secondary terminal blocks
Future Use
X = All product
Drawout Breaker Shipping,
Fixed Breaker Terminals, Door Frame Kit
D= Drawout (or parent) breaker shipping alone,
without door frame kit
C= Drawout breaker in cassette, no shutters,
no terminals, with door frame kit
K= Fixed breaker, no adapters, rear connector,
with door frame kit, with mounting feet,
with door frame kit
A= Terminal adapters for rear connect,
short vertical/horizontal, with door frame kit
E= Terminal adapters for rear connect,
long vertical/horizontal, with door frame kit
F= Terminal adapters for rear connect,
with mounting feet, short vertical/horizontal,
with door frame kit
H= Terminal adapters for rear connect, with
mounting feet, long vertical/horizontal,
with door frame kit
1= Drawout breaker in cassette, no shutters,
short vertical/horizontal, with door frame kit
2= Drawout breaker in cassette, no shutters,
long vertical/horizontal, with door frame kit
4= Drawout breaker in cassette, with shutters,
short vertical/horizontal, with door frame kit
5= Drawout breaker in cassette, with shutters,
long vertical/horizontal, with door frame kit
9= Drawout breaker in cassette, with shutters,
no terminals, with door frame kit
Padlock Provisions, Key Lock
Provisions, Operations Counter 1
N= No PB covers, none, no counter
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-31
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.1
Circuit Protection
Circuit Breakers
Catalog Number Selection
Series NRX Cassettes
Product Selection
Series NRX Low Voltage Power Breakers
Notes
1See Page V9-T1-30 for cassette selection for drawout breakers.
2See selection above for accessories in positions 12–20.
Breaker
Frame
Industry
Standard
Fault Current
Rating (kAIC)
Frame Rating
in Amperes Poles Mounting Trip Unit Rating Plug Part Number 2
N UL 1066 42 800 3 Drawout 1520 LSI (No ZSI) 800 NSS4083W528
N UL 1066 42 800 4 Fixed 520 LSI (No ZSI) 800 NSS4084B528
N UL 1066 50 800 3 Drawout 1520 LSI (No ZSI) 800 NSS5083W528
N UL 1066 50 800 4 Fixed 520 LSI (No ZSI) 800 NSS5084B528
N UL 1066 65 800 3 Drawout 1520 LSI (No ZSI) 800 NSS6083W528
N UL 1066 65 800 3 Fixed 520 LSI (No ZSI) 800 NSS6083B528
N UL 1066 65 800 4 Drawout 1520 LSI (No ZSI) 800 NSS6084W528
N UL 1066 65 800 4 Fixed 520 LSI (No ZSI) 800 NSS6084B528
N UL 489 42 800 3 Drawout 1520 LSI (No ZSI) 800 NXS4083W528
N UL 489 42 1200 4 Drawout 1520 LSI (No ZSI) 1200 NXS4124W52B
N UL 489 50 800 3 Fixed 520 LSI (No ZSI) 800 NXS5083B528
N UL 489 50 1200 4 Fixed 520 LSI (No ZSI) 1200 NXS5124B528
N UL 489 65 800 3 Drawout 1520 LSI (No ZSI) 800 NXS6083W528
N UL 489 65 800 4 Fixed 520 LSI (No ZSI) 800 NSS6084B528
N UL 489 65 1200 3 Drawout 1520 LSI (No ZSI) 1200 NXS6123W52B
N UL 489 65 1200 4 Fixed 520 LSI (No ZSI) 1200 NXS6124B52B
N IEC 42 630 3 Drawout 1520 LSI (No ZSI) 630 NES4073W527
N IEC 42 1600 4 Drawout 1520 LSI (No ZSI) 1600 NES4164W52D
N IEC 50 630 3 Fixed 520 LSI (No ZSI) 630 NES5073B527
N IEC 50 1600 4 Fixed 520 LSI (No ZSI) 1600 NES5164B52D
N IEC 65 630 3 Drawout 1520 LSI (No ZSI) 630 NES6073W527
N IEC 65 800 4 Fixed 520 LSI (No ZSI) 800 NES6084B528
N IEC 65 1250 3 Fixed 520 LSI (No ZSI) 1250 NES6133B52C
N IEC 65 1600 4 Drawout 1520 LSI (No ZSI) 1600 NES6164W52D
Poles and Phasing
(Facing Front of Breaker)
3 = Three-pole ABC
4 = Four-pole NABC
Continuous Ampere Range
08 = 800A (UL 1066)
12 = 800–1200A (UL 489)
16 = 630–1600A (IEC)
Arc Hood
A = Arc hood installed (default)
TOC Switches
(Truck Operated Cell)
N = Not included (default)
Cassette Family and Breaker Frame
NS = UL 1066 N Frame
NX = UL 489 N Frame
NE = IEC N Frame
Load Terminal Connections
F= With flat tapped pads only
G= With vertical/horizontal bus adapter kit (short style)
H= With front-connected kit
N= No cassette stabs (interunit only)
Future
N = None
Future
N = None
Cassette Shipping
C= Cassette only
B= Breaker shipped in cassette
Shutters
N= Not included (default)
S = Included
NX 12 3 F A B N S N N N C
Secondary Contact Terminals Installed
N= None
B= Breaker defined, when breaker ships in cassette
F= Full complement
C= Common options when cassette ships alone
Door Frame Gasket and Rejection Kits
B = Door kit included (default), with rejection kit
V9-T1-32 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.1
Circuit Protection
Circuit Breakers
Magnum Low Voltage Power Breakers
Features
●Rated up to 6300A with interrupting ratings up to 200 kAIC
and withstand ratings up to 100 kAIC
●Magnum® DS is UL 1066 listed for one-half second short-time
withstand rating, and rated for 30 cycles. It is a switchgear
class product to meet UL 1558 switchgear standards
●Magnum SB is a UL 1066 listed product with one-half second
short-time withstand rating at three cycles to meet
switchboard class product specifications, such as UL 891
●Magnum DS MDDX is the highest interrupting performance in
a non-current limiting breaker construction rated up to
200 kAIC with 100 kAIC short-time withstand
●The Magnum DS, Magnum SB and Magnum IEC lines all offer
the smallest double narrow 4000A frame available
Magnum Low Voltage Power Breakers
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-33
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.1
Circuit Protection
Circuit Breakers
Catalog Number Selection
Magnum ANSI/UL Low Voltage Power Breakers
Breaker Type
MD = Magnum DS
SB = Magnum
switchboard
Frame Type
S = Standard or double
N = Narrow
D = Double (MDDX only)
Interrupting/
Withstand Rating
4= 42
5= 50
6= 65
8= 85
C= 100
E= 150 (DSE)
X= 200 (DSX)
L= 200 (DSL)
Poles and Neutral
(Facing Front of Breaker)
3= Three-pole
4= Four-pole, neutral left
MD S 4 12 3 V E A 06 MU A W C H N E H K L A X
Continuous Amperes and
Phasing (Facing Front of
Breaker)
08 = 800 ABC
12 = 1200 ABC
16 = 1600 ABC
20 = 2000 ABC
25 = 2500 ABC
30 = 3000 ABC
32 = 3200 ABC or ABCABC
3N = 3200 AABBCC
4N = 4000 AABBCC
5N = 5000 AABBCC
6N = 6000 AABBCC
40 = 4000 ABCABC
50 = 5000 ABCABC
60 = 6000 ABCABC
Mounting Configuration
and Load Terminals
H = Fixed horizontal
V = Fixed vertical
L = Drawout (MDN)
W = Drawout (MDS)
Nameplate Language
E= English
A= Spanish
Current Limiter Selection
A =Non-DSL
(no limiter)
D =MA250
E =MA300
F =MA400
G =MA600
H = MA800
K = MB1200
L = MB1600
M = MB2000
N = MD2500
P = MD3000
Sensor and
Rating Plug Rating
NN = None
01 = 100
02 = 200
05 = 250
03 = 300
04 = 400
06 = 600
08 = 800
10 = 1000
12 = 1200
13 = 1250
16 = 1600
20 = 2000
25 = 2500
30 = 3000
32 = 3200
40 = 4000
50 = 5000
60 = 6000
Trip Unit and Protection
(and External Control
Voltage When Required)
NN = Non-automatic (no trip unit)
22 = 220 + LI
52 = 520 LSI
5G = 520 LSIG
M2 = 520M LSI
MT = 520M LSI (24/48 Vdc)
MU = 520M LSI (120 Vac)
MV = 520M LSI (240 Vac)
MQ = 520M LSI (125 Vac)
MG = 520M LSIG
MH = 520M LSIG (24/48 Vdc)
MM = 520M LSIG (120 Vac)
MN = 520 LSIG (240 Vac)
MX = 520M LSIG (125 Vac)
ME = 520M LSIA (24/48 Vdc)
MC = 520 LSIA (120 Vac)
MF = 520M LSIA (240 Vac)
MZ = 520M LSIA (125 Vac)
CT = 520MC LSI (24/48 Vdc)
CU = 520MC LSI (120 Vac)
CV = 520MC LSI (240 Vac)
CQ = 520MC LSI (125 Vac)
CH = 520MC LSIG (24/48 Vdc)
CM = 520MC LSIG (120 Vac)
CN = 520MC LSIG (240 Vac)
CX = 520MC LSIG (125 Vac)
CE = 520MC LSIA (24/48 Vdc)
CC = 520MC LSIA (120 Vac)
CF = 520MC LSIA (240 Vac)
CY = 520MC LSIA (125 Vac)
1A = 1150 LSI (24/48 Vdc)
1C = 1150 LSI (120 Vac)
1E = 1150 LSI (240 Vac)
1Q = 1150 LSI (125 Vac)
1F = 1150 LSIG (24/48 Vdc)
1G = 1150 LSIG (120 Vac)
1H = 1150 LSIG (240 Vac)
1X = 1150 LSIG (125 Vac)
1J = 1150 LSIA (24/48 Vdc)
1K = 1150 LSIA (120 Vac)
1M = 1150 LSIA (240 Vac)
1Y = 1150 LSIA (125 Vac)
Shunt Trip (ST)
N = None
A = 110–127 Vac/Vdc
R = 208–240 Vac/Vdc
C = 24 Vdc
H = 48 Vdc
Motor Operator
M= Manual operated
N= 110–125 Vac
W= 110–125 Vdc
T= 220–250 Vdc
P= 220–240 Vac
L= 24 Vdc
K= 48 Vdc
Spring Release
Device (SRD)
N= None
A= 110–127 Vac/Vdc
R= 208–240 Vac/Vdc
C= 24 Vdc
H= 48 Vdc
Undervoltage
Release (UVR) or
2nd Shunt Trip (ST)
N = None
A = UVR (110–127 Vac)
R = UVR (208–240 Vac)
C = UVR (24 Vdc)
H = UVR (48 Vdc)
E = UVR (110–125 Vdc)
F = UVR (220–250 Vdc)
J = UVR (480 Vac)
K = UVR (600 Vac)
1 = 2nd ST (110–127 Vac/Vdc)
2 = 2nd ST (208–240 Vac/Vdc)
3 = 2nd ST (24 Vdc)
4 = 2nd ST (48 Vdc)
Bell Alarms Switch (OTS)
with 2a/2b Contacts and/or
Mechanical Trip Indicator
OTS 2a/2b Trip Indicator
E =
N =
Y =
No OTS
No OTS
With OTS
No indicator
With indicator
With indicator
Auxiliary Switch
N= None
2= 2A/2B
4= 4A/4B
6= 6A/6B
Padlock Provisions for Blocking
Close and/or Open ACB Manual
Pushbuttons
N = None
M = Metal (block close and open)
P = Plastic (block close and open)
C = Metal (block close only)
H = Plastic (block close only)
S = Metal swbd lock-off (block close,
depress open)
Operations Counter and/or
Keylock Provisions
Counter
Keylock
Provisions
N =
K =
C =
R =
A =
Y =
L =
H =
No counter
No counter
No counter
No counter
Counter
Counter
Counter
Counter
No lock
Kirk lock
Castell lock
Ronis lock
No lock
Kirk lock
Castell lock
Ronis lock
Latch Check Switch/Trip Unit
Metering Voltage Connection
for Digitrip 1150 Trip Unit
Latch Check
Switch
1150 Voltage
Connection
N=
M =
L=
Y=
C=
D=
None
None
LCS wired to SRD
LCS wired to SRD
LCS wired external
LCS wired external
Upper terminals
Lower terminals
Upper terminals
Lower terminals
Upper terminals
Lower terminals
Breaker Shipping Options
and Instructions
A= Fixed breaker alone with
door kit
F= Fixed breaker alone without
door kit
A= Drawout breaker alone
without door frame kit
C= Drawout breaker in cassette
(unwired)
P= Drawout breaker in cassette
(prewired)
S= Drawout breaker in cassette
(shutters)
W= Drawout breaker in cassette
(prewired and shutters)
Double frame drawout breakers
ship without cassette drawout.
ACBs ship in narrow and
universal cassettes only.
Frame Use
X = All breakers
V9-T1-34 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.1
Circuit Protection
Circuit Breakers
Magnum ANSI/UL Low Voltage Air Circuit Breaker Cassettes
Cassette Family
M= Standard or double frame
L= Narrow frame
S= SB standard or double frame
T= SB narrow frame
Continuous Amperes
16 = Up to 1600A
20 = Up to 2000A
32 = 2500 to 3200A
40 = 4000A
50 = 5000A
Poles
3 = Three-pole
4 = Four-pole
Cassette Frame and Rear Terminals
P= Basic cassette
(without vertical bus stabs)
C= Basic cassette with stabs
(with vertical bus stab kit)
H= Narrow frame cassette
(with horizontal terminal pads)
U= Universal cassette
(with universal terminal pads)
Future Use
E = SB cassette (150 kAIC)
N = Cassettes (up to 100 kA)
L = MDSL cassettes (200 kA)
X = MDSX cassettes (200 kA)
D = MDDX breaker
Arc Hood
A = Arc hood installed
Door Frame and Gasket Kit
DN = Door frame and gasket kit included
XN = Door frame and gasket kit not included
Cassette Shipping
CA = Cassette only
BA = Breaker shipped in cassette
Cassette Wiring
N = Unwired
W = Cassettes wired
Future Use
NNN = All cassettes
Shutters
N= No shutters
S= Shutters installed
M E 32 3 C A DN NNNN W C
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-35
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.1
Circuit Protection
Circuit Breakers
Magnum IEC Low Voltage Air Circuit Breakers
Auxiliary Switch
N= None
2= 2A/2B
4= 4A/4B
6= 6A/6B
Breaker Frame
I= Standard
or double
N= Narrow
K= Special
1100 Vac ACB
Sensor and Rating Plug Rating
NN = None
02 = 200
05 = 250
03 = 300
04 = 400
06 = 600
07 = 630
08 = 800
10 = 1000
12 = 1200
13 = 1250
16 = 1600
20 = 2000
25 = 2500
30 = 3000
32 = 3200
40 = 4000
50 = 5000
63 = 6300
Nameplate Language
E= English
A= Spanish
Poles and Neutral
(Facing Front of Breaker)
3= Three
4= Four (neutral left)
R= Four (reserved for neutral right)
Future Use
X = All ACBs
ACB Shipping Instructions
A= Fixed ACB with door kit
F= Fixed ACB without door kit
A= D/O ACB only without
door kit
C= D/O ACB in cassette
(unwired)
P= D/O ACB in cassette
(prewired)
S= D/O ACB in cassette
(shutters)
W= D/O ACB in cassette
(prewired and shutters)
Double frame D/O ACBs ship
without cassette
Shunt Trip
Attachment (STA)
N = None
A = 110–127 Vac
R = 208–240 Vac
C = 24 Vdc
H = 48 Vdc
Bell Alarms Switch (OTS) with 2a/2b
Contacts and/or Mechanical Trip Indicator
OTS 2a/2b Trip Indicator
E =
N =
Y =
No OTS
No OTS
With OT
No indicator
With indicator
With indicator
Operations Counter and/or
Keylock Provisions
Counter
Keylock
Provisions
N =
K =
C =
R =
A =
T =
L =
H =
No counter
No counter
No counter
No counter
Counter
Counter
Counter
Counter
No lock
Kirk lock
Castell lock
Ronis lock
No lock
Kirk lock
Castell lock
Ronis lock
MW I 408 3 H E A–0222 A M A A 2 E M K L A X
Motor Operator
M= Manual operated
N= 110–125 Vac
W= 110–125 Vdc
T= 220–250 Vdc
P= 220–250 Vac
L= 24 Vdc
K= 48 Vdc
Spring Release
Device (SRD)
N= None
A= 110–127 Vac/Vdc
R= 208–240 Vac/Vdc
C= 24 Vdc
H= 48 Vdc
Undervoltage Release (UVR) or
2nd Shunt Trip Attachment
(STA)
N = None
A = 110–127 Vac
R = 208–240 Vac
C = 24 Vdc
H = 48 Vdc
E = 110–125 Vdc
F = 220–250 Vdc
G = 32 Vdc
X = 380–415 Vac
J = 480 Vac
K = 600 Vac
1 = 2nd STA (110–127 Vac/Vdc)
2 = 2nd STA (208–250 Vac/Vdc)
3 = 2nd STA (24 Vdc)
4 = 2nd STA (48 Vdc)
Continuous Amperes
and Phasing (Facing
Front of Breaker)
08 = 800 ABC
10 = 1000 ABC
12 = 1250 ABC
16 = 1600 ABC
20 = 2000 ABC
25 = 2500 ABC
32 = 3200 ABC
4N = 4000 AABBCC
5N = 5000 AABBCC
6N = 6300 AABBCC
40 = 4000 ABCABC
50 = 5000 ABCABC
60 = 6300 ABCABC
Mounting Configuration
and Load Terminals
H= Fixed horizontal
V= Fixed vertical
L= Drawout horizontal
Latch Checking Switch/Trip Unit
Metering Voltage Connection
for Digitrip 1150 Trip Unit
Latch Check
Switch
1150 Voltage
Connection
N=
M=
L=
Y=
C=
D=
None
None
LCS wired to SRD
LCS wired to SRD
LCS wired external
LCS wired external
Upper terminals
Lower terminals
Upper terminals
Lower terminals
Upper terminals
Lower terminals
Trip Unit Protection,
(and External Control
Voltage When Required)
NN = Non-automatic (no trip unit)
22 = 220 LI
52 = 520 LSI
5W = 520i LSIG
M2 = 520M LSI
MT = 520M LSI (24–48 Vdc)
MU = 520M LSI (120 Vac)
MV = 520M LSI (240 Vac)
MW = 520Mi LSIG
MJ = 520Mi LSIG (24–48 Vdc)
MK = 520Mi LSIG (120 Vac)
ML = 520Mi LSIG (240 Vac)
ME = 520M LSIA (24–48 Vdc)
MC = 520M LSIA (120 Vac)
MF = 520M LSIA (240 Vac)
CT = 520MC LSI
CU = 520MC LSI
CV = 520MC LSI
CE = 520MC LSIA
CC = 520MC LSIA
CF = 520MC LSIA
CJ = 520MCi LSIG
CK = 520MCi LSIG
CL = 520MCi LSIG
1W = 1150i LSI (24–48 Vdc)
1N = 1150i LSI (120 Vac)
1P = 1150i LSI (240 Vac)
1R = 1150i LSIG/A (24–48 Vdc)
1S = 1150i LSIG/A (120 Vac)
1T = 1150i LSIG/A (240 Vac)
Interrupting ICU
4= 40 kA
5= 50 kA
6= 65 kA
8= 85 kA
C= 100 kA
2= 25 kA
(1100 Vac MWK)
Padlock Provisions for Blocking Close
and/or Open ACB Manual Pushbuttons
N= None
M= Metal (block close and open)
P= Plastic (block close and open)
C= Metal (block close only)
H= Plastic (block close only)
V9-T1-36 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.1
Circuit Protection
Circuit Breakers
Magnum IEC Low Voltage Air Circuit Breaker Cassettes
Continuous Amperes
20 = Up to 2000A
32 = 2500–3000A
40 = 4000A
63 = 5000–6300A
Arc Hood
A= Arc hood for 690 Vac
K= Arc hood for 1100 Vac
Future Use
N = All cassettes
Rear Terminals
H = Horizontal stabs (upper
and lower terminals)
Cassette Family
E= Standard or double frame IEC
(690 and 1100 Vac)
N= Narrow frame IEC
Poles
3= Three-pole
4= Four-pole
Cassette Wiring
N= Unwired
W= Cassette wired
Cassette Wiring
C = Cassette only
E N 20 3HANNNNNNNC
Future Use
N = All cassettes
Door Frame and Gasket Kit
X= Door frame and gasket kit
included
D= Door frame and gasket kit
not included
Future Use
N = All cassettes
Shutters
N= No shutters
S= Shutters installed
Future Use
N = All cassettes
Future Use
N = All cassettes
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-37
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.1
Circuit Protection
Circuit Breakers
Product Selection
Magnum DS Switchgear Class UL 1066 Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
Notes
1
Interrupting ratings shown based on breaker equipped with integral Digitrip RMS trip unit. Interruption ratings for non-automatic breakers are equal to the published short time current rating. These
interruption ratings are based on the standard duty cycle consisting of an open operation, a 15-second interval and a close-open operation, in succession, with delayed tripping in case of short-delay
devices. The standard duty cycle for short time ratings consists of maintaining the rated current for two periods of 1/2 seconds each, with a 15-second interval of zero current between the two periods.
2See Page V9-T1-36 for selection of trip unit and accessories. See Page V9-T1-36 for cassette selection for drawout breakers.
3Magnum MDSL current limiting power circuit breaker with integral current limiters. Current limiter selected determines short time and maximum instantaneous trip rating.
Maximum voltage rating is 600 Vac.
4Product to be tested. Contact Eaton for product rating.
5Magnum MDSX current limiting power circuit breaker with fast opening contacts.
6Contact Eaton for availability.
7Breaker applied in a tested fan-cooled enclosure.
Frame
Type
RMS Symmetrical Current Ratings kA 50/60 Hz 1Short Time
Current Rating
Frame
AmperesInterrupting at 254 Vac Interrupting at 508 Vac Interrupting at 635 Vac Breaker Type 2
Narrow42424242800MDN-408
50 50 50 50 MDN-508
65 65 65 65 MDN-608
100 100 65 20 MDN-C08
Standard 42 42 42 42 800 MDS-408
65 65 65 65 MDS-608
85 85 85 85 MDS-808
100 100 100 85 MDS-C08
200 200 200 — MDS-L08 3
200 200 430 MDS-X08 56
Narrow424242421600MDN-416
50 50 50 50 MDN-516
65 65 65 65 MDN-616
100 100 65 30 MDN-C16
Standard 65 65 65 65 1600 MDS-616
85 85 85 85 MDS-816
100 100 100 85 MDS-C16
200 200 200 — MDS-L16 3
200 200 430 MDS-X16 5
Narrow656565652000MDN-620
100 100 65 35 MDN-C20
Standard 65 65 65 65 2000 MDS-620
85 85 85 85 MDS-820
100 100 100 85 MDS-C20
200 200 200 — MDS-L20 3
200 200 430 MDS-X20 5
65 65 65 65 3200 MDS-632
85 85 85 85 MDS-832
100 100 100 85 MDS-C32
Double 200 200 450 3200 MDS-X32 5
Double (N) 85 85 485 4000 MDN-840
100 100 4100 MDN-C40
Double858585854000MDS-840
100 100 100 100 MDS-C40
200 200 450 MDS-X40 5
200 200 4100 4000 MDD-X40
85 85 85 85 5000 MDS-850
100 100 100 100 MDS-C50
200 200 450 MDS-X50 57
200 200 4100 MDD-X50
100 100 100 100 6000 MDS-C60 7
200 200 4100 MDD-X60
V9-T1-38 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.1
Circuit Protection
Circuit Breakers
Magnum SB Switchboard Class UL 1066 Insulated Case Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
Notes
1Interrupting ratings shown based on breaker equipped with integral Digitrip RMS trip unit. Interruption ratings for non-automatic breakers are equal to the
published short time current rating. These interruption ratings are based on the standard duty cycle consisting of an open operation, a 15-second interval
and a close-open operation, in succession, with delayed tripping in case of short-delay devices. The standard duty cycle for short time ratings consists of
maintaining the rated current for two periods of 1/2 seconds each, with a 15-second interval of zero current between the two periods.
2Product to be tested. Contact Eaton for product rating.
3Magnum SBSE current limiting power circuit breaker with fast opening contacts.
4Breaker applied in a tested fan-cooled enclosure.
Frame
Type
RMS Symmetrical Current Ratings kA 50/60 Hz 1Short Time
Current Rating
Frame
AmperesInterrupting at 254 Vac Interrupting at 508 Vac Interrupting at 635 Vac Breaker Type 2
Narrow50503520800SBN-508
65 65 42 20 SBN-608
100 100 65 20 SBN-C08
Standard 65 65 65 20 800 SBS-608
100 100 85 20 SBS-C08
200 150 230 SBS-E08 3
Narrow505035251200SBN-512
65 65 42 25 SBN-612
100 100 65 25 SBN-C12
Standard 65 65 65 25 1200 SBS-612
100 100 85 25 SBS-C12
200 150 230 SBS-E12 3
Narrow505035301600SBN-516
65 65 42 30 SBN-616
100 100 65 30 SBN-C16
Standard 65 65 65 30 1600 SBS-616
100 100 85 30 SBS-C16
200 150 230 SBS-E16 3
Narrow656565352000SBN-620
100 100 65 35 SBN-C20
Standard 65 65 65 35 2000 SBS-620
100 100 85 35 SBS-C20
200 150 230 SBS-E20 3
65 65 65 45 2500 SBS-625
100 100 85 45 SBS-C25
Double 200 150 250 SBS-E25 3
Standard 65 65 65 50 3000 SBS-630
100 100 85 50 SBS-C30
Double 200 150 250 SBS-E30 3
Double (N) 85 85 385 4000 SBN-840
100 100 3100 SBN-C40
Double85858585 SBS-840
100 100 100 100 SBS-C40
200 150 250 SBS-E40 3
85 85 85 85 5000 SBS-850
100 100 100 100 SBS-C50
200 150 250 SBS-E50 34
100 100 100 100 6000 SBS-C60 4
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-39
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.1
Circuit Protection
Circuit Breakers
Magnum IEC 60947-2 Rated Low Voltage Air Circuit Breakers
Note
1Interrupting ratings shown based on breaker equipped with integral Digitrip RMS trip unit. Interruption ratings for non-automatic breakers are
equal to the published breaker Icw rating.
rms Symmetrical Current Ratings kA 1Fixed
Internal
Inst. Trip
Available Current Sensor and Rating
Plugs for Digitrip RMS Trip Unit
(Establishes Breaker In Rating)
Frame
Amperes
Breaker
Type
Frame
Type
Interrupting at
240 Vac ICU = ICS
Interrupting at
440 Vac ICU = ICS
Interrupting at
690 Vac ICU = ICS
Withstand Rating
ICW 1-Sec/3-Sec
800 MWN-408 Narrow 40 40 40 40/— — 200, 250, 300, 400, 630, 800
MWN-508Narrow50505050/——
MWN-608Narrow65656565/40—
MWI-608 Standard 65 65 65 65/— —
MWI-808 Standard 85 85 85 85/65 —
MWI-C08 Standard 100 100 85 85/65 85
1000 MWN-410 Narrow 40 40 40 40/— — 200, 250, 300, 400, 630, 800, 1000
MWN-510Narrow50505050/——
MWN-610Narrow65656565/40—
MWI-610 Standard 65 65 65 65/— —
MWI-810 Standard 85 85 85 85/65 —
MWI-C10 Standard 100 100 85 85/65 85
1250 MWN-412 Narrow 40 40 40 40/— — 200, 250, 300, 400, 630, 800, 1000, 1250
MWN-512Narrow50505050/——
MWN-612Narrow65656565/40—
MWI-612 Standard 65 65 65 65/— —
MWI-812 Standard 85 85 85 85/65 —
MWI-C12 Standard 100 100 85 85/65 85
1600 MWN-516 Narrow 50 50 50 50/— — 200, 250, 300, 400, 630, 800, 1000, 1250,
1600
MWN-616Narrow65656565/40—
MWI-616 Standard 65 65 65 65/— —
MWI-816 Standard 85 85 85 85/65 —
MWI-C16 Standard 100 100 85 85/65 85
2000 MWN-520 Narrow 50 50 50 50/30 — 200, 250, 300, 400, 630, 800, 1000, 1250,
1600, 2000
MWN-620Narrow65656565/40—
MWI-620 Standard 65 65 65 65/50 —
MWI-820 Standard 85 85 85 85/65 —
MWI-C20 Standard 100 100 85 85/65 85
2500 MWI-625 Standard 65 65 65 65/— — 200, 250, 300, 400, 630, 800, 1000, 1250,
1600, 2000, 2500
MWI-825 Standard 85 85 85 85/65 —
MWI-C25 Standard 100 100 85 85/65 85
3200 MWI-632 Standard 65 65 65 65/50 — 200, 250, 300, 400, 630, 800, 1000, 1250,
1600, 2000, 2500, 3200
MWI-832 Standard 85 85 85 85/65 —
MWI-C32 Standard 100 100 85 85/65 85
4000 MWI-64N Double 65 65 65 65/— — 2000, 2500, 3200, 4000
MWI-84NDouble85858585/——
MWI-C4N Double 100 100 100 100/— —
5000 MWI-85N Double 85 85 85 85/— — 2500, 3200, 4000, 5000
MWI-C5N Double 100 100 100 100/— —
6300 MWI-86N Double 85 85 85 85/— — 3200, 4000, 5000, 6300
MWI-C6N Double 100 100 100 100/— —
V9-T1-40 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.2
Circuit Protection
Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders
Product Overview
Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders
For our complete product offering, see Volume 4—Circuit
Protection, CA08100005E.
Description C350 Series
Page V9-T1-41
Technical Data
Number of poles Up to 3
Mounting 35 mm flat or 32 mm asymmetrical DIN rail
(with optional adapter)
Terminal ratings 600V, 30A
Housing construction Thermoplastic UL 94VO flammability rating
Clip/terminal construction Tin-plated copper alloy
Screw/pressure plate construction Zinc-plated steel
Dielectric strength 1200V
Approvals
UL, CSA
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-41
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.2
Circuit Protection
Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders
C350 Series Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders
Features
●Space-saving design
●Rated 600V, 30A
●UL approved for motor loads
Product Selection
C350 Series
Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders
Wire Termination
Number
of Poles
250V 600V
30A
Catalog Number
Carton
Qty.
60A
Catalog Number
Carton
Qty.
30A
Catalog Number
Carton
Qty.
60A
Catalog Number
Carton
Qty.
Class H Fuse Holders
Single collar (box lug)—sized to ampere
rating
1W231HA 10 W261HA 10 W631HA 10 W661HA 1
2W232HA 5W262HA 5W632HA 5W662HA 1
3W233HA 5W263HA 5W633HA 1W663HA 2
Class M Fuse Holders
Combination of double quick-connect,
20A max., and binding head screw,
#10 max., Cu/Al
1————WM631F 10 ——
2————WM632F 8——
3————WM633F 6——
Combination of double quick-connect,
20A max., and pressure plate screw,
#10 max., Cu only
1————WM631G 10 ——
2————WM632G 8——
3————WM633G 6——
Class R Fuse Holders
Single collar (box lug)—sized to ampere
rating
1WR231HA 10 ——WR631HA 10 ——
2————WR632HA 5——
3WR233HA 5WR263HA 1WR633HA 5WR663HA 5
Combination of double quick-connect,
20A max., and binding head screw,
#10 max., Cu/Al
1————————
2————WMR632F 1——
3————WMR633F 6——
Combination of double quick-connect,
20A max., and pressure plate screw,
#10 max., Cu only
1————WMR631G 10 ——
3————WMR633G 6——
Class R Fuse Holder, Type WRR Control Transformer Fuse Block
Combination of double quick-connect,
20A max., and pressure plate screw,
#14–#10 Cu only
3————WRR633G 6——
V9-T1-42 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.3
Circuit Protection
Rotary Disconnect Switches
Open Rotary Disconnects
Product Overview
Rotary Disconnect Switch Selection Guide
Note
1Q4 2010
Description
R5 Series
Non-Fusible 16–80A
R9 Series
Non-Fusible 30–100A Compact
R9 Series
Non-Fusible 100–1200A
Page V9-T1-44 Page V9-T1-46 Page V9-T1-48
Product Description
R5 Series (UL 508 listed) products are manually
operated modular switches. Load break switching
and isolation provide safety solutions for any low
voltage circuit, particularly for machine and control
circuits. The R5 Series products are manual motor
controllers suitable as motor disconnect.
The R9 Series (UL 98 listed) non-fusible 30–100A
compact range ensures making or breaking on
load and safety isolation for low voltage electrical
circuits, particularly for machine control circuits
up to 600V.
The R9 Series (UL 98 listed) non-fusible 100–1200A
are manually operated multipole load-break switches.
Quick-make, quick-break design provides safety
isolation for any low voltage circuit.
Approvals
UL 508 listed, Guide NLRV, File E165150
CSA C22.2 No.14, File 217736
IEC 60947-3, EN 60947-3
CCC
UL 98, File E222859
CSA 22.2 No. 4, File 217736
IEC 60947-3
EN 60947-3
UL 98, File E222859
CSA 22.2 No. 4, File 217736
IEC 60947-3
EN 60947-3
Description
R9 Series
Fusible 30–800A
R9 Series
DC Rated Disconnects Manual Transfer Switches
Page V9-T1-50 Page V9-T1-55 Page V9-T1-56
Product Description
R9 Series (UL 98 listed) Fusible 30–800A manual
operated multi-pole fusible disconnect switches
use double break contacts per pole that ensure
complete isolation of the fuse when the switch
is in the OFF position.
When installed with fuses, they provide protection
for low voltage electrical installations against short
circuit and overload.
UL listed disconnect switches 600 Vdc for
photovoltaic applications 100 to 400A
R9 Series (UL 98 listed) DC rated disconnects are
manually operated multi-pole load break switches.
They provide safety isolation for any low voltage
circuit in a photovoltaic application.
R9 Series (UL 98 listed) non-fusible disconnects are
heavy-duty manual transfer switches, they transfer
load manually between two low voltage circuits and
provide safety disconnection.
These switches are extremely durable and are tested
and approved for use in the most demanding
applications as resistive load or total system
applications.
Approvals
UL 98, File E222859 for 30 to 800A ratings
UL 489, File E305341 for H Frame switches
CSA 22.2 No. 4, File 217736
CSA 22.2 No. 5, File 217736, H Frame only
IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1
IEC 60947-3, EN 60947-3
CE mark
NFPA® 79
UL 98, cULus®, File E222859
CSA 22.2 No. 4, File 217736 1
IEC 60947-3
EN 60947-3
IEC 60-364-7-712 (Rules for the installations and
sites special—photovoltaic applications)
UL 98, cULus, File E222859
UL 1008 (2011)
CSA 22.2 No. 4, File 217736
IEC 60947-3
EN 60947-3
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-43
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.3
Circuit Protection
Rotary Disconnect Switches
Catalog Number Selection
Disconnects
External Handles
Shafts
Notes
1HV at the end of some catalog numbers indicates use with H and V switches only. Not all handles are designed to go with all disconnects.
Consult specific section of the catalog for available options.
2H at the end of some catalog numbers indicates use with H Frame switches only. Not all shafts are designed to go with all disconnects.
Consult specific section of the catalog for available options.
UL Listing
R5 = UL 508
R9 = UL 98
R4 = UL 489
R5 A 3 016 U
Frame Designation
A = UL 508 (16–40A)
B = UL 508 (60–80A)
C = UL 98 Non-fusible (30–100A modular)
V = UL 98 Non-fusible (60–100A visible blade)
D = UL 98 Non-fusible (100–200A)
E = UL 98 Non-fusible (400A)
F = UL 98 Non-fusible (600A)
G = UL 98 Non-fusible (800–1200A)
H = UL 489 Fusible (30A compact)
I = UL 98 Fusible (30A)
J = UL 98 Fusible (30–60A)
K = UL 98 Fusible (60–100A)
L = UL 98 Fusible (200A)
M = UL 98 Fusible (400A)
N = UL 98 Fusible (600–800A)
Phase
2 = Two-pole
3 = Three-pole
4 = Four-pole
Ampere Rating
016 =16A
025 =25A
030 =30A
040 =40A
060 =60A
080 =80A
100 = 100A
200 = 200A
400 = 400A
600 = 600A
800 = 800A
1000 = 1000A
1200 = 1200A
Protection
U= Non-fusible
F= Fusible
Fuse Type Accepted
CC = Class CC
J= Class J
L= Class L
Blank = Non-fusible device
SH B 00 4X F
Handle Type
SH = Selector handle
PH = Pistol handle
Color
B= Black/blue
R= Red/yellow
Size
(Smallest to Largest)
00 = Size 00
0 = Size 0
1 = Size 1
2 = Size 2
3 = Size 3
4 = Size 4
NEMA Type Rating
12 = Type 1, 3R, 12
4X = Type 4, 4X
Operation
F= Front
S= Right side
Blank = Front or right side
Additional Features 1
T = Test position function
Blank = No test function
Product Type
SF = Shaft Length
55 =55 mm
90 =90 mm
150 =150 mm
200 =200 mm
320 =320 mm
400 =400 mm
500 =500 mm
Applicable
Handle Type
SH = Selector handle
PH = Pistol handle
Shaft Cross Section
5x5 = 5 mm x 5 mm
6x6 = 6 mm x 6 mm
10x10 = 10 mm x 10 mm
12x12 = 12 mm x 12 mm
15x12 = 15 mm x 12 mm
Additional Features 2
SF 150 SH 5X5
V9-T1-44 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.3
Circuit Protection
Rotary Disconnect Switches
R5 Series Non-Fusible 16–80A
Features
●Up to 65 kAIC short-circuit rating
●Direct or external operation
●Compact footprint
●DIN rail or base mount
●Wide range of accessories
●Modular design
●Padlockable design (direct, toggle and external handles)
R5 Series Non-Fusible 16–80A
Product Identification
1External front handle
2Shaft extension for external handle
3Direct handle
4Auxiliary contacts
5Switched fourth-pole module
6Terminal shroud
Note: For further details, please see the installation instructions supplied with each device.
2
3
6
4
5
1
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-45
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.3
Circuit Protection
Rotary Disconnect Switches
Product Selection
R5 Series
Accessories
Notes
1Toggle version includes direct handle.
2Available Q2 2011.
3Includes shaft and accessory cap.
Ampere
Rating
Three-Pole Toggle
Switch Only 1
Three-Pole Rotary
Switch Only
Direct
Handle
Front and Right
External Handle SH00
(Choose One)
Front and Right
External Handle SH0
(Choose One)
Three-Position Front
External Handle
SH00 (Black) 2
Shaft for SH0 and
SH00—5 x 5 mm—
In (mm)
16 — R5A3016U DHR5 SH00
Black
3R, 12
SHB00N12
SH00
Red
3R, 12
SHR00N12
SH00
Black
4, 4X
SHB00N4X
SH00
Red
4, 4X
SHR00N4X
SH0
Black
3R, 12
SHB0N12
SH0
Red
3R, 12
SHR0N12
SH0
Black
4, 4X
SHB0N4X
SH0
Red
4, 4X
SHR0N4X
SH00
4, 4X
I–0–II
Open transition
SHB00MTSOT
SH00
4, 4X
I–I+II–II
Closed transition
SHB00MTSCT
2.20 (55.5)
SF55SH5X5
3.50 (90.0)
SF90SH5X5
5.90 (150.0)
SF150SH5X5
7.90 (200.0)
SF200SH5X5
12.60 (320.0)
SF320SH5X5
25 — R5A3025U
30 T5A3030U R5A3030U
40 T5A3040U R5A3040U
60 T5B3060U R5B3060U
80 T5B3080U R5B3080U
+++
Switch body Direct handle Switch body Shaft External handle
+++
Direct Operation External Operation
Ampere
Rating
Switched Fourth-Pole
Module
Unswitched Neutral
Module
Auxiliary Contacts
(Choose One)
Terminal
Shrouds
Conversion Kit
(Choose One) 2
Door
Mounting Kit 3
16 S4PR516 UNMR5A 1NO + 1NC
AC1NON
2NO
AC2N
1P
TS1R5A
3P
TS3R5A
6/8 pole
CKR568
Changeover switch
Open transition
I–0–II
MTSCKR5OT
Changeover switch
Closed transition
I–I+II–II
MTSCKR5CT
DMK
25 S4PR525
30 S4PR530
40 S4PR540
60 S4PR560 2UNMR5B 1P
TS1R5B
3P
TS3R5B
80 S4PR580 2
V9-T1-46 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.3
Circuit Protection
Rotary Disconnect Switches
Non-Fusible 30–100A Compact
Features
●Rating three-pole from 30A to 100A
●Direct or external operation handle (padlockable in
ON position)
●Double breaking per phase
●Small footprint
R9 Series Non-Fusible 30–100A Compact
Product Identification
1Direct handle
2Door interlocked external handle
3Shaft extension
4Terminal shrouds
5Unswitched neutral pole
6Switch body
7Switched fourth-pole module
8Modular type auxiliary contacts
Note: For further details, please see the installation instructions supplied with each device.
1
2
3
4
56
7
8
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-47
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.3
Circuit Protection
Rotary Disconnect Switches
Product Selection
R9 Series 30–100A
Ampere
Rating
(Frame)
Number
of Poles
Switch Body
Only
Direct
Handle
Front and
Right External
Handle SH00
(Choose One)
Front and
Right External
Handle SH0
(Choose One)
Shaft for SH0
and SH00
Handles—
In (mm)
(Choose One)
Switched
Fourth-Pole
Module
Unswitched
Neutral
Module
Auxiliary
Contacts
(Choose One)
Terminal Shrouds
(Choose One)
30
(C Frame)
3R9C3030U DHR9 SH00
Black
3R, 12
SHB00N12
SH00
Red
3R, 12
SHR00N12
SH00
Black
4, 4X
SHB00N4X
SH00
Red
4 4X
SHR00N4X
SH0
Black
3R, 12
SHB0N12
SH0
Red
3R, 12
SHR0N12
SH0
Black
4, 4X
SHB0N4X
SH0
Red
4 4X
SHR0N4X
2.20 (55.5)
SF55SH5X5
3.50 (90.0)
SF90SH5X5
5.91 (150.0)
SF150SH5X5
7.87 (200.0)
SF200SH5X5
12.60 (320.0)
SF320SH5X5
S4PR930 Neutral
UNMR9C
1NO + 1NC
AC1NONC
2NO
AC2N
1P
TS1R9
3P
TS3R9CV
60
(C Frame)
3R9C3060U S4PR960
100
(C Frame)
3R9C3100U S4PR9100
+++
Switch body Direct handle Switch body Shaft External handle
+++
Direct Operation External Operation
V9-T1-48 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.3
Circuit Protection
Rotary Disconnect Switches
Non-Fusible 100–1200A
Features
●High thermal and dynamic withstand ratings
●Arduous categories of applications
●High electrical and mechanical endurances
R9 Series Non-Fusible 100–1200A
Product Identification
1External front handle
2Shaft extensions for external handle
3Configurable U-type ACs, for pre-break and signalling or TEST
4Terminal Screens
Note: For further details, please see the installation instructions supplied with each device.
1
2
3
4
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-49
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.3
Circuit Protection
Rotary Disconnect Switches
Product Selection
R9 Series Non-Fusible 100–1200A
Notes
1Top (line side) supplied as standard.
2Auxiliary contact requires holder (catalog number ACHFG) when used on F and G Frame switches (non-fusible 600–1200A).
3Each catalog number is for line or load side. For both line and load, please order two sets.
Ampere Rating
(Frame)
Number
of Poles
Switch
Body Only
Direct
Handle
Door Interlocked
External Pistol Handle
(Choose One)
Shaft Extensions for
External Handle—
In (mm)
(Choose One)
Auxiliary
Contacts
Terminal Screens
(Choose One)
Terminal
Lugs 3
100
(D Frame)
3R9D3100U DHR9DE Size 2, Black
1, 3R, 12
Defeatable
PHB2N12F
Size 2, Red
1, 3R, 12
Defeatable
PHR2N12F
Size 2, Black
4, 4X
Defeatable
PHB2N4XF
Size 2, Red
4, 4X
Defeatable
PHR2N4XF
7.90 (200.0)
SF200PH10X10
12.60 (320.0)
SF320PH10X10
15.70 (400.0)
SF400PH10X10
19.70 (500.0)
SF500PH10X10
1NO + 1NC
AC1N0NCDE
AC1N0NCDELL
2NO + 2NC
AC2N0NCDE
AC2N0NCDELL
3-pole, Line side only
TS3R9DT
3-pole, Load side only
TS3R9DB
4-pole, Line or load side
TS4R9DTB
LK3R9DL
4R9D4100U LK4R9DL
200
(D Frame)
3R9D3200U LK3R9DL
4R9D4200U LK4R9DL
400
(E Frame)
3R9E3400U 3-pole, Line side only
TS3R9ET
3-pole, Load side only
TS3R9EB
4-pole, Line or load side
TS4R9ETB
LK3R9EM
4R9E4400U LK4R9EM
600
(F Frame)
3R9F3600U DHR9FG Size 3, Black
4, 4X
Defeatable
PHB3N4XF
Size 3, Red
4, 4X
Defeatable
PHR3N4XF
Size 4, Black
4, 4X
Defeatable
PHB4N4XF
Size 4, Red
4, 4X
Defeatable
PHR4N4XF
7.90 (200.0)
SF200PH15X12
12.60 (320.0)
SF320PH15X12
1.70 (400.0)
SF400PH15X12
19.7 (500.0)
SF500PH15X12
1NO AC U Type
AC1N0R9 2
1NC AC U Type
AC1NCR9 2
TS3R9F 1LK3R9FN
4R9F4600U TS4R9F 1LK4R9FN
800
(G Frame)
3R9G3800U TS3R9G 1LK6R9G
LK8R9G
4R9G4800U TS4R9G 1
1000
(G Frame)
3R9G31000U
4R9G41000U
1200
(G Frame)
3R9G31200U
4R9G41200U
+++
Switch body Direct handle Switch body Shaft External handle
+++
Direct Operation External Operation
V9-T1-50 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.3
Circuit Protection
Rotary Disconnect Switches
Fusible 30–800A
Features
●Load break functionality
●Double break contacts
●Up to 200 kA short-circuit rating with Class CC, J or L fuses
●Compact footprints
●Defeatable pistol handles automatically re-latch when the
panel door is closed
●Front or right side operation
●NFPA 79 compliant kits
●Two-, three- and four-pole devices
R9 Series Fusible 30–800A
R9 Fusible 30A/CC and 30A/J (H Frame)—
Direct and External Operation
Product Identification
1External front handles
2Direct handle
3Shaft extensions for external handles
4Configurable U Type ACs, for pre-break and signaling or TEST
1
2
3
4
R9 Fusible 30A/J–800A/L (I–N Frames)—
Direct and External Operation
Product Identification
1External front handles
2External right side handle (not applicable for N Frame 600/800A)
3Direct handle
4Shaft extensions for external handles
5Configurable U Type ACs, for pre-break and signaling or TEST
6Side auxiliary contacts
7Terminal shrouds
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
4
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-51
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.3
Circuit Protection
Rotary Disconnect Switches
Product Selection
Front and Right Side Operation
Note
1100 kA short-circuit rating.
Ampere Rating
(Frame)
(Fuse Class)
Number
of Poles
Switch
Body Only
Direct
Handle
External Selector
Handle
(Choose One)
Shaft Extension for
Selector Handle Only
(Choose One)
External Front
Pistol Handle
External Right
Side Pistol Handle
30
Compact
(H Frame) (CC)
3R4H3030FCC DHR9HC Black
1,3R,12
SHB0N12HV
Red
1,3R,12
SHR0N12HV
Black
4,4X
SHB0N4XHV
Red
4,4X
SHR0N4XHV
7.90 (200.0)
SF200SH5X5H
Black
1,3R,12
PHB1N12F
Red
1,3R,12
PHR1N12F
Black
4,4X
PHB1N4XF
Red
4,4X
PHR1N4XF
Black
4,4X
(w/ TEST Position)
PHB1N4XFT
Red
4,4X
(w/ TEST Position)
PHR1N4XFT
—
30
(H Frame) (CC)
3 + switched neutral R4H3030FCCSN 12.60 320.0)
SF320SH5X5H
30
Compact
(H Frame) (J)
3R4H3030FJ DHR9HJ 15.70 (400.0)
SF400SH5X5H
30
(H Frame) (J)
3 + switched neutral R4H3030FJSN
30
(I Frame) (CC)
3R9I3030FCC DHR9J2M ——
4R9I4030FCC
30
(J Frame) (J)
2R9J2030FJ Black
4, 4X
PHB1N4XS
Red
4, 4X
PHR1N4XS
3R9J3030FJ
4R9J4030FJ
60 1
(J Frame) (J)
2R9J2060FJ
3R9J3060FJ
4R9J4060FJ
+++
Switch body Direct handle Switch body Shaft External handle
+++
Direct Operation External Operation
V9-T1-52 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.3
Circuit Protection
Rotary Disconnect Switches
Front and Right Side Operation, continued
Note
1100 kA short-circuit rating.
Ampere Rating
(Frame)
(Fuse Class)
Number
of Poles
Switch
Body Only
Shaft Extensions for
Pistol Handle Only
In (mm)
(Choose One)
NFPA
79 Kit
Auxiliary
Contacts
(Choose One)
S Type Auxiliary
Contacts
(Choose One)
Terminal
Shrouds
30
Compact
(H Frame) (CC)
3R4H3030FCC 7.90 (200.0)
SF200PH5X5
12.60 (320.0)
SF320PH5X5
15.70 (400.0)
SF400PH5X5
NFPA79H 1 AC
NO
AC1NOR9
1 AC
NC
AC1NCR
— Integral to switch
30
(H Frame) (CC)
3 + switched neutral R4H3030FCCSN
30
Compact
(H Frame) (J)
3R4H3030FJ
30
(H Frame) (J)
3 + switched neutral R4H3030FJSN
30
(I Frame) (CC)
3R9I3030FCC 7.90 (200.0)
SF200PH10X10
12.60 (320.0)
SF320PH10X10
15.70 (400.0)
SF400PH10X10
19.70 (500.0)
SF500PH10X10
NFPA79JKL 1 AC
NO + NC
AC1NO1NCJ2N
2 AC
NO + NC
AC2NO2NCJ2N
1 AC
NO + NC
w/ TEST
AC1NO1NCJ2NT
2 AC
NO + NC
w/ TEST
AC2NO2NCJ2NT
4R9I4030FCC
30
(J Frame) (J)
2R9J2030FJ
3R9J3030FJ
4R9J4030FJ
60 1
(J Frame) (J)
2R9J2060FJ
3R9J3060FJ
4R9J4060FJ
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-53
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.3
Circuit Protection
Rotary Disconnect Switches
Front and Right Side Operation, continued
Note
1200 kA short-circuit rating.
Ampere Rating
(Frame)
(Fuse Class)
Number
of Poles
Switch
Body Only
Direct Handle
(Black)
External Front
Pistol Handle
(Choose One)
External Right Side
Pistol Handle (Choose One)
60 1
(K Frame) (J)
2R9K2060FJ DHR9J2M Black
1,3R,12
PHB2N12F
Red
1,3R,12
PHR2N12F
Black
4,4X
PHB2N4XF
Red
4,4X
PHR2N4XF
Black
4,4X
(w/ TEST Position)
PHB2N4XFT
Red
4,4X
(w/ TEST Position)
PHR2N4XFT
Black
4, 4X
PHB2N4XS
Red
4, 4X
PHR2N4XS
3R9K3060FJ
4R9K4060FJ
100
(K Frame) (J)
2R9K2100FJ
3R9K3100FJ
4R9K4100FJ
200
(L Frame) (J)
2R9L2200FJ
3R9L3200FJ
4R9L4200FJ
400
(M Frame) (J)
3R9M3400FJ —
4R9M4400FJ
600
(N Frame) (J)
2R9N2600FJ DHR9N Black
4, 4X
PHB3N4XF
Red
4,4X
PHR3N4XF
3R9N3600FJ
4R9N4600FJ
800
(N Frame) (L)
2R9N2800FL
3R9N3800FL
4R9N4800FL
V9-T1-54 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.3
Circuit Protection
Rotary Disconnect Switches
Front and Right Side Operation, continued
Note
1200 kA short-circuit rating.
Ampere Rating
(Frame)
(Fuse Class)
Number
of Poles
Switch
Body Only
Shaft Extensions
for External Handle
In (mm) (Choose One)
NFPA
79 Kit
Auxiliary
Contacts
(Choose One)
Auxiliary
Contacts
(Choose One)
Terminal
Shrouds
60 1
(K Frame) (J)
2R9K2060FJ 7.90 (200.0)
Pistol
SF200PH10X10
12.60 (320.0)
Pistol
SF320PH10X10
15.70 (400.0)
Pistol
SF400PH10X10
19.70 (500.0)
Pistol
SF500PH10X10
NFPA79JKL 1 AC
NO
AC1NOR9
1 AC
NC
AC1NCR9
1 AC
NO + NC
AC1NO1NCJ2N
2 AC
NO + NC
AC2NO2NCJ2N
1 AC
NO + NC
w/ TEST
AC1NO1NCJ2NT
2 AC
NO + NC
w/ TEST
AC2NO2NCJ2NT
Integral to switch
3R9K3060FJ
4R9K4060FJ
100
(K Frame) (J)
2R9K2100FJ
3R9K3100FJ
4R9K4100FJ
200
(L Frame) (J)
2R9L2200FJ TSR9L2
3R9L3200FJ TSR9L3
4R9L4200FJ TSR9L4
400
(M Frame) (J)
3R9M3400FJ TSR9M3
4R9M4400FJ TSR9M4
600
(N Frame) (J)
2R9N2600FJ 7.90 (200.0)
Pistol
SF200PH12X12
12.60 (320.0)
Pistol
SF320PH12X12
15.70 (400.0)
Pistol
SF400PH12X12
19.70 (500.0)
Pistol
SF500PH12X12
NFPA79N 1 AC
NO + NC
AC1NO1NCJ2N
2 AC
NO + NC
AC2NO2NCJ2N
TSR9N2
3R9N3600FJ TSR9N3
4R9N4600FJ TSR9N4
800
(N Frame) (L)
2R9N2800FL TSR9N2
3R9N3800FL TSR9N3
4R9N4800FL TSR9N4
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-55
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.3
Circuit Protection
Rotary Disconnect Switches
DC Rated Disconnects
Features
●Switching technology
●Up to 600 Vdc according to UL 98/CSA
●Up to 1000 Vdc according to IEC 947-3
R9 Series DC Rated Disconnects
Product Selection
Front Operation—Three- and Four-Pole
Notes
1Defeatable handle.
2Top (line side).
3Bottom (load side).
4Top or bottom (line or load side).
Ampere
Rating
Number
of Poles
Switch
Body Direct Handle
External Handle
(Choose One)
Shaft for External
Handle
In (mm) (Choose One)
Auxiliary Contacts
(Choose One)
Terminals
Shroud Terminal Lugs
Jumpers for
Connecting
Poles in Series
100 3 R9D3100UDC DHR9DE S2 Type
Black
1, 3R, 12 1
PHB2N12F
Red/Yellow
1, 3R, 12 1
PHR2N12F
Black
4, 4X 1
PHB2N4XF
Red/Yellow
4, 4X 1
PHR2N4XF
7.90 (200.0)
SF200PH10X10
12.60 (320.0)
SF320PH10X10
15.7 0 (400.0)
SF400PH10X10
C Type
1st Contact
NO+NC
AC1NONCDE
C Type
2nd Contact
NO+NC
AC2NONCDE
3P 2
TS3R9DT
3P 3
TS3R9DB
4P 4
TS4R9DTB
3P 4
LK3R9DL
4P 4
LK4R9DL
2 pieces
DCJUMPD2
3 pieces
DCJUMPD3
4R9D4100UDC
200 3 R9D3200UDC
4R9D4200UDC
400 3 R9E3400UDC 3P 2
TS3R9ET
3P 3
TS3R9EB
4P 4
TS4R9ETB
3P 4
LK3R9EM
4P 4
LK4R9EM
2 pieces
DCJUMPE2
3 pieces
DCJUMPE3
4R9E4400UDC
+++
Switch body Direct handle Switch body Shaft External handle
+++
V9-T1-56 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.3
Circuit Protection
Rotary Disconnect Switches
Manual Transfer Switches
Features
●Three load break positions (I, 0, II)
●On load switching
●Direct or external handle
●480 Vac total system
●600 Vac resistive load
Manual Transfer Switches
Product Identification
1External front handle
2Direct handle
3Shaft extension for external handle
4Pre-break ACs (standard on 600–1200A)
5Terminal Screen
5
4
1
3
2
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-57
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.3
Circuit Protection
Rotary Disconnect Switches
Product Selection
Manual Transfer Switches—UL 98 Standard 1
Notes
1All ratings, 100–1200A, are UL 98 listed. Switches are to be UL 1008 listed in 2011.
2Line or load (top or bottom); for both line and load, order two kits.
3Low level auxiliary contact—gold plated for minimal resistance—for PLC applications.
Ampere
Rating
Number
of Poles
Switch
Body Only 1
Direct
Handle (Black)
External Three-
Position Handle
(Choose One)
Shaft Extensions for
External Handle
In (mm)
(Choose One)
Bridging
Bars
Auxiliary
Contacts
Terminal
Screens 2
100 3 RMTS3100U DHMTSSL Size 2, Black
I–0–II
Type 4/4X
PHB2N4X3P
Size 2, Red
I–0–II
Type 4/4X
PHR2N4X3P
7.90 (200.6)
SF200PH10X10
12.60 (320.0)
SF320PH10X10
15.70 (398.8)
SF400PH10X10
3P
BB3P200
4P
BB4P200
NO/NC
AC1NONCMTS400
Low level
AC1NONCMTS400LL 3
3P
TS3MTS200TB
4P
TS4MTS200TB
4RMTS4100U
200 3 RMTS3200U
4RMTS4200U
400 3 RMTS3400U Size 3, Black
I–0–II
Type 4/4X
PHB3N4X3P
Size 3, Red
I–0–II
Type 4/4X
PHR3N4X3P
7.90 (200.6)
SF200PH15X12
12.60 (320.0)
SF320PH15X12
15.70 (398.8)
SF400PH15X12
3P
BB3P400
4P
BB4P400
3P
TS3MTS400TB
4P
TS4MTS400TB
4RMTS4400U
600 3 RMTS3600U DHMTSDL Size 4, Black
I–0–II
Type 4/4X
PHB4N4X3P
Size 4, Red
I–0–II
Type 4/4X
PHR4N4X3P
3P
BB3P600
4P
BB4P600
NO/NC
contact
standard
3P
TS3MTS600
4P
TS4MTS600
4RMTS4600U
800 3 RMTS3800U DHMTSDLM 3P
BB3P1200
4P
BB4P1200
3P
TS3MTS1200
4P
TS4MTS1200
4RMTS4800U
1200 3 RMTS31200U
4RMTS41200U
+++
Switch body Direct handle Switch body Shaft External handle
+++
Direct Operation External Operation
V9-T1-58 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.3
Circuit Protection
Rotary Disconnect Switches
Enclosed Rotary Disconnects
Features
●Padlockable in the OFF position (up to three padlocks) to meet
OSHA lockout requirements
●Available in 16–80A ratings
●600 Vac, three- and four-pole non-fusible device
●Rated for making and breaking loads
●Accepts auxiliary contacts; capability to signal PLC controllers
●Ground lug connection provided
●Possibility of adding one power pole and one auxiliary contact
●NEMA Type 1, 3R, 12, 4, 4X
●65kAIC rating when applied downstream from appropriate
fusing
Enclosed Rotary Disconnects
Provide users with the ability
to lock directly wired motor
loads in the OFF position to
comply with OSHA lockout/
tagout regulations. Also for
machine applications that
require compact, economical
disconnect switches.
Enclosed rotary disconnect
switches allow safe control
and safe disconnect of any
motor application.
Open rotary disconnects can
be found on Pages V9-T1-42
to V9-T1-57 and full
information in Volume 5,
Motor Control and Protection,
CA08100006E, Tab 34.
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-59
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.3
Circuit Protection
Rotary Disconnect Switches
Product Selection
Enclosed Rotary Non-Fusible
Accessories for Enclosed Rotary Disconnects 56
Notes
1For CSA listed switches, add prefix letter “C” to the front of the catalog number.
2NEMA Type 12 enclosures (16–80A) can be field modified to meet NEMA Type 3R rainproof requirements when a factory-provided drain hole is opened.
3YR suffix indicates Yellow cover with Red handle. For Gray cover with Black handle, replace “YR” with “GB.” For Gray cover with Red handle, replace “YR” with “GR.”
4cULus only.
5Ordered and shipped as separate components—not integral to enclosed device.
6Enclosed disconnects can accept one power pole, neutral or up to two auxiliary contacts (one mounted on either side of switch).
7Available 2011.
Contact the Safety Switch Flex Center (1-888-329-9272) for factory-installed accessories or other special modifications.
Ampere
Rating
Maximum Horsepower Ratings
NEMA 1 1
Enclosure
Indoor
NEMA 12 1 2
Enclosure
Dust-Tight/
Rainproof
NEMA 4X 1
Enclosure
Corrosion-Resistant,
Stainless Steel
NEMA 4X 1
Enclosure
Corrosion-Resistant,
Non-Metallic
NEMA 4X
Enclosure
Polycarbonate-
Non-MetallicThree-Phase AC
208V 240V 480V 600V Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
Three-Pole, 600 Vac
16 351010ER53016UG ER53016UD ER53016UW ER53016UX —
25 7-1/2 7-1/2 15 20 ER53025UG ER53025UD ER53025UW ER53025UX —
30 7-1/2 7-1/2 15 20 ER53030UG ER53030UD ER53030UW ER53030UX ER53030UPYR 34
40 7-1/2 7-1/2 20 25 ER53040UG ER53040UD ER53040UW ER53040UX —
60 15 15 30 30 ER53060UG ER53060UD ER53060UW ER53060UX ER53060UPYR 34
80 15 20 40 40 ER53080UG ER53080UD ER53080UW ER53080UX —
Four-Pole, 600 Vac
16 351010ER54016UG ER54016UD ER54016UW ER54016UX —
25 7-1/2 7-1/2 15 20 ER54025UG ER54025UD ER54025UW ER54025UX —
30 7-1/2 7-1/2 20 25 ER54030UG ER54030UD ER54030UW ER54030UX —
40 7-1/2 7-1/2 20 25 ER54040UG ER54040UD ER54040UW ER54040UX —
Disconnect
Ampere Rating
Switched
Fourth Pole
Unswitched
Neutral Pole
Auxiliary Contacts
(Choose One)
Terminal
Shrouds
16 S4PR516 UNMR5A 1NO + 1NC
AC1NONC
2NC
AC2NC
Single-pole
TS1R5A
Three-pole
TS3R5A
25 S4PR525
30 S4PR530
40 S4PR540
60 S4PR560 7UNMR5B 7Single-pole
TS1R5B
Three-pole
TS3R5B
80 S4PR580 7
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Motor Control and Protection
Soft Starters
Drives
Motor Protection and
Monitoring Relays
Contactors
Manual Motor Protectors
and Controllers
2.1 Contactors
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T2-2
Compact Definite Purpose Contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T2-3
50 mm C25 Definite Purpose Contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T2-5
XT IEC Miniature Contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T2-7
XT IEC Contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T2-9
2.2 Motor Protection and Monitoring Relays
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T2-15
D65 Series Monitoring Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T2-17
D65C Series Monitoring Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T2-19
XT IEC Miniature Overload Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T2-22
XTOB, XTOT Thermal Overload Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T2-23
XT Electronic Overload Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T2-26
Motor Insight Overload and Monitoring Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T2-32
2.3 Manual Motor Protectors and Controllers
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T2-36
XT IEC Manual Motor Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T2-37
XT IEC Manual and Combination Motor Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T2-41
2.4 Soft Starters
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T2-47
DS7 Soft Start Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T2-48
DS6 Soft Start Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T2-50
S611 Soft Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T2-51
S801+ Soft Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T2-55
S811+ Soft Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T2-58
2.5 Drives
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T2-65
M-Max Machinery Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T2-66
SVX9000 Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T2-68
For our complete product offering, see Volume 5—Motor Control and Protection, CA08100006E
and Volume 6—Solid-State Motor Control, CA08100007E.
V9-T2-2 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.1
Motor Control and Protection
Contactors
Product Overview
Contactors Selection Guide
For our complete product offering, see Volume 5—Motor Control and Protection, CA08100006E.
Description Definite Purpose Contactors XT IEC Miniature Contactors XT IEC Contactors
Page V9-T2-3 Page V9-T2-7 Page V9-T2-9
Ty p e
Definite purpose IEC IEC
Approvals
UL® Recognized, CSA®, CE, ARI, RoHS UL, IEC EN 60947, CE, CSA, RoHS UL, IEC EN 60947, CE, CSA, RoHS
Technical Data
Pole configurations 1P, 2P, 3P, 4P 3P, 4P 3P, 4P
Inductive Amp ratings To 360A To 8.8A (AC-3) To 1600A (AC-3)
Resistive Amp ratings To 360A To 20A (AC-1) To 3185A (AC-1)
Typical electrical operations To 300,000 To 750,000 To 1,400,000
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.1
Motor Control and Protection
Contactors
Compact Definite Purpose Contactors
Features
●Insulation voltage: 690V
●Current rated and hp/kW rated
●Magnet coil: Class F, 155°C
●Contact arc covers are standard on all contactors
Product Selection
Compact Definite Purpose Contactors—Open Type
Ampere Ratings 1
Magnet Coil Selection Notes
1Rating per pole.
2Replace underscore (_) in catalog
number with coil suffix letter from table
at left.
Inductive Full Load Resistive
Locked Rotor
240–277V Catalog Number 2
Single-Pole
30 40 150 C25ANB130_
40 50 240 C25ANB140_
Single-Pole with Shunt
30 40 150 C25CNB130_
40 50 240 C25CNB140_
Tw o - Po l e
25 35 150 C25BNB225_
30 40 150 C25BNB230_
40 50 240 C25BNB240_
AC Coil Voltage
50/60 Hz Coil Suffix
24 T
110–120 A
208–240 B
V9-T2-4 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.1
Motor Control and Protection
Contactors
Catalog Number Selection
Definite Purpose Contactors
Definite Purpose Contactors
Note
1Not available on 50A devices.
Type
25 = Non-reversing contactors
27 = Non-reversing starters
29 = Non-reversing starters
65 = Reversing contactors
Contactor Frame Size
A = Compact, single-pole
B = Compact, two-pole
C = Compact, single-pole w/shunt
D = 15–50A, two- and three-pole
E = 25–40A, four-pole
F = 60–75A, two- and three-pole
G = 90A, two- and three-pole
H = 120A, two- and three-pole
K = 200 and 300A, three-pole
L = 360A, three-pole
For Starters Only
C = Common control wiring
S = Separate control wiring
Enclosure Type
N = Open with metal mounting plate
R = Open with DIN rail mounting adapter
(two- and three-pole, 15–50A contactors only)
G = NEMA Type 1 Enclosed
Power Terminals
A = Binding head screw
B = Binding head screw and quick connect terminals (side-by-side)
C = Screw/pressure plate 1
D = Screw/pressure plate and quick connect terminals (side-by-side) 1
E = Box lugs (posidrive setscrew)
F = Box lugs (posidrive setscrew) and quick connect terminals (side-by-side)
G = Binding head screw and quick connect terminals (vertical in-line)
H = Screw/pressure plate and quick connect ZZ terminals (vertical in-line) 1
J = Box lugs (posidrive setscrew) and quick connect terminals (vertical in-line)
K = Box lugs (hex socket allen head setscrew)
L = Box lugs (hex socket allen head setscrew) and quick connect terminals (side-by-side)
M = Box lugs (hex socket allen head setscrew) and quick connect terminals (vertical in-line)
Number of Poles
1 = Single-pole
2 = Two-pole
3 = Three-pole
4 = Four-pole
Current Rating
15 = 15A
25 = 25A
30 = 30A
40 = 40A
50 =50A
60 =60A
75 =75A
90 =90A
120 = 120A
200 = 200A
300 = 300A
360 = 360A
Coil Selection
A = 110–120 Vac, 50/60 Hz
B = 208–240 Vac, 50/60 Hz
C = 440–480 Vac, 50/60 Hz
D = 550–600 Vac, 50/50 Hz
H = 277 Vac, 60 Hz
J = 220–240 Vac, 50/60 Hz
L = 380–415 Vac, 50 Hz
R = 12 Vac, 50/60 Hz
T = 24 Vac, 50/60 Hz
1R = 12 Vdc
1T = 24 Vdc
1W = 48 Vdc
1A = 120 Vdc
Auxiliary Contacts (Side Mount)
A = 1NO pressure plate
B = 1NC pressure plate
C = 1NO-1NC pressure plate
L = 1NO-1NC snap switch QC only
M = 2NO-2NC snap switch QC only
Model
C =Contactor
A = Three-phase starter
B = Single-phase starter
C2 5 D N A 2 1 5 A A
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-5
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.1
Motor Control and Protection
Contactors
50 mm C25 Definite Purpose Contactors
Features
●Contactors are dual-rated with inductive and resistive ratings,
as well as horsepower and kilowatt ratings
●Contactors rated 15–50A are available with DIN rail mount as
a factory installed option
●Magnet coil: Class B (C25E, F, G, H and K), 130°C
●Ambient temperature: 150°F (65°C) maximum
Product Selection
50 mm C25 Definite Purpose Contactors
C25 Contactors—Open Type
Magnet Coil Selection Notes
1Replace underscore (_) in catalog
number with magnet coil suffix from
table at left.
2Carton quantities including 20
individually packaged units are available
for two- and three-pole units through
60A inductive.
3Class H AC coils available as option for
15–50A contactor. Add 2 before AC coil
suffix letter.
4Available through 120A.
5104–120V 50/60 Hz for 60A, 75A and all
four-pole contactors (25–40A).
6Contactors with DC coils (only available
up to 75A) include an early break NC
auxiliary contact, C320KGD1.
Rating, Amperes
Inductive Full Load
Resistive
per Pole Line Voltage Locked Rotor
Maximum Motor Horsepower
Open Type with
Metal Mounting Plate
Open Type with
DIN Rail Adapter
Single-Phase Three-Phase Catalog Number 12 Catalog Number 12
15 20 230 90 2 3 C25DND315_ C25DRD315_
460 75 — 5
575 60 — 5
25 35 230 150 3 7-1/2 C25DND325_ C25DRD325_
460 125 — 10 C25END425_
575 100 — 10
30 40 230 180 5 10 C25DND330_ C25DRD330_
460 150 — 15 C25END430_
575 120 — 15
40 50 230 240 7-1/2 10 C25DNF340_ C25DRF3340_
460 200 — 20 C25ENF440_
575 160 — 20
50 65 230 300 10 15 C25DNJ350_ C25DRJ350_
460 250 — 30
575 200 — 30
60 75 230 360 10 20 C25FNF360_ —
460 300 — 40
575 240 — 40
75 90 230 450 15 20 C25FNF375_ —
460 375 — 50
575 300 — 50
Voltage
60 Hz 50 Hz
Coil
Suffix
AC 3
24 424 T
110–120 5110–120 5A
208–240 5208–240 B
DC 6
24 1T
V9-T2-6 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.1
Motor Control and Protection
Contactors
Reversing and Two-Speed Contactors—Open Type—Unwired, Mechanically Interlocked Only
Magnet Coil Selection Notes
1Replace underscore (_) with magnet coil
suffix from table at left.
2Class H AC coils available as option for
15–50A contactor. Add 2 before AC coil
suffix letter.
3104–120V 50/60 Hz for 60A, 75A.
4Available through 50A.
Rating, Amperes
Inductive Full Load
Resistive
per Pole
Line
Voltage
Locked
Rotor
Maximum Motor Horsepower
Open Type with
Metal Mounting Plate
Single-Phase Three-Phase Catalog Number 1
15 20 230 90 2 3 C65DND315_
460 75 — 5
575 60 — 5
25 35 230 150 3 7-1/2 C65DND325_
460 125 — 10
575 100 — 10
30 40 230 180 5 10 C65DND330_
460 150 — 15
575 120 — 15
40 50 230 240 7-1/2 10 C65DNF340_
460 200 — 20
575 160 — 20
50 65 230 300 10 15 C65DNJ350_
460 250 — 30
575 200 — 30
Voltage
60 Hz 50 Hz
Coil
Suffix 2
24 24 T
110–120 3110–120 3A
208–240 4208–240 B
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-7
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.1
Motor Control and Protection
Contactors
XT IEC Miniature Contactors
Features
●Reversing or non-reversing
●Three- and four-pole configurations
●Three-pole XTMC
●Four-pole XTMF
●Panel or DIN rail mounting
●IP20 finger and back-of-hand proof
●Direct mount with XTOM miniature overload relays
Catalog Number Selection
XT IEC Miniature Contactors
Miniature Contactors
Product Selection
Full Voltage Non-Reversing Miniature Contactors
Magnet Coil Suffix IEC Utilization Categories
AC-1: Non-inductive or
slightly inductive loads.
AC-3: Squirrel cage motors—
starting, switching of motors
during running.
AC-4: Squirrel cage motors—
starting, plugging, inching.
Notes
1Underscore (_) indicates magnet coil
suffix required. See table at left.
2With DC operation: Integrated diode
resistor combination, coil rating 2.6W.
Operational
Current AC-3
Amp Rating
380/400V
Conventional
Free Air Thermal
Current AC-1
at 50°C
Maximum kW Ratings AC-3 Maximum Three-Phase Motor Ratings
Number
of Power
Poles
Auxiliary
Contacts
Catalog Number—
Screw Terminals 1
Three-Phase Motors, 50–60 Hz Single-Phase hp Ratings Three-Phase hp Ratings
220–240V 380–400V 550V 660/690V 115V 200V 230V 200V 230V 460V 575V
6.6 20 1.5 3 3 3 1/4 3/4 1 1-1/2 2 3 3 3 1NO XTMC6A10_
6.6 20 1.5 3 3 3 1/4 3/4 1 1-1/2 2 3 3 3 1NC XTMC6A01_
8.8 20 2.2 4 44 1/21 1-1/223553 1NO XTMC9A10_
8.8 20 2.2 4 44 1/21 1-1/223553 1NC XTMC9A01_
8.8 20 2.2 4 44 1/21 1-1/223554 — XTMF9A00_
Type
MC = Three-pole FVNR
mini IEC contactor
Designation
XT = XT IEC power control
Current Rating, AC-3
XTMC
6 = 6.6A 9 = 8.8A
Integral
Auxiliary Contact
01 = 1NC 10 = 1NO
Coil Codes
A= 110V 50 Hz, 120V 60 Hz
B= 220V 50 Hz, 240V 60 Hz
T= 24V 50/60 Hz
TD = 24 Vdc
Frame Size
A = 45 mm mini
XT MC 6 A 10 A
Coil Voltage Suffix Code
110V 50 Hz, 120V 60 Hz A
220V 50 Hz, 240V 60 Hz B
24V 50/60 Hz T
24 Vdc TD 2
415V 50 Hz, 480V 60 Hz C
550V 50 Hz, 600V 60 Hz D
208V 60 Hz E
V9-T2-8 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.1
Motor Control and Protection
Contactors
Accessories
Front Mount Auxiliary Contacts 1
XT IEC Miniature Contactors
Notes
1For two contactors with AC or DC operated magnet system that are horizontally or vertically
mounted, the distance between contactors is 0 mm, and the mechanical lifespan is 2.5 x 106
operations. The following control cables are integrated as part of the electrical interlock:
K1M: A1—K2M: 21; K1M: 21—K2M: A1.
2Reversing link kit does not include mechanical interlock.
30 mm distance between contactors.
Conventional Free
Air Thermal Current,
Ith = Ie, AC-1 in Amps
Contact
Configuration
Contact
Sequence
Package
Qty.
Catalog Number—
Screw Terminals
10 1NO-1NC 5 XTMCXFA11
10 2NO-2NC 5 XTMCXFA22
10 3NO-1NC 5 XTMCXFA31
10 4NO 5 XTMCXFA40
Description
Package
Qty. Catalog Number
Mechanical interlock 5 XTMCXML
Reversing link kit—main current wiring for reversing
contactors and starters
1XTMCXRL 2
Connector—for mechanically arranging contactors and
timing relays in combinations
50 XTMCXCN 3
54
53 61
62
54
53 61
62
71
72
83
84
54
53 61
62
73
74
83
84
54
63 73
64 74
53 83
84
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-9
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.1
Motor Control and Protection
Contactors
XT IEC Contactors
Features
●Reversing or non-reversing contactors
●AC-3 contactor ratings to 1600A and AC-1 contactor ratings to
2000A
●Panel or DIN rail mounting to 65A
●IP20 finger and back-of-hand proof
●Built-in NO or NC auxiliary contacts to 32A
●Built-in surge suppression on DC coils XTCE Frame B-G and
AC or DC coils on XTCE Frame L-R
●Can be used with XT or C396 overload relays
●Can be used with XTPR MMPs for manual motor controllers
or UL508 Type F combination motor controllers
Catalog Number Selection
XT IEC Contactors
Contactors
Type
CE = Three-pole FVNR IEC contactor
CS = Three-pole FVNR S Series IEC contactor
Designation
XT = XT line of IEC control
Frame Size Designation
B=45 mm
C=45 mm
D=55 mm
F=90 mm
G=90 mm
H= 140 mm
L= 140 mm
M= 160 mm
N= 250 mm
P= 260 mm
R= 515 mm
Built-In Auxiliary Contact
01 =1NC
10 =1NO
00 = 0NO–0NC
22 = 2NO–2NC
Coil Codes
See Page V9-T2-12.
Current Ratings, AC-3
007 = 7A
009 = 9A
012 = 12A
015 = 15A
018 = 18A
025 = 25A
032 = 32A
040 = 40A
050 = 50A
065 = 65A
072 = 72A
080 = 80A
095 = 95A
115 = 115A
150 = 150A
170 = 170A
185 = 185A
225 = 225A
250 = 250A
300 = 300A
400 = 400A
500 = 500A
570 = 570A
580 = 580A
650 = 650A
750 = 750A
820 = 820A
C10 = 1000A
C14 = 1400A, AC-1
C16 = 1600A, AC-3
C20 = 2000A, AC-1
XT CE 007 B 01 A
V9-T2-10 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.1
Motor Control and Protection
Contactors
Product Selection
Full Voltage Non-Reversing Three-Pole Contactors, Frames B–G
Notes
The 7–32A XTCE contactors have positively driven contacts between the integrated auxiliary contact and the auxiliary contact module as well as within
the auxiliary contact modules.
The 40–65A XTCE contactors have positively driven contacts within the auxiliary contact module. Six auxiliary contacts are possible with a combination
of side mounted and front mount auxiliary contacts.
DC operated contactors (Frames B–G, 7–150A) have a built-in suppressor circuit.
Frames B–C contactors with 1NC built-in auxiliary are mirror contacts (XTCE…B01_–XTCE…C01_).
1Underscore (_) indicates magnet coil suffix required. See Page V9-T2-12.
2For spring cage terminals, insert C after the fourth digit of the catalog number. Example: XTCE C 007B10A.
For 7–12A XTCEC contactors, the power, auxiliary and coil terminals are spring cage.
For 18–32A XTCEC contactors, the auxiliary and coil terminals are spring cage.
For 40–150A XTCEC contactors, the coil terminals only are spring cage.
3For electrical life contactor application data, see Volume 5—Motor Control and Protection, CA08100006E, Tab 27.
4For 180–225A, use 2 x 3/0 AWG wire.
UL/CSA Ratings IEC Ratings
Auxiliary
Contacts
Catalog Number—
Screw Terminals 12
UL General
Purpose Amp
Rating
Single-Phase hp Ratings Three-Phase hp Ratings AC-3
Ie (A)
AC-1
(40°C)
Ie = Ith (A)
Maximum kW Ratings AC-3
Three-Phase Motors 50–60 Hz
115V 200V 230V 200V 230V 460V 575V 220/230V 380/400V 415V 660/690V
Frame B
20 1/43/411-1/22357 22 2.2 3 43.5 1NOXTCE007B10_
20 1/43/411-1/22357 22 2.2 3 43.5 1NCXTCE007B01_
20 1/211-1/23357-1/29 22 2.5 4 5.54.5 1NOXTCE009B10_
20 1/211-1/23357-1/29 22 2.5 4 5.54.5 1NCXTCE009B01_
20 1223310
310 12 22 3.5 5.5 7 6.5 1NO XTCE012B10_
20 1223310
310 12 22 3.5 5.5 7 6.5 1NC XTCE012B01_
20 1235510
310 15.5 22 4 7.5 8 7 1NO XTCE015B10_
20 1235510
310 15.5 22 4 7.5 8 7 1NC XTCE015B01_
Frame C
40 2235510
315 18 40 5 7.5 10 11 1NO XTCE018C10_
40 2235510
315 18 40 5 7.5 10 11 1NC XTCE018C01_
40 2357-1/21015202545 7.5 11 14.514 1NOXTCE025C10_
40 2357-1/21015202545 7.5 11 14.514 1NCXTCE025C01_
40 355101020253245 10 15 1817 1NOXTCE032C10_
40 355101020253245 10 15 1817 1NCXTCE032C01_
Frame D
63 3 5 7-1/2 10 15 30 40 40 60 12.5 18.5 24 23 — XTCE040D00_
80 3 7-1/2 10 15 20 40 50 50 80 15.5 22 30 30 — XTCE050D00_
88 5 10152025506065 98 20 30 3935 — XTCE065D00_
88 5 10152025506072 98 22 37 4135 — XTCE072D00_
Frame F
125 7-1/2 15 15 25 30 60 75 80 110 25 37 48 63 — XTCE080F00_
125 7-1/2 15 15 25 40 75 75 95 130 30 45 57 75 — XTCE095F00_
Frame G
160 1025254050100100115160 37 55 7090 — XTCE115G00_
180 1025304060125125150190 48 75 9196 — XTCE150G00_
225 410 25 30 40 60 125 125 170 225 52 90 100 96 — XTCE170G00_
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-11
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.1
Motor Control and Protection
Contactors
Full Voltage Non-Reversing Three-Pole Contactors, Frames H–R
Contactor Application Data
Notes
AC and DC operated contactors have a built-in suppressor circuit (Frames L–R, 185–2000A).
1For 185–500A contactors at 660/690V or 1000V: Do not reverse directly.
2Underscore (_) indicates magnet coil suffix required. See Page V9-T2-12.
3When operating the 580–2000A XTCE contactors with frequency inverters, the suppressor on
the load side must be removed. The load side suppressor must also be removed when
performing a high-voltage test—see Pub51204, Pub51209.
Full Voltage Non-Reversing Three-Pole Contactors—
Contact Sequence (Circuit Symbols), Standard Offering
UL/CSA Ratings IEC Ratings
Auxiliary
Contacts Catalog Number 2
UL General
Purpose Amp
Rating
Three-Phase hp Ratings AC-3
Ie (A)
AC-1
(40°C)
Ie = Ith (A)
Maximum kW Ratings AC-3
Three-Phase Motors 50–60 Hz
200V 230V 460V 575V 220/230V 380/400V 415V 660/690V 11000V 1
Frame H—Electronic Coil
250 50 60 125 150 185 337 55 90 — 140 108 2NO-2NC XTCE185H22_
250 60 75 150 200 225 386 70 110 — 215 108 2NO-2NC XTCE225H22_
Frame L—Standard Coil (110/120V, 230/240 Vac Coil Only)
300 75 100 200 250 250 429 75 132 148 240 108 2NO-2NC XTCS250L22_
350 100 125 250 300 300 490 90 160 — 195 132 2NO-2NC XTCS300L22_
Frame L—Electronic Coil
300 75 100 200 250 250 429 75 132 148 240 108 2NO-2NC XTCE250L22_
350 100 125 250 300 300 490 90 160 — 195 132 2NO-2NC XTCE300L22_
Frame M—Standard Coil (110/120V, 230/240 Vac Coil Only)
450 125 150 300 400 400 612 125 200 240 344 132 2NO-2NC XTCS400M22_
550 150 200 400 500 500 857 155 250 300 344 132 2NO-2NC XTCS500M22_
Frame M—Electronic Coil
450 125 150 300 400 400 612 125 200 240 344 132 2NO-2NC XTCE400M22_
550 150 200 400 500 500 857 155 250 300 344 132 2NO-2NC XTCE500M22_
Frame N—Electronic Coil
630 200 200 400 600 580 980 185 315 348 560 600 2NO-2NC XTCE580N22_ 3
700 200 250 500 600 650 1041 205 355 390 630 600 2NO-2NC XTCE650N22_ 3
800 250 300 600 700 750 1102 240 400 455 720 800 2NO-2NC XTCE750N22_ 3
850 290 350 700 860 820 1225 260 450 500 750 800 2NO-2NC XTCE820N22_ 3
1100 350 420 850 980 1000 1225 315 560 610 1000 1000 2NO-2NC XTCEC10N22_ 3
Frame P—Electronic Coil
1400 —————1714 — — —— — 2NO-2NCXTCEC14P22_ 3
Frame R—Electronic Coil
1600 560 640 1200 1300 1600 2200 500 900 900 1600 1700 2NO-2NC XTCEC16R22_ 3
2000 —————2450 — — —— — 2NO-2NCXTCEC20R22_ 3
Catalog Prefix
Electrical Life (Operations) for 10 hp,
480V (14.2A) Applications
XTCE012B 1 million
XTCE015B 1.2 million
XTCE018C 2 million
Contactor Frame Auxiliary Contacts Contact Sequence
B–C 1NO
B–C 1NC
D–G —
L–R 2NO-2NC
2
35
46
A1
A2
113
14
2
35
46
A1
A2
121
22
2
35
46
A1
A2
1
2
3513 21 31
46
14 22 32
43
44
A1
A2
1
V9-T2-12 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.1
Motor Control and Protection
Contactors
Magnet Coil Suffix
XTCR Reversing Contactor Components
Coil Voltage Suffix Code
Frames B–F
110V 50 Hz, 120V 60 Hz A
220V 50 Hz, 240V 60 Hz B
24V 50/60 Hz T
24 Vdc TD
415V 50 Hz, 480V 60 Hz C
550V 50 Hz, 600V 60 Hz D
208V 60 Hz E
Frame G
100–120V 50/60 Hz A
190–240V 50/60 Hz B
24V 50/60 Hz T
24–27 Vdc TD
480–500V 50/60 Hz C
Coil Voltage Suffix Code
Frame H
100–120V 50/60 Hz A
190–240V 50/60 Hz B
480–500V 50/60 Hz C
24–27 Vdc TD
Frames L–M, S-Series
110–120V 50/60 Hz A
220–240V 50/60 Hz B
Frame N
110–250V 40–60 Hz/DC A
250–500V 40–60 Hz C
24–48 Vdc TD
Frames P–R
220–250V 50–60 Hz/DC B
Qty.FrameBCDF G
2 Contactor XTCE…B01_ XTCE…B01_ XTCE…D00_ XTCE…F00_ XTCE…G00_
2 Auxiliary contact XTCEXFAC20 XTCEXFAC20 XTCEXFBG11 XTCEXFBG11 XTCEXFBG11
1 Mechanical interlock XTCEXMLB XTCEXMLC XTCEXMLD XTCEXMLG XTCEXMLG
1 Reversing link kit XTCEXRLB XTCEXRLC XTCEXRLD XTCEXRLG XTCEXRLG
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-13
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.1
Motor Control and Protection
Contactors
Accessories
Auxiliary Contacts—Frames B–G
Notes
Interlocked opposing contacts, to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Annex L (positively driven), within the auxiliary contact modules (not NO
[early make] and NC [late break] contacts) and for the built-in auxiliary contacts of the XTCE007_–XTCE032_ Auxiliary break
contact can be used as mirror contact to IEC/EN 60947-4-1 Annex F (not NC [late break] contact). No auxiliary contacts can
be fitted between two contactors.
1Frames B–C cannot use both a side AND a top mount auxiliary contact at the same time.
2Can be mounted to the left side of contactor only.
Cannot be used in combination with front (top) mount auxiliary contacts or mechanical interlocks.
3For Frame D, six auxiliary contacts maximum (can be a combination of side and top mount units).
Conventional Thermal
Current, Open at 60°C
Ith = Ie, AC-1 in Amps Poles
Contact
Configuration Circuit Symbol Pkg. Qty.
Catalog Number—
Screw Terminals
Frames B–C—Front (Top) Mount 1
16 2 2NO 5 XTCEXFAC20
16 2 1NO-1NC 5 XTCEXFAC11
16 4 4NO 5 XTCEXFAC40
16 4 2NO-2NC 5 XTCEXFAC22
Frame B—Side Mount 12
16 1 1NO 1 XTCEXSAB10
16 1 1NC 1 XTCEXSAB01
Frame C—Side Mount 1
10 2 1NO-1NC 1 XTCEXSCC11 1
Frames D–G 3
16 2 2NO 5 XTCEXFBG20
16 2 1NO-1NC 5 XTCEXFBG11
16 4 4NO-0NC 5 XTCEXFBG40
16 4 2NO-2NC 5 XTCEXFBG22
Frames B–C
Frame B
Frame C
Frames D–G
54
63
64
53
54
53 61
62
54
63 73
64 74
53 83
84
54
53 61
62
71
72
83
84
53
54
51
52
14
13 23
24
33
34
43
44
14 24
13 23
14
13 21
22
14
13 23
24
33
34
43
44
14
13 21
22
31
32
43
44
V9-T2-14 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.1
Motor Control and Protection
Contactors
Side Mount Auxiliary Contacts—Frames D–R, 40–2000A
Mechanical Interlock 3
Reversing Link Kits
Notes
1For Frame D, six auxiliary contacts maximum (can be a combination of side and top mount units).
2For Frames F–R, eight auxiliary contacts maximum (can be a combination of side and top mount units).
3For two contactors with AC or DC operated magnet system which are horizontally or vertically mounted. For B–G frames,
mechanical lifespan is 2.5 x 106 operations and the distance between contactors is 0 mm. For L–N frames, mechanical
lifespan is 5 x 106 operations and no auxiliary contact can be mounted between the mechanical interlock and the
contactor—the distance between contactors is 15 mm.
4XTCEXMLG, XTCEXMLN and XTCEXMLNM consist of an interlock element and mounting plate.
5Also includes interlocking bridge (XTCEXLBB). The following control cables are integrated for electrical interlock:
K1M: A1–K2M: 21; K1M: 21–K2M: A1; K1M: A2–K2M: A2.
Conventional Free Air
Thermal Current,
Ith = Ie, AC-1 in Amps Poles
Contact
Configuration Circuit Symbol Pkg. Qty.
Catalog Number—
Screw Terminals
Frame D–R 12
10 2 1NO-1NC 1 XTCEXSBN11
Frames H–R (Screw Mount) 2
10 2 1NO-1NC 1 XTCEXSBR11
For Use with … Package Qty. Catalog Number
XTCE007B–XTCE015B, XTCF020B 5 XTCEXMLB
XTCE018C–XTCE032C 1 XTCEXMLC
XTCF032C–XTCF045C
XTCE040D–XTCE072D
XTCF063D–XTCF080D 1 XTCEXMLD
XTCE080F–XTCE170G 1 XTCEXMLG 4
XTCF125G–XTCF200G
XTCE185H–XTCE570M 1 XTCEXMLM
XTCE580N–XTCEC10N 1 XTCEXMLN 4
XTCE500M–XTCE570M with XTCE500N–XTCEC10N 1 XTCEXMLNM 4
For Use with … Package Qty. Catalog Number
XTCE007B–XTCE015B 1 XTCEXRLB 5
XTCE018C–XTCE032C 1 XTCEXRLC
XTCE040D–XTCE065D 1 XTCEXRLD
XTCE080F–XTCE150G 1 XTCEXRLG
Frames D–R
Frames H–R
13
44
14
43
21
32
31
22
13
44
14
43
21
32
31
22
XTCEXMLB
XTCEXMLM
XTCEXMLC
Reversing Link Kits
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-15
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Motor Control and Protection
Motor Protection and Monitoring Relays
Product Overview
Monitoring Relays Selection Guide
For our complete product offering, see Volume 5—Motor Control and Protection, CA08100006E.
Description D65 Series D65C Series
Page V9-T2-17 Page V9-T2-19
Approvals
cULus, CE RoHS, cURus, cULus, CE
Features
Various combinations of protection available
Compact cases for easy mounting
LED indicators for quick troubleshooting
Monitors AC single-phase currents from 0.1–10 A
External CT can be used to extend ranges
LED indicates output relay status
Choice of fixed or user-adjustable settings
Contact Data
Configuration SPDT or DPDT —
Maximum allowable load 10A Less than 5 VA
Material — —
Resistance — —
Dielectric strength 2000V —
Coil Data
AC 24–480 Vac —
DC 24–120 Vdc —
Power
VA (Vac) 5 VA —
Watts (Vdc) — —
General Data
Ambient temperature
Operational –4° to 149°F (–20° to 65°C) –20º to 131ºF (–28º to 55ºC)
Maximum pick-up <= 500 milliseconds Overcurrent: Adjustable throughout current range
monitored
Undercurrent: Fixed at 5% above adjustable drop-out
setting
Maximum release <= 500 milliseconds Overcurrent: Fixed at 95% of pick-up setting for D65CE;
adjustable from 50–95% of pick-up setting for D65CEK
Undercurrent: Adjustable throughout current range
monitored
Life
Mechanical operations 10 million 10 million
Electrical operations 100,000 100,000
V9-T2-16 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Motor Control and Protection
Motor Protection and Monitoring Relays
Overload Relays Selection Guide
For our complete product offering, see Volume 5—Motor Control and Protection, CA08100006E.
Description
XT IEC Miniature
Overload Relays
XTOB, XTOT Thermal
Overload Relays
XT Electronic
Overload Relays
Motor Insight Overload
and Monitoring Relays
Page V9-T2-22 Page V9-T2-23 Page V9-T2-26 Page V9-T2-32
Relay type Thermal bi-metal Thermal bi-metal Electronic Electronic
FLA range 0.1–12A 0.1–630A 0.1–1500A 1–540A
FLA max.:min. ratio Approx. 1.5:1 Approx. 1.5:1 5:1 18:1 and 9:1
Trip class 10 10 Selectable 10A/10/20/30 5–30, stepped by 1’s
Reset type Selectable manual/automatic Selectable manual/automatic Selectable manual/automatic/remote Selectable manual/automatic/remote
Direct connect to XT contactor Yes, XTMC Yes, XTCE Yes, XTCE —
Direct connect to DP contactor — — Yes —
Standalone mounting — Panel or DIN Panel or DIN Panel
Thermal overload protection Yes Yes Yes Yes, programmable
Jam — — — Yes, programmable
Current unbalance protection — — Yes, selectable Yes, programmable
Single-phasing — — Yes, fixed level Yes, fixed on or off
Ground fault — — Yes, fixed Yes, programmable
Phase reversal — — — Yes, programmable
Undercurrent — — — Yes, programmable
Overcurrent — — — —
Low power/high power — — — Yes, programmable
Overvoltage/undervoltage — — — Yes, programmable
Voltage unbalance — — — Yes, programmable
Current per phase and average rms — — — Yes
Current unbalance percent — — Yes Yes
Ground fault current — — Yes Yes
Voltage per phase and average rms — — — Yes
Voltage unbalance percent — — — Yes
Power/power factor — — — Yes
Thermal capacity — — Yes Yes
Frequency — — Yes Yes
Motor run hours — — — Yes
Motor starts count — — — Yes
Time to restart after fault — — — Yes
Overload status — — Yes Yes
Programmable reset timers/attempts — — — Yes
Programmable trip delays — — — Yes
Programmable auxiliary contact — — — Yes (120 Vac control-power version)
Communications with I/O — — Yes
(
Modbus
®
RTU, DeviceNet™, PROFIBUS
®
,
Modbus TCP, EtherNet/IP)
Yes
(
Modbus
RTU, DeviceNet, PROFIBUS
,
Modbus TCP, EtherNet/IP)
Remote display — — — Yes (NEMA 1, 12, and 3R)
Lockable user interface or
tamperproof
——Yes Yes
Alarm no-trip mode — — — Yes, for GF and line faults
Diagnostics — — — Yes, 10 fault queue
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-17
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Motor Control and Protection
Motor Protection and Monitoring Relays
Catalog Number Selection
D65 Series Monitoring Relays
D65 Series
D65 Series Full-Featured Voltage/Phase Monitor
Features
●Full-featured voltage/phase
monitoring relays
●Undervoltage, overvoltage,
phase imbalance, phase
loss (single-phasing),
phase reversal
●Universal voltage range of
208–480V provides the
flexibility to cover a variety
of applications; 120V and
600V units also available
●Automatic or manual reset
after the fault condition is
corrected
●User-adjustable settings
include nominal voltage,
percent phase imbalance,
undervoltage drop-out,
time delay on undervoltage
and time delay on restart
after fault
Product Selection
D65VML Series
D65 Series Phase Reversal Monitoring Relays
Features
●Protects against phase
reversal
●One version works on
208–480V three-phase
systems
●10A SPDT output contacts
Product Selection
D65VMC Series
Notes
1Requires a 600V rated socket when used on system voltages greater than 300V.
2The D3PA2 socket is rated 10A, 600V.
D65 VML S 120
Type
D65 = D65 Series
Voltage
120 = 120V
208 = 208V
240 = 240V
400 = 400V
480 = 240–480V
600 = 600V
Function
VML = Full-featured voltage/phase monitor
PLR = Phase loss/reversal
VMC = Phase reversal
PAR = Phase loss/reverse/undervoltage
Monitoring
S=Surface mount
P or blank = Plug-in octal
Style Operating Voltage, 50/60 Hz Catalog Number
Surface-mount (DIN rail or panel) 120V D65VMLS120
208–480V D65VMLS480
600V D65VMLS600
Plug-in (DIN rail) 120V D65VMLP120
208–480V D65VMLP480 1
8-pin socket — D3PA2 2
8-pin IP20 rated socket — D3PA6
D65VML_
Style Nominal Voltage, 50/60 Hz Catalog Number
Plug-in 120V D65VMC120
208–480V D65VMC480 1
D65VMC_
V9-T2-18 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Motor Control and Protection
Motor Protection and Monitoring Relays
D65 Series Phase Loss and Reversal Monitoring Relays
Features
●Protects against phase loss
and phase reversal
●LED indicates both normal
and fault conditions
●10A SPDT output contacts
Product Selection
D65PLR Series
D65 Series Phase Loss, Reversal and Undervoltage
Features
●Protects against phase
loss, phase reversal and
undervoltage
●Undervoltage setting is
adjustable from 75–95% of
nominal
●LED indicates both normal
and fault conditions
●10A SPDT output contacts
Product Selection
D65PAR Series
Note
1Requires a 600V rated socket when used on system voltages greater than 300V.
Style Nominal Voltage, 50/60 Hz Catalog Number
Plug-in 120V D65PLR120
208V D65PLR208
240V D65PLR240
400V D65PLR400 1
480V D65PLR480 1
D65PLR_
Style Nominal Voltage, 60 Hz Undervoltage Range Catalog Number
Plug-in 120V 90–115V D65PAR120
208V 156–198V D65PAR208
240V 180–230V D65PAR240
400V 300–380V D65PAR400 1
480V 360–460V D65PAR480 1
D65PAR_
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-19
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Motor Control and Protection
Motor Protection and Monitoring Relays
Catalog Number Selection
D65C Series Monitoring Relays
D65C Series
D65CE Standard Current Monitoring Relays
Features
●Monitors AC single-phase
currents
●Three separate current
monitoring ranges covering
0.1–10 amperes
●External CT can be used to
extend ranges
●Fixed 100 ms pick-up and
drop-out time delay
Product Selection
D65CE Series
D65C E K 2 C10 T
Type
D65C = Current monitors Function
E= Standard
H= Overcurrent
L= Undercurrent
Drop-Out Setting
K= Adjustable
Blank =Fixed
Current Range
C01 =0.1–1A
C5 =0.5–5A
C10 = 1–10A
Number of Poles
1=1 PDT
2=2 PDT
Voltage
T= 24 Vac
A= 120 Vac
Pick-Up Setting Drop-Out Setting Input Voltage
Current Range
Monitored Catalog Number
SPDT—8-Pin Plug-In
Adjustable Fixed
(at 95% of pick-up)
24 Vac 0.1–1A D65CE1C01T
0.5–5A D65CE1C5T
1–10A D65CE1C10T
120 Vac 0.1–1A D65CE1C01A
0.5–5A D65CE1C5A
1–10A D65CE1C10A
Adjustable
(50–95% of pick-up)
24 Vac 0.1–1A D65CEK1C01T
0.5–5A D65CEK1C5T
1–10A D65CEK1C10T
120 Vac 0.1–1A D65CEK1C01A
0.5–5A D65CEK1C5A
1–10A D65CEK1C10A
DPDT—11-Pin Plug-In
Adjustable Fixed
(at 95% of pick-up)
24 Vac 0.1–1A D65CE2C01T
0.5–5A D65CE2C5T
1–10A D65CE2C10T
120 Vac 0.1–1A D65CE2C01A
0.5–5A D65CE2C5A
1–10A D65CE2C10A
Adjustable
(50–95% of pick-up)
24 Vac 0.1–1A D65CEK2C01T
0.5–5A D65CEK2C5T
1–10A D65CEK2C10T
120 Vac 0.1–1A D65CEK2C01A
0.5–5A D65CEK2C5A
1–10A D65CEK2C10A
D65CE_
V9-T2-20 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Motor Control and Protection
Motor Protection and Monitoring Relays
D65CH Series, Overcurrent Monitors
Features
●Monitors AC single-phase
currents for overcurrent
conditions
●Three separate current
monitoring ranges covering
0.1–10 amperes
●External CT can be used to
extend ranges
●Adjustable pick-up setting
with either fixed or
adjustable drop-out setting
●Adjustable time delay of
0.1–10 seconds on pick-up
●Fixed 100 ms time delay
on drop-out
●LED indicates output
Product Selection
D65CH Series
Pick-Up Setting Drop-Out Setting Input Voltage
Current Range
Monitored Catalog Number
SPDT—8-Pin Plug-In
Adjustable Fixed
(at 95% of pick-up)
24 Vac 0.1–1A D65CH1C1T
0.5–5A D65CH1C5T
1–10A D65CH1C10T
120 Vac 0.1–1A D65CH1C1A
0.5–5A D65CH1C5A
1–10A D65CH1C10A
Adjustable
(50–95% of pick-up)
24 Vac 0.1–1A D65CHK1C1T
0.5–5A D65CHK1C5T
1–10A D65CHK1C10T
120 Vac 0.1–1A D65CHK1C1A
0.5–5A D65CHK1C5A
1–10A D65CHK1C10A
DPDT—11-Pin Plug-In
Adjustable Fixed
(at 95% of pick-up)
24 Vac 0.1–1A D65CH2C1T
0.5–5A D65CH2C5T
1–10A D65CH2C10T
120 Vac 0.1–1A D65CH2C1A
0.5–5A D65CH2C5A
1–10A D65CH2C10A
Adjustable
(50–95% of pick-up)
24 Vac 0.1–1A D65CHK2C1T
0.5–5A D65CHK2C5T
1–10A D65CHK2C10T
120 Vac 0.1–1A D65CHK2C1A
0.5–5A D65CHK2C5A
1–10A D65CHK2C10A
D65CH_
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-21
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Motor Control and Protection
Motor Protection and Monitoring Relays
D65CL Series, Undercurrent Monitoring Relays
Features
●Monitors AC single-phase
currents for undercurrent
conditions
●Three separate current
monitoring ranges covering
0.1–10 amperes
●External CT can be used to
extend ranges
●Adjustable drop-out setting
with fixed pick-up setting
●Adjustable time delay
of 0.1–10 seconds on
drop-out
●Fixed 100 ms time delay
on pick-up
Product Selection
D65CL Series
Pick-Up Setting Drop-Out Setting Input Voltage
Current Range
Monitored Catalog Number
SPDT—8-Pin Plug-In
Adjustable Fixed
(at 5% of drop-out)
24 Vac 0.1–1A D65CL1C1T
0.5–5A D65CL1C5T
1–10A D65CL1C10T
120 Vac 0.1–1A D65CL1C1A
0.5–5A D65CL1C5A
1–10A D65CL1C10A
SPDT—11-Pin Plug-In
Adjustable Fixed
(at 5% of drop-out)
24 Vac 0.1–1A D65CL2C1T
0.5–5A D65CL2C5T
1–10A D65CL210T
120 Vac 0.1–1A D65CL2C1A
0.5–5A D65CL2C5A
1–10A D65CL2C10A
D65CL_
V9-T2-22 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Motor Control and Protection
Motor Protection and Monitoring Relays
XT IEC Miniature Overload Relays
Features
●Trip class 10A
●Ambient temperature compensated –5° to 50°C
(23° to 122°F)
●Selectable manual/automatic reset
●1NO-1NC auxiliary contact as standard
●Direct mount with XTMC contactors
Catalog Number Selection
XT IEC Miniature Overload Relays
Miniature Overload Relays
Product Selection
Miniature Overload Relays 12
Notes
1Short-circuit protection: Observe the maximum permissible fuse of the contactor with direct device mounting. See MN03402002E for more information.
2When fitted directly to the contactor, a clearance of at least 5 mm is required between the overload relays.
Overload
Release It
Trip
Class
Contact
Sequence
Contact
Configuration
Short Circuit Protection (A)
Catalog Number
Type 1 Coordination,
gG/gL
Type 2 Coordination,
gG/gL
Circuit
Breaker
CEC/NEC
Fuse
0.1–0.16A 10A 1NO-1NC 20 0.5 15 — XTOMP16AC1
0.16–0.24A 20 1 15 — XTOMP24AC1
0.24–0.4A 20 2 15 — XTOMP40AC1
0.4–0.6A 20 2 15 — XTOMP60AC1
0.6–1A 20 4 15 3 XTOM001AC1
1–1.6A 20 6 15 6 XTOM1P6AC1
1.6–2.4A 20 6 15 6 XTOM2P4AC1
2.4–4A 20 10 15 15 XTOM004AC1
4–6A 20 10 15 20 XTOM006AC1
6–9A 20 10 15 35 XTOM009AC1
9–12A — — — 45 XTOM012AC1
Type
OM = Mini overload relay
Trip Class
C1 = Class 10A
Designation
XT = XT IEC power control Frame Size
A = 45 mm mini
XT OM P16 A C1
Overload Release
P16 = 0.1–0.16A
P24 = 0.16–0.24A
P40 = 0.24–0.4A
P60 = 0.4–0.6A
001 =0.6–1A
1P6 = 1–1.6A
2P4 = 1.6–2.4A
004 = 2.4–4A
006 = 4–6A
009 = 6–9A
012 = 9–12A
6429896
97 95
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-23
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Motor Control and Protection
Motor Protection and Monitoring Relays
XTOB, XTOT Thermal Overload Relays
Features
●Direct mount to XT contactors or separate mount
●Class 10A
●Up to 630A
Catalog Number Selection
XTOB, XTOT Thermal Overload Relays
Thermal Overload Relays
Type
OB = Bimetallic overload relay
OT = Current transformer overload relay
Designation
XT = XT line of IEC control
Trip Class
C1 = Class 10A
C3 = Class 30
Mounting
Blank = Direct to contactor
S= Separate mount
Frame Size
Designation
B = 45 mm
C = 45 mm
D = 55 mm
G = 90 mm
H = 140 mm
L = 140 mm
Blank = XTOT only
Overload Release
Frame B
P16 = 0.1–0.16A
P24 = 0.16–0.24A
P40 = 0.24–0.4A
P60 = 0.4–0.6A
001 =0.6–1A
1P6 = 1.0–1.6A
2P4 = 1.6–2.4A
004 =2.4–4A
006 = 4–6A
010 = 6–10A
012 = 9–12A
016 = 12–16A
Frame C
P16 = 0.1–0.16A
P24 = 0.16–0.24A
P40 = 0.24–0.4A
P60 = 0.4–0.6A
001 =0.6–1A
1P6 = 1.0–1.6A
2P4 = 1.6–2.4A
004 =2.4–4A
006 = 4–6A
010 = 6–10A
016 = 10–16A
024 = 16–24A
032 = 24–32A
Frame D
010 = 6–10A
016 = 10–16A
024 = 16–24A
040 = 24–40A
057 = 40–57A
065 = 50–65A
075 = 65–75A
Frame F
035 = 25–35A
050 = 35–50A
070 = 50–70A 100 = 70–100A
Frame G
035 = 25–35A
050 = 35–50A
070 = 50–70A
100 = 70–100A
125 = 95–125A
150 = 120–150A
175 = 145–175A
Frame L and H
070 = 50–70A
100 = 70–100A
125 = 95–125A
160 = 120–160A
220 = 160–220A
250 = 200–250A
CT Type
063 = 42–63A
090 = 60–90A
125 = 85–125A
160 = 110–160A
240 = 160–240A
290 = 190–290A
400 = 270–400A
540 = 360–540A
XT OB P16 B C1 S
V9-T2-24 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Motor Control and Protection
Motor Protection and Monitoring Relays
Product Selection
XTOB, XTOT Thermal Overload Relays
Notes
Short circuit protection: Observe the maximum permissible fuse of the contactor with direct device mounting.
See MN03402001E for more information on overload relays for Frames B–G.
Trip Class: 10A
Suitable for protection of EEx e-motors. EC prototype test certificate available upon request.
Observe manuals MN03402001E and MN03407001E. See documentation—manuals for overload monitoring of EEx e-motors.
Overload
Releases, Ir
Contact
Sequence
Contact
Configuration
For Use with Contactor
Ampere Range
Short-Circuit Protection (A)
Catalog Number
Maximum
Circuit Breaker CEC/NEC Fuse
Frame B—Direct Mount to XTCE…B Contactor
0.1–0.165 1NO-1NC 7–15A 25 3 XTOBP16BC1
0.16–0.24 7–15A 25 3 XTOBP24BC1
0.24–0.4 7–15A 25 3 XTOBP40BC1
0.4–0.6 7–15A 25 3 XTOBP60BC1
0.6–1 7–15A 25 3 XTOB001BC1
1–1.6 7–15A 25 6 XTOB1P6BC1
1.6–2.4 7–15A 25 6 XTOB2P4BC1
2.4–4 7–15A 25 15 XTOB004BC1
4–6 7–15A 25 20 XTOB006BC1
6–10 7–15A 25 35 XTOB010BC1
9–12 9–15A 25 45 XTOB012BC1
12–16 12–15A 30 45 XTOB016BC1
Frame C—Direct Mount to XTCE…C Contactor
0.6–1 1NO-1NC 18–32A 25 3 XTOB001CC1
1–1.6 18–32A 25 6 XTOB1P6CC1
1.6–2.4 18–32A 25 6 XTOB2P4CC1
2.4–4 18–32A 25 15 XTOB004CC1
4–6 18–32A 25 20 XTOB006CC1
6–10 18–32A 25 25 XTOB010CC1
10–16 18–32A 30 25 XTOB016CC1
16–24 18–32A 30 25 XTOB024CC1
24–32 25–32A 30 25 XTOB032CC1
Frame D—Direct Mount to XTCE…D Contactor
6–10 1NO-1NC 40–72A 25 25 XTOB010DC1
10–16 40–72A 25 25 XTOB016DC1
16–24 40–72A 30 25 XTOB024DC1
24–40 40–72A 125 125 XTOB040DC1
40–57 50–72A 150 150 XTOB057DC1
50–65 65–72A 150 200 XTOB065DC1
65–75 72A 150 200 XTOB075DC1
Frames F–G—Direct Mount to XTCE…F or XTCE…G Contactor
35–50 1NO-1NC 80–170A 150 200 XTOB050GC1
50–70 80–170A 150 200 XTOB070GC1
70–100 80–170A 400 400 XTOB100GC1
95–125 80–170A 500 400 XTOB125GC1
120–150 80–170A 600 600 XTOB150GC1
145–175 150–170A 600 600 XTOB175GC1
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-25
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Motor Control and Protection
Motor Protection and Monitoring Relays
XTOB, XTOT Thermal Overload Relays, continued
Current Transformer Operated Overload Relay
Accessories
DIN-Rail or Panel-Mount Adapter,
Frames C–D 1
Notes
Short circuit protection: Observe the maximum permissible fuse of the contactor with direct device
mounting. See MN03402001E for more information on overload relays for Frames B–G.
Trip Class: 10A
Suitable for protection of EEx e-motors. EC prototype test certificate available upon request.
Observe manuals MN03402001E and MN03407001E. See documentation—manuals for overload
monitoring of EEx e-motors.
1Can be snap fitted on a top hat rail (DIN rail) or can be screw fitted.
Overload
Releases, Ir
Contact
Sequence
Contact
Configuration
For Use with Contactor
Ampere Range
Short-Circuit Protection (A)
Catalog Number
Maximum
Circuit Breaker CEC/NEC Fuse
Frames F–G—Separate Mount
35–50 1NO-1NC 80–170A 150 200 XTOB050GC1S
50–70 80–170A 150 200 XTOB070GC1S
70–100 80–170A 400 400 XTOB100GC1S
95–125 80–170A 500 400 XTOB125GC1S
120–150 80–170A 600 600 XTOB150GC1S
145–175 150–170A 600 600 XTOB175GC1S
Frame H—Separate Mount
50–70 1NO-1NC 185–250A 150 200 XTOB070HC1
70–100 185–250A 400 400 XTOB100HC1
95–125 185–250A 500 400 XTOB125HC1
120–160 185–250A 600 600 XTOB160HC1
160–220 185–250A 600 800 XTOB220HC1
200–250 225–250A 600 700 XTOB250HC1
Frame L—Direct Mount to XTC (E or S)…L or Separate Mount
50–70 1NO-1NC 185–250A 150 200 XTOB070LC1
70–100 185–250A 400 400 XTOB100LC1
95–125 185–250A 500 400 XTOB125LC1
120–160 185–250A 600 600 XTOB160LC1
160–220 185–250A 800 800 XTOB220LC1
200–250 225–250A 600 700 XTOB250LC1
Overload
Releases, Ir
Contact
Sequence
Contact
Configuration
For Use with Contactor
Ampere Range
Short-Circuit Protection (A)
Catalog Number
Maximum
Circuit Breaker CEC/NEC Fuse
Frames M–N—Separate Mount
160–240 1NO-1NC 300–500A 600 700 XTOT240C3S
190–290 300–500A 600 700 XTOT290C3S
270–400 300–500A 1000 1000 XTOT400C3S
360–540 500A 600 1000 XTOT540C3S
420–630 630A 600 1000 XTOT630C3S
For Use With…
Package
Qty. Catalog Number
XTOB…CC1 5 XTOBXDINC
XTOB…DC1 2 XTOBXDIND
1359795
2469896
Adapter
V9-T2-26 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Motor Control and Protection
Motor Protection and Monitoring Relays
XT Electronic Overload Relays
Features
●Direct mount to XT contactors or separate mount
●Standard version: selectable trip class (10A, 10, 20, 30) with
selectable manual or auto reset
●Broad 5:1 FLA range
●Self-powered design, will accept AC voltages from
12–690V 50/60 Hz
●Electrically isolated 1NO-1NC contacts (push-to-test)
●FLA range of 0.1–1500A
Catalog Number Selection
XT Electronic Overload Relays
XT Electronic Overload Relay—IEC 1
Note
1See Page V9-T2-27 for Product Selection.
Designation
XT = XT line of IEC control
Type
OE = Electronic overload relay
Mounting
Blank = Direct to contactor
S = Separate mount (Frames C and G only)
Trip Type
CS = Selectable Class 10A, 10, 20, 30
GS = Ground fault with selectable Class 10, 20
Overload Range
Contactor Frame
1P6 = 0.33–1.65A
005 = 1–5A
020 = 4–20A
B = 45 mm
1P6 = 0.33–1.65A
005 = 1–5A
020 = 4–20A
045 = 9–45A
C = 45 mm
045 = 9–45A
100 = 20–100A
D = 55 mm
100 = 20–100A F, G = 105 mm
175 = 35–175A G, H = 110 mm
XT OE 1P6 C CS S
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-27
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Motor Control and Protection
Motor Protection and Monitoring Relays
Product Selection
XT Electronic Overload Relays
XT Electronic Overload Relays for Direct Mount to XT Contactors
XT Electronic Overload Relays with Ground Fault for Direct Mount to XT Contactors
For Use with
XT Contactor
Frame
For Use with
Contactor
Overload
Range (Amps)
Contact
Sequence
Frame
Size
Auxiliary
Contact
Configuration Type Catalog Number
B XTCE007B…,
XTCE009B…,
XTCE012B…,
XTCE015B…
0.33–1.65 45 mm NO-NC ZEB12-1,65 XTOE1P6BCS
1–5 ZEB12-5 XTOE005BCS
4–20 ZEB12-20 XTOE020BCS
C XTCE018C…,
XTCE025C…,
XTCE032C
0.33–1.65 45 mm NO-NC ZEB32-1,65 XTOE1P6CCS
1–5 ZEB32-5 XTOE005CCS
4–20 ZEB32-20 XTOE020CCS
9–45 ZEB32-45 XTOE045CCS
D XTCE040D…,
XTCE050D…,
XTCE065D…,
XTCE072D…
9–45 45 mm NO-NC ZEB65-45 XTOE045DCS
20–100 55 mm ZEB65-100 XTOE100DCS
F XTCE080F…,
XTCE095F…
20–100 55 mm NO-NC ZEB150-100 XTOE100GCS
G XTCE115G…,
XTCE150G…,
XTCE170G…
20–100 55 mm NO-NC ZEB150-100 XTOE100GCS
35–175 110 mm ZEB150-175 XTOE175GCS
H XTCE185H… 35–175 110 mm NO-NC ZEB225-175 XTOE175HCS
For Use with
XT Contactor
Frame
For Use with
Contactor
Overload
Range (Amps)
Contact
Sequence
Frame
Size
Auxiliary
Contact
Configuration Type Catalog Number
B XTCE007B…,
XTCE009B…,
XTCE012B…,
XTCE015B…
0.33–1.65 45 mm NO-NC ZEB12-1,65-GF XTOE1P6BGS
1–5 ZEB12-5-GF XTOE005BGS
4–20 ZEB12-20-GF XTOE020BGS
C XTCE018C…,
XTCE025C…,
XTCE032C
0.33–1.65 45 mm NO-NC ZEB32-1,65-GF XTOE1P6CGS
1–5 ZEB32-5-GF XTOE005CGS
4–20 ZEB32-20-GF XTOE020CGS
9–45 ZEB32-45-GF XTOE045CGS
D XTCE040D…,
XTCE050D…,
XTCE065D…,
XTCE072D…
9–45 45 mm NO-NC ZEB65-45-GF XTOE045DGS
20–100 55 mm ZEB65-100-GF XTOE100DGS
F XTCE080F…,
XTCE095F…
20–100 55 mm NO-NC ZEB150-100-GF XTOE100GGS
G XTCE115G…,
XTCE150G…,
XTCE170G…
20–100 55 mm NO-NC ZEB150-100-GF XTOE100GGS
35–175 110 mm ZEB150-175-GF XTOE175GGS
H XTCE185H… 35–175 110 mm NO-NC ZEB225-175-GF XTOE175HGS
45 mm XT for
Direct Mount
2 4 6 98 96
97 95
2 4 6 98 96
97 95
2 4 6 98 96
97 95
2 4 6 98 96
97 95
2 4 6 98 96
97 95
45 mm XT for
Direct Mount
with Ground Fault
2 4 6 98 96
97 95
2 4 6 98 96
97 95
2 4 6 98 96
97 95
2 4 6 98 96
97 95
2 4 6 98 96
97 95
V9-T2-28 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Motor Control and Protection
Motor Protection and Monitoring Relays
XT Electronic Overload Relays for use with Large Frame XT Contactors (L–R)
Use CTs and 1-5A XT overload relay. CT kit does not include overload relay (order separately).
XT Electronic Overload Relays for Separate Mount
XT Electronic Overload Relay for Pass-Through Design
Pass-through design does not include any lugs to land wires.
Terminate motor leads directly on contactor.
XT
Contactor
Frame
For Use with IEC
Contactor Amp
Range (AC-3)
CT Range
(Amps) Description
CT Kit
Catalog Number
Terminal
Size
Overload Relay
Catalog Number
Overload Relay
with Ground Fault
Catalog Number
L, M 185–500A 60-300 300: 5 panel-mount CT kit
with integrated lugs
ZEB-XCT300 750 kcmil
(2) 250 kcmil
3/0 Cu/Al
XTOE005CCSS XTOE005CGSS
M, N 300–820A 120-600 600: 5 panel-mount CT kit
with integrated,
pass through holes
ZEB-XCT600 (2) 750 kcmil
3/0 Cu/Al
XTOE005CCSS XTOE005CGSS
N 580–1000A 200-1000 1000: 5 panel-mount CT kit
with integrated,
pass through holes
ZEB-XCT1000 (3) 750 kcmil
3/0 Cu/Al
XTOE005CCSS XTOE005CGSS
R 1600A 300-1500 1500: 5 panel-mount CT kit
with integrated,
pass through holes
ZEB-XCT1500 (4) 750 kcmil
1/0 Cu/Al
XTOE005CCSS XTOE005CGSS
Overload
Range (Amps)
Frame
Size
Contact
Sequence Type
Overload Relay
Catalog Number
Overload Relay
with Ground Fault
Catalog Number
Overload Relay
0.33–1.65 45 mm ZEB32-1,65/KK XTOE1P6CCSS XTOE1P6CGSS
1–5 ZEB32-5/KK XTOE005CCSS XTOE005CGSS
4–20 ZEB32-20/KK XTOE020CCSS XTOE020CGSS
9–45 ZEB32-45/KK XTOE045CCSS XTOE045CGSS
20–100 55 mm ZEB150-100/KK XTOE100GCSS XTOE100GGSS
35–175 110 mm ZEB150-175/KK XTOE175GCSS XTOE175GGSS
Overload
Range (Amps)
Frame
Size
Contact
Sequence Type
Overload Relay
Catalog Number
Overload Relay
with Ground Fault
Catalog Number
35–175 110 mm ZEB150-175/PT XTOE175GCSP XTOE175GGSP
1–5A OL with CTs
45 mm XT for
Separate Mount
1359795
2469896
1359795
2469896
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-29
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Motor Control and Protection
Motor Protection and Monitoring Relays
Accessories
CT Kits
Accessories
Communication
The C440 is provided with two levels of communication capability.
Basic Communication via
Expansion Module—
Monitoring Only
Basic communication on
the C440 is accomplished
using an expansion module.
The expansion module plugs
into the expansion bay on
the C440 overload relay,
enabling communications
with the overload via their
Modbus RTU (RS-485)
network. No additional parts
are required. See
figure below.
Basic Communication—
Modbus
Advanced
Communication—
Monitoring and Control
C440 also has the ability to
communicate on industrial
protocols such as DeviceNet,
PROFIBUS, Modbus RTU and
Modbus TCP, and Ethernet
(planned) while providing
control capability using I/O.
An expansion module
(mentioned earlier) combined
with a communication
adapter and a communication
module allows easy
integration onto the
customer’s network. See
figure below.
Advanced Communication—
Communication Adapter with
Communication Module
Advanced
Communication—
Communication Module
The communication adapter
comes standard with four
inputs and two outputs
(24 Vdc or 120 Vac) while
providing the customer with
flexible mounting options
(DIN rail or panel). See
figure below,
Note
1Customer can wire remote mounted button to reset module (that is, 22 mm pushbutton, catalog number M22-D-B-GB14-K10).
Description Catalog Number
Safety Cover
Clear Lexan cover that mounts on top of the FLA dial and DIP switches when closed. ZEB-XSC
Reset Bar
Assembles to the top of the overload to provide a larger target area for door
mounted reset operators.
ZEB-XRB
Remote Reset
Remote reset module (24 Vdc) 1C440-XCOM
Remote reset module (120 Vac) 1ZEB-XRR-120
Remote reset module (24 Vac) 1ZEB-XRR-24
Safety Cover
Reset Bar
Remote Reset
V9-T2-30 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Motor Control and Protection
Motor Protection and Monitoring Relays
The following information can be viewed using the communication option:
●Motor status—running,
stopped, tripped or
resetting
●Individual rms phase
currents (A, B, C)
●Average of three-phase
rms current
●Percent thermal capacity
●Fault codes (only available
prior to reset)
●Percent phase unbalance
●Ground fault current and
percent
●Overload relay settings—
trip class, DIP switch
selections, reset selections
●Modbus address (can be
set over the network)
Communication Accessories
Description Catalog Number
Expansion module (Remote Reset/Modbus RTU, RS-485 Communication) C440-XCOM
Communication adapter kit (DIN C Panel mounted adapter, required for advance communication option) C440-COM-ADP
DeviceNet communication module kit—120V I/O (consists of C440-XCOM + C441K + C440-COM-ADP) C440-DN-120
DeviceNet communication module kit—24 Vdc I/O (consists of C440-XCOM + C441L + C440-COM-ADP) C440-DN-24
PROFIBUS communication module kit—120V I/O (consists of C440-XCOM + C441S + C440-COM-ADP) C440-DP-120
PROFIBUS communication module kit—24V I/O (consists of C440-XCOM + C441Q + C440-COM-ADP) C440-DP-24
Modbus communication module kit—120V I/O (consists of C440-XCOM + C441N + C440-COM-ADP) C440-MOD-120
Modbus communication module kit—24 Vdc I/O (consists of C440-XCOM + C441P + C440-COM-ADP) C440-MOD-24
Modbus TCP / EtherNet/IP communication module kit—120V I/O (consists of C440-XCOM + C441U) C440-ET-120
Modbus TCP / EtherNet/IP communication module kit—24V I/O (consists of C440-XCOM + C441V) C440-ET-24
Expansion Module
Communication
Adapter
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-31
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Motor Control and Protection
Motor Protection and Monitoring Relays
Short Circuit Ratings (North America CSA, cUL)
Changes to UL 508A and NEC in recent years have brought a focus to control panel safety with
regard to short-circuit current ratings (SCCR). Eaton’s C440 electronic overload relays combined
with XT series IEC and Freedom Series NEMA contactors provide a wide variety of SCCR
solutions needed for a variety of applications. The SCCR data in this document reflects the
latest information as of April 2010.
C440/XT Standalone Overload Relays (XT, C440)
IEC XT Starters with XT Electronic Overload Relays
Overload
FLA Range
Maximum
Operating
Voltage
Standard-Fault Short Circuit Data High-Fault Short Circuit Data
600V (kA)
Maximum
Fuse Size (A)
(RK5)
Maximum
Breaker
Size (A)
Fuses (RK5, J, CC) Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers
480V (kA) 600V (kA)
Maximum
Fuse Size 480V (kA) 600V (kA)
Maximum
Breaker Size
0.33–1.65A600 Vac1 6 15 ——————
1–5A 600 Vac 5 20 20 100 100 30 100 35 20
4–20A 600 Vac 5 80 80 100 100 100 100 35 80
9–45A 600 Vac 5 175 175 100 100 100 100 35 100/175 (480/600)
20–100A 600 Vac 10 400 400 100 100 200 150 35 250/400 (480/600)
28–140A 600 Vac 10 450 500 100 100 400 100 65 400
35–175A 690 Vac 10 500 (gG) 350 (690 Vac)
320 (415 Vac)
100 100 500 (gG) 100 (415 Vac) — 350 (LGC3350)
320 (NZMH3)
Contactor
Frame Size
Maximum
Operating
Voltage
High-Fault Short Circuit Data Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers
Fuses (RK5, J, CC)
480V 600V
Maximum
Fuse Size 480V 600V
Maximum
Breaker Size
B 1–5A 100 100 30 ———
4–20A 100 100 30 — — —
C 1–5A 100 100 60 — — —
4–20A 100 100 60 — — —
9–45A 100 100 60 — — —
D 9–45A 100 100 200 65 35 175
20–100A 100 100 200 65 35 175
F 20–100A 100 100 200 65 65 350
G 20–100A 100 100 200 65 65 350
35–175A 100 100 400 65 30 250 (480 Vac)
350 (600 Vac)
H 35–175A 100 100 400 65 30 400
V9-T2-32 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Motor Control and Protection
Motor Protection and Monitoring Relays
Motor Insight Overload and Monitoring Relays
Features
●Power, voltage and current monitoring, ground fault, flexible
communications, motor and line protection in a single
package
●Monitor energy consumption at individual loads to avoid peak
demand charges
●Protect pumps from dead-head or starved conditions
●0–660V, 1–540A with two relays
●Remote display allows for configuration without opening the
panel, providing additional operator safety
Catalog Number Selection
Motor Insight Overload and Monitoring Relays
Motor Insight Overload Relays
Motor Insight Overload Relays—Communications Modules and Accessory Types
Device Type
C441 = Motor Insight overload relay Overload Relay Current Rating
A = 1–9A (1–540A refer to
Page V9-T2-33)
B = 5–90A (5–90A refer to
Page V9-T2-33)
0109 = 120 Vac control power
(0–660 Vac, 1–9A)
0590 = 120 Vac control power
(0–660 Vac, 5–90A)
Overload Relay
Power Source Voltage
B= 240 Vac (170–264 Vac)
C= 480 Vac (323–528 Vac)
D= 600 Vac (487–660 Vac)
Blank = 120 Vac control power
(170–660 Vac)
Internal User Interface
Blank = With user interface
(line powered models)
NOUI = Without user interface
(120 Vac control models)
C441 B A NOUI
Device Type
C441 = Motor Insight overload relay Communication Module
K= DeviceNet module 4IN/2OUT 120 Vac
L= DeviceNet module 4IN/2OUT 24 Vdc
M= Modbus RTU module
N= Modbus RTU module 4IN/2OUT 120 Vac
P= Modbus RTU module 4IN/2OUT 24 Vdc
Q= PROFIBUS module 4IN/2OUT 120 Vac
R= Modbus TCP / EtherNet/IP module
4IN/2OUT 120 Vac
S= PROFIBUS module 4IN/2OUT 24 Vdc
T= Modbus TCP / EtherNet/IP module
4IN/2OUT 24 Vdc
Accessory Type
1= Type 1 and 12 remote mounted display
3= Type 3R kit for remote display
CMP1 = Conversion plate
C441 K
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-33
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Motor Control and Protection
Motor Protection and Monitoring Relays
Product Selection
Motor Insight
Motor Insight CT Multiplier and Wire Wrap Schedule
Notes
1 Underscore indicates Operating Voltage Code required.
Operating Voltage Codes:
2 Any manufacturer’s CTs may be used.
Power Source
Monitoring
Range
Current
Range
Catalog
Number
240 Vac (170–264) 170–264 Vac 1–9A C441BA
5–90A C441BB
480 Vac (323–528) 323–528 Vac 1–9A C441CA
5–90A C441CB
600 Vac (489–660) 489–660 Vac 1–9A C441DA
5–90A C441DB
120 Vac (93.5–132) 170–660 Vac 1–9A C4410109NOUI
5–90A C4410590NOUI
Catalog
Number 1
Motor
FLA
Number
of Loops
Number of
Conductors Through
CT Primary
CT
Multiplier
Setting
External CT Kit
Catalog Number 2
Current Range: 5–90A
C441_B and
C4410590NOUI
5–22.5A 3 4 4 —
6.67–30A 2 3 3 —
10–45A 1 2 2 —
20–90A 0 1 1 —
Current Range: 1–9A
C441_A and
C4410109NOUI
1–5A 1 2 2 —
2–9A 0 1 1 —
60–135A 0 1 150–(150:5) C441CTKIT150
120–270A 0 1 300–(300:5) C441CTKIT300
240–540A 0 1 600–(600:5) C441CTKIT600
Code Voltage
B240 Vac
C480 Vac
D600 Vac
<empty> 120 Vac Control Power
Motor Insight
V9-T2-34 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Motor Control and Protection
Motor Protection and Monitoring Relays
Modbus Communication Module
PROFIBUS Communication Module
DeviceNet Modules
Ethernet Communication Module
Description I/O Catalog Number
Modbus communication module None C441M
Modbus communication module 4IN/2OUT 120 Vac C441N
Modbus communication module 4IN/2OUT 240 Vdc C441P
Description I/O Catalog Number
PROFIBUS communication module 4IN/2OUT 120 Vac C441S
PROFIBUS communication module 4IN/2OUT 24 Vdc C441Q
Description I/O Catalog Number
DeviceNet communication module 120 Vac C441K
DeviceNet communication module 24 Vdc C441L
Description I/O Catalog Number
Modbus TCP / EtherNet/IP communication module 4IN/2OUT 120 Vac C441R
Modbus TCP / EtherNet/IP communication module 4IN/2OUT 24 Vdc C441T
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-35
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Motor Control and Protection
Motor Protection and Monitoring Relays
Accessories
Motor Insight
Communication Cables
The Remote Display requires
a communication cable to
connect to the Motor Insight
overload relay.
Communication Cable
Lengths
Note
1Underscore indicates operating voltage code required.
Description Catalog Number
Remote display Type 1 C4411
Type 3R kit for remote display
(remote display not included)
C4413
Adaptive mounting plate C441CMP1
Remote Display
Kit for Remote display
Length in
Inches (meters)
Catalog
Number
9.8 (0.25) D77E-QPIP25
39.4 (1.0) D77E-QPIP100
78.7 (2.0) D77E-QPIP200
118.1 (3.0) D77E-QPIP300
V9-T2-36 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Motor Control and Protection
Manual Motor Protectors and Controllers
Product Overview
Manual Motor Protectors and Controllers Selection Guide
Description
XTPB Pushbutton
Manual Motor Protectors
XTPR Rotary
Manual Motor Protectors XTSC Manual Motor Controllers XTFC Combination Motor Controllers
Page V9-T2-37 Page V9-T2-37 Page V9-T2-41 Page V9-T2-41
Operator style Pushbutton Rotary Rotary Rotary
Components Manual motor protector Manual motor protector Manual motor protector contactor
connector kit
Manual motor protector contactor
connector kit line side adapter
UL 508 Type E — Yes, with line side adapter — —
UL 508 Type F — — — Yes
Branch motor circuit functions Disconnect Disconnect Disconnect Disconnect
Controller (manual) Controller (manual) Controller (manual and remote) Controller (manual and remote)
Short circuit protection Short circuit protection Short circuit protection Short circuit protection
Motor overload protection Motor overload protection Motor overload protection Motor overload protection
FLA range 0.1–25A 0.1–65A 0.1–65A 0.1–65A
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-37
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Motor Control and Protection
Manual Motor Protectors and Controllers
XT IEC Manual Motor Protectors
Features
●ON/OFF rotary handle with lockout provision
●Class 10 overload protection
●Motor applications from 0.1–63A
●Built-in heater and magnetic trip elements to protect
the motor
●Adjustment dial for setting motor FLA
●XTPR Rotary MMP with a lineside adapter is rated for
UL 508 Type E
Catalog Number Selection
XT IEC Manual Motor Protectors
Manual Motor Protectors
Type
PB = Manual motor protector—
pushbutton
PR = Manual motor protector—
rotary
Designation
XT = XT IEC power control
Trip Class
C1 =Class 10
Blank = Magnetic only (no thermal trip)
Frame Size
B=45 mm
D=55 mm
Current Ratings
Frame B
P16 = 0.16A
P25 = 0.25A
P40 = 0.40A
P63 = 0.63A
001 =1A
1P6 =1.6A
2P5 =2.5A
004 =4A
6P3 =6.3A
010 =10A
012 =12A
016 =16A
020 =20A
025 =25A
032 =32A
Frame D
016 = 16A
025 = 25A
032 = 32A
040 = 40A
050 = 50A
058 = 58A
063 = 63A
XT PR 012 BC1
V9-T2-38 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Motor Control and Protection
Manual Motor Protectors and Controllers
Product Selection
XTPB Pushbutton Manual Motor Protectors—Global and North American Ratings
Motor Protective Device with Thermal and Magnetic Trip
Note: Service Factor (SF)—Setting Ir of current scale in dependence of load factor:
SF = 1.15 -> Ir = 1 x In mot
SF = 1 -> Ir = 0.9 x In mot
Notes
1Select manual motor protectors by full load amperes. Maximum motor ratings (kW, hp) are for reference only.
2In this range, calculate motor rating according to rated current. Specified values to NEC® 430.6(A)(1).
Rated
Uninterrupted
Current—
Iu = Ie (Amps)
FLA Adjustment
Range/Overload
Release—Ir (A)
Short Circuit
Release—
Irm (A)
Maximum Motor Ratings 1 Maximum hp Rating—P (hp)
Screw Terminals—
Catalog Number
Maximum kW Rating
AC-3—P (kW) Three-Phase
UL 508/CSA C 22.2 No. 14
Three-Phase
220–240V 380–415V 440V 500V 660–690V 200V 240V 480V 600V
Frame B
0.16 0.1–0.16 2.2 — — — — 0.06 2222 XTPBP16BC1
0.25 0.16–0.25 3.5 — 0.06 0.06 0.06 0.12 2222 XTPBP25BC1
0.4 0.25–0.4 5.6 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.12 0.18 2222 XTPBP40BC1
0.63 0.4–0.63 8.8 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.25 2222 XTPBP63BC1
1 0.63–1 14 0.12 0.25 0.25 0.37 0.55 221/2 1/2 XTPB001BC1
1.6 1–1.6 22 0.25 0.55 0.55 0.75 1.1 223/4 1 XTPB1P6BC1
2.5 1.6–2.5 35 0.37 0.75 1.1 1.1 1.5 1/2 1/2 1 1-1/2 XTPB2P5BC1
4 2.5–4 56 0.75 1.5 1.52.23 1123 XTPB004BC1
6.3 4–6.3 88 1.1 2.2 3 3 4 1-1/2 1-1/2 3 5 XTPB6P3BC1
10 6.3–10 140 2.2 4 4 4 7.5 3 3 7-1/2 10 XTPB010BC1
12 8–12 168 3 5.5 5.5 5.5 11 3 3 7-1/2 10 XTPB012BC1
16 10–16 224 4 7.5 9 9 12.5 3 5 10 10 XTPB016BC1
20 16–20 280 5.5 9 11 12.5 15 5 5 10 15 XTPB020BC1
25 20–25 350 5.5 12.5 12.5 15 22 5 7-1/2 15 20 XTPB025BC1
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-39
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Motor Control and Protection
Manual Motor Protectors and Controllers
XTPR Rotary Manual Motor Protectors with Screw Terminals—Global Ratings and North American Ratings
Motor Protective Device with Thermal and Magnetic Trip
Note: Service Factor (SF)—Setting Ir of current scale in dependence of load factor:
SF = 1.15 -> Ir = 1 x In mot
SF = 1 -> Ir = 0.9 x In mot
Notes
1Select manual motor protectors by full load amperes. Maximum motor ratings (kW, hp) are for reference only.
2In this range, calculate motor rating according to rated current. Specified values to NEC 430.6(A)(1).
3Catalog number shown comes with screw terminals. For Frame B devices up to 16A, spring cage terminals are available.
For spring cage terminals on line and load sides, insert a “C” into the catalog number in the 5th position—Example: XTPRC _BC1.
For spring cage terminals on the load side only, insert an “SC” into the catalog number in the 5th and 6th positions—Example: XTPRSC _BC1.
Rated
Uninterrupted
Current—
Iu = Ie (Amps)
FLA Adjustment
Range/Overload
Release—Ir (A)
Short Circuit
Release—
Irm (A)
Maximum Motor Ratings 1Maximum hp Rating—P (hp)
Screw Terminals—
Catalog Number 3
Maximum kW Rating
AC-3—P (kW) Three-Phase
UL 508/CSA C 22.2 No. 14
Three-Phase
220–240V 380–415V 440V 500V 660–690V 200V 240V 480V 600V
Frame B
0.16 0.1–0.16 2.2 — — — — 0.06 2222 XTPRP16BC1
0.25 0.16–0.25 3.5 — 0.06 0.06 0.06 0.12 2222 XTPRP25BC1
0.4 0.25–0.4 5.6 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.12 0.18 2222 XTPRP40BC1
0.63 0.4–0.63 8.8 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.25 2222 XTPRP63BC1
1 0.63–1 14 0.12 0.25 0.25 0.37 0.55 221/2 1/2 XTPR001BC1
1.6 1–1.6 22 0.25 0.55 0.55 0.75 1.1 223/4 1 XTPR1P6BC1
2.5 1.6–2.5 35 0.37 0.75 1.1 1.1 1.5 1/2 1/2 1 1-1/2 XTPR2P5BC1
4 2.5–4 56 0.75 1.5 1.52.23 1123 XTPR004BC1
6.3 4–6.3 88 1.1 2.2 3 3 4 1-1/2 1-1/2 3 5 XTPR6P3BC1
10 6.3–10 140 2.2 4 4 4 7.5 3 3 7-1/2 10 XTPR010BC1
12 8–12 168 3 5.5 5.5 5.5 11 3 3 7-1/2 10 XTPR012BC1
16 10–16 224 4 7.5 9912.5 351010 XTPR016BC1
20 16–20 280 5.5 9 11 12.5 15 5 5 10 15 XTPR020BC1
25 20–25 350 5.5 12.5 12.5 15 22 5 7-1/2 15 20 XTPR025BC1
32 25–32 448 7.5 15 15 22 30 7-1/2 10 25 30 XTPR032BC1
Frame D
16 10–16 224 4 7.5 9912.5 351015 XTPR016DC1
25 16–25 350 5.5 12.5 12.5 15 22 7-1/2 7-1/2 20 25 XTPR025DC1
32 25–32 448 7.5 15 17.52222 10102530 XTPR032DC1
40 32–40 560 11 20 22 24 30 10 15 30 40 XTPR040DC1
50 40–50 700 14 25 30 30 45 10 15 30 40 XTPR050DC1
58 50–58 812 17 30 37 37 55 — — 40 — XTPR058DC1
65 55–65 882 18.5 34 374555 ———— XTPR063DC1
V9-T2-40 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Motor Control and Protection
Manual Motor Protectors and Controllers
XTPR Manual Self-Protected Motor Starters—North American Ratings, UL 508 Type E 2
Motor Protective Device with Thermal and Magnetic Trip
Note: A UL 508 Type E self-protected manual combination starter (XTPR) consists of a manual motor protector
(XTPR) and a UL listed line side adapter (e.g., XTPAXLSA). The Type E self-protected manual combination
starter alone is a legitimate short-circuit protective device and disconnect means for the downstream motor,
while the contactor has been added to provide remote operation of the motor circuit.
Notes
1Select manual motor protectors by full load amperes. Maximum motor ratings (kW, hp) are for reference only.
2UL 508 Type E starters are assembled from a standard XTPR and a special incoming terminal line side adapter (XTPAXLSA or XTPAXLSAD).
3In this range, calculate motor rating according to rated current. Specified values to NEC 430.6(A)(1).
Rated
Uninterrupted
Current—
Iu = Ie (Amps)
FLA Adjustment
Range/Overload
Release—Ir (A)
Short Circuit
Release—
Irm (A)
Maximum Motor Ratings 1
Line Side Adapter—
Catalog Number 2
Manual Motor
Protector
Screw Terminals—
Catalog Number
Maximum hp Rating—P (hp)
Three-Phase
Rated Short Circuit Breaking
Capacity (kA)
220V 240V 480–277V 600–247V 240V 480–277V 600–247V
Frame B
0.16 0.1–0.16 2.2 331/2 1/2 50 50 50 XTPAXLSA XTPRP16BC1
0.25 0.16–0.25 3.4 331/2 1/2 50 50 50 XTPAXLSA XTPRP25BC1
0.4 0.25–0.4 5.6 331/2 1/2 50 50 50 XTPAXLSA XTPRP40BC1
0.63 0.4–0.63 8.8 331/2 1/2 50 50 50 XTPAXLSA XTPRP63BC1
1 0.63–1 14 331/2 1/2 50 50 50 XTPAXLSA XTPR001BC1
1.6 1–1.6 22 333/4 3/4 50 50 50 XTPAXLSA XTPR1P6BC1
2.5 1.6–2.5 35 1/2 1/2 1 1-1/2 50 50 50 XTPAXLSA XTPR2P5BC1
4 2.5–4 56 3/4 1 2 3 50 50 50 XTPAXLSA XTPR004BC1
6.3 4–6.3 88 11-1/235505050XTPAXLSA XTPR6P3BC1
10 6.3–11 140 3 3 7-1/2 10 50 50 50 XTPAXLSA XTPR010BC1
12 8–12 168 3 3 7-1/2 — 42 42 — XTPAXLSA —
16 10–16 224 3 5 10 — 42 42 — XTPAXLSA XTPR016BC1
20 16–20 280 5 5 — — 42 42 — XTPAXLSA XTPR020BC1
25 20–25 350 5 7-1/2 15 — 18 18 — XTPAXLSA XTPR025BC1
32 25–32 448 7-1/2 10 25 — 18 18 — XTPAXLSA XTPR032BC1
Frame D
16 10–16 224 351010505050XTPAXLSAD XTPR016DC1
25 16–25 350 7-1/2 7-1/2 20 25 50 50 50 XTPAXLSAD XTPR025DC1
32 25–32 448 101025 30 5050 50 XTPAXLSAD XTPR032DC1
40 32–40 560 101030 40 5050 50 XTPAXLSAD XTPR040DC1
50 40–50 700 10 15 30 — 65 65 — XTPAXLSAD XTPR050DC1
58 50–58 812 15 15 40 — 65 65 — XTPAXLSAD XTPR058DC1
65 55–65 882 15 15 40 — 65 65 — XTPAXLSAD XTPR063DC1
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-41
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Motor Control and Protection
Manual Motor Protectors and Controllers
XT IEC Manual and Combination Motor Controllers
Features
●ON/OFF rotary handle with lockout provision
●Class 10 overload protection
●Adjustment dial for setting motor FLA
●Built-in surge suppression on DC coils as standard
●Assembled manual motor controllers consist of manual motor
protector, contactor, connector kit and 1NO-1NC auxiliary
contact for MMP
●Assembled combination motor controllers consist of manual
motor protector, contactor, connector kit, 1NO-1NC auxiliary
contact for MMP and line side adapter
●Combination motor controllers are UL 508 Type F rated, and
provide the following functions in a single device
●Disconnect, short circuit protection, motor overload
protection, motor controller
Catalog Number Selection
XT IEC Manual and Combination Motor Controllers
Manual and Combination Motor Controllers
Type
SC = Manual motor controller—
FVNR
FC =
Combination motor controller,
UL 508 Type F—FVNR
Design
XT = XT IEC power control
Coil Voltage
A= 110V 50 Hz, 120V 60 Hz
B= 220V 50 Hz, 240V 60 Hz
C= 415V 50 Hz, 480V 60 Hz
D= 550V 50 Hz, 600V 60 Hz
E= 208V 50 Hz
T= 24V 50/60 Hz
TD = 24 Vdc
Frame Size—Contactor
B= 45 mm, 7 to 15A
C= 45 mm, 18 to 32A
D= 55 mm, 40 to 65A
Rated Current of MMP
Frame B
P16 =0.16A
P25 =0.25A
P40 =0.40A
P63 =0.63A
001 =1A
1P6 =1.6A
2P5 =2.5A
004 =4A
6P3 =6.3A
010 = 10A
012 = 12A
016 = 16A
020 = 20A
025 = 25A
032 = 32A
Frame D
016 = 16A
025 = 25A
032 = 32A
040 = 40A
050 = 50A
058 = 58A
063 = 63A
Frame Size—MMP
B= 45 mm, 0.1 to 32A
D= 55 mm, 16 to 63A
XT SC 012 BBA
V9-T2-42 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Motor Control and Protection
Manual Motor Protectors and Controllers
Product Selection
XTSC Manual Motor Controllers (MMC)/Starter Combinations
Factory Assembled Motor Protective Device with Thermal and Magnetic Trip + Contactor
Notes
The assembled Manual Motor Controller (MMC) consists of an XTPR Manual Motor Protector (MMP) and an XTCE contactor. For Frame B MMP + Frame B
Contactor assemblies, the XTSC can be mounted directly on DIN rail without an adapter. The contactors are supported mechanically with a mechanical
connection element (included in XTPAXTPCB). For 16A and above, the assembly is mounted via a DIN rail adapter plate (XTPAXTPCPC, XTPAXTPCPD) and
the electrical connection is made with electrical contact modules (XTPAXECMC, XTPAXECMD), both included in XTPAXTPCC and XTPAXTPCD.
Service Factor (SF)—Setting Ir of current scale in dependence of load factor:
SF = 1.15 -> Ir = 1 x In mot
SF = 1 -> Ir = 0.9 x In mot
1Overload release—Ir.
2Select manual motor protectors by full load amperes. Maximum motor ratings (kW, hp) are for reference only.
3Underscore (_) indicates magnet coil suffix required. See Page V9-T2-43.
4In this range, calculate motor rating according to rated current. Specified values to NEC 430.6(A)(1).
FLA Adjustment
Range (A) 1
Short Circuit
Release—
Irm (A)
Maximum Motor Ratings—P 2
Assembled Manual
Motor Controller 3
Non-Reversing—
Catalog Number
Maximum kW Rating
AC-3—P (kW) Three-Phase
Maximum hp Rating—P (hp)
Three-Phase
220–240V 380–415V 500V 660–690V 200V 240V 480V 600V
Frame B MMP + Frame B Contactor
0.1–0.16 3.2 ———0.06
441/2 1/2 XTSCP16BB_
0.16–0.25 3.5 — 0.06 0.06 0.12 441/2 1/2 XTSCP25BB_
0.25–0.4 5.6 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 441/2 1/2 XTSCP40BB_
0.4–0.63 8.82 0.09 0.18 0.25 0.25 441/2 1/2 XTSCP63BB_
0.63–1 14 0.12 0.25 0.37 0.55 441/2 1/2 XTSC001BB_
1–1.6 22.4 0.25 0.55 0.75 1.1 443/4 1 XTSC1P6BB_
1.6–2.5 35 0.37 0.75 1.1 1.5 1/2 1/2 1 1-1/2 XTSC2P5BB_
2.5–4 56 0.751.52.231123XTSC004BB_
4–6.3 88.2 1.1 2.2 3 4 1-1/2 1-1/2 3 5 XTSC6P3BB_
6.3–10 140 2.2 4 4 7.5 3 3 7-1/2 10 XTSC010BB_
8–12 168 3 5.5 5.5 11 3 3 7-1/2 10 XTSC012BB_
10–16 224 47.5912.5331010XTSC016BB_
Frame B MMP + Frame C Contactor
10–16 224 47.5912.5331010XTSC016BC_
16–20 280 5.5912.515551015XTSC020BC_
20–25 350 5.51115225 7-1/21520XTSC025BC_
25–32 448 7.5 15 22 30 7-1/2 10 20 25 XTSC032BC_
Frame D MMP + Frame C Contactor
10–16 224 47.5912.5351015XTSC016DC_
16–25 350 5.5 12.5 12.5 22 7-1/2 7-1/2 20 25 XTSC025DC_
25–32 448 7.51517.52210102530XTSC032DC_
Frame D MMP + Frame D Contactor
32–40 560 1120223010—3030XTSC040DD_
40–50 700 1425304515153040XTSC050DD_
50–58 812 17303755——40—XTSC058DD_
55–65 882 18.5343755——40—XTSC063DD_
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-43
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Motor Control and Protection
Manual Motor Protectors and Controllers
XTFC Combination Motor Controllers (CMC), UL 508 Type F
Factory Assembled Motor Protective Device with Thermal and Magnetic Trip + Contactor + Required Line Side Adapter
Magnet Coil Suffix Notes
The assembled Combination Motor
Controller (CMC) consists of an XTPR
Manual Motor Protector (MMP) and an
XTCE contactor and a required Line Side
Adapter. For Frame B MMP + Frame B
Contactor assemblies, the XTFC and
XTFR can be mounted directly on DIN rail
without an adapter. The contactors are
supported mechanically with a
mechanical connection element
(included in XTPAXTPCB, XTPAXRPCRB).
For 16A and above, the assembly is
mounted via a DIN rail adapter plate
(XTPAXTPCPC, XTPAXTPCPD) and the
electrical connection is made with
electrical contact modules (XTPAXECMC,
XTPAXECMD), both included in
XTPAXTPCC and XTPAXTPCD.
SF = 1.15 -> Ir = 1 x In mot
SF = 1 -> Ir = 0.9 x In mot
1Overload release—Ir.
2Select combination motor controllers by
full load amperes. Maximum motor
ratings (kW, hp) are for reference only.
3Underscore (_) indicates magnet coil
suffix required. See table at left.
4In this range, calculate motor rating
according to rated current. Specified
values to NEC 430.6(A)(1).
5With DC operation: Integrated diode-
resistor combination, coil rating 2.6W.
FLA Adjustment
Range (A) 1
Short Circuit
Release—
Irm (A)
Maximum Motor Ratings—P 2
Assembled Manual
Motor Controller 3
Non-Reversing—
Catalog Number
Maximum kW Rating
AC-3—P (kW) Three-Phase
Maximum hp Rating—P (hp)
Three-Phase
220–240V 380–415V 500V 660–690V 200V 240V 480V 600V
Frame B MMP + Frame B Contactor
0.1–0.16 2.2 ———0.06
441/2 1/2 XTFCP16BB_
0.16–0.25 3.5 — 0.06 0.06 0.12 441/2 1/2 XTFCP25BB_
0.25–0.4 5.6 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 441/2 1/2 XTFCP40BB_
0.4–0.63 8.82 0.09 0.18 0.25 0.25 441/2 1/2 XTFCP63BB_
0.63–1 14 0.120.250.370.55441/2 1/2 XTFC001BB_
1–1.6 22.4 0.250.550.751.1 443/4 1 XTFC1P6BB_
1.6–2.5 35 0.37 0.75 1.1 1.5 1/2 1/2 1 1-1/2 XTFC2P5BB_
2.5–4 56 0.751.52.231123XTFC004BB_
4–6.3 88.2 1.1 2.2 3 4 1-1/2 1-1/2 3 5 XTFC6P3BB_
6.3–10 140 2.2 4 4 7.5 3 3 7-1/2 10 XTFC010BB_
8–12 168 35.55.511337-1/2—XTFC012BB_
10–16 224 47.5912.53510—XTFC016BB_
Frame B MMP + Frame C Contactor
10–16 224 47.5912.53510—XTFC016BC_
16–20 280 5.5 9 12.5 15 5 5 — — XTFC020BC_
20–25 350 5.5 11 15 22 5 7-1/2 15 — XTFC025BC_
25–32 448 7.5 15 22 30 7-1/2 10 20 — XTFC032BC_
Frame D MMP + Frame C Contactor
10–16 224 47.5912.5351010XTFC016DC_
16–25 350 5.5 12.5 12.5 22 7-1/2 7-1/2 20 25 XTFC025DC_
25–32 448 7.51517.52210102530XTFC032DC_
Frame D MMP + Frame D Contactor
32–40 560 1120223010103040XTFC040DD_
40–50 700 14253045101530—XTFC050DD_
50–58 812 17303755151540—XTFC058DD_
55–65 882 18.5343755151540—XTFC063DD_
Coil Voltage
Suffix
Code
110V 50 Hz, 120V 60 Hz A
220V 50 Hz, 240V 60 Hz B
24V 50/60 Hz T
24 Vdc TD 5
415V 50 Hz, 480V 60 Hz C
550V 50 Hz, 600V 60 Hz D
208V 60 Hz E
V9-T2-44 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Motor Control and Protection
Manual Motor Protectors and Controllers
Accessories
Auxiliary Contacts
IP65 Rotary Handle Mechanism 123
Shunt Release
Undervoltage Release
Notes
1With ON/OFF switch position and “+” (tripped), lockable with three padlocks, 4–8 mm hasp. Can be locked in the OFF position, if required.
2Rotary handle mechanisms ship with door interlock disabled. See instruction publication with product for how to enable door interlock.
3Not for use with XTPAXFAEM20 early-make front-mount auxiliary contact.
Contact Configuration Contact Sequence
Screw Terminals
Pkg. Qty. Catalog Number
Side-Mount
1NO-1NC 5 XTPAXSA11
Front-Mount
1NO-1NC 5 XTPAXFA11
Description Pkg. Qty. Catalog Number
Complete Kits—Includes Handle, Shaft and Required Hardware
Rotary handle mechanism IP65 black—for use on main
switches to IEC/EN 60204.
1XTPAXRHMB
Rotary handle mechanism IP65 red/yellow—for use on main
switch with emergency-stop function to IEC/EN 60204.
1XTPAXRHMRY
Rotary handle mechanism IP65 black—for use on main
switches to IEC/EN 60204 where XTPR is mounted 90° from
vertical.
1XTPAXRHM90B
Rotary handle mechanism IP65 red/yellow—for use on main
switch with emergency-stop function to IEC/EN 60204
where XTPR is mounted 90° from vertical.
1XTPAXRHM90RY
Pkg. Qty.
Screw Terminals—
Catalog Number
2XTPAXSR120V60H
2XTPAXSR240V60H
2XTPAXSR480V60H
2XTPAXSR24VDC
Pkg. Qty.
Screw Terminals—
Catalog Number
2XTPAXUVR120V60H
2XTPAXUVR240V60H
2XTPAXUVR480V60H
Rotary Handle
Mechanism
Shunt Release
Undervoltage Release
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-45
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Motor Control and Protection
Manual Motor Protectors and Controllers
Three-Phase Commoning Links 1
Incoming Terminal for Three-Phase Commoning Link 2
Line-Side Adapter 3
Notes
1Protected against accidental contact. B Frame short circuit proof Ue = 690V, Iu = 63A; D Frame short circuit proof
Ue = 690V, Iu = 128A. Frame B links can be combined by rotating mounting. Frame D links cannot be combined.
2For three-phase commoning link, protected against accidental contact, Ue = 690V, Iu = 63A; for conductor cross-
sections: 2.5–25 mm2 stranded; 2.5–16 mm2 flexible with ferrules, AWG 14-6.
3XTPAXLSA is for three-phase commoning link, finger- and back-of-hand proof, Ue = 690V, Iu = 60A; for conductor
cross sections: 2.5–25 mm2 stranded, 2.5–16 mm2 flexible with ferrule, AWG 14-6.
4XTPAXLSAD cannot be combined with three-phase commoning links.
For Use With… Qty MMP
Length of
Link (mm)
Unit
Width (mm) Pkg. Qty. Catalog Number
Frame B
MMP with no side-mounted auxiliaries or voltage releases 2 90 45 10 XTPAXCLKA2
3 135 45 10 XTPAXCLKA3
4 180 45 10 XTPAXCLKA4
5 225 45 10 XTPAXCLKA5
Frame D
MMP with no side-mounted auxiliaries or voltage releases 2 110 55 1 XTPAXCLKA2D
3165551XTPAXCLKA3D
4220551XTPAXCLKA4D
For Use With… Pkg. Qty. Catalog Number
B Frame XTPR, XTPB 5 XTPAXIT
For Use With… Pkg. Qty. Catalog Number
B Frame XTPR to create a UL 508 type E/F manual
combination starter
5XTPAXLSA
D Frame XTPR to create a UL 508 type E/F manual
combination starter
1XTPAXLSAD 4
MMP—Frame B
MMP—Frame D
Incoming Terminal
Line-Side Adapter
V9-T2-46 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Motor Control and Protection
Manual Motor Protectors and Controllers
Combination Connection Kits for Connection of XTPR MMP with XTCE Contactor
Insulated Enclosures for Surface Mounting
Notes
1Built-in terminal for PE(N).
2North American enclosures come with conduit adapters for use with 1/2 NPT.
3Built-in N and PE terminal, lower part without knockouts.
4Integrated terminal for PE(N) connection.
5% Metric knockouts:
Top ÷ bottom: M25/M32
In backplate: M25/M32
Control cable entry: M20
For Use With… Description Std. Pack Catalog Number
Non-Reversing Starters
XTPR…B + XTCE…B Comprised of: 1 XTPAXTPCB
Mechanical connection element for XTPR…B and contactor
Main current wiring between XTPR…B and contactor in tool-less plug
connection
Cable guidance
Use contactor auxiliary switch XTCEXFAT_.
Control cable guidance: max. six cables up to 2.5 mm2 external diameter or
four cables up to 3.5 mm2 external diameter.
XTPR…B + XTCE…C
XTPR…D + XTCE…D
Comprised of: 1 XTPAXTPCC
DIN rail adapter plate
Main current wiring between XTPR and contactor 1 XTPAXTPCD
Degree of
Protection For Use With… Description Catalog Number
XTPB Pushbutton Manual Motor Protectors—North American Usage 12
IP65
NEMA
3R, 4X, 12, 13
XTPB MMP only or with: XTPAXFA_, XTPBXFAEM20,
XTPAXSA_, XTPAXUVR_, XTPAXSR_, XTPAXCL
With actuating diaphragm XTPBXENAS65
IP65
NEMA
3R, 4X, 12, 13
XTPB MMP only or with: XTPAXFA_, XTPBXFAEM20,
XTPAXUVR_, XTPAXSR_, XTPAXCL
With emergency-stop (E-stop) pushbutton
actuator, red/yellow
XTPBXENASES65
B Frame (0.1–32A) XTPR Rotary Manual Motor Protectors—North American Usage 3
IP55
NEMA
1, 12, 3R
B Frame XTPR Only or with: XTPAXSA_ and XTPAXFA_,
XTPAXUVR_ and XTPAXFA_, XTPAXSR_ and XTPAXFA_,
XTPAXCL
With red/yellow rotary handle for use as
emergency-stop switch to VDE 0113
XTPAXENAS55RY
D Frame (10–65A) XTPR Rotary Manual Motor Protectors 45
IP65
NEMA
1, 12, 3R, 4X
D Frame XTPR only or with: XTPAXFA_, XTPAXFAEM20,
XTPAXSA_, XTPAXSATR_, XTPAXUVR_, XTPAXSR_,
XTPAXCL
With red/yellow rotary handle for use as
emergency-stop switches to IEC/EN 60204
XTPAXENCSD65RY
Non-Reversing
Starters
Insulated Enclosures
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-47
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.4
Motor Control and Protection
Soft Starters
Product Overview
Soft Starters Selection Guide
Description DS7 DS6 S611 S801+ S811+
Page V9-T2-48 Page V9-T2-50 Page V9-T2-51 Page V9-T2-55 Page V9-T2-58
Power
Current range (A) 4–32 41–200 26–414 11–1000 11–1000
Phases Two-phase control Two-phase control Three-phase Three-phase Three-phase
Input voltage (line voltage) 0–460V 0–460V 0–600V 0–600V; 690V on V and T Frame 0–600V; 690V on V and T Frame
Horsepower range 460V: 2–20 hp 460V: 30–150 hp 460V: 40–350 hp 460V: 25–800 hp 460V: 25–800 hp
Internal run-bypass Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Inside-the-delta control — — — Yes Yes
Control
User interface Dials Dials LED and keypad Dials and DIP switches LCD and keypad
Control voltage 24 Vac/Vdc or 120–240 Vac 24 Vdc 120 Vac 24 Vdc 24 Vdc
Communications — — Modbus RTU, EtherNet/IP,
Modbus TCP, PROFIBUS,
DeviceNet
— Modbus RTU, EtherNet/IP,
Modbus TCP
Program relays — — Yes Yes Yes
Soft Start
Voltage ramp initial current 5–85% LRT 5–85% LRT 5–85% LRT 5–85% LRT 5–85% LRT
Voltage ramp time 1–30 sec 1–30 sec 0.5–180 sec 0.5–180 sec 0.5–180 sec
Current limit — — 5–85% LRT 5–85% LRT 5–85% LRT
Current limit time — — 0.5–180 sec 0.5–180 sec 0.5–180 sec
Kick start current — — 5–85% LRT 5–85% LRT 5–85% LRT
Kick start time — — 0–2 sec 0–2 sec 0–2 sec
Jog — — — Yes Yes
Soft Stop
Stop ramp time 0–30 sec 0–30 sec 0–60 sec 0–60 sec 0–60 sec
Pump control — — Optional Optional Optional
Environmental
Operating temperature 0° to 40°C 0° to 40°C –20° to 50°C –30° to 50°C –30° to 50°C
Humidity 0–95% noncondensing 0–95% noncondensing 0–95% noncondensing 0–95% noncondensing 0–95% noncondensing
Altitude <2000M <2000M <2000M <2000M <2000M
V9-T2-48 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.4
Motor Control and Protection
Soft Starters
DS7 Soft Start Controller
Features
●Small size
●Patented asymmetric delay angle control—makes torque
behavior similar to a three-phase control device
●Integrated bypass
●It can take 24 Vac/Vdc or 110V/230 Vac control voltage
●Mechanical and electrical toolless assembly with MMPs
●Low cost solution compared to three-phase control devices
●Full UL approval
Product Selection
DS7 Soft Start Controller
Please refer to Application Note AP03901006E for additional information on proper size selection.
DS7 Soft Start Controllers—Horsepower Ratings—
10 Second Ramp, One Start per Hour, 300% Current Limit at 40°C 1
Notes
1 Actual motor FLAs vary. Verify these devices cover the motor specific FLA.
2 Selections are based on motor FLA value at 480V.
3 24 Vac/Vdc device.
4 120/230 Vac device.
Rated
Current (A)
Motor Power (hp) Maximum
Allowable
Breaker Size
Maximum
Allowable
Fuse Size
Recommended
XTOB Overload
(Direct Connect) 2
Recommended
XTOE Overload 2MMP 2
Connection
Kit to MMP Catalog Number200V 230V 480V
3.7 0.75 0.75 2 HFD3015 15A Class RK5 XTOB004BC1 XTOE005BCS XTPR004BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX004NO-N 3
DS7-342SX004NO-N 4
6.9 1.5 2 3 HFD3015 15A Class RK5 XTOB006BC1 1XTOE020BCS XTPR6P3BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX007NO-N 3
DS7-342SX007NO-N 4
7.8 225HFD3020 20A Class RK5XTOB010BC1 XTOE020BCS XTPR010BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX009NO-N 3
DS7-342SX009NO-N 4
11 3 3 7.5 HFD3030 20A Class RK5 XTOB012BC1 XTOE020BCS XTPR012BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX012NO-N 3
DS7-342SX012NO-N 4
15.2 3 5 10 HFD3035 25A Class RK5 XTOB016CC1 XTOE020CCS XTPR016BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX016NO-N 3
DS7-342SX016NO-N 4
22 5 7.5 15 HFD3060 40A Class RK5 XTOB024CC1 XTOE045CCS XTPR025BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX024NO-N 3
DS7-342SX024NO-N 4
32 7.5 10 20 HFD3070 50A Class RK5 XTOB032CC1 XTOE045CCS XTPR032BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX032NO-N 3
DS7-342SX032NO-N 4
DS7 Soft Start
Controller—Frame 1
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-49
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.4
Motor Control and Protection
Soft Starters
Please refer to Application Note AP03901006E for additional information on proper size selection.
DS7 Soft Start Controllers—Horsepower Ratings—
10 Second Ramp, One Start per Hour, 400% Current Limit at 40°C 1
Notes
1 Actual motor FLAs vary. Verify these devices cover the motor specific FLA.
2 Selections are based on motor FLA value at 480V.
3 24 Vac/Vdc device.
4 120/230 Vac device.
Rated
Current (A)
Motor Power (hp) Maximum
Allowable
Breaker Size
Maximum
Allowable
Fuse Size
Recommended
XTOB Overload
(Direct Connect) 2
Recommended
XTOE Overload 2MMP 2
Connection
Kit to MMP Catalog Number200V 230V 480V
3 0.5 0.5 1.5 HFD3015 15A Class RK5 XTOB004BC1 XTOE005BCS XTPR004BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX004NO-N 3
DS7-342SX004NO-N 4
4.8 113HFD3015 15A Class RK5XTOB006BC1 1XTOE020BCS XTPR6P3BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX007NO-N 3
DS7-342SX007NO-N 4
6.9 1.5 2 3 HFD3020 20A Class RK5 XTOB006BC1 XTOE020BCS XTPR6P3BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX009NO-N 3
DS7-342SX009NO-N 4
9 225HFD3030 20A Class RK5XTOB010BC1 XTOE020BCS XTPR010BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX012NO-N 3
DS7-342SX012NO-N 4
11 3 3 7.5 HFD3035 25A Class RK5 XTOB016CC1 XTOE020CCS XTPR016BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX016NO-N 3
DS7-342SX016NO-N 4
17.5 5 5 10 HFD3060 40A Class RK5 XTOB016CC1 XTOE045CCS XTPR016BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX024NO-N 3
DS7-342SX024NO-N 4
22 5 7.5 15 HFD3070 50A Class RK5 XTOB024CC1 XTOE045CCS XTPR025BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX032NO-N 3
DS7-342SX032NO-N 4
DS7 Soft Start
Controller—Frame 1
V9-T2-50 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.4
Motor Control and Protection
Soft Starters
DS6 Soft Start Controller
Features
●Run bypass mode greatly reduces internal heating created by
the power dissipation across the SCRs. The bypass contactor
directly connects the motor to the line and improves system
efficiency by reducing internal power losses
●Less heat minimizes enclosure size and cooling requirements,
and maximizes the life of all devices in the enclosure
●LED displays device status and provides fault indication
●Variable ramp times and voltage control (torque control)
settings provide unlimited starting configurations, allowing
for maximum application flexibility
●Minimizes the peak inrush current’s stress on the
power system
●Minimizes peak starting torque to diminish mechanical
system wear and damage
Product Selection
DS6 Soft Start Controller
For 400% ramp, see Volume 6—Solid-State Motor Control, CA08100007E, Tab 1.
DS6 Soft Start Controller—Horsepower Rating, 10-Second Ramp, One Start per Hour, 300% Current Limit at 40°C
Power Supply Selection
Notes
1Maximum values may be higher than allowed per NEC 430.52 and UL 508A 31.1.
2XTOBXDIND panel mounting adaptor must be used with this overload.
3XTOBXTLL line and load lugs must be used with this overload.
4C396CTK300 current transformer must be used with this overload.
Rated
Current (A)
Motor Power (hp) Maximum
Allowable
Breaker Size a
Maximum
Allowable
Fuse Size 1
Recommended
XTOB Overload
Recommended
C396 Overload
Catalog
Number200V 230V 460V
40 10 10 30 HFD3150L 150A Class RK5 XTOB040DC1 2C396A2A045SELAX DS6-34DSX041N0-N
52 15 20 40 HFD3200L 200A Class RK5 XTOB057DC1 2C396B2A075SELAX DS6-34DSX055N0-N
65 20 25 50 HJD3250 200A Class RK5 XTOB065DC1 2C396B2A075SELAX DS6-34DSX068N0-N
77 25 30 60 HKD3300 300A Class RK5 XTOB100GC1S C396B2A110SELAX DS6-34DSX081N0-N
96 30 30 75 HKD3350 350A Class RK5 XTOB100GC1S C396B2A110SELAX DS6-34DSX099N0-N
124 40 50 100 HKD3400 500A Class RK5 XTOB125GC1S C396C2A150SELAX DS6-34DSX134N0-N
156 50 60 125 HLD3450 500A Class RK5 XTOB160LC1 3C396A2A005SELAX 4DS6-34DSX161N0-N
180 60 75 150 HLD3500 500A Class RK5 XTOB220LC1 3C396A2A005SELAX 4DS6-34DSX196N0-N
Description Catalog Number
85–264V input and 24V output ELC-PS01
380–480V input and 24V output PSS25F
100–240 Vac input and 24 Vdc output PSG60E
380–480 Vac input and 24 Vdc output PSG60F
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-51
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.4
Motor Control and Protection
Soft Starters
S611 Soft Starter
Features
●Integrated bypass
●Integrated electronic overload protection
●120V control
●Power monitoring
●Intuitive user interface
●Field serviceability (control board, contactors)
●Pump control option
●Modbus RTU native
●Plug-and-play EtherNet IP / Modbus TCP / PROFIBUS /
DeviceNet adapters
●Control board mounted underneath the cover
●High fault combination rating up to 100 kA
●Available in NEMA 1/12/3R/4/4X enclosures
Catalog Number Selection
S611 Soft Starter
Solid-State Soft Starter
Ampere Rating
052 = 52A
065 = 65A
077 = 77A
099 = 99A
125 = 125A
156 = 156A
180 = 180A
242 = 242A
302 = 302A
361 = 361A
414 = 414A
S = Standard soft starterS = Soft starter
611 = Non-combination soft starter Number of Poles
3 = Three-pole device
Options
N = No options
P = Pump control
Frame Size
A = 52–77A
B = 99–125A
C = 156–180A
D = 242A
E = 302–361A
F = 414A
S611 B125 N 3 S
V9-T2-52 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.4
Motor Control and Protection
Soft Starters
Product Selection
Horsepower Ratings
Note: Always refer to motor plate FLA and ensure that the motor plate FLA is equal to or lower than the
maximum current value in the tables.
Standard Duty—300% Current for 15 Seconds, 115% Continuous
Standard Duty Plus—350% FLA for 30 Seconds, 115% Continuous
Maximum
Current (Amps)
Horsepower Rating
Catalog Number208V 240V 480V 600V
52 15 15 40 50 S611A052N3S
65 20 20 50 60 S611A065N3S
77 25 25 60 75 S611A077N3S
99 30 30 75 100 S611B099N3S
125 4040100125S611B125N3S
156 5060125150S611C156N3S
180 6060150150S611C180N3S
242 7575200250S611D242N3S
302 100 100 250 300 S611E302N3S
361 125 150 300 350 S611E361N3S
414 150 150 350 450 S611F414N3S
Maximum
Current (Amps)
Horsepower Rating
Catalog Number208V 240V 480V 600V
52 15 15 40 50 S611A052N3S
65 20 20 50 60 S611A065N3S
71 20 25 60 75 S611A077N3S
99 30 30 75 100 S611B099N3S
119 4040100125S611B125N3S
156 5060125150S611C156N3S
180 6060150150S611C180N3S
242 7575200250S611D242N3S
302 100 100 250 300 S611E302N3S
361 125 150 300 350 S611E361N3S
407 150 150 350 400 S611F414N3S
S611
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-53
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.4
Motor Control and Protection
Soft Starters
Note: Always refer to motor plate FLA and ensure that the motor plate FLA is equal to or lower than the
maximum current value in the tables.
Heavy Duty—500% FLA for 30 Seconds, 125% Continuous
Severe Duty—600% FLA for 30 Seconds, 125% Continuous
Accessories
Optional Accessory Kits
Maximum
Current (Amps)
Horsepower Rating
Catalog Number208V 240V 480V 600V
49 15 15 40 50 S611A052N3S
83 25 30 60 75 S611B099N3S
142 4060125150S611C156N3S
225 7575200200S611D242N3S
256 75 100 200 250 S611E361N3S
285 100 125 250 300 S611F414N3S
Maximum
Current (Amps)
Horsepower Rating
Catalog Number208V 240V 480V 600V
41 10 15 30 40 S611A052N3S
69 20 30 60 60 S611B099N3S
117 3050100125S611C180N3S
187 6075150200S611D242N3S
213 7575150200S611E361N3S
238 75 100 200 250 S611F414N3S
Description
S611 Current
Rating
Accessory Kit
Part Number
User interface remote mounting kit —3.28 ft (1m) 52–414A S611-RMK-100
User interface remote mounting kit—6.56 ft (2m) 52–414A S611-RMK-200
User interface remote mounting kit—9.84 ft (3m) 52–414A S611-RMK-300
User interface communication cable—3.28 ft (1m) 52–414A D77E-QPIP100
User interface communication cable—6.56 ft (2m) 52–414A D77E-QPIP200
User interface communication cable—9.84 ft (3m) 52–414A D77E-QPIP300
Lug kit—mechanical 52–77A S611-LUG-M01
99–125A S611-LUG-M02
156–242A S611-LUG-M03
302–414A S611-LUG-M04
S611
V9-T2-54 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.4
Motor Control and Protection
Soft Starters
Options
Pump Control
For pump control option, change the 8th digit in the Catalog Number to P,
as in S611XXXP3S.
Replacement Parts
S611 Replacement Components
Description Part Number
User interface S611-KEYPAD
User interface communication cable—0.25m (0.82 ft) D77E-QPIP25
Control board assembly—52A standard S611-PCB-052S
Control board assembly—65A standard S611-PCB-065S
Control board assembly—77A standard S611-PCB-077S
Control board assembly—99A standard S611-PCB-099S
Control board assembly—125A standard S611-PCB-125S
Control board assembly—156A standard S611-PCB-156S
Control board assembly—180A standard S611-PCB-180S
Control board assembly—242A standard S611-PCB-242S
Control board assembly—302A standard S611-PCB-302S
Control board assembly—361A standard S611-PCB-361S
Control board assembly—414A standard S611-PCB-414S
Control board assembly—52A pump S611-PCB-052P
Control board assembly—65A pump S611-PCB-065P
Control board assembly—77A pump S611-PCB-077P
Control board assembly—99A pump S611-PCB-099P
Control board assembly—125A pump S611-PCB-125P
Control board assembly—156A pump S611-PCB-156P
Control board assembly—180A pump S611-PCB-180P
Control board assembly—242A pump S611-PCB-242P
Control board assembly—302A pump S611-PCB-302P
Control board assembly—361A pump S611-PCB-361P
Control board assembly—414A pump S611-PCB-414P
Frame A/B CT S611-CT-AB
Frame C/D CT S611-CT-CD
Frame E/F CT S611-CT-EF
Contactor assembly—52–180A C25DNY172
Contactor assembly—242–414A C25DNY173
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-55
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.4
Motor Control and Protection
Soft Starters
S801+ Soft Starters
Features
●Smaller size
●Physically fits in place of most NEMA and IEC starters
●Built-in run bypass contactor
●Built-in overload protection
●Adjustable ramp times
●Adjustable kick start control
●Dial and DIP switch user interface (CIM)
●Alarm and warning capability
●Analog input
Catalog Number Selection
S801+ Soft Starter
S801+ Open Soft Starters 12
Notes
1S801+T_, S801+U_ and S801+V_ units require lug kits found on Pages V9-T2-63.
2All units require a 24 Vdc power supply found on catalog Pages V9-T2-63, or equivalent.
3S801+U50N3S unit does not have IEC certification.
S = Soft starter
801+ = Non-combination
soft starter
Ampere Rating
N37 = 37A
N66 = 66A
R10 = 105A
R13 = 135A
T18 = 180A
T24 = 240A
T30 = 304A
U36 = 360A
U42 = 420A
U50 = 500A 3
V36 = 360A
V42 = 420A
V50 = 500A
V65 = 650A
V72 = 720A
V85 = 850A
V10 = 1000A
S801+ N66 N 3 S
Number of Poles
3 = Three-pole device
Options
N = Standard
S = Standard soft starter
V9-T2-56 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.4
Motor Control and Protection
Soft Starters
Product Selection
Standard Duty
Standard Duty—15 Second Ramp, 300% Current Limit at 40°C, Inline Connection
Note
1 S801+U50N3S does not have IEC certification.
Max.
Current
Three-Phase Motors
Catalog
Number
kW Rating (50 Hz) hp Rating (60 Hz)
230V 380–400V 440V
200V 230V 460V 575–600V
1.0SF 1.15SF 1.0SF 1.15SF 1.0SF 1.15SF 1.0SF 1.15SF
Frame Size N
37 10 18.5 18.5 10 10 10 10 25 20 30 30 S801+N37N3S
66 18.5 30 37 20 15 20 20 50 40 60 50 S801+N66N3S
Frame Size R
105 30 55 59 30254030756010075S801+R10N3S
135 40 63 80 4030504010075125100S801+R13N3S
Frame Size T
180 51 90 110 60 50 60 60 150 125 150 150 S801+T18N3S
240 75 11014775607575200150200200S801+T24N3S
304 90 160 185 100 75 100 100 250 200 300 250 S801+T30N3S
Frame Size U
360 110 185 220 125 100 150 125 300 250 350 300 S801+U36N3S
420 129 220 257 150 125 175 150 350 300 450 350 S801+U42N3S
500 150 257 300 150 150 200 150 400 350 500 450 S801+U50N3S 1
Frame Size V
360 110 185 220 125 100 150 125 300 250 350 300 S801+V36N3S
420 129 220 257 150 125 175 150 350 300 450 350 S801+V42N3S
500 150 257 300 150 150 200 150 400 350 500 450 S801+V50N3S
650 200 355 425 250 200 250 200 500 450 600 500 S801+V65N3S
720 220 400 450 — — 300 250 600 500 700 600 S801+V72N3S
850 257 475 500 — — 350 300 700 600 900 700 S801+V85N3S
1000 277 525 550 — — 400 350 800 700 900 800 S801+V10N3S
S801+
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-57
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.4
Motor Control and Protection
Soft Starters
Severe Duty
Severe Duty—>30 Second Ramp, >300% Current Limit
Note
1 S801+U50N3S unit does not have IEC certification.
Max.
Current
Three-Phase Motor
Catalog
Number
kW Rating (50 Hz) hp Rating (60 Hz)
230V 380–400V 440V
200V 230V 460V 575V
1.0SF 1.15SF 1.0SF 1.15SF 1.0SF 1.15SF 1.0SF 1.15SF
Frame Size N
22 5.5 10 11 5 5 7-1/2 5 15 10 20 15 S801+N37N3S
42 11 18.522 1010151030254030S801+N66N3S
Frame Size R
65 15 30 33 15 15 20 15 50 40 50 50 S801+R10N3S
80 22 40 45 25 20 30 25 60 50 75 60 S801+R13N3S
Frame Size T
115 33 59 63 303040307575100100S801+T18N3S
150 45 80 90 50 40 50 50 100 100 150 125 S801+T24N3S
192 55 100 110 60 50 75 60 150 125 200 150 S801+T30N3S
Frame Size U
240 75 110 147 75 60 75 75 200 150 200 200 S801+U36N3S
305 90 160 185 100 75 100 100 250 200 300 250 S801+U42N3S
365 110 185 220 125 100 150 125 300 250 350 300 S801+U50N3S 1
Frame Size V
240 75 110 147 75 60 75 75 200 150 200 200 S801+V36N3S
305 90 160 185 100 75 100 100 250 200 300 250 S801+V42N3S
365 110 185 220 125 100 150 125 300 250 350 300 S801+V50N3S
420 129 220 257 150 125 150 150 350 300 450 350 S801+V65N3S
480 147 257 295 150 150 200 150 400 350 500 450 S801+V72N3S
525 160 280 335 150 150 200 150 450 350 500 450 S801+V85N3S
600 185 315 375 200 150 250 200 500 450 600 500 S801+V10N3S
S801+
V9-T2-58 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.4
Motor Control and Protection
Soft Starters
Type S811+ Soft Starters
Features
●Smaller size
●Physically fits in place of most NEMA and IEC starters
●Built-in run bypass contactor
●Built-in overload protection
●Adjustable ramp times
●Adjustable kick start control
●Native Modbus RTU and QCP communication
●kW and power factor measurement
●Cloning feature
●Alarm and warning capability
●Analog input
●Digital interface
●Pump control option
●Inside-the-delta capability
Catalog Number Selection
S811+ Soft Starter
S811+ Open Soft Starters 1
Notes
1All units require a 24 Vdc power supply found on catalog Page V9-T2-63, or equivalent.
2S811+T_, S811+U_ and S811+V_ units require lug kits found on Page V9-T2-63.
3S811+U50_ unit does not have IEC certification.
4Level/Edge Sense, Inline or Inside-the-Delta wiring configuration.
5Level/Edge Sense, Inline or Inside-the-Delta wiring configuration, pump control and extended ramp.
6Not available in S811+U_.
7Level/Edge Sense, Inline wiring configuration, pump control, extended ramp.
S811+ T30 N 3 S
Frame Size 2
N = 65 mm
R = 110 mm
T = 200 mm
U = 200 mm
V = 290 mm
Ampere Rating
37 = 37A
66 = 66A
10 = 105A
13 = 135A
18 = 180A
24 = 240A
30 = 304A
36 = 360A
42 = 420A
50 = 500A 3
65 = 650A
72 = 720A
85 = 850A
10 = 1000A
S = Soft starter
Number of Poles
3 = Three-pole device
Options
N = No options 4
P = Premium, 600V rated 5
V = Premium, 690V rated
(S811+T18V35 through
S811+V85V35) 67
S = Soft starter
811+ = Non-combination
soft starter
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-59
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.4
Motor Control and Protection
Soft Starters
Product Selection
Standard Duty
Standard Duty—15 Second Ramp, 300% Current Limit at 40°C, Inline Connection
Notes
1 690V is available only from S811+T18V3S through S811+V85V3S. Not available on S811+U…V3S.
2 S811+U5O_ rating does not have IEC certification.
Max.
Current
Three-Phase Motors
Catalog
Number
kW Rating (50 Hz) hp Rating (60 Hz)
230V 380–400V 440V
200V 230V 460V 575–690V 1
1.0SF 1.15SF 1.0SF 1.15SF 1.0SF 1.15SF 1.0SF 1.15SF
Frame Size N
37 10 18.5 18.5 10 10 10 10 25 20 30 30 S811+N37N3S
66 18.5 30 37 20 15 20 20 50 40 60 50 S811+N66N3S
Frame Size R
105 30 55 59 30254030756010075S811+R10N3S
135 40 63 80 40 30 50 40 100 75 125 100 S811+R13N3S
Frame Size T
180 51 90 110 60 50 60 60 150 125 150 150 S811+T18N3S
240 75 110 147 75 60 75 75 200 150 200 200 S811+T24N3S
304 90 160 185 100 75 100 100 250 200 300 250 S811+T30N3S
Frame Size U
360 110 185 220 125 100 150 125 300 250 350 300 S811+U36N3S
420 129 220 257 150 125 175 150 350 300 450 350 S811+U42N3S
500 150 257 300 150 150 200 150 400 350 500 450 S811+U50N3S 2
Frame Size V
360 110 185 220 125 100 150 125 300 250 350 300 S811+V36N3S
420 129 220 257 150 125 175 150 350 300 450 350 S811+V42N3S
500 150 257 300 150 150 200 150 400 350 500 450 S811+V50N3S
650 200 355 425 250 200 250 200 500 450 600 500 S811+V65N3S
720 220 400 450 — — 300 250 600 500 700 600 S811+V72N3S
850 257 475 500 — — 350 300 700 600 900 700 S811+V85N3S
1000 277 525 550 — — 400 350 800 700 900 800 S811+V10N3S
S811+
V9-T2-60 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.4
Motor Control and Protection
Soft Starters
Severe Duty
Severe Duty—30 Second Ramp and/or 450% Current Limit at 50°C, Inline Connection
Note
1 690V is available only from S811+T18V3S through S811+V85V3S. Not available on S811+U…V3S.
Max.
Current
Three-Phase Motors
Catalog
Number
kW Rating (50 Hz) hp Rating (60 Hz)
230V 380–400V 440V
200V 230V 460V 575–690V 1
1.0SF 1.15SF 1.0SF 1.15SF 1.0SF 1.15SF 1.0SF 1.15SF
Frame Size N
22 5.510 11 5 5 7-1/25 15102015S811+N37N3S
42 11 18.5 22 10 10 15 10 30 25 40 30 S811+N66N3S
Frame Size R
65 15 30 33 15 15 20 15 50 40 50 50 S811+R10N3S
80 22 40 45 25 20 30 25 60 50 75 60 S811+R13N3S
Frame Size T
115 33 59 63 303040307575100100S811+T18N3S
150 45 80 90 50405050100100150125S811+T24N3S
192 55 10011060507560150125200150S811+T30N3S
Frame Size U
240 75 11014775607575200150200200S811+U36N3S
305 90 160 185 100 75 100 100 250 200 300 250 S811+U42N3S
Frame Size V
240 75 11014775607575200150200200S811+V36N3S
305 90 160 185 100 75 100 100 250 200 300 250 S811+V42N3S
365 110 185 220 125 100 150 125 300 250 350 300 S811+V50N3S
420 129 220 257 150 125 150 150 350 300 450 350 S811+V65N3S
480 147 257 295 150 150 200 150 400 350 500 450 S811+V72N3S
525 160 280 335 150 150 200 150 450 350 500 450 S811+V85N3S
575 172 303 370 200 150 250 200 500 450 600 500 S811+V10N3S
S811+
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-61
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.4
Motor Control and Protection
Soft Starters
Inside-the-Delta, Standard Duty
Standard Duty—15 Second Ramp, 300% Current Limit at 40°C, Inside-the-Delta Connection
Notes
1 15 sec start, 300% inrush, 40°C, 1 start every 15 minutes. If these start parameters are exceeded, please refer to S811+V50_.
2 S811+U50_ unit does not have IEC certification.
Max.
Continuous
Motor Line
Current
Three-Phase Motor
Catalog
Number
kW Rating (50 Hz) hp Rating (60 Hz)
230V 380–400V 440V
200V 230V 460V 575V
1.0SF 1.15SF 1.0SF 1.15SF 1.0SF 1.15SF 1.0SF 1.15SF
Frame Size N
65 10 18.5 18.5 15 15 15 15 40 30 50 50 S811+N37N3S
114 18.530 37 30253030756010075S811+N66N3S
Frame Size R
182 3055 59 50406050125100150125S811+R10N3S
234 4063 80 60507560150125200150S811+R13N3S
Frame Size T
311 51 90 110 100 75 100 100 250 200 250 250 S811+T18N3S
415 75 110 147 125 100 125 125 300 250 300 300 S811+T24N3S
526 90 160 185 150 125 150 150 400 300 400 400 S811+T30N3S
Frame Size U
623 110 185 220 200 150 250 200 450 400 550 450 S811+U36N3S
727 129 220 257 250 200 300 250 550 450 700 550 S811+U42N3S
865 150 257 300 250 250 300 250 600 550 750 700 S811+U50N3S 12
Frame Size V
623 110 185 220 200 150 250 200 450 400 550 450 S811+V36N3S
727 129 220 257 250 200 300 250 550 450 700 550 S811+V42N3S
865 150 257 300 250 250 300 250 600 550 750 700 S811+V50N3S
1125 200 355 425 400 300 400 300 750 700 900 750 S811+V65N3S
1246 —— — ————————S811+V72N3S
1471 —— — ————————S811+V85N3S
— —— — ————————S811+V10N3S
S811+
V9-T2-62 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.4
Motor Control and Protection
Soft Starters
Inside-the-Delta, Severe Duty
Severe Duty—30 Second Ramp and/or 450% Current Limit at 50°C, Inside-the-Delta Connection
Note
1 S811+U50_ unit does not have IEC certification.
Max.
Continuous
Motor Line
Current
Three-Phase Motor
Catalog
Number
kW Rating (50 Hz) hp Rating (60 Hz)
230V 380–400V 440V
200V 230V 460V 575V
1.0SF 1.15SF 1.0SF 1.15SF 1.0SF 1.15SF 1.0SF 1.15SF
Frame Size N
39 5.5 10 11 7-1/2 7-1/2 10 7-1/2 25 15 30 25 S811+N37N3S
73 11 18.5 22 15 15 25 15 50 40 60 50 S811+N66N3S
Frame Size R
111 1530 33 2525302575607575S811+R10N3S
138 2240 45 4030504010075120100S811+R13N3S
Frame Size T
199 3359 63 50506050125125150150S811+T18N3S
257 4580 90 75607575150150250200S811+T24N3S
324 55 100 110 100 75 100 100 250 200 300 250 S811+T30N3S
Frame Size U
415 75 110 147 125 100 125 125 300 250 300 300 S811+U36N3S
526 90 160 185 150 120 150 150 400 300 450 400 S811+U42N3S
623 110 185 220 200 150 250 200 450 400 550 450 S811+U50N3S 1
Frame Size V
415 75 110 147 125 100 125 125 300 250 300 300 S811+V36N3S
526 90 160 185 150 120 150 150 400 300 450 400 S811+V42N3S
623 110 185 220 200 150 250 200 450 400 550 450 S811+V50N3S
727 129 220 257 250 200 250 250 550 450 700 550 S811+V65N3S
816 147 257 295 250 250 300 250 600 550 750 700 S811+V72N3S
908 160 280 335 250 250 300 250 700 550 750 700 S811+V85N3S
— —— — ————————S811+V10N3S
S811+
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-63
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.4
Motor Control and Protection
Soft Starters
Accessories
Lug Kits
S811+T_, S811U_ and
S811+V_ soft starters each
have different lug options
based on your wiring needs.
Each lug kit contains three
lugs that can be mounted on
either the load or line side.
Lug Kits
Power Supplies
24 Vdc power supply that can
be used with the S811+ SSRV
or as a stand-alone device.
Power Supplies
Lug Cover Kits
Replacement covers for the
S811+T_, S811+U_ and
S811+V_ soft starters are
available in case of damage to
the existing covers.
Lug Cover Kits
IP20 Kits
IP20 Kits
Surge Suppressors
The surge suppressor can
mount on either the line or
load side of the soft starter. It
is designed to clip the line
voltage (or load side induced
voltage).
Surge Suppressors
Notes
1The EML33 does not have a CSA listing.
2S811+T_ only.
S811+
Catalog Number Description
Kits
Required
Catalog
Number
S811+T_,
S811+U_
2 cable connections, 4 AWG to 1/0 cable 2 EML22
1 cable connection, 4/0 to 500 kcmil cable EML23
2 cable connections, 4/0 to 500 kcmil cable EML24
1 cable connection, 2/0 to 300 kcmil cable EML25
2 cable connections, 2/0 to 300 kcmil cable EML26
S811+V_ 2 cable connections, 4/0 to 500 kcmil cable 2 EML28
4 cable connections, 4/0 to 500 kcmil cable EML30
6 cable connections, 4/0 to 500 kcmil cable EML32
4 cable connections, 2/0 to 300 kcmil cable EML33 1
Lug Kit
Description
Catalog
Number
85–264 Vac input
24 Vdc output
PSG240E
360–575 Vac input
24 Vdc output
PSG240F
Description
Catalog
Number
Lug cover S811+T_, S811+U_ EML27
Lug cover S811+V_ EML34
Description
Catalog
Number
S811+N_ SS-IP20-N
S811+R_ SS-IP20-R
S811+T_ and S811+U_ SS-IP20-TU
S811+V_ SS-IP20-V
Description
Catalog
Number
600V MOV for S811+_ units EMS39
690V MOV for S811+_ units 2EMS41
Surge Suppressor
V9-T2-64 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.4
Motor Control and Protection
Soft Starters
Mounting Plates
The mounting plates are
designed to help make it easy
to install or retrofit the soft
starter into enclosures and
MCCs. The soft starter can
be mounted onto the plate
prior to installation. The
mounting plate is designed
with tear drop mounting
holes for easier installation.
Mounting Plates
Vibration Plates
The vibration plates allow the
soft starter to be applied in
high shock and vibration
applications. The vibration
plate allows vibration up to 5g
and shock in up to 40g. The
soft starter is mounted onto
the vibration plate prior to
installation in the panel.
Vibration Plates
Adapter Plates
The adapter plate allows
customers to retrofit a
S811+V_ soft starter with the
S811+U_ soft starter.
Adapter Plates
Control Wire Connector
Control Wire Connector
Digital Interface Module
The Digital Interface
Module (DIM) is available
as a replacement part.
DIM
Options
S811+ Premium
In addition to what is already
there in the S811+ standard,
these devices offer pump
control and extended ramp
functions.
S811+ Premium
S811+ Premium 690V Option
In addition to what is already
there in S811+ standard, this
product offers 690V, pump
control and extended ramp
functions.
S811+ Premium 690V
Option
Cooling Fan Kit
The EMM18 cooling fan kit
mounts on either side of
any frame size S811+ soft
starter to provide additional
printed circuit board cooling in
high ambient operating
temperatures.
Cooling Fan Kit
Note
1S811+U50_ unit does not have IEC certification.
Description
Catalog
Number
S811+N_ EMM13N
S811+R_ EMM13R
S811+T_ and S811+U_ EMM13T
S811+V_ EMM13V
Description
Catalog
Number
S811+N_ EMM14N
S811+R_ EMM14R
S811+T_ and S811+U_ EMM14T
S811+V_ EMM14V
Description
Catalog
Number
Adapter plates EMM13U
Description
Catalog
Number
12-pin, 5 mm pitch connector
for control wiring
EMA75
Description
Catalog
Number
Blank cover (filler) EMA68
DIM for standard unit EMA91
Panel mounting kit
3 ft cable EMA69A
5 ft cable EMA69B
8 ft cable EMA69C
10 ft cable EMA69D
Current
Range
Catalog
Number
11–37 S811+N37P3S
20–66 S811+N66P3S
32–105 S811+R10P3S
42–135 S811+R13P3S
56–180 S811+T18P3S
75–240 S811+T24P3S
95–304 S811+T30P3S
112–360 S811+U36P3S
131–420 S811+U42P3S
156–500 S811+U50P3S 1
112–360 S811+V36P3S
131–420 S811+V42P3S
156–500 S811+V50P3S
203–650 S811+V65P3S
225–720 S811+V72P3S
265–850 S811+V85P3S
312–1000 S811+V10P3S
Current
Range
Catalog
Number
56–180 S811+T18V3S
75–240 S811+T24V3S
95–304 S811+T30V3S
112–360 S811+V36V3S
131–420 S811+V42V3S
156–500 S811+V50V3S
203–650 S811+V65V3S
225–720 S811+V72V3S
265–850 S811+V85V3S
Description
Catalog
Number
Fan kit EMM18
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-65
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.5
Motor Control and Protection
Drives
Product Overview
Drives Selection Guide
Description M-Max Machinery Drives SVX9000 Drives
Page V9-T2-66 Page V9-T2-68
Frame
FS1 FS2 FS3 FR4 FR5 FR6 FR7 FR8 FR9
Dimensions (in Inches)
Height 6.16 7.68 10.33 12.9 16.5 2.2 24.8 30.1 45.3
Width 2.58 3.54 3.94 5 5.6 7.6 9.3 11.5 18.9
Depth 4.02 4.13 4.41 7.5 8.4 9.3 10.1 13.5 13.4
I/O
Six digital inputs
Two analog inputs (V and mA)
One analog output
One digital output
Two relay outputs
RS-485 interface (Modbus RTU)
Six digital inputs
Two analog inputs (V and mA)
Two digital outputs, form C relays
One digital output, open collector
One analog output
Varied communication options
V9-T2-66 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.5
Motor Control and Protection
Drives
M-Max Machinery Drive
Features
●Ease of use—plug and play, start-up wizard, advanced
diagnostic capability, copy/paste parameters without
powering drive
●Compact, space-saving design
●Availability—short lead-times, stocked at multiple locations
●Aftermarket support organization with industry-leading drive
specialists for pre- and post-sale support
●Rugged and reliable—50°C rating, 150% overload for one
min., 200% starting current for two secs. in every 20 sec.
period, conformal coated boards, two year warranty
●RoHS compliance
Catalog Number Selection
M-Max™ Machinery Drive
Machinery Drive
Software
Designation Series
AA
Base Catalog Number
MMX 1 1 AA 1D1 F1–0
Phase
1 = Single-phase
3 = Three-phase
Voltage
1 = 115V
2 = 230V
4 = 480V
Output Current
1D6 = 1.6A
010 = 10A
EMC Filter
F= Filter
N= No filter
Enclosure Class
0 = NEMA 0 or IP00
1 = IP21 or NEMA 1
Option
0 = Full version
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-67
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.5
Motor Control and Protection
Drives
Product Selection
M-Max Machinery Drive
Accessories
Kits
Optional Communication Modules
P (kW) P (hp) IN (A) Catalog Number P (kW) P (hp) IN (A) Catalog Number
Input 115V Single-Phase Out 230V Three-Phase Input 480V Three-Phase Out 480V Three-Phase
0.25 0.33 1.7 MMX11AA1D7N0-0 0.37 0.5 1.3 MMX34AA1D3F0-0
0.37 0.5 2.4 MMX11AA2D4N0-0 0.55 0.75 1.9 MMX34AA1D9F0-0
0.55 0.75 2.8 MMX11AA2D8N0-0 0.75 1 2.4 MMX34AA2D4F0-0
0.75 1 3.7 MMX11AA3D7N0-0 1.1 1.5 3.3 MMX34AA3D3F0-0
1.1 1.5 4.8 MMX11AA4D8F0-0 1.5 2 4.3 MMX34AA4D3F0-0
Input 230V Single-Phase Out 230V Three-Phase 2.2 3 5.6 MMX34AA5D6F0-0
0.25 0.33 1.7 MMX12AA1D7F0-0 347.6 MMX34AA7D6F0-0
0.37 0.5 2.4 MMX12AA2D4F0-0 45.59 MMX34AA9D0F0-0
0.55 0.75 2.8 MMX12AA2D8F0-0 5.5 7.5 12 MMX34AA012F0-0
0.75 1 3.7 MMX12AA3D7F0-0 7.5 10 14 MMX34AA014F0-0
1.1 1.5 4.8 MMX12AA4D8F0-0 Input 575V Three-Phase Out 575V Three-Phase
1.5 2 7 MMX12AA7D0F0-0 11.72 MMX35AA1D7N0-0
2.2 3 9.6 MMX12AA9D6F0-0 22.73.6 MMX35AA2D7N0-0
Input 230V Three-Phase Out 230V Three-Phase 33.95 MMX35AA3D9N0-0
0.25 0.33 1.7 MMX32AA1D7N0-0 56.17.6 MMX35AA6D1N0-0
0.37 0.5 2.4 MMX32AA2D4N0-0 7.5 9 10.4 MMX35AA9D0N0-0
0.55 0.75 2.8 MMX32AA2D8N0-0
0.75 1 3.7 MMX32AA3D7N0-0
1.1 1.5 4.8 MMX32AA4D8F0-0
1.5 2 7 MMX32AA7D0F0-0
2.2 3 11 MMX32AA011F0-0
Description Catalog Number
Drive to PC communication module MMX-COM-PC
Type 1 and IP21 kit for Frame 1 MMX-IP21-FS1
Type 1 and IP21 kit for Frame 2 MMX-IP21-FS2
Type 1 and IP21 kit for Frame 3 MMX-IP21-FS3
Description Catalog Number
Communication adapter kit MMX-NET-XA
CANopen network card XMX-NET-CO-A
PROFIBUS DP network card with serial connection XMX-NET-PS-A
PROFIBUS DP network card with sub-D connection XMX-NET-PD-A
DeviceNet network card XMX-NET-DN-A
V9-T2-68 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.5
Motor Control and Protection
Drives
SVX9000 Drives
Features
●Integrated 3% line reactors standard on drives from FR4
through FR9
●EMI/RFI filters standard up to 200 hp IH 480V, 100 hp IH 230V
●Quick start wizard built into the programming of the drive
ensures a smooth start-up
●LOCAL/REMOTE operation from keypad
●Copy/paste function allows transfer of parameter settings
from one drive to the next
●Standard Type 12 keypad on all drives
●Hand-held auxiliary 240V power supply allows programming/
monitoring of control module without applying full power to
the drive
Catalog Number Selection
SVX9000 Drives
SVX9000
Notes
1480V drives 250 hp (IH) and larger are available with enclosure style 0 (chassis); 690V drives 200 hp (IH) and larger are available with enclosure style 0 (chassis).
2480V and 690V FR10 freestanding drives are available with enclosure style 1 (NEMA Type 1) and enclosure style 2 (NEMA Type 12). FR11 freestanding drives only
available with enclosure style 1 (NEMA Type 1).
3All 230V drives and 480V drives up to 200 hp (IH) are only available with input option 1 (EMC level H). 480V drives 250 hp (IH) or larger are available with input
option 2 (EMC level N). 480V drives are available with input option 4 (EMC level L). 575V drives 200 hp (IH) or larger are only available with input option 2.
575V drives up to 150 hp (IH) are only available with input option 4 (EMC level L).
4480V drives up to 30 hp (IH) are only available with brake chopper option B. 480V drives 40 hp (IH) or larger come standard with brake chopper option N.
230V drives up to 15 hp (IH) are only available with brake chopper option B. 230V drives 20 hp or larger come standard with brake chopper option N.
All 575V drives come standard without brake chopper option (N). N = No brake chopper.
______
Options
Options appear in alphabetical order.
Extended I/O Card Options
B1 = 6 DI, 1 ext +24 Vdc/EXT +24 Vdc
B2 = 1 RO (NC-NO), 1 RO (NO), 1 therm
B4 = 1 AI (mA isolated), 2 AO (mA isolated),
1 ext +24 Vdc/EXT + 24 Vdc
B5 = 3 RO (NO)
B8 = 1 ext +24 Vdc/EXT +24 Vdc, 3 Pt100
B9 = 1 RO (NO), 5 DI 42–240 Vac input
Communication Cards
CA = Johnson Controls® N2
CI = Modbus TCP
CJ = BACnet®
CK = Ethernet IP
C2 = Modbus
C3 = PROFIBUS DP
C4 = LonWorks®
C5 = PROFIBUS DP (D9 connector)
C6 = CANopen (slave)
C7 = DeviceNet
C8 = Modbus (D9 Type connector)
D3 = RS-232 with D9 connection
Board Modifications
1 = Standard boards
2 = Conformal (varnished) coating
Brake Chopper Options 4
N= No brake chopper circuit
B= Internal brake chopper circuit
Input Options 3
1 = Three-phase, EMC H
2 = Three-phase, EMC N
4 = Three-phase, EMC L
Keypad
A = Alphanumeric
AFD Software Series
A = Standard software
Enclosure 12
0 = Chassis
1 = NEMA Type 1
2 = NEMA Type 12
Voltage Rating
2 = 230 (208–240) V
4 = 480 (380–500) V
5 = 575 (525–690) V
Product Family
SVX = Open drives
SVX = Open drives FR10 and greater
Horsepower Rating
F07 = 3/4 hp
F15 = 1-1/2 hp
007 = 7-1/2 hp
010 = 10 hp
050 = 50 hp
125 = 125 hp
350 = 350 hp
700 = 700 hp
800 = 800 hp
900 = 900 hp
H10 = 1000 hp
H12 = 1200 hp
H13 = 1350 hp
H15 = 1500 hp
H16 = 1600 hp
H20 = 2000 hp
SVX 010 A 1 –4A 1 B 1
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-69
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.5
Motor Control and Protection
Drives
Product Selection
208–240V, Type 1 Drive
380–500V, Type 1 Drive
525–690V, Type 1 Drive
Frame
Size
Delivery
Code
hp
(IH)
Current
(IH)
hp
(IL)
Current
(IL) Catalog Number
FR4 W 3/4 3.7 1 4.8 SVXF07A1-2A1B1
1 4.8 1-1/2 6.6 SVX001A1-2A1B1
1-1/2 6.6 2 7.8 SVXF15A1-2A1B1
27.8311SVX002A1-2A1B1
311—12.5SVX003A1-2A1B1
FR5 W — 12.5 5 17.5 SVX004A1-2A1B1
517.57-1/225SVX005A1-2A1B1
7-1/2 25 10 31 SVX007A1-2A1B1
FR6 W 10 31 15 48 SVX010A1-2A1B1
15 48 20 61 SVX015A1-2A1B1
FR7 W 20 61 25 75 SVX020A1-2A1N1
25 75 30 88 SVX025A1-2A1N1
30 88 40 114 SVX030A1-2A1N1
FR8 W 40 114 50 140 SVX040A1-2A1N1
50 140 60 170 SVX050A1-2A1N1
60 170 75 205 SVX060A1-2A1N1
FR9 W 75 205 100 261 SVX075A1-2A1N1
100 261 — — SVX100A1-2A1N1
Frame
Size
Delivery
Code
hp
(IH)
Current
(IH)
hp
(IL)
Current
(IL) Catalog Number
FR4 W 1 2.2 1-1/2 3.3 SVX001A1-4A1B1
1-1/2 3.3 2 4.3 SVXF15A1-4A1B1
24.335.6SVX002A1-4A1B1
35.657.6SVX003A1-4A1B1
57.6—9 SVX005A1-4A1B1
— 9 7-1/2 12 SVX006A1-4A1B1
FR5 W 7-1/2 12 10 16 SVX007A1-4A1B1
10 16 15 23 SVX010A1-4A1B1
15 23 20 31 SVX015A1-4A1B1
FR6 W 20 31 25 38 SVX020A1-4A1B1
25 38 30 46 SVX025A1-4A1B1
30 46 40 61 SVX030A1-4A1B1
FR7 W 40 61 50 72 SVX040A1-4A1N1
50 72 60 87 SVX050A1-4A1N1
60 87 75 105 SVX060A1-4A1N1
FR8 W 75 105 100 140 SVX075A1-4A1N1
100 140 125 170 SVX100A1-4A1N1
125 170 150 205 SVX125A1-4A1N1
FR9W 150205 200261 SVX150A1-4A1N1
200 245 250 300 SVX200A1-4A1N1
Frame
Size
Delivery
Code
hp
(IH)
Current
(IH)
hp
(IL)
Current
(IL) Catalog Number
FR6 W 2 3.33 3 4.5 SVX002A1-5A4N1
3 4.5 — 5.5 SVX003A1-5A4N1
— 5.5 5 7.5 SVX004A1-5A4N1
5 7.5 7-1/2 10 SVX005A1-5A4N1
7-1/2 10 10 13.5 SVX007A1-5A4N1
10 13.5 15 18 SVX010A1-5A4N1
15 18 20 22 SVX015A1-5A4N1
20 22 25 27 SVX020A1-5A4N1
25 27 30 34 SVX025A1-5A4N1
FR7 W 30 34 40 41 SVX030A1-5A4N1
40 41 50 52 SVX040A1-5A4N1
FR8 W 50 52 60 62 SVX050A1-5A4N1
60 62 75 80 SVX060A1-5A4N1
75 80 100 100 SVX075A1-5A4N1
FR9 W 100 100 125 125 SVX100A1-5A4N1
125 125 150 144 SVX125A1-5A4N1
150 144 — 170 SVX150A1-5A4N1
— 170 200 208 SVX175A1-5A4N1
V9-T2-70 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.5
Motor Control and Protection
Drives
Accessories
Option Board Kits
Notes
1AI = Analog Input; AO = Analog Output, DI = Digital Input, DO = Digital Output, RO = Relay Output.
2Option card must be installed in one of the slots listed for that card. Slot indicated in bold is the preferred location.
3OPTC2 is a multi-protocol option card.
Option Kit Description 1
Allowed Slot
Locations 2
Field Installed
Catalog Number
Factory Installed
Option Designator
SVX Ready
Programs Basic
Standard I/O Cards
2 RO (NC/NO) B OPTA2 —X
6 DI, 1 DO, 2 AI, 1AO, 1 +10 Vdc Ref, 2 Ext +24 Vdc/Ext +24 Vdc A OPTA9 —X
Extended I/O Card Options
2 RO, therm—SPX only B OPTA3 A3 —
Encoder low volt +5V/15V/24V—SPX only C OPTA4 A4 —
Encoder high volt +15V/24V—SPX only C OPTA5 A5 —
Double encoder—SPX only C OPTA7 A7 X
6 DI, 1 DO, 2 AI, 1 AO—SPX only A OPTA8 A8 —
3 DI (encoder 10–24V), out +15V/+24V, 2 DO (pulse+direction)—SPX only C OPTAE AE X
6 DI, 1 ext +24 Vdc/Ext +24 Vdc B, C, D, E OPTB1 B1 —
1 RO (NC/NO), 1 RO (NO), 1 therm B, C, D, E OPTB2 B2 —
1 AI (mA isolated), 2 AO (mA isolated), 1 Ext +24 Vdc/Ext +24 Vdc B, C, D, E OPTB4 B4 X
3 RO (NO) B, C, D, E OPTB5 B5 —
1 Ext +24 Vdc/Ext +24 Vdc, 3 Pt100 B, C, D, E OPTB8 B8 —
1 RO (NO), 5 DI 42–240 Vac input B, C, D, E OPTB9 B9 —
Communication Cards
Modbus D, E OPTC2 C2 X
Johnson Controls N2 3D, E OPTC2 CA —
Modbus TCP D, E OPTCI CI X
BACnet D, E OPTCJ CJ X
Ethernet IP D, E OPTCK CK X
PROFIBUS DP D, E OPTC3 C3 X
LonWorks D, E OPTC4 C4 X
PROFIBUS DP (D9 connector) D, E OPTC5 C5 X
DeviceNet D, E OPTC7 C7 X
Modbus (D9 type connector) D, E OPTC8 C8 X
Adapter—SPX only D, EOPTD1D1 X
Adapter—SPX only D, EOPTD2D2 X
RS-232 with D9 connection D, EOPTD3D3 X
Keypad
9000X series local/remote keypad (replacement keypad) — KEYPAD-LOC/REM ——
9000X series remote mount keypad unit (keypad not included, includes 10 ft cable,
keypad holder, mounting hardware)
—OPTRMT-KIT-9000X ——
9000X Series RS-232 cable, 13 ft — PP00104 ——
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-71
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.5
Motor Control and Protection
Drives
Miscellaneous Options
NEMA Type 12 Conversion Kit
Note: The NEMA Type 12 kit option is used to convert a NEMA Type 1 to a NEMA Type 12 drive. The NEMA
Type 12 kit consists of a metal drive shroud, fan kit for some frames, adapter plate and plugs.
Description Catalog Number
9000XDrive
A PC-based tool for controlling and monitoring of the SVX9000. Features include: loading parameters that can be
saved to a file or printed, setting references, starting and stopping the motor, monitoring signals in graphical or
text form, and real-time display. To avoid damage to the drive or computer, SVDrivecable must be used.
9000XDRIVE
SVDrivecable
6 ft (1.8m) RS-232 cable (22 gauge) with a 7-pin connector on each end. Should be used in conjunction with the
9000XDrive option to avoid damage to the SVX9000 or computer. The same cable can be used for downloading
specialized applications to the drive.
SVDRIVECABLE
Frame
Size
Delivery
Code
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Approximate Weight
in lb (kg) Catalog NumberLength Width Height
FR4 W 13 (330) 7 (178) 4 (102) 4 (1.8) OPTN12FR4
FR5 W 16 (406) 8 (203) 7 (178) 5 (2.3) OPTN12FR5
FR6 W 21 (533) 10 (254) 5 (127) 7 (3.2) OPTN12FR6
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-1
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Logic Devices
Preset Counters
Hour Meters
XC152 PLCs
Encoders
XV HMI-PLCs
Relays
easy Programmable Relay
3.1 Relays
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T3-2
Terminal Block Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T3-8
General Purpose Plug-In Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T3-9
General Purpose Type AA Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T3-23
XTRE Control Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T3-24
Solid-State Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T3-26
TR Series Timing Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T3-29
3.2 Programmable Controllers
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T3-33
Fusion Integrated Machine Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T3-36
easy Programmable Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T3-37
easy802/806 Programmable Relays with SmartWire-DT . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T3-41
XC152 PLCs with and without SmartWire-DT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T3-42
XV Series HMI-PLCs with and without SmartWire-DT . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T3-44
ELC Series Programmable Logic Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T3-46
3.3 Preset Counters
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T3-49
1/16 DIN LCD Preset Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T3-50
1/18 DIN Eclipse Series Preset Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T3-51
3.4 Ratemeters
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T3-52
Courier Series Battery Powered Ratemeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T3-53
Eclipse Series 1/8 DIN LED Ratemeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T3-54
3.5 Hour Meters
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T3-55
Electromechanical Hour Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T3-56
Electronic LCD Hour Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T3-57
3.6 Totalizers
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T3-58
Electromechanical Totalizers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T3-59
Electronic 1/32 DIN Totalizers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T3-60
Electronic Courier Series Battery Powered LCD Totalizers . . . . . . . . . V9-T3-61
Electronic 1/8 DIN LED Totalizers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T3-62
3.7 Encoders
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T3-63
Shaft Encoders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T3-64
For our complete product offering, see Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and
Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E and PG05400001E
V9-T3-2 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.1
Logic Devices
Relays
Product Overview
Relays Selection Guide
For our complete product offering, see Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E and
PG05400001E.
Description XR Series Terminal Block Relays D1 Series D2 Series
Page V9-T3-8 Page V9-T3-9 Page V9-T3-11
Approvals
Features Pluggable relay allows easy field replacement,
LED indicator standard, functional plug-in
bridges available
Only 6.2 mm wide for SP and
14 mm wide for DP
DIN rail mounting
Polycarbonate cover
Indicator lamp and pushbutton available
Panel and DIN mounting
Polycarbonate cover
Indicator lamp and pushbutton available
Panel, DIN and flange mounting
Latching
Contact Data
Configuration SPDT DPDT OctoCoupler SPDT DPDT DPDT Latching 4PDT
Maximum allowable load 6A or 10A 6A 2A 20A 10A 10A 10A
Material — Silver alloy Silver alloy
Dielectric strength between poles — 1500V 1500V
Coil Data
AC 24 Vac or 120 Vac 6–240 Vac 6–240 Vac
DC 12, 24, 110 Vdc 6–110 Vdc 6–110 Vdc
Power
VA (Vac) 1.5 0.9 VA 1.2 VA
Watts (Vdc) 0.12 0.7 Watts 0.9 Watts
General Data
Ambient temperature
Storage — –40° to 185°F (–40° to 85°C) –40° to 185°F (–40° to 85°C)
Operational –4° to 140°F (–20° to 60°C) –40° to 131°F (–40° to 55°C) –40° to 131°F (–40° to 55°C)
Response time Available upon request 20 milliseconds 20 milliseconds
Life
Mechanical operations 20 million 10 million 10 million
Electrical operations — 100,000 200,000
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.1
Logic Devices
Relays
Relays Selection Guide, continued
For our complete product offering, see Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E and
PG05400001E.
Description D3 Series D4 Series D5 Series
Page V9-T3-13 Page V9-T3-15 Page V9-T3-16
Approvals
Features Polycarbonate cover
Indicator lamp and pushbutton available
Panel and DIN mounting
8- or 11-pin octal plug-in
Latching (D3PR version)
Polycarbonate cover
Indicator lamp available
Panel and DIN mounting
Socket has built-in hold-down spring
Polycarbonate cover
Indicator lamp and pushbutton available
Panel, DIN and PC board mounting
Contact Data
Configuration DPDT 3PDT SPDT DPDT DPDT 3PDT
Maximum allowable load 16A 16A 16A 10A at 250 Vac 5A at 240 Vac 16A 16A
Material Silver alloy AgCdO Silver alloy
Dielectric strength between poles 1500V 5000V 1500V
Coil Data
AC 6–240 Vac 6–240 Vac 6–240 Vac
DC 6–110 Vdc 6–110 Vdc 6–110 Vdc
Power
VA (Vac) 3 VA,1.4 Watts (D3PRand DPF) 0.9 VA 3 VA
Watts (Vdc) 2 VA 1.64 Watts (D3PR5 latching) 0.5 Watts 1.4 Watts
General Data
Ambient temperature
Storage –40° to 185°F (–40° to 85°C) –40° to 158°F (–40° to 70°C) –40° to 185°F (–40° to 85°C)
Operational –40° to 131°F (–40° to 55°C) –40° to 158°F (–40° to 70°C) –40° to 131°F (–40° to 55°C)
Response time 20 milliseconds 15 milliseconds 206 milliseconds
Life
Mechanical operations 5 million (D3PR and D3PF)
10 million (D3PR5 latching)
10 million 5 million
Electrical operations 100,000 100,000 100,000
V9-T3-4 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.1
Logic Devices
Relays
Relays Selection Guide, continued
For our complete product offering, see Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E and
PG05400001E.
Description D7 Series D8 Series D9 Series
Page V9-T3-18 Page V9-T3-20 Page V9-T3-22
Approvals
Features Polycarbonate cover
Indicator lamp and pushbutton available
Panel, DIN and flange mounting
Dust cover
Panel, DIN and flange mounting
Quick-connect and screw terminals
Dust cover
Pushbutton available
Panel mounting
Screw terminals
Contact Data
Configuration 4PST
SPDT DPDP 3PDT 4PDT SPST-NO DPST-NO NO NC
Maximum allowable load 20A 15A 15A 15A 30A at 220 Vac 25A at 220 Vac 25A at 220 Vac 8A at 220 Vac
Material Silver alloy AgCdO AgCdO
Dielectric strength between poles 1500V 1500V 2500V 2500V 4000V 4000V
Coil Data
AC 6–240 Vac 6–240 Vac 24–240 Vac
DC 6–110 Vdc 12–24 Vdc 12–110 Vdc
Power
VA (Vac) 1.2 VA 1.2 VA 1.5 VA 1.5 VA 2.5 VA 2.6 VA
Watts (Vdc) 0.9 Watts 0.9 Watts 1.4 Watts 1.5 Watts 1.9 Watts 2.0 Watts
General Data
Ambient temperature
Storage –40° to 185°F (–40° to 85°C) –4° to 185°F (–20° to 85°C) –13° to 140°F (–25° to 60°C)
Operational –40° to 131°F (–40° to 55°C) –4° to 131°F (–20° to 55°C) –13° to 140°F (–25° to 60°C)
Response time 20 milliseconds (30 milliseconds for latching) 30 milliseconds 50 milliseconds
Life
Mechanical operations 10 million 5 million 1 million
Electrical operations 100,000 100,000 200,000 200,000 100,000 100,000
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-5
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.1
Logic Devices
Relays
Relays Selection Guide, continued
For our complete product offering, see Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E and
PG05400001E.
Description Type AA Series XTRE Series D93 Series
Page V9-T3-23 Page V9-T3-24 Page V9-T3-26
Approvals
Features Available blowout magnets for high DC
switching
Available auxiliary switches
Combo head screws for simple hook-up
Riveted construction for long service life
Four-pole configurations
IP20 finger and back-of-hand proof
Positively driven contacts between the relay and
auxiliary contact modules as well as within the
auxiliary contact modules
All solid-state circuitry with no moving parts to
wear
Compact, panel mounting for flexible installation
Isolated input and output terminals to protect the
system from electrical noise
Internal snubber circuitry to protect the SSR from
transients
Contact Data
Configuration DPDT NO-NC variations in a four-pole relay
plus four-pole auxiliary module
SPST-NO (Triac, Zero-cross or MOSFET)
Maximum allowable load 40A 16A 10–75A
Material Silver cadmium oxide, gold flashed — —
Dielectric strength between pole 1500V 6000 Vac 4000 Vac
Coil Data
AC 6–600 Vac 12–600 Vac 90–280 Vac
DC 6–220 Vdc 24–240 Vdc 3–32 Vdc
Power
VA (Vac) 10 VA 3.3 VA Available upon request
Watts (Vdc) 4 Watts 3 Watts Available upon request
General Data
Ambient temperature
Storage –40° to 185°F (–40° to 85°C) –40° to 176° (–40° to 80°C) –40° to 100°C
Operational –40° to 131°F (–40° to 55°C) –13° to 140°F (–25° to 60°C) –40° to 80°C
Response time 35/50 milliseconds 12/31 milliseconds Available upon request
Life
Mechanical operations — 20 million —
Electrical operations 6000 100,000 —
V9-T3-6 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.1
Logic Devices
Relays
Relays Selection Guide, continued
For our complete product offering, see Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E and
PG05400001E.
Description D96 Series D99 Series Universal TR Series
Page V9-T3-27 Page V9-T3-28 Page V9-T3-29
Approvals
Features All solid-state circuitry has no moving parts to
wear
Integral heat sink eliminates the need for added
accessories and installation
Flexible mounting allows DIN rail or panel
mounting without additional hardware or tools
Isolated input and output terminals protect the
system from electrical noise
Internal snubber circuitry protects the SSR from
transients
All solid-state circuitry has no moving parts to
wear
Integral heat sink eliminates the need for added
accessories and installation
Flexible mounting allows DIN rail or panel
mounting without additional hardware or tools
Isolated input and output terminals protect the
system from electrical noise
Internal snubber circuitry protects the SSR from
transients
Multiple user-selectable timing functions and
timing ranges in a single unit reduce product
variations and stock keeping units (SKUs)
Universal input voltages from 12 or 24–240 Vac or
Vdc eliminate the need to order and stock separate
coil voltages
Compact, DIN rail mountable case reduces panel
size
Advanced LED indication makes troubleshooting
easy
Staggered terminal locations allow access to
lower-level terminals after wiring
SPDT or DPDT contacts with 8A ratings
Contact Data
Configuration SPST-NO (DC switch, zero-cross or random) SPST-NO (zero cross) SPDT and DPDT
Maximum allowable load 8–15A 10–40A 8A
Material — — —
Dielectric strength between pole 2500 (4000 on random) Vac 4000 Vac —
Coil Data
AC 90–280 Vac 90–280 Vac 24–240 Vac SPDT, 12–240 Vac DPDT
DC 3–32 Vdc (3.5–32 Vdc on DC switch) 3–32 Vdc 24–240 Vdc SPDT, 12–240 Vdc DPDT
Power
VA (Vac) Available upon request Available upon request 4 VA SPDT, 6 VA DPDT
Watts (Vdc) Available upon request Available upon request 1.5 Watts SPDT, 2W DPDT
General Data
Ambient temperature
Storage –40° to 100°C –40° to 100°C –25° to 70°C
Operational –30° to 80°C –30° to 80°C –25° to 55°C
Response time Available upon request Available upon request 100 ms
Life
Mechanical operations — — 20,000,000
Electrical operations — — 200,000
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-7
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.1
Logic Devices
Relays
Relays Selection Guide, continued
For our complete product offering, see Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E and
PG05400001E.
Description TMR5 Series TMR6 Series TMRP Series
Page V9-T3-30 Page V9-T3-31 Page V9-T3-32
Approvals
Features Various configurations available with fixed or
adjustable time delays
Single operating voltage for simple set-up
Plugs in standard 8- or 11-pin octal sockets
Provides OFF delay function without requiring
input voltage during OFF time delay
Duplicates operation of pneumatic OFF delay
timers
Each unit has eight timing ranges built in, covering
0.05 seconds to 30 minutes
Selecting a range is easy using a rotary switch
(no math is required or DIP switches to set)
Uses industry-standard 8-pin octal socket
10A DPDT output contacts
Multiple user-selectable timing functions and timing
ranges in a single unit reduce product variations and
stock keeping units (SKUs)
Universal input voltages from 12–240 Vac/Vdc
eliminate the need to order and stock separate coil
voltages
Timing ranges up to 9990 hours
Dual LED indication makes troubleshooting easy
Flexible design for backpanel, through-panel
(45 mm x 45 mm cutout), or DIN rail mounting
SPDT or DPDT contacts with 12A ratings
Plastic dust cover keeps out contaminants and
eliminates accidental set point changes
Use with standard Eaton D3 sockets
Contact Data
Configuration DPDT DPDT SPDT and DPDT
Maximum allowable load 10A 10A 12A
Material — — —
Dielectric strength between pole 2000V 2000V —
Coil Data
AC 12–240 Vac 24, 120 or 240 Vac 12–240 Vac
DC 12–240 Vdc 24, 120 or 240 Vdc 12–240 Vdc
Power
VA (Vac) 2 VA 2 VA 2.5 VA
Watts (Vdc) — — 2 Watts
General Data
Ambient temperature
Storage — — –40° to 85°C
Operational –4° to 149°F (–20° to 65°C) –18° to 150°F (–28° to 65°C) –10° to 55°C
Response time 100 milliseconds — 25 milliseconds
Life
Mechanical operations 10 million 2,000,000 10 million
Electrical operations 100,000 100,000 100000
V9-T3-8 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.1
Logic Devices
Relays
Terminal Block Relays
Features
●Pluggable relay allows for field replacement
●Functional plug-in bridges
●LED status indication
●Only 6.2 mm wide for single pole versions, 14 mm wide for
double pole
Catalog Number Selection
Terminal Block Relays
Terminal Block Relays
Product Selection
Standard Terminal Block Relays
Contacts Rated Current Supply Voltage Standard Pack Catalog Number
1PDT Screw Connection
No 6A 12 Vdc 10 XRU1D12
No 6A 120 Vac/110 Vdc 10 XRU1D120U
Yes 6A 120 Vac/110 Vdc 10 XRU1D120UG
No 6A 24 Vdc 10 XRU1D24
No 6A 24 Vac/Vdc 10 XRU1D24U
Yes 6A 24 Vac/Vdc 10 XRU1D24UG
1PDT Spring-Cage Connection
No 6A 12 Vdc 10 XRP1D12
No 6A 120 Vac/110 Vdc 10 XRP1D120U
No 6A 24 Vdc 10 XRP1D24
No 6A 24 Vac/Vdc 10 XRP1D24U
DPDT Screw Connection
No 6A 12 Vdc 10 XRU2D12
No 6A 120 Vac/110 Vdc 10 XRU2D120U
No 6A 24 Vdc 10 XRU2D24
No 6A 24 Vac/Vdc 10 XRU2D24U
Type
XR = XR Terminal block relay
XR U 1 D120 G
Connection Type
U = Screw
P = Spring-cage
Number of Poles
1 = 1 PDT
2 = 2 PDT
Coil Voltage
D12 = 12 Vdc
D1204 = 120 Vac/110 Vdc
D24 = 27 Vdc
D246 = 24 Vac/Vdc
Size
G= Yes
Blank = No
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-9
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.1
Logic Devices
Relays
General Purpose Plug-In Relays—D1 Series
Features
●Compact relay capable of breaking relatively large load currents
●The contact operation can be easily checked by push-to-test
button
●Panel and DIN rail mounting
●Flag indicator shows relay status in manual or powered
condition
●LED status lamp shows coil “ON” or “OFF” status—ideal for
use in low light applications
●Push-to-test button allows for manual operation of relay
without the need for coil power
●Lock-down door holds pushbutton and contacts in the operate
position when activated
●Finger-grip cover allows operator to remove relays from
sockets easily
●ID tag/write label to identify relays in multiple-relay circuits
●Bi-polar LED allows for reverse polarity applications
Catalog Number Selection
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
D1 Series 1
Note
1For deciphering catalog numbers. Do not use for ordering as not all combinations are readily available.
D1PF 1 A A
Family Type
D1PR = Standard relay
D1PF = Full-featured relay
Contact Configuration
1 = SPDT
Standard Features
A = LED, test button, flag indicator,
flange mounting, lock-down door,
finger-grip cover, I.D. tag
Blank = Mechanical flag indicator
Coil Voltage
A = 120 Vac
A1 = 110 Vdc
B = 240 Vac
P = 6 Vac
P1 = 6 Vdc
R = 12 Vac
R1 = 12 Vdc
T = 24 Vac
T1 = 24 Vdc
W1 = 48 Vdc
V9-T3-10 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.1
Logic Devices
Relays
Product Selection
General Purpose Plug-In Relays—D1PR/D1PF
Accessories
D1PR/D1PF Socket and Accessories
Coil
Voltage
Contact
Configuration
Coil Resistance
(Ohms)
Catalog
Number
Coil
Voltage
Contact
Configuration
Coil Resistance
(Ohms)
Catalog
Number
Full Featured Plain Cover
6 Vac SPDT 12.2 D1PF1AP 6 Vac SPDT 12.2 D1PR1P
6 Vdc SPDT 47 D1PF1AP1 6 Vac SPDT 47 D1PR1P1
12 Vac SPDT 46 D1PF1AR 12 Vac SPDT 46 D1PR1R
12 Vdc SPDT 188 D1PF1AR1 12 Vac SPDT 188 D1PR1R1
24 Vac 50/60 Hz SPDT 180 D1PF1AT 24 Vac SPDT 750 D1PR1T1
24 Vdc SPDT 750 D1PF1AT1 48 Vac SPDT 720 D1PR1W
48 Vac SPDT 720 D1PF1AW 48 Vac SPDT 2,600 D1PR1W1
48 Vdc SPDT 2,600 D1PF1AW1 110 Vdc SPDT 13,800 D1PR1A1
110 Vdc SPDT 13,800 D1PF1AA1 120 Vac 50/60 Hz SPDT 4,430 D1PR1A
120 Vac 50/60 Hz SPDT 4,430 D1PF1AA 240 Vac SPDT 15,270 D1PR1B
240 Vac 50/60 Hz SPDT 15,720 D1PF1AB
Type
Standard
Pack
Catalog
Number
Socket 10 D1PAA
Flange mount adapter 25 PFC-D11
Metal spring clip 25 PMC-1781
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-11
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.1
Logic Devices
Relays
General Purpose Plug-In Relays—D2 Series
Features
●Ultra-high sensitivity relay with quick response
●Designed small, two-pole type break 5A load and four-pole
type, 3A load
●High reliability, long life
●Panel, DIN rail and flange mounting
●Small size
Catalog Number Selection
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
D2 Series 1
Product Selection
D2PF/D2PR Relay/Socket Quick Reference
Note
1For deciphering catalog numbers.
Do not use for ordering as not all combinations are readily available.
Relay Type Socket Clip
D2PR2
D2PF2
D2PAL PWC-D24
PQC-1782
D2PA6 PQC-1342
D2PR4
D2PF4
D2PAP PWC-D24
PQC-1782
D2PA7 PWC-D24
PQC-1782
D2PA6 PQC-1342
D2PR5 D2PA4 PYC-A1
D2PF 2 A A
Family Type
D2PF
D2PR
Contact Configuration
2 = DPDT
4 = 4PDT
5 = DPDT latching
Standard Features
Blank = Plain cover (only with D2PR)
A = LED, test button, flag indicator,
lock-down door, finger-grip cover,
ID tag (only with D2PF)
Coil Voltage
A = 120 Vac
A1 = 110 Vdc
B = 240 Vac
P = 6 Vac
P1 = 6 Vdc
R = 12 Vac
R1 = 12 Vdc
T = 24 Vac
T1 = 24 Vdc
W = 48 Vac
W1 = 48 Vdc
V9-T3-12 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.1
Logic Devices
Relays
General Purpose Plug-In Relays—D2PR/D2PF
Accessories
D2PF/D2PR Sockets and Accessories
Note
1Protection category (finger safe), EN 60529 IP20.
Coil
Voltage
Contact
Configuration
Coil Resistance
(Ohms)
Catalog
Number
Coil
Voltage
Contact
Configuration
Coil Resistance
(Ohms)
Catalog
Number
Full Featured Style Plain Cover Style
6 Vac DPDT 9.6 D2PF2AP 6 Vdc DPDT 40 D2PR2P1
6 Vdc DPDT 40 D2PF2AP1 12 Vdc DPDT 160 D2PR2R1
12 Vac DPDT 46 D2PF2AR 24 Vac DPDT 180 D2PR2T
12 Vdc DPDT 160 D2PF2AR1 24 Vdc DPDT 650 D2PR2T1
24 Vac DPDT 180 D2PF2AT 48 Vdc DPDT 2,600 D2PR2W1
24 Vdc DPDT 650 D2PF2AT1 110/125 Vdc DPDT 11,000 D2PR2A1
48 Vdc DPDT 2,600 D2PF2AW1 120 Vac DPDT 4,430 D2PR2A
110/125 Vdc DPDT 11,000 D2PF2AA1 220/240 Vac DPDT 15,720 D2PR2B
120 Vac DPDT 4,430 D2PF2AA 6 Vac 4PDT 9.6 D2PR4P
220/240 Vac DPDT 15,720 D2PF2AB 6 Vdc 4PDT 40 D2PR4P1
12 Vac 4PDT 46 D2PF4AR 12 Vac 4PDT 46 D2PR4R
12 Vdc 4PDT 160 D2PF4AR1 12 Vdc 4PDT 160 D2PR4R1
24 Vac 4PDT 180 D2PF4AT 24 Vac 4PDT 180 D2PR4T
24 Vdc 4PDT 650 D2PF4AT1 24 Vdc 4PDT 650 D2PR4T1
48 Vdc 4PDT 2,600 D2PF4AW1 110/125 Vdc 4PDT 11,000 D2PR4A1
110/125 Vdc 4PDT 11,000 D2PF4AA1 120 Vac 4PDT 4,430 D2PR4A
120 Vac 4PDT 4,430 D2PF4AA 220/240 Vac 4PDT 15,720 D2PR4B
220/240 Vac 4PDT 15,720 D2PF4AB
Type
Standard
Pack
Catalog
Number
Socket 1 D2PAL 1
Socket 10 D2PA6
Socket 1 D2PAP 1
Socket 10 D2PA7 1
Socket 5 D2PA4
Flange mount adapter 25 PFC-D2D72
Plastic ejector clip 10 PWC-D24
Metal spring clip 25 PQC-1782
Metal spring clip 25 PQC-1342
Hold-down spring 100 PYC-A1
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-13
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.1
Logic Devices
Relays
General Purpose Plug-In Relays—D3 Series
Features
●Compact relay capable of breaking relatively large load
currents
●The contact operation can be easily checked by push-to-test
button
●Panel and DIN rail mounting
●8- or 11-pin octal plug-in
Catalog Number Selection
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
D3 Series 1
Product Selection
D3 Relay/Socket Quick Reference
Notes
1For deciphering catalog numbers.
Do not use for ordering as not all combinations are readily available.
2D3PR only.
Relay Type Socket Clip
D3PR2
D3PF2
D3PA6 PQC-1332
D3PAL8 PQC-1351
D3PA2 PQC-1351
D3PR3
D3PF3
D3PA7 PQC-1332
D3PAL11 PQC-1351
D3PA3 PQC-1351
D3PR5 D3PA7 PQC-1351
D3PAL11 PQC-1351
D3PA3 PQC-1351
D3PR 2 3 A
Family Type
D3PR = Standard relay
D3PF = Full-featured relay
Contact Configuration
2 = DPDT (8-pin)
3 = 3PDT (11-pin)
5 = DPDT latching (11-pin) 2
Options
Blank = Plain cover relay (only with D3PR)
A = LED, test button, flag indicator,
lock-down door, finger-grip cover,
ID tag (D3FF only)
1 = Indicating Light (D3PR only)
Coil Voltage
A = 120 Vac
A1 = 110 Vdc
B = 240 Vac
P = 6 Vac
P1 = 6 Vdc
R = 12 Vac
R1 = 12 Vdc
T = 24 Vac
T1 = 24 Vdc
W = 48 Vac
W1 = 48 Vdc
V9-T3-14 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.1
Logic Devices
Relays
General Purpose Plug-In Relays—D3PR/D2PF
Accessories
D2PF/D2PR Sockets and Accessories
Note
1Protection category (finger safe) EN 60529 IP20.
Coil
Voltage
Contact
Configuration
Coil Resistance
(Ohms)
Catalog
Number
Coil
Voltage
Contact
Configuration
Coil Resistance
(Ohms)
Catalog
Number
Full Featured Style Plain Cover Style, continued
120 Vac DPDT 1,700 D3PF2AA 6 Vdc DPDT 32 D3PR2P1
240 Vac DPDT 7,200 D3PF2AB 12 Vac DPDT 18 D3PR2R
12 Vdc DPDT 120 D3PF2AR1 12 Vdc DPDT 120 D3PR2R1
24 Vdc DPDT 470 D3PF2AT1 24 Vac DPDT 72 D3PR2T
48 Vdc DPDT 1,800 D3PF2AW1 24 Vdc DPDT 470 D3PR2T1
120 Vac 3PDT 1,700 D3PF3AA 48 Vac DPDT 290 D3PR2W
220/240 Vac 3PDT 7,200 D3PF3AB 48 Vdc DPDT 1,800 D3PR2W1
6 Vdc 3PDT 32 D3PF3AP1 120 Vac 3PDT 1,700 D3PR3A
24 Vac 3PDT 72 D3PF3AT 110/125 Vdc 3PDT 10,000 D3PR3A1
24 Vdc 3PDT 470 D3PF3AT1 220/240 Vac 3PDT 7,200 D3PR3B
48 Vdc 3PDT 1,800 D3PF3AW1 12 Vac 3PDT 18 D3PR3R
Plain Cover Style 12 Vdc 3PDT 120 D3PR3R1
120 Vac DPDT 1,700 D3PR2A 24 Vac 3PDT 72 D3PR3T
110/125 Vdc DPDT 10,000 D3PR2A1 24 Vdc 3PDT 470 D3PR3T1
220/240 Vac DPDT 7,200 D3PR2B 48 Vdc 3PDT 1,800 D3PR3W1
6 Vac DPDT 4.2 D3PR2P
Type
Standard
Pack
Catalog
Number
Socket 1 D3PA6 1
Socket 10 D3PAL8 1
Socket 10 D3PA2
Socket 1 D3PA7 1
Socket 10 D3PAL11 1
Socket 10 D3PA3
Metal spring clip 25 PQC-1332
Metal spring clip 10 PQC-1351
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-15
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.1
Logic Devices
Relays
General Purpose Plug-In Relays—D4 Series
Features
●Slim-styled power relay
●Socket has built-in hold-down clip
●Panel or DIN rail mounting
Catalog Number Selection
General Purpose Plug-In Relays—D4 Series
D4 Series 1
Product Selection
D4 Relay/Socket Quick Reference
D4 Series
Notes
1For deciphering catalog numbers. Do not use for ordering as not all combinations are readily available.
2Socket has built-in hold down spring.
3Additional coil voltages available—consult sales office or customer support center.
Relay Type Socket Hold Down Clip
D4PR1 D4PA1 2
D4PR2 D4PA2 2
Coil Voltage 3
Catalog
Number Coil Voltage 3
Catalog
Number Coil Voltage 3
Catalog
Number
Standard SPDT Standard DPDT DIN Rail Sockets
24 Vac D4PR1T 24 Vac D4PR2T Single-Pole D4PA1
120 Vac D4PR1A 120 Vac D4PR2A Two-Pole D4PA2
24 Vdc D4PR1T1 12 Vdc D4PR2R1 Accessories
SPDT with Indicating Light 24 Vdc D4PR2T1 DIN rail end stop PFP-M
24 Vac D4PR11T DPDT with Indicating Light
120 Vac D4PR11A 120 Vac D4PR21A
24 Vdc D4PR11T1 24 Vdc D4PR21T1
D4PR 1 1 A
Type
D4PR = D4PR standard relay Contact Configuration
1 = SPDT
2 = DPDT
Options
1 = Indicating light
Coil Voltage
A = 120 Vac
A1 = 110 Vdc
B = 240 Vac
P = 6 Vac
P1 = 6 Vdc
R = 12 Vac
R1 = 12 Vdc
T = 24 Vac
T1 = 24 Vdc
W1 = 48 Vdc
V9-T3-16 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.1
Logic Devices
Relays
General Purpose Plug-In Relays—D5 Series
Features
●Industrial rated 300V, 15A relay in two-pole and three-pole
configurations
●Compact design can be panel or DIN rail mounted
Catalog Number Selection
General Purpose Plug-In Relays—D5 Series
D5 Series 1
Product Selection
D5 Relay/Socket Quick Reference
Note
1For deciphering catalog numbers.
Do not use for ordering as not all combinations are readily available.
Relay Type Socket Clip
D5PR2 D5PAL PQC-1351
D5PF2 D5PA2 PQC-1351
D5PR3 D5PA3L PQC-1351
D5PF3 D5PA3S PQC-1351
D5PR 3 1 A
Family Type
D5PR = Standard relay
D5PF = Full featured relay
Contact Configuration
2 = DPDT
3 = 3PDT
Options
Blank = Plain cover (D5PR only)
A = LED, test button, flag indicator,
lock-down door, finger-grip cover,
ID tag (D5PF only)
1 = Indicating light (D5PR only)
Coil Voltage
A = 120 Vac
A1 = 110 Vdc
B = 240 Vac
G1 = 74 Vdc
P = 6 Vac
P1 = 6 Vdc
R = 12 Vac
R1 = 12 Vdc
T = 24 Vac
T1 = 24 Vdc
W = 48 Vdc
W1 = 48 Vdc
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-17
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.1
Logic Devices
Relays
General Purpose Plug-In Relays—D5
Accessories
D5 Sockets and Accessories
Note
1Protection category (finger safe), EN 60529 IP20.
Coil
Voltage
Contact
Configuration
Coil Resistance
(Ohms)
Catalog
Number
Coil
Voltage
Contact
Configuration
Coil Resistance
(Ohms)
Catalog
Number
Full Featured Plain Cover, continued
120 Vac DPDT 1,700 D5PF2AA 6 Vdc DPDT 32 D5PR2P1
110/125 Vdc DPDT 10,000 D5PF2AA1 12 Vac DPDT 18 D5PR2R
220/240 Vac DPDT 7,200 D5PF2AB 12 Vdc DPDT 120 D5PR2R1
12 Vdc DPDT 120 D5PF2AR1 24 Vac DPDT 72 D5PR2T
24 Vac DPDT 72 D5PF2AT 24 Vdc DPDT 470 D5PR2T1
24 Vdc DPDT 470 D5PF2AT1 48 Vac DPDT 290 D5PR2W
48 Vdc DPDT 1,800 D5PF2AW1 48 Vdc DPDT 1,800 D5PR2W1
120 Vac 3PDT 1,700 D5PF3AA 120 Vac 3PDT 1,700 D5PR3A
110/125 Vdc 3PDT 10,000 D5PF3AA1 110/125 Vdc 3PDT 10,000 D5PR3A1
220/240 Vac 3PDT 7,200 D5PF3AB 220/240 Vac 3PDT 7200 D5PR3B
12 Vdc 3PDT 120 D5PF3AR1 74 Vdc 3PDT 4,800 D5PR3G1
24 Vac 3PDT 72 D5PF3AT 6 Vac 3PDT 4.2 D5PR3P
Plain Cover 6 Vdc 3PDT 32 D5PR3P1
120 Vac DPDT 1,700 D5PR2A 12 Vac 3PDT 18 D5PR3R
110/125 Vdc DPDT 10,000 D5PR2A1 12 Vdc 3PDT 120 D5PR3R1
220/240 Vac DPDT 7,200 D5PR2B 24 Vac 3PDT 72 D5PR3T
74 Vdc DPDT 4,800 D5PR2G1 24 Vdc 3PDT 470 D5PR3T1
6 Vac DPDT 4.2 D5PR2P 48 Vdc 3PDT 1,800 D5PR3W
Description
Standard
Pack
Catalog
Number
Socket 10 D5PAL 1
Socket 10 D5PA2
Socket 10 D5PA3L
Socket 10 D5PA3S
Metal spring clip 10 PQC-1351
V9-T3-18 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.1
Logic Devices
Relays
General Purpose Plug-In Relays—D7 Series
Features
●Arc barrier equipped relay with high dielectric strength
●Panel, DIN rail and flange mounting
Catalog Number Selection
General Purpose Plug-In Relays—D7 Series
D7 Series 1
Product Selection
D7 Relay/Socket Quick Reference
Note
1For deciphering catalog numbers.
Do not use for ordering as not all combinations are readily available.
Relay Type Socket/Adapter Clip
D7PR1 D7PAA PQC-1342
D7PR2 PQC-1349
D7PF1 D7PA9 PQC-1342
D7PF2 PFC-D2D72 —
D7PR3 D7PAB PQC-1783
PMC-1783
D7PF3 PFC-D73 —
D7PR4 D7PAD PQC-1784
PMC-1784
D7PF4 PFC-D74 —
D7PR 1 1 A
Type
D7PR = Standard relay
D7PF = Full featured relay
Contact Configuration
1 = SPDT
2 = DPDT
3 = 3PDT
4 = 4PDT
Options
A = LED, test button, flag indicator,
lock-down door, finger-grip cover,
ID tag
Blank = Plain cover
Coil Voltage
A = 120 Vac
A1 = 110 Vdc
B = 240 Vac
P = 6 Vac
P1 = 6 Vdc
R = 12 Vac
R1 = 12 Vdc
T = 24 Vac
T1 = 24 Vdc
W = 48 Vdc
W1 = 48 Vdc
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-19
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.1
Logic Devices
Relays
General Purpose Plug-In Relays—D7
Accessories
D7 Sockets and Accessories
Note
1Protection category (finger safe) EN 60529 IP20.
Coil
Voltage
Contact
Configuration
Coil Resistance
(Ohms)
Catalog
Number
Coil
Voltage
Contact
Configuration
Coil Resistance
(Ohms)
Catalog
Number
Full Featured Plain Cover
120 Vac SPDT 4,430 D7PF1AA 120 Vac SPDT 4,430 D7PR1A
6 Vac SPDT 9.6 D7PF1AP 110/125 Vdc SPDT 11,000 D7PR1A1
6 Vdc SPDT 40 D7PF1AP1 220/240 Vac SPDT 15,720 D7PR1B
12 Vac SPDT 46 D7PF1AR 6 Vac SPDT 9.6 D7PR1P
24 Vdc SPDT 650 D7PF1AT1 12 dc SPDT 160 D7PR1R1
48 Vac SPDT 788 D7PF1AW 24 Vac SPDT 180 D7PR1T
48 Vdc SPDT 2,600 D7PF1AW1 24 Vdc SPDT 650 D7PR1T1
120 Vac DPDT 4,430 D7PF2AA 48 Vdc SPDT 2600 D7PR1W1
110/125 Vdc DPDT 11,000 D7PF2AA1 120 Vac DPDT 4,430 D7PR2A
220/240 Vac DPDT 15,720 D7PF2AB 110/125 Vdc DPDT 11,000 D7PR2A1
6 Vac DPDT 9.6 D7PF2AP 220/240 Vac DPDT 15,720 D7PR2B
6 Vdc DPDT 40 D7PF2AP1 6 Vac DPDT 9.6 D7PR2P
12 Vac DPDT 46 D7PF2AR 6 Vdc DPDT 40 D7PR2P1
12 Vdc DPDT 160 D7PF2AR1 12 Vac DPDT 46 D7PR2R
24 Vac DPDT 180 D7PF2AT 12 Vdc DPDT 160 D7PR2R1
24 Vdc DPDT 650 D7PF2AT1 24 Vac DPDT 180 D7PR2T
48 Vac DPDT 788 D7PF2AW 24 Vdc DPDT 650 D7PR2T1
48 Vdc DPDT 2,600 D7PF2AW1 120 Vac 3PDT 2,770 D7PR3A
120 Vac 3PDT 2,770 D7PF3AA 240 Vac 3PDT 12,100 D7PR3B
6 Vac 3PDT 6 D7PF3AP 6 Vac 3PDT 6 D7PR3P
6 Vdc 3PDT 25 D7PF3AP1 12 Vac 3PDT 25.3 D7PR3R
12 Vac 3PDT 25.3 D7PF3AR 12 Vdc 3PDT 100 D7PR3R1
24 Vac 3PDT 103 D7PF3AT 24 Vac 3PDT 103 D7PR3T
24 Vdc 3PDT 400 D7PF3AT1 24 Vdc 3PDT 400 D7PR3T1
48 Vac 3PDT 412 D7PF3AW 48 Vdc 3PDT 1,600 D7PR3W1
48 Vdc 3PDT 1,600 D7PF3AW1 120 Vac 4PDT 2,220 D7PR4A
120 Vac 4PDT 2,220 D7PF4AA 110/125 Vdc 4PDT 7,340 D7PR4A1
110/125 Vdc 4PDT 7,340 D7PF4AA1 240 Vac 4PDT 9,120 D7PR4B
240 Vac 4PDT 9,120 D7PF4AB 6 Vac 4PDT 5.4 D7PR4P
6 Vac 4PDT 5.4 D7PF4AP 24 Vac 4PDT 84.5 D7PR4T
6 Vdc 4PDT 24 D7PF4AP1 24 Vdc 4PDT 388 D7PR4T1
12 Vac 4PDT 21.2 D7PF4AR 48 Vdc 4PDT 1,550 D7PR4W1
12 Vdc 4PDT 96 D7PF4AR1
24 Vac 4PDT 84.5 D7PF4AT
24 Vdc 4PDT 388 D7PF4AT1
48 Vdc 4PDT 1,550 D7PF4AW
48 Vac 4PDT 410 D7PF4AW1
Type
Standard
Pack
Catalog
Number Type
Standard
Pack
Catalog
Number
Socket — D7PAA 1Metal spring clip 25 PQC-1342
Socket 1 D7PA9 Plastic ID clip 10 PQC-1349
Socket — D7PAD 1Metal spring clip 25 PQC-1784
Socket — D7PAB 1Plastic ID clip 10 PMC-1784
Flange mount adapter 25 PFC-D2D72 Hold-down spring 25 PYC-B2
Flange mount adapter 25 PFC-D73 Metal spring clip 10 PQC-1783
Flange mount adapter 25 PFC-D74 Plastic ID clip 10 PMC-1783
V9-T3-20 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.1
Logic Devices
Relays
General Purpose Plug-In Relays—D8 Series
Features
●Allows switching of 25A and 30A loads
●A high-capacity, high-withstand voltage relay compatible with
momentary voltage drops
●No contact chattering for momentary voltage drops up to
50% of rated voltage
Catalog Number Selection
General Purpose Plug-In Relays—D8 Series
D8 Series 1
Product Selection
D8 Relay/Socket Quick Reference
Note
1For deciphering catalog numbers.
Do not use for ordering as not all combinations are readily available.
Relay Type
Mounting
Bracket
Adapter Track/
Panel Mount
Front Connecting
Sockets Track/
Panel Mount
D8PR6TE D8PA5 D8PA1 D8PA2
D8PR7TE D8PA5 D8PA1 D8PA2
D8PR 6 TE A
Type
D8PR = Standard relay Contact Configuration
6 = SPST-NO
7 = DPST-NO
Options
TE = E-bracket
TF = Range mount
Coil Voltage
A = 120 Vac
B = 240 Vac
R1 = 12 Vdc
T = 24 Vac
T1 = 24 Vdc
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-21
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.1
Logic Devices
Relays
D8 Series
Accessories
D8 Series Sockets and Accessories
Coil Voltage
Catalog
Number
SPST E-Bracket
24 Vac D8PR6TET
24 Vdc D8PR6TET1
SPST Flange Mount
120 Vac D8PR6TFA
24 Vdc D8PR6TFT1
DPST E-Bracket
120 Vac D8PR7TEA
DPST Flange Mount
120 Vac D8PR7TFA
24 Vdc D8PR7TFT1
Description
Standard
Pack
Catalog
Number
Sockets
DIN rail adapter 10 D8PA1
Screw terminal adapter 10 D8PA2
Bracket adapter 10 D8PA5
Accessory
DIN rail end stop 100 PFP-M
V9-T3-22 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.1
Logic Devices
Relays
General Purpose Plug-In Relays—D9 Series
Features
●Ideal for three-phase motor control applications
●No contact chattering for momentary voltage drops up to
50% of rated voltage
●Push-to-test button is a standard feature to check contact
operation
Catalog Number Selection
General Purpose Plug-In Relays—D9 Series
D9 Series 1
Product Selection
D9 Series
Note
1For deciphering catalog numbers.
Do not use for ordering as not all combinations are readily available.
Coil Voltage Catalog Number
4PST-NO Power Relay
24 Vac D9PR8BT
120 Vac D9PR8BA
240 Vac D9PR8BB
24 Vdc D9PR8BT1
3PST-NO/SPST-NC Power Relay
120 Vac D9PR9BA
DPST-NO/DPST-NC Power Relay
24 Vac D9PR10BT
120 Vac D9PR10BA
24 Vdc D9PR10BT1
Type
D9PR = Standard relay
Coil Voltage
A = 120 Vac
A1 = 110 Vdc
B = 240 Vac
R1 = 12 Vdc
T = 24 Vac
T1 = 24 Vdc
Contact Configuration
8B = 4PST-NO
9B = 3PST-NO/SPST-NC
10B = DPST-NO/DPST-NC
D9PR 8B A
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-23
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.1
Logic Devices
Relays
General Purpose Type AA Relays
Features
●Type AA panel mounted relays are rated (each pole) 40A up to
300 Vac, 50/60 Hz; 5A at 480/600 Vac, 50/60 Hz and 40A at
28 Vdc
●9575H Series 3000 relays are ideal for applications when
controlling smaller loads such as single-phase motors
Catalog Number Selection
General Purpose Type AA Relays
Ty p e A A
Product Selection
Type AA Relays
Coil Voltage Selection Table
Note
1Underscore (_) indicates missing coil voltage suffix code. See table above.
Relay Style Catalog Number 1
Relay (DPDT) 9575H3_000
Relay with auxiliary switch 9575H3_010
Relay with blowout magnets 9575H3_100
Relay with auxiliary switch and blowout magnets 9575H3_110
Coil Voltage Hz Suffix Code Coil Voltage Hz Suffix Code
Volts AC Volts DC
120 50/60 A110 — P
240 50/60 B220 — Q
480/440 60/50 C6—R
600/550 60/50 D12 — S
208 50/60 E24 — T
277 50/60 H48 — W
650/60J
12 50/60 K
24 50/60 L
48 50/60 M
Type
9575H3 = Type AA relay
Option
000 = None
010 = Auxiliary switch
100 = Blowout magnets
110 = Auxiliary switch and blowout magnets
Coil Voltage
A= 120 Vac
B= 240 Vac
C= 480/440 Vac
D= 600/550 Vac
E= 208 Vac
H= 277 Vac
J= 6 Vac
K= 12 Vac
L= 24 Vac
M= 48 Vac
P= 110 Vdc
Q= 220 Vdc
R= 6 Vdc
S= 12 Vdc
T= 24 Vdc
W= 48 Vdc
9575H3 A 000
V9-T3-24 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.1
Logic Devices
Relays
XTRE Control Relays
Features
●16A conventional thermal current (open at 60°C Ith)
●Four-pole configurations
●4NO
●3NO-1NC
●2NO-2NC
●Expandable to eight-pole with add-on front-mount auxiliary
contacts
●Built-in surge suppression on DC coils
Catalog Number Selection
XTRE Control Relays
XTRE Relays
Product Selection
XTRE Control Relays
Coil Voltage Suffix
Notes
1Underscore (_) indicates magnet coil suffix required. See table above.
2DC operated control relays XTRE(C)10B22_ can only be combined with two-pole auxiliary contacts.
Conventional
Thermal Current
Ith (A), Open at 60°C
Contact
Configuration
Rated Operational Current AC-15 Ie (A)
Circuit
Symbol
Catalog Number—
Screw Terminals 1
220–240V 380–414V 500V
16 4NO 641.5 XTRE10B40_
16 3NO-1NC 6 4 1.5 XTRE10B31_
16 2NO-2NC 6 4 1.5 XTRE10B22_ 2
Coil Voltage
Suffix
Code Coil Voltage
Suffix
Code Coil Voltage
Suffix
Code
110V 50 Hz, 120V 60 Hz A24 Vdc TD 550V 50 Hz, 600V 60 Hz D
220V 50 Hz, 240V 60 Hz B415V 50 Hz, 480V 60 Hz C208V 60 Hz E
24V 50/60 Hz T
Product Line Prefix
XT = XT IEC Power Control
XT RE 10 B 22 A
Product Family Code
RE = IEC Control Relay Conventional Thermal
Current Rating
10 = 10A
Frame
B = 45 mm—standard
Contact
Configuration
40 = 4NO
31 = 3NO-1NC
22 = 2NO-2NC
Coil Code
See table below.
14
13 33
34
43
44
A1
A2
23
24
14
13 21
22
33
34
43
44
A1
A2
14
13 33
34
43
44
A1
A2
23
24
14
13 21
22
31
32
43
44
A1
A2
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-25
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.1
Logic Devices
Relays
Front Mount Auxiliary Contacts for Use with XTRE Control Relays 1
Note
1Interlocked opposing contacts, to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Annex L (positively driven), within the auxiliary contact modules (not NOE and NCL contacts) and between the auxiliary contacts and built-in
contacts of the XTRE control relays.
Conventional
Thermal Current
Ith (A), Open at 60°C Poles
Rated Operational Current AC-15 Ie (A)
Contact
Configuration
Circuit
Symbol
Package
Quantity
Catalog Number—
Screw Terminals
220V
230V
240V
380V
400V
415V 500V
16 2631.52NO 5 XTCEXFAC20v
16 2631.51NC-1NC 5 XTCEXFAC11
16 4631.54NO 5 XTCEXFAC40
16 4631.52NO-2NC 5 XTCEXFAC22
54
63
6
4
53
54
53 61
62
54
63 73
64 74
53 83
8
4
54
53 61
62
73
74
83
84
V9-T3-26 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.1
Logic Devices
Relays
Solid-State Relays—D93 Series
Features
●All solid-state circuitry with no moving parts to wear
●Compact, panel mounting for flexible installation
●Isolated input and output terminals to protect the system
from electrical noise
●Internal snubber circuitry to protect the SSR from transients
●UL®/cUL® listed—UL 508
●CSA® certified
●CE marked
●RoHS compliant
Catalog Number Selection
Solid-State Relays—D93 Series
D93 Series
Product Selection
D93 Series
Accessory
Heat Sink Accessory
Input Voltage Output Voltage Contact Configuration Switching Type Rated Current Load (A) Catalog Number
90–280 Vac 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 10 D93210ACZ1
3–32 Vdc 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 10 D93210ACZ2
3–32 Vdc 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Triac 10 D93210ATZ2
90–280 Vac 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 25 D93225ACZ1
3–32 Vdc 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 25 D93225ACZ2
3–32 Vdc 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Triac 25 D93225ATZ2
90–280 Vac 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 40 D93240ACZ1
3–32 Vdc 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 40 D93240ACZ2
3–32 Vdc 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Triac 40 D93240ATZ2
90–280 Vac 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 50 D93250ACZ1
3–32 Vdc 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 50 D93250ACZ2
90–280 Vac 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 75 D93275ACZ1
3–32 Vdc 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 75 D93275ACZ2
3–32 Vdc 3–200 Vdc SPST-NO MOSFET 12 D93312AMD2
3–32 Vdc 3–200 Vdc SPST-NO MOSFET 25 D93325AMD2
3–32 Vdc 3–200 Vdc SPST-NO MOSFET 40 D93340AMD2
Description
D93 = Hockey puck
D96 = Compact
D99 = DIN rail
Output Voltage
1 = 2–60 Vdc
2 = 24–280 Vac
3 = 3–200 Vdc
4 = 48–480 Vac
6 = 48–600 Vac
Current
Output current in amps
Turn On Type
Z = Zero cross
R= Random
D = DC switch
Input Voltage
1 = 90–280 Vac
2 = 3–32 Vdc
3 = 3.5–32 Vdc
4 = 4–15 Vdc
5 = 20–50 Vdc
Output Type
C=SCR
T=Triac
M=MOSFET
Contact
Configuration
A = SPST-NO
B = SPST-NC
C =DPST-NO
D =DPST-NC
D93 3 25 A M D 2
Description Catalog Number
Heat sink D93HS1
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-27
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.1
Logic Devices
Relays
Solid-State Relays—D96 Series
Features
●All solid-state circuitry has no moving parts to wear
●Integral heat sink eliminates the need for added accessories
and installation
●Flexible mounting allows DIN rail or panel mounting without
additional hardware or tools
●Isolated input and output terminals protect the system from
electrical noise
●Internal snubber circuitry protects the SSR from transients
●UL/cUL listed—UL 508
●CSA certified
●CE marked
●RoHS compliant
Product Selection
Solid-State Relays—D96 Series
D96 Series
Input Voltage Output Voltage Contact Configuration Switching Type Rated Current Load (A) Catalog Number
3.5–32 Vdc 3–50 Vdc SPST-NO DC switch 15 D96115ACZ3
3.5–32 Vdc 3–150 Vac SPST-NO DC switch 8 D96208ACZ3
90–280 Vac 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Random 10 D96210ACR1
3–32 Vdc 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Random 10 D96210ACR2
90–280 Vac 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 10 D96210ACZ1
3–32 Vdc 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 10 D96210ACZ2
3–32 Vdc 24–280 Vac SPST-NC Random 10 D96210BCR2
90–280 Vac 48–480 Vac SPST-NO Random 10 D96410ACR1
3–32 Vdc 48–480 Vac SPST-NO Random 10 D96410ACR2
90–280 Vac 48–480 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 10 D96410ACZ1
3–32 Vdc 48–480 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 10 D96410ACZ2
90–280 Vac 48–600 Vac SPST-NO Random 10 D96610ACR1
90–280 Vac 48–600 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 10 D96610ACZ1
3–32 Vdc 48–600 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 10 D96610ACZ2
V9-T3-28 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.1
Logic Devices
Relays
Solid-State Relays—D99 Series
Features
●All solid-state circuitry has no moving parts to wear
●Integral heat sink eliminates the need for added accessories
and installation
●Flexible mounting allows DIN rail or panel mounting without
additional hardware or tools
●Isolated input and output terminals protect the system from
electrical noise
●Internal snubber circuitry protects the SSR from transients
●UL/cUL listed—UL 508
●CSA certified
●CE marked
●RoHS compliant
Product Selection
Solid-State Relays—D99 Series
D99 Series
Input Voltage Output Voltage Contact Configuration Switching Type Rated Current Load (A) Catalog Number
90–280 Vac 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 10 D99210ACZ1
3–32 Vdc 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 10 D99210ACZ2
90–280 Vac 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 25 D99225ACZ1
3–32 Vdc 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 25 D99225ACZ2
90–280 Vac 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 40 D99240ACZ1
3–32 Vdc 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 40 D99240ACZ2
90–280 Vac 48–600 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 10 D99610ACZ1
3–32 Vdc 48–600 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 10 D99610ACZ2
90–280 Vac 48–600 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 25 D99625ACZ1
3–32 Vdc 48–600 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 25 D99625ACZ2
90–280 Vac 48–600 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 40 D99640ACZ1
3–32 Vdc 48–600 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 40 D99640ACZ2
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-29
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.1
Logic Devices
Relays
Universal TR Series Timing Relays
Features
●Multiple user-selectable timing functions and timing ranges in
a single unit reduce product variations and stock keeping units
(SKUs)
●Universal input voltages from 12 or 24–240 Vac/Vdc eliminate
the need to order and stock separate coil voltages
●Compact, DIN rail mountable case reduces panel size
●Advanced LED indication makes troubleshooting easy
●Staggered terminal locations allow access to lower-level
terminals after wiring
●SPDT or DPDT contacts with 8A ratings
●cULus listed
●CE marked
●RoHS compliant
●IEC/EN 61812
Product Selection
Universal TR Series Timing Relays
Universal TR Series
Supply Voltage Description Catalog Number
4-Function
24–240 Vac/Vdc Compact DIN rail mount, SPDT TRL04
7-Function
24–240 Vac/Vdc Compact DIN rail mount, SPDT TRL07
12–240 Vac/Vdc Compact DIN rail mount, DPDT TRL27
Asymmetrical pulse generator, DPDT TRW27
V9-T3-30 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.1
Logic Devices
Relays
TMR5 Series Timing Relays
Features
●Single timing range for each unit
●Ranges available from 0.02 sec. to 24 hours
●Wide variety of functions available
●10A DPDT output contacts
Catalog Number Selection
TMR5 Series Timing Relays
TMR5 Series
Product Selection
TMR5 Time Delay Relays
Notes
1Indicates DUAL knob unit. All dual knob units can have independently selectable and adjustable ON and OFF times. If different ON and OFF times are desired, add two codes for time ranges in the
part number. The first code listed indicates the first timing range of the unit (OFF time for R, ON time for Y) and the second code indicates the second timing range (ON time for R, OFF Time for Y).
2Any time range can be created as a custom unit. Contact Eaton for details.
3Fixed time delay settings are available for orders of 50 pieces or more.
Input Voltage Socket Timing Range Catalog Number Input Voltage Socket Timing Range Catalog Number
ON Delay Single Shot, Control Switch Trigger
120 Vac/Vdc 8-pin 0.1–10 sec. TMR5N05120 120 Vac/Vdc 11-pin 0.1–10 sec. TMR5C05120
120 Vac/Vdc 0.6–60 sec. TMR5N08120 120 Vac/Vdc 0.6–60 sec. TMR5C08120
24 Vac/Vdc 0.1–10 sec. TMR5N0524 24 Vac/Vdc 0.1–10 sec. TMR5C0524
24 Vac/Vdc 0.6–60 sec. TMR5N0824 24 Vac/Vdc 0.6–60 sec. TMR5C0824
OFF Delay, Control Switch Trigger Repeat Cycle (OFF Time First Followed by ON Time and Repeating)
120 Vac/Vdc 11-pin 0.1–10 sec. TMR5F05120 120 Vac/Vdc 8-pin 0.1–10 sec. TMR5R05120
120 Vac/Vdc 0.6–60 sec. TMR5F08120 120 Vac/Vdc 0.6–60 sec. TMR5R08120
24 Vac/Vdc 0.1–10 sec. TMR5F0524 24 Vac/Vdc 0.1–10 sec. TMR5R0524
24 Vac/Vdc 0.6–60 sec. TMR5F0824 24 Vac/Vdc 0.6–60 sec. TMR5R0824
Interval ON Repeat Cycle (ON Time First Followed by OFF Time and Repeating)
120 Vac/Vdc 8-pin 0.1–10 sec. TMR5T05120 120 Vac/Vdc 8-pin 0.1–10 sec. TMR5Y05120
120 Vac/Vdc 0.6–60 sec. TMR5T08120 120 Vac/Vdc 0.6–60 sec. TMR5Y08120
24 Vac/Vdc 0.1–10 sec. TMR5T0524 24 Vac/Vdc 0.1–10 sec. TMR5Y0524
24 Vac/Vdc 0.6–60 sec. TMR5T0824 24 Vac/Vdc 0.6–60 sec. TMR5Y0824
Input Voltage
120 = 120 Vac/Vdc
24 = 24 Vac/Vdc
12 = 12 Vac/Vdc
240 = 240 Vac/Vdc
12 = 12 Vac/Vdc
240 = 240 Vac/Vdc
Type
TMR5 = TMR5 Series
timing relays
Timing Range 23
03 = 0.02–2 sec.
05 = 0.1–10 sec.
08 = 0.6–60 sec.
12 = 3–300 sec.
15 = 0.3–30 min.
16 = 0.6–60 min.
20 = 4.8–8 hr.
22 = 6 sec.–10 min.
23 = 14.4 min.–24 hr.
Operational Mode
8-Pin Octal Sockets 11-Pin Octal Sockets
N= ON delay
T= Interval ON
L=Flasher
R 1 = Repeat cycle
(OFF time first followed by
ON time and repeating)
Y 1 = Repeat cycle
(ON time first followed by
OFF time and repeating)
F= OFF delay, control switch trigger
C= Single shot, control switch trigger
W= Watchdog, control switch trigger
(retriggerable single shot)
P= OFF delay, power trigger
G= Single shot, power trigger
D= Watchdog, power trigger
(retriggerable single shot)
TMR5 N05 120
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-31
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.1
Logic Devices
Relays
TMR6 Series Timing Relays
Features
●Provides OFF delay function without requiring input voltage
during OFF time delay
●Duplicates operation of pneumatic OFF delay timers
●Each unit has eight timing ranges built in, covering 0.05
seconds to 30 minutes
●Selecting a range is easy using a rotary switch (no math is
required or DIP switches to set)
●Uses industry-standard
●8-pin octal socket
●10A DPDT output contacts
●cRUus
●UL listed (with Eaton socket)
●RoHS compliant
●CE marked
Catalog Number Selection
TMR6 Series Timing Relays
TMR6 Series
Product Selection
TMR6 True OFF Delay Relays
Accessories
Accessories for Use with TMR6 Time Delay Relays
True OFF Delay
Input Voltage Timing Range Catalog Number
120 Vac/Vdc 0.05 sec.–30 min.
(user selectable, eight ranges)
TMR6X00120
24 Vac/Vdc TMR6X0024
240 Vac/Vdc TMR6X00240
Description Standard Pack Catalog Number
8-pin socket 10 D3PA2
Hold-down spring 10 D65CHDS
Family Type
TMR6
TMR6 X 00 120
Operational Mode
X = True OFF delay
Timing Range
00 = Programmable
Input Voltage
120 = 120 Vac/Vdc
24 = 24 Vac/Vdc
240 = 240 Vac/Vdc
Delay
Input
Power
(Voltage)
Output
(Load)
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
V9-T3-32 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.1
Logic Devices
Relays
TMRP Series Timing Relays
Features
●Multiple user-selectable timing functions and timing ranges in a
single unit reduce product variations and stock keeping units (SKUs)
●Universal input voltages from 12–240 Vac/Vdc eliminate the
need to order and stock separate coil voltages
●Timing ranges up to 9990 hours
●Dual LED indication makes troubleshooting easy
●Flexible design for back-panel, through-panel (45 mm x
45 mm cutout), or DIN rail mounting
●SPDT or DPDT contacts with 12A ratings
●Plastic dust cover keeps out contaminants and eliminates
accidental set point changes
●Use with standard Eaton D3 sockets
●UL recognized
●CE marked
●RoHS compliant
Product Selection
TMRP Series Timing Relays
TMRP Timing Relays
Supply Voltage Description Catalog Number
10-Function
12–240 Vac/Vdc Control switch trigger, DPDT TMRP5100
Control switch trigger, SPDT TMRP5101
Power trigger, DPDT TMRP5102
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-33
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.2
Logic Devices
Programmable Controllers
Product Overview
Programmable Controllers Selection Guide
Note
1Combo modules have 11 bit resolution; analog input-only modules support 13 bit.
For our complete product offering, see Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E and
PG05400001E.
Description
Fusion Integrated
Machine Controllers easy Programmable Relays
MFD-Titan
Multi-Functional Displays ELC Series PLCs
Page V9-T3-36 Page V9-T3-37 Page V9-T3-40 Page V9-T3-46
User Interface
LCD display (text/graphics) 3-, 4- or 5-line text
(embedded)
4-line text
(embedded)
4-line text and graphics
(embedded)
Text and graphics thru HMi
or ELC-GP (external)
Seven-segment display — — 4 characters (simulated) PA only = 2 digital
Keypad for programming Yes Optional Optional —
Hand-held programmer———Available for all
Potentiometers Simulated using display Simulated using optional display Simulated using optional display PC/PH = two embedded
I/O Digital
Embedded digital input types 3.5–30 Vdc 12 Vdc/24 Vdc
24 Vac or 110/240 Vac
24 Vac or 110/240 Vac
(using MFD I/O)
24 Vdc or 110/240 Vac
Embedded digital output types 24 Vdc transistor or high current
relay (5A resistive)
24 Vdc transistor or high current
relay (8A resistive)
24 Vdc transistor or high current
relay (8A resistive)
(using MFD I/O)
24 Vdc transistor or relay
Embedded digital inputs/outputs
per unit
10 control inputs
3 counter inputs/
2 transistors
5 relays
easy500 = 8/4
easy700/800 = 12 (6 or 8)
12/4
(using MFD I/O)
PA = 4/2
PB = 8/6
PC/PH = 8/4
PV = 16/12
Expansion digital input types — 24 Vdc or 110/240 Vac 24 Vdc or 110/240 Vac 24 Vdc or 110/240 Vac
Expansion digital output types — 24 Vdc transistor or high current
relay (8A resistive)
24 Vdc transistor or high current
relay (8A resistive)
24 Vdc transistor, relay or high
current relay (6A resistive)
Max. digital I/O includes
embedded and expansion
20 easy500 = 12
easy700/800 = 40
easy800 (link up to 8 expanded units
using easyNet) = 320
(link up to 8 expanded units
with easyNet) = 320
PA/PB/PC/PH =
112 in/112 out and embedded
PV = 240 in/240 out embedded
I/O Analog
Embedded analog input quantity
and types
2 at 4–20 mA
2 at 0–10 Vdc
Optional on 24 Vac or DC
input units
easy500 = 2
easy700 = 4
easy819/821 = N/A
easy820/822 = 1
All 0 to +10 Vdc
Optional on 24 Vac or Vdc
input units = 4
All 0 to +10 Vdc
PA = 2 at
either –10 to +10 Vdc
or –20 to +20 mA
Embedded analog input resolution 6.5 bit 10 bit 10 bit 12 bit
Embedded analog outputs
quantity and types
1 at 4–20 mA
1 at 0–10 Vdc
Optional easy820/822 = 1
All 0 to +10 Vdc
Available using
MFD-RA17 or MFD-TA17
MFD I/O Modules = 1
All 0 to +10 Vdc
PA = 2 at
either –10 to +10 Vdc
or –20 to +20 mA
Embedded analog output resolution 6.5 bit 10 bit 10 bit 12 bit
Expansion analog input types — 0 0 –10 to +10 Vdc or
–20 to +20 mA
Expansion analog input resolution———V = 12 bits, I = 11 or 13 bits 1
Expansion analog outputs types — 0 0 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA
0 to 10 Vdc, 2 to 10 Vdc 1
V9-T3-34 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.2
Logic Devices
Programmable Controllers
Programmable Controllers Selection Guide, continued
Note
1Combo modules have 11 bit resolution; analog input-only modules support 13 bit.
For our complete product offering, see Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E and
PG05400001E.
Description
Fusion Integrated
Machine Controllers easy Programmable Relays
MFD-Titan
Multi-Functional Displays ELC Series PLCs
I/O Analog
Expansion analog
output resolution
———Voltage = 14 bit
Current = 11 or 12 bit 1
Max. expansion analog
inputs/outputs
— 0/0 0/0 Up to 32/up to 32
(max. using eight combo
modules = 32 in + 16 out)
I/O Specialty Inputs
RTD PT100———Four point expansion module
Thermocouple———Four point expansion module
Programming
Programming tools Software or front panel Software;
on-board keypad;
memory module transfer
Software;
on-board keypad;
memory module transfer
Software;
memory module transfer;
hand-held programmer
Program size 100 rungs with up to 6 contacts
and 1 coil per rung
easy500/700 = 128 rungs
easy800 = 256 rungs
MFD = 256 rungs PB = 4k steps
PA/PC/PH = 8k steps
PV = 16k steps
Programming languages Ladder Ladder;
function block
Ladder;
function block
Instructions, ladder,
sequential function chart
Timers 8 easy500/700 = 16
easy800 = 32
32 PB = 128
PA/PC/PH/PV =
244 standard with additional timers for
subroutine and retentive applications
General counters 8 easy500/700 = 16
easy800 = 32
32 PB = 128
PA/PC/PH = 235
PV = 253
High speed counters
Quantity at max. speed
(pulse train output use
may limit maximum
counter frequency)
Up to 14 kHz with five presets
and prewarn
1 kHz 3 kHz PB = up to 4, 2 at 20 kHz
PA/PC = up to 6, 1 at 30 kHz
and 1 at 10 kHz
PH = up to 8, 1 at 100 kHz
and 1 at 30 kHz
PV = up to 8, 2 at 200 kHz
2 at 20 kHz; and 2 at 10 kHz
Pulse train outputs
Quantity at max. speed
(high speed input use
may limit maximum
speed for outputs)
———PB = 2 at 10 kHz
PA/PC = 1 at 30 kHz;
and 1 at 10 kHz
PH = 1 at 100 kHz;
and 1 at 30 kHz
PV = up to 2 at 200 kHz;
and 1 at 40 kHz
Real time clock Yes easy500 = Optional
easy700/800 = Yes
Yes PA/PC/PH/PV = Yes
Not available on PB
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-35
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.2
Logic Devices
Programmable Controllers
Programmable Controllers Selection Guide, continued
For our complete product offering, see Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E and
PG05400001E.
Description
Fusion Integrated
Machine Controllers easy Programmable Relays
MFD-Titan
Multi-Functional Displays ELC Series PLCs
Communications
Ports 1 RS-232/RS-485 Programming only Programming only 1 RS-232 device or programming
1 RS-485 master or device
DeviceNet — easy700/800 = device only Device only PA/PB/PC/PH = device only
PV = master and device
Ethernet OPC — easy700/800 = device only Device only PA/PB/PC/PH = device only
PV = limited master and device
ASi — easy700/800 = device only Device only —
PROFIBUS-DP — easy700/800 = device only Device only —
CANopen — easy700/800 = device only Device only —
Modbus Serial Device only — — ASCII/RTU
master and device
General Specifications
CSA
Hazardous location
Class I, Division 2
—Yes——
Agency certifications UL/cUL/CE UL/CSA/CE/C-Tick UL/CSA/CE/C-Tick cULus/CE/C-Tick
Operating temperature range 0° to 50°C
(32° to 122°F)
–25° to 55°C
(–13° to 131°F)
–25° to 55°C
(–13° to 131°F)
Display –5° to 50°C
0° to 55°C
(32° to 131°F)
Storage/transport temperature
range
–20° to 70°C
(–4° to 158°F)
–40° to 70°C
(–40° to 158°F)
–40° to 70°C
(–40° to 158°F)
–25° to 70°C
(–13° to 158°F)
Nominal operating power 100/240 Vac
24 Vdc
12 Vdc
100/240 Vac
24 Vdc
12 Vdc
100/240 Vac
24 Vdc
24 Vdc
110/240 Vac using
ELC power supply
V9-T3-36 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.2
Logic Devices
Programmable Controllers
Fusion® Integrated Machine Controller
Features
●User-configurable operator interface with back-lit LCD display
and 18-button tactile feedback keypad
●High-speed counter with five presets and prewarn, totalizer,
batch counter and ratemeter
●10 parameter sets
●13 digital inputs
●(2) 4–20 mA inputs
●(2) 0–10V input
●(3) Form C, 2 Form A, 2 NPN transistor, (1) 4–20 mA, and
(1) 0–10V output
●RS-232 and RS-485 serial communications
●100-line ladder logic processor for ultimate flexibility
●Configuration software included
●Type 4X enclosure
Product Selection
Fusion Integrated Machine Controller
Fusion Integrated Machine Controller
Description Catalog Number
Fusion integrated machine controller—10–30 Vdc power 57550400
Fusion integrated machine controller—85–265 Vac power 57551400
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-37
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.2
Logic Devices
Programmable Controllers
easy500/700/800 Programmable Relays
Features
●easy500 Series—for controlling small applications with up to
12 input/output signals
●easy700 Series—for controlling medium-sized applications
with up to 40 input/output signals
●easy800 Series—for controlling large-scale applications with
up to 320 input/output signals; use easyNet for applications
beyond 40 I/O
●Available with or without 2.5 in LCD display
●DIN rail mounted or panel mounted using optional
mounting feet
Catalog Number Selection
easy Programmable Relays
easy500/700/800
Note: Not all combinations are possible. See selection tables.
Display
Blank = Display
X = No display
Digital Outputs
R = Relay
T = Transistor
Clock
C = Clock
Blank = No clock
Digital Inputs
AB = 24 Vac
AC = 110–240 Vdc
DA = 12 Vdc
DC = 24 Vdc
EASY512 -AC-RC
Module Type
EASY5xx = 500 Series
EASY7xx = 700 Series
EASY8xx = 800 Series
V9-T3-38 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.2
Logic Devices
Programmable Controllers
Product Selection
easy500 Programmable Relays (Standalone)
easy700 Programmable Relays (Expandable and Networkable)
easy800 Programmable Relays (Expandable and Networkable)
Note
1 Analog inputs optional. Use of analog inputs will result in a decrease in the same number of available digital inputs.
Inputs Outputs Catalog
NumberDescription 24 Vac 110–240 Vac 12 Vdc 24 Vdc Analog 1Relay Transistor
Display
12 I/O, no clock — 8 — — — 4 — EASY512-AC-R
———8 2 4 — EASY512-DC-R
12 I/O, clock8 ———2 4 — EASY512-AB-RC
—8 ——— 4 — EASY512-AC-RC
——8 —2 4 — EASY512-DA-RC
———8 2 4 — EASY512-DC-RC
———8 2 —4 EASY512-DC-TC
No Display
12 I/O, clock8 ———2 4 — EASY512-AB-RCX
—8 ——— 4 — EASY512-AC-RCX
——8 —2 4 — EASY512-DA-RCX
———8 2 4 — EASY512-DC-RCX
———8 2 —4 EASY512-DC-TCX
Inputs Outputs Catalog
NumberDescription 24 Vac 110–240 Vac 12 Vdc 24 Vdc Analog 1Relay Transistor
Display
18 I/O, clock12———4 6 — EASY719-AB-RC
—12——— 6 — EASY719-AC-RC
——12—4 6 — EASY719-DA-RC
———124 6 — EASY719-DC-RC
20 I/O, clock———124 —8 EASY721-DC-TC
No Display
18 I/O, clock12———4 6 — EASY719-AB-RCX
—12——— 6 — EASY719-AC-RCX
——12—4 6 — EASY719-DA-RCX
———124 6 — EASY719-DC-RCX
20 I/O, clock———124 —8 EASY721-DC-TCX
Inputs Outputs Catalog
NumberDescription 110–240 Vac 24 Vdc Analog 1Relay Transistor Analog
Display
18 I/O, clock 12 — — 6 — — EASY819-AC-RC
—124 6 —— EASY819-DC-RC
19 I/O, clock — 12 4 6 — 1 EASY820-DC-RC
20 I/O, clock — 12 4 — 8 — EASY821-DC-TC
21 I/O, clock — 12 4 — 8 1 EASY822-DC-TC
No Display
18 I/O, clock 12 — — 6 — — EASY819-AC-RCX
—124 6 —— EASY819-DC-RCX
19 I/O, clock — 12 4 6 — 1 EASY820-DC-RCX
20 I/O, clock — 12 4 — 8 — EASY821-DC-TCX
21 I/O, clock — 12 4 — 8 1 EASY822-DC-TCX
easy500—Display
easy500—No Display
easy700—Display
easy700—No Display
easy800—Display
easy800—No Display
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-39
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.2
Logic Devices
Programmable Controllers
Digital I/O Expansion Modules
Can be used via easyLink.
Analog I/O Expansion Modules
Can be used via easyLink.
Ethernet Gateway Module
Network Interface Modules
Supply Voltage Digital Inputs
Outputs Catalog
NumberRelay 10A (UL) Transistor
100–240 Vac 12 6 — EASY618-AC-RE
24 Vdc 12 6 — EASY618-DC-RE
24 Vdc 12 — 8 EASY620-DC-TE
24 Vdc64—EASY410-DC-RE
24 Vdc 6 — 4 EASY410-DC-TE
24 Vdc — 2 — EASY202-RE
For distributed connection of a digital input/output expansion at up to 98 ft (30m) distance EASY200-EASY
Supply
Voltage
Inputs Digital Outputs
Analog
Outputs
Catalog
Number
Digital/
Analog
Can Be Used
for Digital Relay 10A (UL) Transistor
24 Vdc 1/2 2 — 2 1 EASY406-DC-ME
24 Vdc 1/6 2 — 2 2 EASY411-DC-ME
Description
Catalog
Number
Ethernet gateway Serial interface easyRelay or MFD-…CP8/CP10_ to
Ethernet, for connecting to easyOPC server,
easySoft or easyCom
EASY209-SE
Description
Catalog
Number
DeviceNet interface module Addresses available 0 to 63 EASY222-DN
PROFIBUS-DP interface module Device addresses available 1 to 126 EASY204-DP
AS-Interface interface module with
4 in and 4 out
Device: 4 inputs, 4 outputs, 4 parameter bits
Addresses available 0 to 31
EASY205-ASI
CANopen interface module Addresses available 1 to 127 EASY221-CO
EASY618_
EASY406_
EASY209-SE
EASY204-DP
V9-T3-40 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.2
Logic Devices
Programmable Controllers
MFD-Titan Display/Operator Unit
Monochrome display 132 x 64 pixels with switchable backlight and removable front frame.
MFD-Titan Text/Graphics Display Modules
Combine with MFD-80-_ to use as remote text/graphics display.
MFD-Titan Controller Module
Attach to MFD-80-_ display/operator unit and add MFD-Titan I/O modules as needed.
MFD-Titan I/O Modules
Attach to back of MFD-Titan controller modules.
MFD-Titan I/O Modules with Temperature Detection
For use with MFD-CP8-_ from device version 08, MFD-CP10.
Note
1 Analog inputs optional.
Description Keypad Eaton Logo
Catalog
Number
MFD display, NEMA 4X indoor rated — — MFD-80-X
MFD display, NEMA 4X indoor rated — ■MFD-80
MFD display/keypad, NEMA 4X in conjunction with MFD-XM-80 protective diaphragm ■—MFD-80-B-X
MFD display/keypad, NEMA 4X in conjunction with MFD-XM-80 protective diaphragm ■■MFD-80-B
Supply
Voltage Description
Catalog
Number
100–240 Vac AC power supply / communication module (no cable) MFD-AC-CP4
AC module for easy500/700 relays and cable MFD-CP4-500-CAB5 MFD-AC-CP4-500
AC module for easy800 relays and cable MFD-CP4-800-CAB5 MFD-AC-CP4-800
24 Vdc DC power supply / communication module (no cable) MFD-CP4
DC module for easy500/700 relays and cable MFD-CP4-500-CAB5 MFD-CP4-500
DC module for easy800 relays and cable MFD-CP4-800-CAB5 MFD-CP4-800
Supply
Voltage Description
Catalog
Number
100–240 Vac Program and screen memory MFD-AC-CP8-ME
Program and screen memory, with easyNet MFD-AC-CP8-NT
24 Vdc Program and screen memory MFD-CP8-ME
Program and screen memory, with easyNet MFD-CP8-NT
Double program and screen memory (as MFD-CP8) MFD-CP10-ME
Double program and screen memory (as MFD-CP8), with easyNet MFD-CP10-NT
Supply
Voltage Description
Inputs 1Outputs Catalog
NumberDigital Analog Relay Transistor Analog
100–240 Vac 16 I/O 12 — 4 — — MFD-AC-R16
24 Vdc 12 4 4 — — MFD-R16
12 4 — 4 — MFD-T16
24 Vdc 17 I/O 12 4 4 — 1 MFD-RA17
12 4 — 4 1 MFD-TA17
Supply
Voltage
Inputs Outputs
Catalog
NumberDigital
Can Be Used
For Analog Pt100
Relay
10A (UL) Transistor Analog Temperature Ranges
24 Vdc 6 2 2 — 4 — –40° to +90°C/0° to +250°C/0° to +400°C MFD-TP12-PT-A
6 2 2 — 4 — –200° to +200°C/0° to +850°C MFD-TP12-PT-B
6 2 — — 4 — –40° to +90°C/0° to +250°C MFD-TP12-NI-A
6 2 2 — 4 1 –40° to +90°C/0° to +250°C/0° to +400°C MFD-TAP13-PT-A
6 2 2 — 4 1 –200° to +200°C/0° to +850°C MFD-TAP13-PT-B
6 2 — — 4 1 –40° to +90°C/0° to +250°C MFD-TAP13-NI-A
MFD-80-B
MFD-CP4
MFD-CP
MFD-R16
MFD-TP_
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-41
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.2
Logic Devices
Programmable Controllers
easy802/806 Programmable Relays with SmartWire-DT
Features
●Combines the functions of an easy800 with direct connection
to SmartWire-DT
●
Exchange of data as well as power supply for the SmartWire-DT
devices and contactors
●Up to 99 SmartWire-DT nodes in total with up to 166 inputs/
outputs that can be connected
●Up to eight easy806 controllers can be connected via easyNet
●easy806 controllers include four high-speed inputs, two of
which can be outputs
●Serial interface for programming or connection of an MFD
remote text display or XV touch panel
Product Selection
easy802/806 Programmable Relays with SmartWire-DT
Control relay for connection of SmartWire-DT and simultaneously for supply
of power to the SmartWire-DT devices, such as switchgear and contactors.
easy800 with SmartWire-DT
Supply
Voltage Description Catalog Number
24 Vdc Control relay with SmartWire-DT EASY802-DC-SWD
24 Vdc Control relay with SmartWire-DT, four inputs, two of
which can be used as outputs (transistor 24 Vdc, 0.1A),
easyNet onboard
EASY806-DC-SWD
EASY802-DC-SWD
EASY806-DC-SWD
V9-T3-42 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.2
Logic Devices
Programmable Controllers
XC152 PLC
Features
●Built-in SmartWire-DT master for 99 nodes
●Ethernet and RS-485 serial ports on all models
●PROFIBUS-DP or CANopen master on all models larger
than 3.5 inches
●Programmable with IEC 61131-3 compliant XSoft-CoDeSys
software
●Easy connection direct to motor control components or I/O
modules on the SmartWire-DT flat cable
●Web/remote visualization
●RISC CPU 32-bit 400 MHz
●64 MB memory
●SD card slot
Catalog Number Selection
XC152 PLCs with and without SmartWire-DT
XC PLC
XC –152–E6–11
Family
XC = Windows® CE
operating system
Mounting
11 = DIN rail mount
Features
Base Unit Variant
Features
Additional COMM Options
D = Ethernet, RS-485 and USB host
E = SmartWire-DT, Ethernet, RS-485
and USB host
3 = None
6 = 1-CANopen
8 = 1-PROFIBUS-DP
Housing
152 = Plastic housing
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-43
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.2
Logic Devices
Programmable Controllers
Product Selection
XC PLC
XC PLC SmartWire-DT
Accessories
XC PLC Accessories
Note
1For details on SW-XSoft-CoDeSys software, see Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E, Tab 4.
CoDeSys
Firmware Fieldbus Type RS-485 Ethernet Catalog Number
Plastic Housing
Y CANopen Y Y XC-152-D6-11
Y PROFIBUS-DP Y Y XC-152-D8-11
CoDeSys
Firmware Fieldbus Type RS-485 Ethernet SmartWire-DT Catalog Number
Plastic Housing
Y None None Y Y XC-152-E3-11
Y CANopen Y Y Y XC-152-E6-11
Y PROFIBUS-DP Y Y Y XC-152-E8-11
Description Catalog Number
HMI-PLC programming software, single seat license SW-XSOFT-CODESYS-2-S 1
HMI-PLC programming software, multiple seat license SW-XSOFT-CODESYS-2-M 1
SD memory card MEMORY-SD-A1-S
XC PLC
XC PLC SmartWire-DT
V9-T3-44 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.2
Logic Devices
Programmable Controllers
XV Series HMI-PLC
Features
●High resolution resistive touch TFT displays
●Brilliant image display with 65,536 colors
●3.5 in, 5.7 in or 7 in widescreen displays in robust plastic
housings and bezels, or 5.7 in, 8.4 in or 10.4 in displays in
high-end aluminum front bezels and metal housings
●Ethernet and RS-485 serial ports on all models
●PROFIBUS-DP or CANopen master on all models larger than
3.5 inches
●Programmable with IEC 61131-3 compliant XSoft-CoDeSys
software
●Built-in SmartWire-DT master for 99 nodes
●Easy connection direct to motor control components or I/O
modules on the SmartWire-DT flat cable
●Web/remote visualization
●RISC CPU 32-bit 400 MHz
●64 MB memory
●SD card slot
Catalog Number Selection
XV Series HMI-PLCs with and without SmartWire-DT
XV HMI-PLC
XV –102–E6–35TQRG–10
Family
XV = Windows® CE
operating system
Bezel
10 = Standard blank front bezel
Display Size Display Technology OS Build
35 = 3.5 in
57 = 5.7 in
70 = 7.0 in
84 = 8.4 in
10 = 10.4 in
TQR = TFT (QVGA) resistive
TVR = TFT (VGA) resistive
TWR = TFT (WGA) resistive
C = XSoft-CoDeSys
Features
Base Unit Variant
Features
Additional COMM Options
B = Retentive memory
D = Retentive memory, USB host,
RS-485
E = SmartWire-DT, retentive
memory, USB host, RS-485
6 = 1-CANopen
8 = 1-PROFIBUS-DP
E = SmartWire-DT
Housing
102 = Plastic housing
152 = Metal housing
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-45
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.2
Logic Devices
Programmable Controllers
Product Selection
XV HMI-PLC
XV HMI-PLC SmartWire-DT
Accessories
XV HMI-PLC Accessories
Note
1For details on SW-XSoft-CoDeSys software, see Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E, Tab 4.
Display Size/Type
Display
Resolution
CoDeSys
Firmware Fieldbus Type RS-485 Ethernet Catalog Number
Plastic Housing
3.5 in TFT
Resistive
QVGA
320x240
Y CANopen Y Y XV-102-B6-35TQRC-10
Y PROFIBUS-DP Y Y XV-102-B8-35TQRC-10
5.7 in TFT
Resistive
VGA
640x480
Y CANopen Y Y XV-102-D6-57TVRC-10
Y PROFIBUS-DP Y Y XV-102-D8-57TVRC-10
7.0 in TFT
Resistive
WGA
800x480
Y CANopen Y Y XV-102-D6-70TWRC-10
Y PROFIBUS-DP Y Y XV-102-D8-70TWRC-10
Metal Housing
5.7 in TFT
Resistive
VGA
640x480
Y CANopen Y Y XV-152-D6-57TVRC-10
Y PROFIBUS-DP Y Y XV-152-D8-57TVRC-10
8.4 in TFT
Resistive
VGA
640x480
Y CANopen Y Y XV-152-D6-84TVRC-10
Y PROFIBUS-DP Y Y XV-152-D8-84TVRC-10
10.4 in TFT
Resistive
VGA
640x480
Y CANopen Y Y XV-152-D6-10TVRC-10
Y PROFIBUS-DP Y Y XV-152-D8-10TVRC-10
Display
Size/Type
Display
Resolution
CoDeSys
Firmware Fieldbus Type RS-485 Ethernet SmartWire-DT Catalog Number
Plastic Housing
3.5 in TFT QVGA
320x240
Y None None Y Y XV-102-BE-35TQRC-10
5.7 in TFT VGA
640x480
Y CANopen Y Y Y XV-102-E6-57TVRC-10
Y PROFIBUS-DP Y Y Y XV-102-E8-57TVRC-10
7.0 in TFT WGA
800x480
Y CANopen Y Y Y XV-102-E6-70TWRC-10
Y PROFIBUS-DP Y Y Y XV-102-E8-70TWRC-10
Metal Housing
5.7 in TFT VGA
640x480
Y CANopen Y Y Y XV-152-E6-57TVRC-10
Y PROFIBUS-DP Y Y Y XV-152-E8-57TVRC-10
8.4 in TFT VGA
640x480
Y CANopen Y Y Y XV-152-E6-84TVRC-10
Y PROFIBUS-DP Y Y Y XV-152-E8-84TVRC-10
10.4 in TFT VGA
640x480
Y CANopen Y Y Y XV-152-E6-10TVRC-10
Y PROFIBUS-DP Y Y Y XV-152-E8-10TVRC-10
Description Catalog Number
HMI-PLC programming software, single seat license SW-XSOFT-CODESYS-2-S 1
HMI-PLC programming software, multiple seat license SW-XSOFT-CODESYS-2-M 1
SD memory card MEMORY-SD-A1-S
XV-102 parts kit (1 power conductor, 8 mounting brackets, 1 sealing strip, 1 touch pen) ACC-TP-57-KG-1
XV-152 parts kit (1 power conductor, 8 mounting brackets, 1 sealing strip, 1 touch pen) ACC-TP-10-12-RES-1
XV HMI-PLC
XV HMI-PLC with
SmartWire-DT
V9-T3-46 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.2
Logic Devices
Programmable Controllers
ELC Programmable Logic Controllers
Features
●Modular PLC logic platform with a range of basic to
sophisticated CPUs
●Ethernet and DeviceNet master communications
●Distributed I/O for EtherNet/IP, Modbus TCP, PROFIBUS-DP,
DeviceNet and Modbus serial networks
Catalog Number Selection
ELC Series Programmable Logic Controllers
Controllers and Expansion Modules
Master Communication Modules
Distributed I/O Adapter Modules
Note
1Left side communications module.
Device Types
PA = Analog model
PB = Base model
PC = Clock/calendar model
PH = High-speed model
PV = Advanced model
AN = Analog expansion module
EX = Digital expansion module
PT = Platinum RTD expansion module
TC = Thermocouple expansion module
Digital Inputs
A=AC
D=DC
S=Switch
N= None
Digital Outputs
T= Transistor NPN
R=Relay
I= High current relay
N=None
P= Transistor PNP
I/O Count
xx = Total number of I/O Analog Inputs
A= Analog
N= None
Analog Outputs
A= Analog
N= None
ELC – PA 10 A A D R
Device Type
CO = Communication interface model
Module Type
DNETM = DeviceNet master module 1
ENETM = Ethernet module 1
ELC – CO ENETM
Device Type
CA = Distributed I/O communication adapter
Module Type
ENET = Modbus TCP/EtherNet/IP adapter
DNET = DeviceNet adapter
RS485 = Modbus serial RS-485 adapter
PBDP = PROFIBUS-DP adapter
ELC – CA ENET
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-47
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.2
Logic Devices
Programmable Controllers
Product Selection
Controllers
Distributed I/O Adapter Modules
Network Communication Master Modules (Left Side Bus)
Description Inputs Outputs Analog High Speed I/O
Maximum Current
Consumption
(at 24 Vdc) Catalog Number
ELC-PB Model and 14 I/O built-in (8) 24 Vdc (6) Relay, 1.5A — (2) 20 kHz inputs 150 mA ELC-PB14NNDR
(8) 24 Vdc (6) Transistor, 100 mA — (2) 20 kHz inputs 150 mA ELC-PB14NNDT
ELC-PC Model and 12 I/O built-in (8) 24 Vdc (4) Relay, 1.5A — (1) 30 kHz inputs 150 mA ELC-PC12NNDR
(8) 24 Vdc (4) Transistor, 100 mA — (1) 30 kHz inputs 150 mA ELC-PC12NNDT
(8) 110 Vac (4) Relay, 1.5A — (1) 30 kHz inputs 150 mA ELC-PC12NNAR
ELC-PH Model and 12 I/O built-in (8) 24 Vdc (4) Transistor, 100 mA — (1) 100 kHz inputs 170 mA ELC-PH12NNDT
ELC-PA Model and 10 I/O built-in (4) 24 Vdc (2) Relay, 1.5A (2) In and (2) Out (1) 30 kHz inputs 210 mA ELC-PA10AADR
(4) 24 Vdc (2) Relay, 1.5A (2) In and (2) Out (1) 30 kHz inputs 210 mA ELC-PA10AADT
ELC-PV Model and 28 I/O built-in (16) 24 Vdc (12) Relay, 1.5A — (2) 200 kHz inputs 220 mA ELC-PV28NNDR
(16) 24 Vdc (12) Transistor, 100 mA — (2) 200 kHz inputs 220 mA ELC-PV28NNDT
Description Catalog Number
Modbus TCP/EtherNet/IP I/O adapter ELC-CAENET
Modbus serial RS-485 I/O adapter ELC-CARS485
DeviceNet I/O adapter ELC-CADNET
PROFIBUS-DP I/O adapter ELC-CAPBDP
Description Catalog Number
Ethernet Modbus TCP (master/node) ELC-COENETM
DeviceNet scanner (master/node) ELC-CODNETM
V9-T3-48 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.2
Logic Devices
Programmable Controllers
Digital Expansion Modules (Right Side Bus)
Analog and Temperature Expansion Modules (Right Side Bus)
Specialty Expansion Modules (Right Side Bus)
Accessories and Software
Description Inputs Outputs
Maximum Current
Consumption
(at 24 Vdc) Catalog Number
8 DC input module (8) 24 Vdc — 50 mA ELC-EX08NNDN
16 DC input module (16) 24 Vdc — 100 mA ELC-EX16NNDN
8 DC input/output module (4) 24 Vdc (4) Transistor (sink), 0.3A 70 mA ELC-EX08NNDT
16 DC input/output module (8) 24 Vdc (8) Transistor (sink), 0.3A 90 mA ELC-EX16NNDT
16 DC input/output module (8) 24 Vdc (8) Transistor (source), 0.3A 100 mA ELC-EX16NNDP
8 DC input/relay output module (4) 24 Vdc (4) Relay, 1.5A 70 mA ELC-EX08NNDR
16 DC input/relay output module (8) 24 Vdc (8) Relay, 1.5A 90 mA ELC-EX16NNDR
8 AC input module (8) 110 Vac — 50 mA ELC-EX08NNAN
8 Transistor output module — (8) Transistor (sink), 0.3A 70 mA ELC-EX08NNNT
8 Relay output module — (8) Relay, 1.5A 70 mA ELC-EX08NNNR
6 High current relay output module — (6) Relay, 6A 70 mA ELC-EX06NNNI
8 Toggle switch input module (8) Switches — 20 mA ELC-EX08NNSN
Description
Analog
Inputs
Analog
Outputs
Maximum Current
Consumption
(at 24 Vdc) Catalog Number
4 Analog input module 4 — 90 mA ELC-AN04ANNN
2 Analog output module — 2 125 mA ELC-AN02NANN
4 Analog output module — 4 170 mA ELC-AN04NANN
6 Analog input/output module 4 2 90 mA ELC-AN06AANN
4 Thermocouple input module (J, K, R, S and T) 4 — 90 mA ELC-TC04ANNN
4 Platinum RTD input module (PT100) 4 — 90 mA ELC-PT04ANNN
Description Catalog Number
Single axis motion control module (Add up to 8 modules per controller) ELC-MC01
RS-485 Easy Connect adapter (DB9, RJ12, 2-pin connections to RS-485) ELC-485APTR
Description Catalog Number
ELC programming software ELCSOFT
24 Vdc, 1A power supply ELC-PS01
24 Vdc, 2A power supply ELC-PS02
Cable to connect a PC or a GP unit to ELC, 1 meter (DB9 pin female to 8-pin DIN) ELC-CBPCELC1
Cable to connect a PC or a GP unit to ELC, 3 meters (DB9 pin female to 8-pin DIN) ELC-CBPCELC3
Cable to connect a PC to a GP unit, 3 meters (DB9 pin female to DB9 pin female) ELC-CBPCGP3
Program transfer module for ELC controllers ELC-ACPGMXFR
Plate mount for specialty modules, qty. 10 ELC-ACCOVER
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-49
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.3
Logic Devices
Preset Counters
Product Overview
Preset Counters Selection Guide
For our complete product offering, see Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E and
PG05400001E.
Description E5-148-C1400 E5-648-C Series Eclipse Series
Page V9-T3-50 Page V9-T3-50 Page V9-T3-51
Display Two-line LCD Two-line LCD LED
Power supply Replaceable lithium batteries 10–30 Vdc or 90–260 Vac 9–30 Vdc or 85–265 Vac
Number of digits 6 6 6
Panel cut-out size 45 x 45 mm (1/16 DIN) 45 x 45 mm (1/16 DIN) 92 x 45 mm (1/8 DIN)
Scaling capability — Yes Yes
Number of presets 1 2 or 4 2
Max. counting speed 25 Hz 10 kHz Up to 8,250 Hz
Front panel protection IP65 IP65 Type 4X
Other features/functions — Timer/rate indicator Analog retransmission/RS-485 communications
Relay rating(s) 2A 3A 5A
V9-T3-50 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.3
Logic Devices
Preset Counters
1/16 DIN LCD Preset Counter
Features
Battery powered
●Two-line LC displays count, preset and level of the output
●Replacement for electromechanical preset counters
●No power supply necessary (battery operated)
●Count and reset input electrically separated from counter
through optocoupler input range 12–250 Vac/Vdc
AC/DC powered
●Two-line LCD with optional two-color display
●Programmable as impulse counter, frequency meter or time
meter with sign and zero blanking
●Batch mode
●Add/subtract/ratio functions
Catalog Number Selection
1/16 DIN LCD Preset Counter
LCD Preset Counter
Product Selection
1/16 DIN LCD
Description Catalog Number
Battery Powered 1 Preset LCD
Battery power 1.89 x 1.89 in (48 x 48 mm) E5-148-C1400
AC/DC Powered 2 Preset LCD
90–260 Vac power 1.89 x 1.89 in (48 x 48 mm) E5-648-C2421
10–30 Vdc power 1.89 x 1.89 in (48 x 48 mm) E5-648-C2422
AC Powered 4 Preset Two-Color LCD
90–260 Vac power 1.89 x 1.89 in (48 x 48 mm) E5-648-C4461
Type
E5 = E5 Series
E5 1 48 C 2 400
Counter Type
1 = Pulse counter
6 = Multifunction
counter with
rate/ratio
Front Dimension
48 = 48 x 48 mm
Display
C = LCD
Presets
2 = 2 presets
4 = 4 presets
Power
421 = AC power with backlit LCD display
422 = DC power with backlit LCD display
461 = AC power with two-color LCD display
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-51
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.3
Logic Devices
Preset Counters
1/18 DIN Eclipse Series Preset Counter
Features
●1/8 DIN cutout
●Type 4X front panel protection
●Seven-segment LED display
Catalog Number Selection
1/18 DIN Eclipse Series Preset Counter
Eclipse Series Preset Counter
Product Selection
LED Count Control, 6-Digit
Description Catalog Number
Relay out, 9–30 Vdc power 57700481
Relay out, 85–265 Vac power 57701481
Relay and analog out, 9–30 Vdc power 57700483
Relay and analog out, 85–265 Vac power 57701483
Relay and RS-485 out, 9–30 Vdc power 57700485
Relay and RS-485 out, 85–265 Vac power 57701485
Relay, analog and RS-485 out, 9–30 Vdc power 57700487
Relay, analog and RS-485 out, 85–265 Vac power 57701487
Type
577 = Eclipse Series
577 00 48 1
Power
00 = DC power
01 = AC power
Function
48 = Counter
Outputs
1 = Dual relay out
2 = Analog output (4–20 mA + 0–10V)
3 = Dual relay + analog output
4 = RS-485 communications
5 = Dual relay + RS-485 communications
6 = Analog output + RS-485 communications
7 = Dual relay, RS-485 communications + analog output
V9-T3-52 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.4
Logic Devices
Ratemeters
Product Overview
Ratemeters Selection Guide
For our complete product offering, see Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E and
PG05400001E.
Description Courier Series Eclipse Series
Page V9-T3-53 Page V9-T3-54
Display LCD LED
Power supply Replaceable lithium battery 9–30 Vdc or 85–265 Vac
Number of digits 5 6
Panel cut-out size 68 x 33 mm 92 x 45 mm (1/8 DIN)
Scaling capability Yes Yes
Number of presets — 2 (with optional relay out model)
Update time 700 ms 500 ms
Front panel protection Type 4X Type 4X
Other features/functions Optional backlight, optional extended temperature range Analog retransmission/RS-485 communications
Relay rating(s) — 5A
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-53
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.4
Logic Devices
Ratemeters
Courier Series Battery Powered Ratemeter
Features
●1/Tau ratemeter
●Scaling capabilities
●Type 4X protection
●Internal battery: 3V, lithium
Catalog Number Selection
Courier Series Battery Powered Ratemeter
Courier Series
Product Selection
1/Tau LCD Ratemeter
Description Catalog Number
Battery powered 53300404
Type
533 = Courier Series
533 0 0 404
Power
0 = Battery powered
Counter
0 = No option
1 = Extend temperature range
2 = Backlight option (24 Vdc required)
Function
404 = Ratemeter
V9-T3-54 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.4
Logic Devices
Ratemeters
Eclipse Series 1/8 DIN LED Ratemeter
Features
●1/8 DIN cutout
●Type 4X front panel protection
●Front panel programming
Catalog Number Selection
Eclipse Series 1/8 DIN LED Ratemeter
Eclipse Series
Product Selection
Eclipse Series 5-Digit LED Ratemeter
Description Catalog Number
9–30 Vdc 57700470
9–30 Vdc, alarms 57700471
9–30 Vdc, analog out 57700472
9–30 Vdc, alarms, analog out 57700473
9–30 Vdc, RS-485 57700474
9–30 Vdc, alarms, RS-485 57700475
9–30 Vdc, analog out, RS-485 57700476
9–30 Vdc, alarms, analog out, RS-485 57700477
85–265 Vac 57701470
85–265 Vac, alarms 57701471
85–265 Vac, analog out 57701472
85–265 Vac, alarms, analog out 57701473
85–265 Vac, RS-485 57701474
85–265 Vac, alarms, RS-485 57701475
85–265 Vac, analog out, RS-485 57701476
85–265 Vac, alarms, analog out, RS-485 57701477
Type
577 = Eclipse Series
577 00 47 1
Power
00 = DC power
01 = AC power
Function
47 = Ratemeter
Outputs
1 = Dual relay out
2 = Analog output (4–20 mA + 0–10V)
3 = Dual relay + analog output
4 = RS-485 communications
5 = Dual relay + RS-485 communications
6 = Analog output + RS-485 communications
7 = Dual relay, RS-485 communications + analog output
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-55
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.5
Logic Devices
Hour Meters
Product Overview
Hour Meters Selection Guide
For our complete product offering, see Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E and
PG05400001E.
Description T48 Series 6-T-3H Series E5-224 Series E42 Series
Page V9-T3-56 Page V9-T3-56 Page V9-T3-57 Page V9-T3-57
Panel cut-out size 45 x 45 mm (1/16 DIN) 50.8 mm (2 in) round 22 x 45 mm (1/32 DIN) 52.3 mm (2.06 in) round OR
24 x 36.8 mm
Display type Mechanical Mechanical LCD LCD
Number of digits 7 for AC versions,
8 for DC versions
686
Power supply 10–30 Vdc or
100–130 Vac
115 Vac Internal battery 12–60 Vdc or
48–230 Vac
Timing method Synchronous motor Quartz Solid-state Solid-state
Front panel protection IP65 Type 4X IP65 No protection ratings
Resolution 0.1 hour 0.1 hour 0.1 second 0.1 hour
V9-T3-56 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.5
Logic Devices
Hour Meters
Electromechanical Hour Meters
Features
1/16 DIN
●High shock-resistance
●Without reset
●Data retention if power is lost
71.1 mm round
●6-digit hour meter for round panel cut-out
●Low cost
●Waterproof
●Type 4X protection
Catalog Number Selection
Electromechanical Hour Meters
Hour Meters
Product Selection
Electromechanical Hour Meters
Accessories
DIN Rail Adapter
Description Catalog Number
1/16 DIN
10–30 Vdc, 1.89 x 1.89 in (48 x 48 mm) 8-T-65-4848PM-402
100–130 Vac, 1.89 x 1.89 in (48 x 48 mm) 7-T-65-4848PM-406
71.1 mm Round
115 Vac, 2.80 in (71.1 mm) round 6-T-3H-508RPM-406
10–80 Vdc, 2.80 in (71.1 mm) round 6-T-3H-508RPM-402
Number of Digits
6 = 6 digits
7 = 7 digits
8 = 8 digits
Function
T = Time meter Option
65 = IP65 seal
3H = 3-hole mount
Size
508R = 50.8 mm round
4848 = 48 x 48 mm square
Mounting
PM = Panel mount
Voltage
402 = DC voltage
406 = AC voltage
6 T – 3H 508R PM – 406
Description Catalog Number
DIN rail adapter for DIN
electromechanical hour meter
T4848DINADAPT
DIN Rail Adapter
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-57
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.5
Logic Devices
Hour Meters
Electronic LCD Hour Meters
Features
Battery powered
●Low price and high efficiency
●Large 8-digit LCD display, height of the figures 0.31 in (8 mm)
●Different time ranges from 0.1 second to 100,000 hours
●Lifetime of the battery is approximately eight years
AC/DC powered
●Solid-state hour meters
●Record and display up to 99,999.9 hours, rollover and
continue timing
●EEPROM memory can retain data for 25+ years
●Time accumulation indicated by flashing hourglass icon
Product Selection
Electronic LCD Hour Meters
LCD Hour Meters
Description Catalog Number
Battery Powered 1/32 DIN 8-Digit LCD
Hours/minutes, 0.94 x 1.89 in (24 x 48 mm) E5-224-C0440
Hours/minutes, 10–260V input, 0.94 x 1.89 in (24 x 48 mm) E5-224-C0448
Minutes/seconds, 0.94 x 1.89 in (24 x 48 mm) E5-224-C0450
Minutes/seconds, 10–260V input 0.94 x 1.89 in (24 x 48 mm) E5-224-C0458
AC/DC Powered Round LCD
Elapsed hour meter, 48–150 Vdc/100–230 Vac E42DIR48230
Elapsed hour meter w/reset, 48–150 Vdc/100–230 Vac E42DIR48230R
Elapsed hour meter, 12–48 Vdc/20–60 Vac E42DIR1260
AC/DC Powered Compact Rectangular LCD
Elapsed hour meter, 48–150 Vdc/100–230 Vac E42DI2448230
Elapsed hour meter, w/reset, 48–150 Vdc/100–230 Vac E42DI2448230R
Elapsed hour meter, 12–48 Vdc/20–60 Vac E42DI241260
V9-T3-58 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.6
Logic Devices
Tot a l i ze r s
Product Overview
Totalizers Selection Guide
Totalizers Selection Guide, continued
For our complete product offering, see Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E and
PG05400001E.
Description Electromechanical Micro SE Series E5-024-C Series E5-x24-E Series
Page V9-T3-59 Page V9-T3-59 Page V9-T3-60 Page V9-T3-60
Display type Mechanical Mechanical LCD LED
Number of digits7686
Power supply 12 Vdc 12 or 24 Vdc, 120 or 240 Vac Internal battery 10–30 Vdc
Mounting configuration(s) Front panel
(13 x 30 mm cut-out)
Base mount, bottom mount,
top mount, or front panel mount
Front panel
22 x 45 mm (1/32 DIN)
Front panel
22 x 45 mm (1/32 DIN)
Maximum counting speed 25 Hz 10 Hz 12 kHz 20 kHz
Count reset method(s) — — Front panel or electronic,
can be locked out
Front panel or electronic,
can be locked out
Front panel protection IP65 — IP65 IP65
Description Courier Series E5-496 Series Eclipse Series
Page V9-T3-61 Page V9-T3-62 Page V9-T3-62
Display type LCD LED LED
Number of digits 8 6 6
Power supply Replaceable battery 10–30 Vdc or 90–260 Vac 9–30 Vdc or 85–265 Vac
Mounting configuration(s) Front panel
68 x 33 mm
Front panel
92 x 45 mm (1/8 DIN)
Front panel
92 x 45 mm (1/8 DIN)
Maximum counting speed 10 kHz 60 kHz 8.2 kHz
Count reset method(s) Front panel or electronic,
can be locked out
Front panel or electronic,
can be locked out
Front panel or electronic,
can be locked out
Front panel protection Type 4X IP65 Type 4X
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-59
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.6
Logic Devices
To t a l izer s
Electromechanical Totalizers
Features
Micro display
●Low power consumption; suitable for battery consumption
●Small dimensions
●Long service life
SE Series
●Low-cost electromechanical counter
●Multiple voltage ranges for almost any application
●Compact with various mounting options
Catalog Number Selection
Electromechanical Totalizers
Totalizers
Product Selection
Micro Display Counter
SE Series Electromechanical Totalizers
Function
Y = Compact
electromechanical
totalizer
Mounting Configuration
41610 = Bottom mount
41611 = Base mount
41612 = Top mount
41613 = Panel mount
41622 = Special base mount
41623 = Special top mount
42613 = Snap-in mount
3013PM = 30 x 13 mm panel mount
Voltage
401 = 12 Vdc
402 = 24 Vdc
406 = 120 Vac
407 = 240 Vac
Contact
Configuration
SE = SE Series
Blank =Micro
display
counter
Number of Digits
6 = 6 digits
7 = 7 digits
6 – Y – 41610 – 401 – SE
Description Catalog Number
Micro display counter—12 Vdc 7-Y-3013PM-401
Description
Catalog
Number
Order
Number Description
Catalog
Number
Order
Number
6-Digit Counter 6-Digit Counter, continued
Bottom mount sub-miniature 12 Vdc 6-Y-41610-401-SE 41610401 Panel mount sub-miniature 120 Vac 6-Y-41613-406-SE 41613406
Bottom mount sub-miniature 24 Vdc 6-Y-41610-402-SE 41610402 Panel mount sub-miniature 240 Vac 6-Y-41613-407-SE 41613407
Bottom mount sub-miniature 120 Vac 6-Y-41610-406-SE 41610406 Special base mount sub-miniature 12 Vdc 6-Y-41622-401-SE 41622401
Bottom mount sub-miniature 240 Vac 6-Y-41610-407-SE 41610407 Special base mount sub-miniature 24 Vdc 6-Y-41622-402-SE 41622402
Base mount sub-miniature 12 Vdc 6-Y-41611-401-SE 41611401 Special base mount sub-miniature 120 Vac 6-Y-41622-406-SE 41622406
Base mount sub-miniature 24 Vdc 6-Y-41611-402-SE 41611402 Special base mount sub-miniature 240 Vac 6-Y-41622-407-SE 41622407
Base mount sub-miniature 120 Vac 6-Y-41611-406-SE 41611406 Special top mount sub-miniature 12 Vdc 6-Y-41623-401-SE 41623401
Base mount sub-miniature 240 Vac 6-Y-41611-407-SE 41611407 Special top mount sub-miniature 24 Vdc 6-Y-41623-402-SE 41623402
Top mount sub-miniature 12 Vdc 6-Y-41612-401-SE 41612401 Special top mount sub-miniature 120 Vac 6-Y-41623-406-SE 41623406
Top mount sub-miniature 24 Vdc 6-Y-41612-402-SE 41612402 Special top mount sub-miniature 240 Vac 6-Y-41623-407-SE 41623407
Top mount sub-miniature 120 Vac 6-Y-41612-406-SE 41612406 Snap-in mount sub-miniature 12 Vdc 6-Y-42613-401-SE 42613401
Top mount sub-miniature 240 Vac 6-Y-41612-407-SE 41612407 Snap-in mount sub-miniature 24 Vdc 6-Y-42613-402-SE 42613402
Panel mount sub-miniature 12 Vdc 6-Y-41613-401-SE 41613401 Snap-in mount sub-miniature 120 Vac 6-Y-42613-406-SE 42613406
Panel mount sub-miniature 24 Vdc 6-Y-41613-402-SE 41613402 Snap-in mount sub-miniature 240 Vac 6-Y-42613-407-SE 42613407
V9-T3-60 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.6
Logic Devices
Tot a l i ze r s
Electronic 1/32 DIN Totalizers
Features
Battery powered LCD
●Low price and high efficiency
●Large 8-digit LCD display, height of the figures 0.31 in (8 mm)
●Lifetime of the battery is approximately 8 years
DC Powered LED
●Display counter adding and subtracting
●Position display
●Frequency counter/ratemeter
●Timer
●Supply voltage: 10–30 Vdc with reverse polarity protection
●Polarity of inputs: programmable, NPN or PNP
Catalog Number Selection
Electronic 1/32 DIN Totalizers
Electronic Totalizers
Product Selection
1/32 DIN LCD Totalizers
Description Catalog Number
Battery Powered 8-Digit LCD Totalizer
0.94 x 1.89 in (24 x 48 mm) LCD totalizer E5-024-C0400
10–260V input 0.94 x 1.89 in (24 x 48 mm) LCD totalizer E5-024-C0408
Count up/down 0.94 x 1.89 in (24 x 48 mm) LCD totalizer E5-024-C0410
DC Powered 6-Digit LED Totalizer
LED single channel totalizer, 10–30 Vdc power 0.94 x 1.89 in
(24 x 48 mm)
E5-024-E0402
LED multifunction totalizer/timer/ratemeter, 10–30 Vdc power
0.94 x 1.89 in (24 x 48 mm)
E5-424-E0402
LED double-function totalizer/timer/ratemeter, 10–30 Vdc power
0.94 x 1.89 in (24 x 48 mm)
E5-524-E0402
LED totalizer with quadrature, 10–30 Vdc power 0.94 x 1.89 in
(24 x 48 mm)
E5-024-E0432
Type
E5 = E5 Series Function
0 = Totalizer
4 = Multi-function totalizer/
timer/ratemeter
5 = Double function totalizer/
timer/ratemeter
Size
24 = 24 x 48 mm
Presets
0 = 0
Options
40 = Battery
41 = Battery with 10–260V
input signal
43 = 10–30 Vdc
Option
40 = None
41 = Bi-directional
43 = Quadrature
Display
C = LCD
E = LED
E5 – 4 – 24 – E – 0 40 2
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-61
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.6
Logic Devices
To t a l izer s
Electronic Courier Series Battery Powered LCD Totalizers
Features
●8-digit totalizer
●1/Tau ratemeter is an additional capability on the
53300405 only
●Scaling capabilities
●Remote reset terminal
●Type 4X protection
●Internal battery: 3V, lithium, replaceable battery
Catalog Number Selection
Electronic Courier Series Battery Powered LCD Totalizers
Courier Series
Product Selection
Courier Series, 8-Digit LCD Totalizers
Description Catalog Number
Totalizer, battery 53300400
Add/subtract (10k Hz, PNP input) totalizer, battery 53300401
Add/subtract (20 Hz, NPN/contact input) totalizer, battery 53300402
Quadrature (10k Hz, PNP input) totalizer, battery 53300403
Totalizer/ratemeter, battery 53300405
Type
533 = Courier Series
Function
400 = Totalizer
401 = Add/subtract (10 kHz, PNP input)
402 = Add/subtract (20 kHz, NPN/contact input)
403 = Quadrature
405 = Totalizer/ratemeter
Option
00 = None
01 = Ext. temperature range
02 = Backlight
533 00 400
V9-T3-62 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.6
Logic Devices
Tot a l i ze r s
Electronic 1/8 DIN LED Totalizers
Features
LED Multifunction
●Display counter adding and subtracting
●Position display
●Frequency counter/ratemeter
●Display: 6-digit red, 7-segment LED display; 0.55 in (14 mm)
high
●Polarity of inputs: programmable, NPN or PNP for all inputs
Eclipse Series
●1/8 DIN cutout
●Type 4X front panel protection
●Front panel programming
Product Selection
Electronic 1/8 DIN LED Totalizers
1/8 DIN LED Totalizers
Description Catalog Number
LED Multifunction Counter/Timer/Ratemeter
90–260 Vac power 3.78 x 1.89 in (96 x 48 mm) E5-496-E0401
10–30 Vdc power 3.78 x 1.89 in (96 x 48 mm) E5-496-E0402
Eclipse Series LED Totalizer
9–30 Vdc power 57700480
85–265 Vac power 57701480
Analog out, 9–30 Vdc power 57700482
Analog out, 85–265 Vac power 57701482
RS-485 out, 9–30 Vdc power 57700484
RS-485 out, 85–265 Vac power 57701484
RS-485 out and analog out, 9–30 Vdc power 57700486
RS-485 out and analog out, 85–265 Vac power 57701486
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-63
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.7
Logic Devices
Encoders
Product Overview
Encoders Selection Guide
For our complete product offering, see Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E and
PG05400001E.
Description Cube Right-Angled
Page V9-T3-64 Page V9-T3-64
Power supply 5–28 Vdc 5–28 Vdc
Output signal NPN transistor NPN transistor
Pulses per revolution Up to 600 Up to 1,800
Maximum shaft speed 6000 RPM 8000 RPM
Mounting configuration(s) Face or base mounted Flange mounted
Shaft size 3/8 in 3/8 in
Maximum axial loading 10 lbs 80 lbs
Quadrature output available Yes Yes
V9-T3-64 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.7
Logic Devices
Encoders
Shaft Encoders
Features
Cube style
●5–28 Vdc input power
●Single channel and quadrature models
●3/8 in (9.5 mm) double-ended shaft
Right-angled
●5–28 Vdc input power
●Quadrature output, two square waves
●Flange mounting
●3/8 in (9.5 mm) shaft diameter
Product Selection
Shaft Encoders
Cube Shaft Encoders
Right-Angled Shaft Encoders, Size 20
Description Catalog Number
Single Channel
60 pulses per revolution 38150060
100 pulses per revolution 38150100
120 pulses per revolution 38150120
600 pulses per revolution 38150600
Quadrature
60 pulses per revolution 38151060
100 pulses per revolution 38151100
120 pulses per revolution 38151120
600 pulses per revolution 38151600
Description Catalog Number
100 pulses per revolution 38159100
120 pulses per revolution 38159120
600 pulses per revolution 38159600
1000 pulses per revolution 381591000
1800 pulses per revolution 381591800
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-1
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Operator Interface
Pushbuttons and Pilot Devices
Panel Meters
Stacklights
Operator Interfaces and
Programming Software
4.1 Pushbutton and Pilot Devices
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T4-2
M22—22.5 mm Modular Pushbutton. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T4-4
10250T—30 mm Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T4-37
4.2 Stacklights
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T4-49
E26 Stacklights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T4-50
4.3 Panel Meters
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T4-54
Digital Panel Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T4-55
4.4 Operator Interfaces and Programming Software
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T4-56
ELC-GP Graphics Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T4-59
HMi Operator Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T4-60
XV Operator Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T4-62
XP Operator Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T4-65
For our complete product offering, see Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and
Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E.
V9-T4-2 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.1
Operator Interface
Pushbutton and Pilot Devices
Product Overview
Pushbuttons and Pilot Devices Selection Guide
Notes
1Eaton’s M22 LED light units come in two convenient universal ranges: 12–30 Vac/Vdc and 85–244 Vac.
2Eaton’s M22 pushbutton, selector switch, and E-stop operators can be attached directly to Eaton’s LS Series miniature limit switches.
For our complete product offering, see Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E.
Description M22—22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons 10250T—30 mm Pushbuttons
Page V9-T4-4 Page V9-T4-37
Ease of Use
Mounting nut on operator installation Yes Yes
Mounting adapter installation/removal Easy —
Contact block installation Snaps on mounting adapter Screw in
Contact block/light unit installation/removal Easy Easy
Visible actuator indication from rear Yes Yes
Optional spring cage terminations Yes —
Optional quick-connect terminations Yes Yes
Built-in or separate anti-rotation locking ring installation Built-in Built-in
Mounting time Low Low
Removal time Low Low
Flexibility and Modularity
Field convertible pushbuttons—color or inscribed button caps Yes —
Field convertible pushbuttons—maintained to momentary Yes —
Field convertible selector switches—momentary to maintained Yes —
Field convertible key selector switches—key removal position Yes —
Universal voltage range LED light units 1Yes —
Stackable contact blocks Yes —
Enclosed limit switch contacts 2Yes —
Safety and Security
ISO/EN 13850/EN 418 rated E-stops Yes Yes
Safety yellow E-stop enclosures Yes —
Secure anti-rotation mounting Good Good
Self-monitoring contact blocks Yes, available 4Q 2010 No
Communications
ASi bus network communications Yes —
DeviceNet network communications — —
PROFIBUS-DP network communications — —
Esthetics and Ergonomics
Low profile design Yes —
Low power integrated LED illuminated devices Yes —
Permanent and wear-resistant markings Yes —
Square bezel pushbuttons and pilot lights — —
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.1
Operator Interface
Pushbutton and Pilot Devices
Pushbuttons and Pilot Devices Selection Guide, continued
For our complete product offering, see Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E.
Description M22—22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons 10250T—30 mm Pushbuttons
Esthetics and Ergonomics
Positive detent on selector switches Very good Fair
Ergonomic dome shaped E-stop and palm switches Yes —
Specialty Operator Types
Acoustic indicators (buzzers) Yes —
Double pushbutton operators Yes No
Elevator E-stops (with mechanical flag indication) Yes —
EMO E-stops — No
Four-way pushbutton operators Yes —
Joysticks Yes —
Potentiometers Yes Yes
Reset pushbutton operators Yes Yes
Selector pushbutton (roto-push) operators — —
Selector switches with key monitoring — —
Toggle switches — —
Standards and Certifications
China Compulsory Certification—CCC (China) Yes —
Conformité Européenne—CE (Europe) Yes Yes
Canadian Standard Association—CSA (Canada) Yes Yes
Gosudarstvennyy Standart Russia—GOST R (Russia) Yes —
Underwriter’s Laboratories—UL (United States) Yes Yes
Marine Classification Societies
American Bureau of Shipping—ABS (United States) — —
Bureau Veritas—BV (France) Yes —
Det Norske Veritas—DNV (Norway) Yes —
Germanischer Lloyd—GL (Germany) Yes —
Lloyd’s Register—LR (United Kingdom) Yes —
Polski Regestre Statkow—PRS (Poland) — —
Registro Italiano Navale—RINA (Italy) — —
Russian Maritime Register of Shipping—RMRS (CIS) — —
Accessories
USB socket bulkhead interface Yes —
RJ45 socket bulkhead interface Yes —
Padlock attachments for pushbuttons — Yes
Padlock attachments for selector switches — Yes
Padlock attachments for E-stops No —
Protective shrouds for E-stops Yes Yes
DIN rail mounting adapter Yes —
V9-T4-4 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.1
Operator Interface
Pushbutton and Pilot Devices
M22—22.5 mm Modular Pushbutton
Features
Highly modular and versatile line
●Field convertible functions (pushbuttons and selector
switches), maintained to momentary
●Customizable laser engraving capabilities
LED indicators
●100,000 hours of life in high-vibration environments
●Lenses specifically designed for LED illumination
Rugged design
●Most pushbutton operators and contact blocks exceed
5 million mechanical operations
●All components have IP66 rating, and some carry IP67
and IP69K for washdown environment; see Volume 7—Logic
Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions,
CA08100008E, Tab 37 for further technical data
Innovative technologies
●ASi communicating devices
●Palm switches
Standards and Certifications
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-5
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.1
Operator Interface
Pushbutton and Pilot Devices
Product Selection
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary
Complete Devices
Note
1 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
Bezel Button Color
Contact Block
Configuration 1Catalog Number
Silver Black NO M22-D-S-K10
NC M22-D-S-K01
2NO M22-D-S-K20
2NC M22-D-S-K02
1NO-1NC M22-D-S-K11
Red NO M22-D-R-K10
NC M22-D-R-K01
2NO M22-D-R-K20
2NC M22-D-R-K02
1NO-1NC M22-D-R-K11
Green NO M22-D-G-K10
NC M22-D-G-K01
2NO M22-D-G-K20
2NC M22-D-G-K02
1NO-1NC M22-D-G-K11
Black Black NO M22S-D-S-K10
NC M22S-D-S-K01
2NO M22S-D-S-K20
2NC M22S-D-S-K02
1NO-1NC M22S-D-S-K11
Red NO M22S-D-R-K10
NC M22S-D-R-K01
2NO M22S-D-R-K20
2NC M22S-D-R-K02
1NO-1NC M22S-D-R-K11
Green NO M22S-D-G-K10
NC M22S-D-G-K01
2NO M22S-D-G-K20
2NC M22S-D-G-K02
1NO-1NC M22S-D-G-K11
M22-D-G-K10
M22S-D-G-K10
V9-T4-6 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.1
Operator Interface
Pushbutton and Pilot Devices
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush
Components
Button Plates 1Momentary Buttonless Operator
Maintained Buttonless Operator 5
Notes
1
For complete listing of available button plates and contact blocks, see Accessories,
Pages V9-T4-31 to V9-T4-36
.
2Minimum order quantity of (10).
3When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library
(see Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E,
Tab 37) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-XD-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
4Includes contact block mounting adapter.
5Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by switching
the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body.
Color Inscription Catalog Number
Black — M22-XD-S 2
Custom M22-XD-S-ETCH 3
STOP M22-XD-S-GB0
START M22-XD-S-GB1
CLOSE M22-XD-S-GB2
UP M22-XD-S-GB3
DOWN M22-XD-S-GB4
OFF M22-XD-S-GB5
ON M22-XD-S-GB6
TEST M22-XD-S-GB9
FORWARD M22-XD-S-GB15
REVERSE M22-XD-S-GB16
RAISE M22-XD-S-GB17
LOWER M22-XD-S-GB18
M22-XD-S-X0
M22-XD-S-X1
M22-XD-S-X2
M22-XD-S-X4
M22-XD-S-X5
M22-XD-S-X7
Red — M22-XD-R 2
Custom M22-XD-R-ETCH 3
STOP M22-XD-R-GB0
OFF M22-XD-R-GB5
M22-XD-R-X0
Green — M22-XD-G 2
Custom M22-XD-G-ETCH 3
START M22-XD-G-GB1
ON M22-XD-G-GB6
M22-XD-G-X1
Blue — M22-XD-B 2
Custom M22-XD-B-ETCH 3
RESET M22-XD-B-GB14
M22-XD-B-X6
White — M22-XD-W 2
Custom M22-XD-W-ETCH 3
START M22-XD-W-GB1
M22-XD-W-X1
Yellow — M22-XD-Y 2
Custom M22-XD-Y-ETCH 3
Black, red, green — M22-XD-SRG
Black, white,
red, green,
yellow, blue
—M22-XD-SWRGYB
M22-XD-G
Bezel Catalog Number 4
Silver M22-D-X
Black M22S-D-X
Silver guarded M22-DG-X
Bezel Catalog Number 4
Silver M22-DR-X
Black M22S-DR-X
M22-D-X
M22S-D-X
M22-DG-X
M22-DR-X
M22S-DR-X
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-7
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.1
Operator Interface
Pushbutton and Pilot Devices
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Momentary
Complete Devices
Note
1 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
Bezel Button Color
Contact Block
Configuration 1Catalog Number
Silver Red NO M22-DH-R-K10
NC M22-DH-R-K01
2NO M22-DH-R-K20
2NC M22-DH-R-K02
1NO-1NC M22-DH-R-K11
Black Red NO M22S-DH-R-K10
NC M22S-DH-R-K01
2NO M22S-DH-R-K20
2NC M22S-DH-R-K02
1NO-1NC M22S-DH-R-K11
Silver guarded Red NO M22-DGH-R-K10
NC M22-DGH-R-K01
2NO M22-DGH-R-K20
2NC M22-DGH-R-K02
1NO-1NC M22-DGH-R-K11
M22-DH-R-K10
M22S-DH-R-K10
M22-DGH-R-K10
V9-T4-8 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.1
Operator Interface
Pushbutton and Pilot Devices
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended
Components
Button Plates 1Momentary Buttonless Operator
Maintained Buttonless Operator 5
Notes
1
For complete listing of available button plates and contact blocks, see Accessories,
Pages V9-T4-31 to V9-T4-36
.
2Minimum order quantity of (10).
3When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library
(see Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E,
Tab 37) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-XDH-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
4Includes contact block mounting adapter.
5Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by switching
the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body.
Color Inscription Catalog Number
Black — M22-XDH-S 2
Custom M22-XDH-S-ETCH 3
STOP M22-XDH-S-GB0
START M22-XDH-S-GB1
CLOSE M22-XDH-S-GB2
UP M22-XDH-S-GB3
DOWN M22-XDH-S-GB4
OFF M22-XDH-S-GB5
ON M22-XDH-S-GB6
TEST M22-XDH-S-GB9
FORWARD M22-XDH-S-GB15
REVERSE M22-XDH-S-GB16
RAISE M22-XDH-S-GB17
LOWER M22-XDH-S-GB18
M22-XDH-S-X0
M22-XDH-S-X1
M22-XDH-S-X2
M22-XDH-S-X4
M22-XDH-S-X5
M22-XDH-S-X7
Red — M22-XDH-R 2
Custom M22-XDH-R-ETCH 3
STOP M22-XDH-R-GB0
OFF M22-XDH-R-GB5
M22-XDH-R-X0
Green — M22-XDH-G 2
Custom M22-XDH-G-ETCH 3
START M22-XDH-G-GB1
ON M22-XDH-G-GB6
M22-XDH-G-X1
Blue — M22-XDH-B 2
Custom M22-XDH-B-ETCH 3
RESET M22-XDH-B-GB14
M22-XDH-B-X6
White — M22-XDH-W 2
Custom M22-XDH-W-ETCH 3
START M22-XDH-W-GB1
M22-XDH-W-X1
Yellow — M22-XDH-Y 2
Custom M22-XDH-Y-ETCH 3
Black, red, green — M22-XDH-SRG
Black, white, red,
green, yellow, blue
—M22-XDH-SWRGYB
M22-XDH-R
Bezel Catalog Number 4
Silver M22-D-X
Black M22S-D-X
Silver guarded M22-DG-X
Bezel Catalog Number 4
Silver M22-DR-X
Black M22S-DR-X
M22-D-X
M22S-D-X
M22-DG-X
M22-DR-X
M22S-DR-X
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-9
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.1
Operator Interface
Pushbutton and Pilot Devices
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary
Complete Devices
Note
1 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
Bezel Button Color
Contact Block
Configuration 1Light Unit Voltage Catalog Number
Silver Red NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DL-R-K01-R
NC 85–264 Vac M22-DL-R-K01-230R
2NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DL-R-K02-R
2NC 85–264 Vac M22-DL-R-K02-230R
1NO/1NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DL-R-K11-R
1NO/1NC 85–264 Vac M22-DL-R-K11-230R
Green NO 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DL-G-K10-G
NO 85–264 Vac M22-DL-G-K10-230G
2NO 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DL-G-K20-G
2NO 85–264 Vac M22-DL-G-K20-230G
1NO/1NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DL-G-K11-G
1NO/1NC 85–264 Vac M22-DL-G-K11-230G
White NO 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DL-W-K10-W
NO 85–264 Vac M22-DL-W-K10-230W
2NO 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DL-W-K20-W
2NO 85–264 Vac M22-DL-W-K20-230W
1NO/1NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DL-W-K11-W
1NO/1NC 85–264 Vac M22-DL-W-K11-230W
Black Red NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22S-DL-R-K01-R
NC 85–264 Vac M22S-DL-R-K01-230R
2NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22S-DL-R-K02-R
2NC 85–264 Vac M22S-DL-R-K02-230R
1NO/1NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22S-DL-R-K11-R
1NO/1NC 85–264 Vac M22S-DL-R-K11-230R
Green NO 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22S-DL-G-K10-G
NO 85–264 Vac M22S-DL-G-K10-230G
2NO 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22S-DL-G-K20-G
2NO 85–264 Vac M22S-DL-G-K20-230G
1NO/1NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22S-DL-G-K11-G
1NO/1NC 85–264 Vac M22S-DL-G-K11-230G
White NO 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22S-DL-W-K10-W
NO 85–264 Vac M22S-DL-W-K10-230W
2NO 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22S-DL-W-K20-W
2NO 85–264 Vac M22S-DL-W-K20-230W
1NO/1NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22S-DL-W-K11-W
1NO/1NC 85–264 Vac M22S-DL-W-K11-230W
M22-DL-G-K01-G
M22S-DL-G-K01-G
V9-T4-10 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.1
Operator Interface
Pushbutton and Pilot Devices
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush
Components
Button Lenses 1Momentary Buttonless Operator
Maintained Buttonless Operator 5
Notes
1
For complete listing of available button plates and contact blocks, see Accessories,
Pages V9-T4-31 to V9-T4-36
.
2Minimum order quantity of (10).
3When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library
(see Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E,
Tab 37) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-XDL-R-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
4Includes contact block mounting adapter.
5Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by switching
the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body.
Color Inscription Catalog Number
Red — M22-XDL-R 2
Custom M22-XDL-R-ETCH 3
STOP M22-XDL-R-GB0
OFF M22-XDL-R-GB5
M22-XDL-R-X0
Green — M22-XDL-G 2
Custom M22-XDL-G-ETCH 3
START M22-XDL-G-GB1
ON M22-XDL-G-GB6
M22-XDL-G-X1
Blue — M22-XDL-B 2
Custom M22-XDL-B-ETCH 3
RESET M22-XDL-B-GB14
M22-XDL-B-X6
White — M22-XDL-W 2
Custom M22-XDL-W-ETCH 3
Yellow — M22-XDL-Y 2
Custom M22-XDL-Y-ETCH 3
M22-XDL-G
Bezel Catalog Number 4
Silver M22-DL-X
Black M22S-DL-X
Silver guarded M22-DGL-X
Bezel Catalog Number 4
Silver M22-DRL-X
Black M22S-DRL-X
M22-DL-X
M22S-DL-X
M22-DGL-X
M22-DRL-X
M22S-DRL-X
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-11
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.1
Operator Interface
Pushbutton and Pilot Devices
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Momentary
Complete Devices
Note
1 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
Bezel Button Color
Contact Block
Configuration 1Light Unit Voltage Catalog Number
Silver Red 1NO/1NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DLH-R-K11-R
1NO/1NC 85–264 Vac M22-DLH-R-K11-230R
Green 2NO 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DLH-G-K20-G
2NO 85–264 Vac M22-DLH-G-K20-230G
White 2NO 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DLH-W-K20-W
2NO 85–264 Vac M22-DLH-W-K20-230W
Black Red 1NO/1NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22S-DLH-R-K11-R
1NO/1NC 85–264 Vac M22S-DLH-R-K11-230R
Green 2NO 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22S-DLH-G-K20-G
2NO 85–264 Vac M22S-DLH-G-K20-230G
White 2NO 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22S-DLH-W-K20-W
2NO 85–264 Vac M22S-DLH-W-K20-230W
M22-DLH-R-K11-R
M22S-DLH-R-K11-R
V9-T4-12 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.1
Operator Interface
Pushbutton and Pilot Devices
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended
Components
Button Lenses 1 Momentary Buttonless Operator
Maintained Buttonless Operator 5
Notes
1
For complete listing of available button plates and contact blocks, see Accessories,
Pages V9-T4-31 to V9-T4-36
.
2Minimum order quantity of (10).
3When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library
(see Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E,
Tab 37) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-XDH-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
4Includes contact block mounting adapter.
5Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by switching
the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body.
Color Inscription Catalog Number
Red — M22-XDLH-R 2
Custom M22-XDLH-R-ETCH 3
STOP M22-XDLH-R-GB0
OFF M22-XDLH-R-GB5
M22-XDLH-R-X0
Green — M22-XDLH-G 2
Custom M22-XDLH-G-ETCH 3
START M22-XDLH-G-GB1
ON M22-XDLH-G-GB6
M22-XDLH-G-X1
Blue — M22-XDLH-B 2
Custom M22-XDLH-B-ETCH 3
RESET M22-XDLH-B-GB14
M22-XDLH-B-X6
White — M22-XDLH-W 2
Custom M22-XDLH-W-ETCH 3
Yellow — M22-XDLH-Y 2
Custom M22-XDLH-Y-ETCH 3
M22-XDH-R
Bezel Catalog Number 4
Silver M22-DL-X
Black M22S-DL-X
Silver guarded M22-DGL-X
Bezel Catalog Number 4
Silver M22-DRL-X
Black M22S-DRL-X
M22-DL-X
M22S-DL-X
M22-DGL-X
M22-DRL-X
M22S-DRL-X
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-13
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.1
Operator Interface
Pushbutton and Pilot Devices
Indicating Lights, Flush
Complete Devices
Complete Press-to-Test Units
Lens Color Light Color Light Unit Voltage Catalog Number
White White 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-L-W-W
Red Red M22-L-R-R
Green Green M22-L-G-G
Yellow White M22-L-Y-W
Blue Blue M22-L-B-B
Amber White M22-L-A-W
White White 85–264 Vac M22-L-W-230W
Red Red M22-L-R-230R
Green Green M22-L-G-230G
Yellow White M22-L-Y-230W
Blue Blue M22-L-B-230B
Amber White M22-L-A-230W
Bezel Button Color Light Unit Voltage Catalog Number
Silver Red 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-T-R-R
Blue M22-T-B-B
Yellow M22-T-Y-W
Green M22-T-G-G
White M22-T-W-W
Red 85–264 Vac M22-T-R-230R
Blue M22-T-R-230B
Yellow M22-T-Y-230W
Green M22-T-G-230G
White M22-T-W-230W
Black Red 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22S-T-R-R
Blue M22S-T-B-B
Yellow M22S-T-Y-W
Green M22S-T-G-G
White M22S-T-W-W
Red 85–264 Vac M22S-T-R-230R
Blue M22S-T-B-230B
Yellow M22S-T-Y-230W
Green M22S-T-G-230G
White M22S-T-W-230W
M22-L-R-R
M22S-DLH-R-K11-R
V9-T4-14 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.1
Operator Interface
Pushbutton and Pilot Devices
Components
Lenses 1
Lensless Indicating Light
Notes
1 For complete listing of available lenses and light units, see Accessories, Pages V9-T4-31 to V9-T4-36.
2 Minimum order quantity of (10).
3 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library (see Volume 7—
Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E, Tab 37) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-XL-R-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
Color Inscription Catalog Number
Red — M22-XL-R 2
Custom M22-XL-R-ETCH 3
OFF M22-XL-R-GB5
Green — M22-XL-G 2
Custom M22-XL-G-ETCH 3
ON M22-XL-G-GB6
REVERSE M22-XL-G-GB16
Blue — M22-XL-B 2
Custom M22-XL-B-ETCH 3
FAULT M22-XL-B-GB8
White — M22-XL-W 2
Custom M22-XL-W-ETCH 3
OFF M22-XL-W-GB5
ON M22-XL-W-GB6
FAULT M22-XL-W-GB8
FORWARD M22-XL-W-GB15
Yellow — M22-XL-Y 2
Custom M22-XL-Y-ETCH 3
Amber — M22-XL-A 2
Custom M22-XL-A-ETCH 3
Catalog Number
M22-L-X
M22-XL-R
M22-L-X
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-15
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.1
Operator Interface
Pushbutton and Pilot Devices
Non-Illuminated Emergency Stops
Complete Devices
Components
Operators Only 2
Notes
1 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
2 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
3 Key included. For identical locks and keys, use the same key code. One key is included with actuator;
additional keys are available as accessories.
4 Includes Key Code MS1.
Type Color
Contact Block
Configuration 1Catalog Number
Push-pull Red NC M22-PV-K01
2NC M22-PV-K02
1NO-2NC M22-PV-K12
Twist-to-release Red NC M22-PVT-K01
2NC M22-PVT-K02
1NO-2NC M22-PVT-K12
Key release Red NC M22-PVS-K01
2NC M22-PVS-K02
1NO-2NC M22-PVS-K12
Type Color Catalog Number
Push-pull Red M22-PV
Black M22S-PV
Twist-to-
release
Red M22-PVT
Black M22S-PVT
Key release 3Red M22-PVS 4
M22-PVS-MS2
M22-PVS-MS3
M22-PVS-MS4
M22-PVS-MS5
M22-PVS-MS6
M22-PVS-MS7
M22-PVS-MS8
M22-PV-K01
M22-PV
M22S-PVT
V9-T4-16 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.1
Operator Interface
Pushbutton and Pilot Devices
Illuminated Emergency Stops
Complete Devices
Components
Operators Only 2
Notes
1 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
2
Includes contact block mounting adapter.
Type Button Color LED Color
Contact Block
Configuration 1Light Unit Voltage Catalog Number
Push-pull Red Red NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-PVL-K01-R
2NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-PVL-K02-R
1NO-2NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-PVL-K12-R
NC 85–264 Vac M22-PVL-K01-230R
2NC 85–264 Vac M22-PVL-K02-230R
1NO-2NC 85–264 Vac M22-PVL-K12-230R
Twist-to-release NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-PVLT-K01-R
2NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-PVLT-K02-R
1NO-2NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-PVLT-K12-R
NC 85–264 Vac M22-PVLT-K01-230R
2NC 85–264 Vac M22-PVLT-K02-230R
1NO-2NC 85–264 Vac M22-PVLT-K12-230R
Type Color Catalog Number
Push-pull Red M22-PVL
Black M22S-PVL
Twist-to- release Red M22-PVLT
Black M22S-PVLT
M22-PVL-K01-R
M22-PVL
M22S-PVLT
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-17
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.1
Operator Interface
Pushbutton and Pilot Devices
Non-Illuminated Selector Switches
Complete Devices, Knob Type 1
Notes
1 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
2 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
Type Switching Position Bezel
Contact Block
Configuration 2Catalog Number
Two-position Maintained Silver NO M22-WRK-K10
1NO-1NC M22-WRK-K11
2NO-2NC M22-WRK-K22
Black NO M22S-WRK-K10
1NO-1NC M22S-WRK-K11
2NO-2NC M22S-WRK-K22
Maintained V Silver NO M22-WKV-K10
1NO-1NC M22-WKV-K11
2NO-2NC M22-WKV-K22
Black NO M22S-WKV-K10
1NO-1NC M22S-WKV-K11
2NO-2NC M22S-WKV-K22
Three-position Maintained Silver 2NO M22-WRK3-K20
2NO-2NC M22-WRK3-K22
Black 2NO M22S-WRK3-K20
2NO-2NC M22S-WRK3-K22
M22-WKV-K10
V9-T4-18 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.1
Operator Interface
Pushbutton and Pilot Devices
Non-Illuminated Selector Switches, continued
Components
Operators Only, Knob Type 1
Notes
1 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
2 Momentary selector switches can be converted in the field to maintained operation with the removal of a color
coded adapter. See Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E, Tab 37.
Type Switching Position Bezel Catalog Number
Two-position Momentary 2 Silver M22-WK
Black M22S-WK
Maintained Silver M22-WRK
Black M22S-WRK
Maintained V Silver M22-WKV
Black M22S-WKV
Three-position Momentary 2 Silver M22-WK3
Black M22S-WK3
Maintained Silver M22-WRK3
Black M22S-WRK3
Maintained, return from left Silver M22-WRK3-2
Black M22S-WRK3-2
Maintained, return from right Silver M22-WRK3-1
Black M22S-WRK3-1
Four-position Maintained Silver M22-WRK4
Black M22S-WRK4
M22-WK
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-19
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.1
Operator Interface
Pushbutton and Pilot Devices
Non-Illuminated Selector Switches, continued
Components
Operators Only, Rotary Type 1
Notes
1 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
2 Momentary selector switches can be converted in the field to maintained operation with the removal of a color
coded adapter. See Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E, Tab 37.
3 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library (see Volume 7—
Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E, Tab 37) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-WR3-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X88, Line item #_.
Type Switching Position Bezel Inscription Catalog Number
Two-position Momentary 2Silver I-O M22-W
Black I-O M22S-W
Maintained Silver I-O M22-WR
Custom M22-WR-ETCH 3
AUTO-HAND M22-WR-X91
II-I M22-WR-X92
Black I-O M22S-WR
Custom M22S-WR-ETCH 3
AUTO-HAND M22S-WR-X91
II-I M22S-WR-X92
Three-position Momentary 2Silver I-O-II M22-W3
Black I-O-II M22S-W3
Maintained Silver I-O-II M22-WR3
Custom M22-WR3-ETCH 3
AUTO-O-MAN M22-WR3-X94
Black I-O-II M22S-WR3
Custom M22S-WR3-ETCH 3
AUTO-O-MAN M22S-WR3-X94
Four-position Maintained Silver 0-1-0-2-0-3-0-4 M22-WR4
Black 0-1-0-2-0-3-0-4 M22S-WR4
M22S-WR3-X94
V9-T4-20 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.1
Operator Interface
Pushbutton and Pilot Devices
Illuminated Selector Switches
Components
Operators Only, Knob Type 1
Notes
1 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
2 Momentary selector switches can be converted in the field to maintained operation with the removal of a color coded
adapter. See Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E, Tab 37.
Type Switching Position Bezel Button Color Catalog Number
Two-position Momentary 2 Silver White M22-WLK-W
Red M22-WLK-R
Green M22-WLK-G
Yellow M22-WLK-Y
Blue M22-WLK-B
Black White M22S-WLK-W
Red M22S-WLK-R
Green M22S-WLK-G
Yellow M22S-WLK-Y
Blue M22S-WLK-B
Maintained Silver White M22-WRLK-W
Red M22-WRLK-R
Green M22-WRLK-G
Yellow M22-WRLK-Y
Blue M22-WRLK-B
Black White M22S-WRLK-W
Red M22S-WRLK-R
Green M22S-WRLK-G
Yellow M22S-WRLK-Y
Blue M22S-WRLK-B
Maintained V Silver White M22-WLKV-W
Red M22-WLKV-R
Green M22-WLKV-G
Yellow M22-WLKV-Y
Blue M22-WLKV-B
Black White M22S-WLKV-W
Red M22S-WLKV-R
Green M22S-WLKV-G
Yellow M22S-WLKV-Y
Blue M22S-WLKV-B
M22-WLK-W
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-21
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.1
Operator Interface
Pushbutton and Pilot Devices
Illuminated Selector Switches, continued
Components
Operators Only, Knob Type 1
Notes
1 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
2 Momentary selector switches can be converted in the field to maintained operation with the removal of a color coded
adapter. See Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E, Tab 37.
Type Switching Position Bezel Button Color Catalog Number
Three-position Momentary 2 Silver White M22-WLK3-W
Red M22-WLK3-R
Green M22-WLK3-G
Yellow M22-WLK3-Y
Blue M22-WLK3-B
Black White M22S-WLK3-W
Red M22S-WLK3-R
Green M22S-WLK3-G
Yellow M22S-WLK3-Y
Blue M22S-WLK3-B
Maintained Silver White M22-WRLK3-W
Red M22-WRLK3-R
Green M22-WRLK3-G
Yellow M22-WRLK3-Y
Blue M22-WRLK3-B
Black White M22S-WRLK3-W
Red M22S-WRLK3-R
Green M22S-WRLK3-G
Yellow M22S-WRLK3-Y
Blue M22S-WRLK3-B
Maintained, return from right Silver White M22-WRLK3-1-W
Red M22-WRLK3-1-R
Green M22-WRLK3-1-G
Yellow M22-WRLK3-1-Y
Blue M22-WRLK3-1-B
Black White M22S-WRLK3-1-W
Red M22S-WRLK3-1-R
Green M22S-WRLK3-1-G
Yellow M22S-WRLK3-1-Y
Blue M22S-WRLK3-1-B
Maintained, return from left Silver White M22-WRLK3-2-W
Red M22-WRLK3-2-R
Green M22-WRLK3-2-G
Yellow M22-WRLK3-2-Y
Blue M22-WRLK3-2-B
Black White M22S-WRLK3-2-W
Red M22S-WRLK3-2-R
Green M22S-WRLK3-2-G
Yellow M22S-WRLK3-2-Y
Blue M22S-WRLK3-2-B
M22-WLK3-W
V9-T4-22 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.1
Operator Interface
Pushbutton and Pilot Devices
Key-Operated Selector Switches 12
For additional key code options, see Volume 7—Solid-State Motor Control, CA08100008E, Tab 37.
Components
Operators Only 3
Notes
1 Includes one key.
2 Key removal positions can be modified in the field using coding adapters; see Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E,
Tab 37.
3 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
4 Momentary selector switches can be converted in the field to maintained operation with the removal of a color coded adapter. See Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator
Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E, Tab 37.
Type Switching Position Key Code Bezel Key Removal Position Catalog Number
Two-position Momentary 4 MS1 Silver Return from right, key
removable left
M22-WS
Black Return from right, key
removable left
M22S-WS
Two-position Maintained MS1 Silver Key removable left M22-WRS-A1
Key removable left/right M22-WRS
MS1 Black Key removable left M22S-WRS-A1
Key removable left/right M22S-WRS
Three-position Momentary 4 MS1 Silver Return from left/right,
key removable center
M22-WS3
Black Return from left/right,
key removable center
M22S-WS3
Maintained MS1 Silver Key removable center M22-WRS3-A1
Key removable
center/left
M22-WRS3-A2
Key removable
center/right
M22-WRS3-A3
Key removable left/right M22-WRS3
Return from left,
key removable center
M22-WRS3-A7
Return from left,
key removable center/right
M22-WRS3-A6
Return from right,
key removable left/center
M22-WRS3-A4
Return from right,
key removable center
M22-WRS3-A5
Black Key removable center M22S-WRS3-A1
Key removable
center/left
M22S-WRS3-A2
Key removable
center/right
M22S-WRS3-A3
Key removable
left/right/center
M22S-WRS3
Black Return from left,
key removable center
M22S-WRS3-A7
Return from left,
key removable center/right
M22S-WRS3-A6
Return from right,
key removable left/center
M22S-WRS3-A4
Return from right,
key removable center
M22S-WRS3-A5
M22-WS
M22S-WRS
M22-WS3-X93
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-23
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.1
Operator Interface
Pushbutton and Pilot Devices
Mushroom Head Pushbuttons 1
Momentary Complete Devices
Non-Illuminated Mushroom Head Pushbuttons, Maintained 13
Complete Devices
Notes
1 35 mm diameter mushroom head button.
2 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
3 Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by switching the locking ring,
which is accessible through the side of the operator body.
4 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
Bezel Button Color
Contact Block
Configuration 2Catalog Number
Silver Red NC M22-DP-R-K01
2NC M22-DP-R-K02
1NO-2NC M22-DP-R-K12
1NO-1NC M22-DP-R-K11
Black Red NC M22S-DP-R-K01
2NC M22S-DP-R-K02
1NO-2NC M22S-DP-R-K12
1NO-1NC M22S-DP-R-K11
Bezel Button Color
Contact Block
Configuration 4Catalog Number
Silver Red NC M22-DRP-R-K01
2NC M22-DRP-R-K02
1NO-2NC M22-DRP-R-K12
1NO-1NC M22-DRP-R-K11
Black Red NC M22S-DRP-R-K01
2NC M22S-DRP-R-K02
1NO-2NC M22S-DRP-R-K12
1NO-1NC M22S-DRP-R-K11
M22-DP-R-K01
M22S-DP-R-K01
M22-DP-R-K01
M22S-DP-R-K01
V9-T4-24 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.1
Operator Interface
Pushbutton and Pilot Devices
Non-Illuminated Mushroom Head Pushbuttons 1
Components
Mushroom Head Plates Momentary Insertless Mushroom Head
Operators
Maintained Insertless Mushroom Head
Operators 4
Notes
1
35 mm diameter mushroom head button.
2Minimum order quantity of (10).
3When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library
(see Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E,
Tab 37) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-XDP-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
4Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by switching
the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body.
Color Inscription Catalog Number
Black -— M22-XDP-S 2
Custom M22-XDP-S-ETCH 3
STOP M22-XDP-S-GB0
START M22-XDP-S-GB1
FORWARD M22-XDP-S-GB15
REVERSE M22-XDP-S-GB16
UP M22-XDP-S-GB3
DOWN M22-XDP-S-GB4
OFF M22-XDP-S-GB5
ON M22-XDP-S-GB6
M22-XDP-S-X0
M22-XDP-S-X1
M22-XDP-S-X4
M22-XDP-S-X5
M22-XDP-S-X7
Red — M22-XDP-R 2
Custom M22-XDP-R-ETCH 3
STOP M22-XDP-R-GB0
OFF M22-XDP-R-GB5
M22-XDP-R-X0
Green — M22-XDP-G 2
Custom M22-XDP-G-ETCH 3
START M22-XDP-G-GB1
ON M22-XDP-G-GB6
M22-XDP-G-X0
M22-XDP-G-X1
White — M22-XDP-W 2
Custom M22-XDP-W-ETCH 3
Yellow — M22-XDP-Y 2
Custom M22-XDP-Y-ETCH 3
M22-XDP-G
Bezel Color Catalog Number
Silver Black M22-DP-S-X
Red M22-DP-R-X
Green M22-DP-G-X
Yellow M22-DP-Y-X
Black Black M22S-DP-S-X
Red M22S-DP-R-X
Green M22S-DP-G-X
Yellow M22S-DP-Y-X
Bezel Color Catalog Number
Silver Black M22-DRP-S-X
Red M22-DRP-R-X
Green M22-DRP-G-X
Yellow M22-DRP-Y-X
Black Black M22S-DRP-S-X
Red M22S-DRP-R-X
Green M22S-DRP-G-X
Yellow M22S-DRP-Y-X
M22-DP-G-X
M22-DRP-G-X
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-25
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.1
Operator Interface
Pushbutton and Pilot Devices
Components
Double Pushbuttons, Extended Pushbuttons and Center Light, Momentary
Operators Only 1
Notes
1 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
2 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library (see Volume 7—
Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E, Tab 37) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-DDL-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
Bezel
Color Inscription
Catalog NumberTop Bottom Top Bottom
Silver Green Red — — M22-DDL-GR
Custom Custom M22-DDL-GR-ETCH 2
M22-DDL-GR-X1-X0
START STOP M22-DDL-GR-GB1-GB0
White Black — — M22-DDL-WS
Custom Custom M22-DDL-WS-ETCH 2
M22-DDL-WS-X1-X0
START STOP M22-DDL-WS-GB1-GB0
Black Black — — M22-DDL-S
Custom Custom M22-DDL-S-ETCH 2
——M22-DDL-S-X4-X5
M22-DDL-S-X7-X7
Black Green Red — — M22S-DDL-GR
Custom Custom M22S-DDL-GR-ETCH 2
M22S-DDL-GR-X1-X0
START STOP M22S-DDL-GR-GB1-GB0
White Black — — M22S-DDL-WS
Custom Custom M22S-DDL-WS-ETCH 2
M22S-DDL-WS-X1-X0
START STOP M22S-DDL-WS-GB1-GB0
Black Black — — M22S-DDL-S
Custom Custom M22S-DDL-S-ETCH 2
—M22S-DDL-S-X4-X5
M22S-DDL-S-X7-X7
M22-DDL-GR-GB1-GB0
M22S-DDL-GR-X1-X0
V9-T4-26 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.1
Operator Interface
Pushbutton and Pilot Devices
Double Pushbuttons, Flush Top Pushbuttons and Center Light, Momentary
Operators Only 1
Double Pushbuttons, Flush Top Pushbutton and Center Light, Extended Bottom Pushbutton, Momentary
Operators Only 1
Notes
1 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
2 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library (see Volume 7—
Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E, Tab 37) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-DDLM-GR-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
Bezel
Color Inscription
Catalog NumberTop Bottom Top Bottom
Silver Green Red — — M22-DDLF-GR
Custom Custom M22-DDLF-GR-ETCH 2
White Black — — M22-DDLF-WS
Custom Custom M22-DDLF-WS-ETCH 2
Green Red M22-DDLF-GR-X1-X0
White Black M22-DDLF-WS-X1-X0
Black Green Red — — M22S-DDLF-GR
Custom Custom M22S-DDLF-GR-ETCH 2
White Black — — M22S-DDLF-WS
Custom Custom M22S-DDLF-WS-ETCH 2
Green Red M22S-DDLF-GR-X1-X0
White Black M22S-DDLF-WS-X1-X0
Bezel
Color Inscription
Catalog NumberTop Bottom Top Bottom
Silver Green Red — — M22-DDLM-GR
Custom Custom M22-DDLM-GR-ETCH 2
White Black — — M22-DDLM-WS
Custom Custom M22-DDLM-WS-ETCH 2
Green Red M22-DDLM-GR-X1-X0
White Black M22-DDLM-WS-X1-X0
Black Green Red — — M22S-DDLM-GR
Custom Custom M22S-DDLM-GR-ETCH 2
White Black — — M22S-DDLM-WS
Custom Custom M22S-DDLM-WS-ETCH 2
Green Red M22S-DDLM-GR-X1-X0
White Black M22S-DDLM-WS-X1-X0
M22-DDLF-GR
M22S-DDLF-GR-X1-X0
M22-DDLM-GR
M22-DDLM-GR-X1-X0
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-27
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.1
Operator Interface
Pushbutton and Pilot Devices
Four-Way Pushbuttons, Momentary
Components
Operators Only 1
Joysticks
Components
Operators Only 1
Notes
1 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
2 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library (see Volume 7—
Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E, Tab 37) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-DDLM-GR-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_
Type Bezel Color Inscription Catalog Number
Non-interlocked Silver Black — M22-D4-S
Custom M22-D4-S-ETCH 2
Directional arrows M22-D4-S-X7
Black Black — M22S-D4-S
Custom M22S-D4-S-ETCH 2
Directional arrows M22S-D4-S-X7
Interlocked Silver Black — M22-DI4-S
Custom M22-DI4-S-ETCH 2
Directional arrows M22-DI4-S-X7
Black Black — M22S-DI4-S
Custom M22S-DI4-S-ETCH 2
Directional arrows M22S-DI4-S-X7
Bezel
Number of
Directions
Switching
Position Catalog Number
Silver Two-position horizontal Momentary M22-WJ2H
Two switch points M22-WJ2H-2P
Two-position horizontal Maintained M22-WRJ2H
Two-position vertical Momentary M22-WJ2V
Two switch points M22-WJ2V-2P
Two-position vertical Maintained M22-WRJ2V
Four-position Momentary M22-WJ4
Two switch points M22-WJ4-2P
Four-position Maintained M22-WRJ4
Black Two-position horizontal Momentary M22S-WJ2H
Two switch points M22S-WJ2H-2P
Two-position horizontal Maintained M22S-WRJ2H
Two-position vertical Momentary M22S-WJ2V
Two switch points M22S-WJ2V-2P
Two-position vertical Maintained M22S-WRJ2V
Four-position Momentary M22S-WJ4
Two switch points M22S-WJ4-2P
Four-position Maintained M22S-WRJ4
M22-D4-S-X7
M22-WJ2H
V9-T4-28 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.1
Operator Interface
Pushbutton and Pilot Devices
Potentiometers
Complete Devices
Acoustic Devices
Complete Devices
Components
Bezel
Resistance
Rk Catalog Number
Silver 1 M22-R1K
4.7 M22-R4K7
10 M22-R10K
47 M22-R47K
100 M22-R100K
470 M22-R470K
Black 1 M22S-R1K
4.7 M22S-R4K7
10 M22S-R10K
47 M22S-R47K
100 M22S-R100K
470 M22S-R470K
Oversized Knob
Silver 1 M22-R1K-RH
4.7 M22-R4K7-RH
10 M22-R10K-RH
47 M22-R47K-RH
100 M22-R100K-RH
470 M22-R470K-RH
Black 1 M22S-R1K-RH
4.7 M22S-R4K7-RH
10 M22S-R10K-RH
47 M22S-R47K-RH
100 M22S-R100K-RH
470 M22S-R470K-RH
Description
Decibel
Rating Catalog Number
Indicator with buzzer,
black continuous tone,
18–30 Vac/Vdc
83 dB/
10 cm
M22-AMC-XAM
Indicator with buzzer,
black pulsed tone,
18–30 Vac/Vdc
83 dB/
10 cm
M22-AMC-XAMP
Description
Decibel
Rating Catalog Number
Indicator without
buzzer, black
83 dB/
10 cm
M22-AMC
Buzzer only,
continuous tone,
18–30 Vac/Vdc
83 dB/
10 cm
M22-XAM
Buzzer only, pulsed
tone, 18–30 Vac/Vdc
83 dB/
10 cm
M22-XAMP
M22-R10K
M22-AMC-XAM
M22-XAM
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-29
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.1
Operator Interface
Pushbutton and Pilot Devices
Through-the-Door Operators 1
Complete Devices
Buttonless Operator
Button Plates 2
Bulkhead Interfaces
USB Socket 45
RJ45 Socket 6
Notes
1 The pushrod is 3.24 in long and can be cut to length.
2 Any combination of plate color and inscription is available.
3 Minimum order quantity of (10).
4 USB interface is complete with 2-ft-long USB cable.
5 UL and CSA pending.
6 RJ45 interface is an eight-wire connector.
Color Inscription Catalog Number
Blue — M22-DZ-B
RESET M22-DZ-B-GB14
M22-DZ-B-X6
Red — M22-DZ-R
M22-DZ-R-X0
STOP M22-DZ-R-GB0
Bezel Catalog Number
Silver M22-DZ-X
Color Inscription Catalog Number
Blue — M22-XD-B 3
RESET M22-XD-B-GB14
M22-XD-B-X6
Red — M22-XD-R 3
M22-XD-R-X0
STOP M22-XD-R-GB0
Description Catalog Number
Used for USB connection
USB 2.0 Type A plug
IP65 when closed
IP20 when connected
M22-USB-SA
Description Catalog Number
Used for RJ45 Ethernet
connection IP65 when
closed IP20 when connected
M22-RJ45-SA
M22-DZ-B-X6
M22-DZ-X
M22-XD-B
M22-USB-SA
M22-RJ45-SA
V9-T4-30 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.1
Operator Interface
Pushbutton and Pilot Devices
ASi Adapter Modules
Complete Devices
Complete Devices
Operator, Base and Contact Blocks 1
Notes
1 For complete listing of available contact blocks, see Accessories, Pages V9-T4-31 to V9-T4-36.
2 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
Description Catalog Number
ASi adapter module M22-ASI
ASi adapter module for base mounting M22-ASI-C
ASi adapter module for E-stop M22-ASI-S
ASi adapter module for E-stop base mounting M22-ASI-CS
Button
Color
Contact Block
Configuration 2Catalog Number
Momentary
Black 1NO-1NC FAK-S-KC11-I
Red 1NO-1NC FAK-R-KC11-I
Yellow 1NO-1NC FAK-Y-KC11-I
Maintained
Red NC FAK-R-V-KC01-IY
2NC FAK-R-V-KC02-IY
1NO-2NC FAK-R-V-KC12-IY
1NO-1NC FAK-R-V-KC11-IY
M22-ASI
FAK-S-KC11-I
FAK-R-V-KC01-IY
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-31
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.1
Operator Interface
Pushbutton and Pilot Devices
Accessories
Mounting Adapters
Contact Blocks
Notes
1 Included with each operator.
2 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
3 Not stackable.
Description Catalog Number
Contact block mounting adapter. 1M22-A
Contact block mounting adapter, four-position (for use with four-way
pushbuttons, joysticks and four-position selector switches only). 1
M22-A4
Allows mounting of M22 pushbuttons to LS-Titan limit switch bodies
(for the full LS-Titan catalog section, see PG08301004E).
M22-LS
Mounting
Location Terminal Type
Contact
Configuration 2
Package
Qty. Catalog Number
Front Screw NO 1 M22-K10
NO 25 M22-K10-B25
NO 100 M22-K10-B100
NO, early-make 1 M22-K10P
NC 1 M22-K01
NC 25 M22-K01-B25
NC 100 M22-K01-B100
NC, late-break 1 M22-K01D
Base NO 1 M22-KC10
NO 25 M22-KC10-B25
NO 100 M22-KC10-B100
NC 1 M22-KC01
NC 25 M22-KC01-B25
NC 100 M22-KC01-B100
Front Spring cage NO 1 M22-CK10
NC 1 M22-CK01
NC, late-break 1 M22-CK01D
2NO 31M22-CK20
2NC 31M22-CK02
NO-NC 31M22-CK11
Base NO 1 M22-CKC10
NC 1 M22-CKC01
M22-A
M22-A4
M22-LS
M22-K10;
V9-T4-32 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.1
Operator Interface
Pushbutton and Pilot Devices
Light Units
Terminal Type
Mounting
Location LED Color Light Unit Voltage Catalog Number
Screw Front White 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-LED-W
Red M22-LED-R
Green M22-LED-G
Blue M22-LED-B
White 85–264 Vac M22-LED230-W
Red M22-LED230-R
Green M22-LED230-G
Blue M22-LED230-B
White 207–264 Vac M22-LED230H-W
Red M22-LED230H-R
Green M22-LED230H-G
Blue M22-LED230H-B
Base White 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-LEDC-W
Red M22-LEDC-R
Green M22-LEDC-G
Blue M22-LEDC-B
White 85–264 Vac M22-LEDC230-W
Red M22-LEDC230-R
Green M22-LEDC230-G
Blue M22-LEDC230-B
White 207–264 Vac M22-LEDC230H-W
Red M22-LEDC230H-R
Green M22-LEDC230H-G
Blue M22-LEDC230H-B
Spring cage Front White 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-CLED-W
Red M22-CLED-R
Green M22-CLED-G
Blue M22-CLED-B
White 85–264 Vac M22-CLED230-W
Red M22-CLED230-R
Green M22-CLED230-G
Blue M22-CLED230-B
Base White 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-CLEDC-W
Red M22-CLEDC-R
Green M22-CLEDC-G
Blue M22-CLEDC-B
White 85–264 Vac M22-CLEDC230-W
Red M22-CLEDC230-R
Green M22-CLEDC230-G
Blue M22-CLEDC230-B
M22-LED-W
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-33
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.1
Operator Interface
Pushbutton and Pilot Devices
LED Resistor and Test Elements
Legend Plate Holders and Inserts, Pushbuttons and Double Pushbuttons 3
Notes
1 Resistor units to be used with 12–30V light units.
2 Refer to IL04716002E for use of resistor elements in series for higher DC voltage.
3 Legend plates are IP66 and NEMA 4X/13.
4 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library (see Volume 7—
Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E, Tab 37) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-XD-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
Example
To order a legend plate for a pushbutton with non-standard markings (FORWARD):
1. Select legend plate holder—M22S-ST-X.
2. Select legend plate insert—M22-XST-ETCH.
3. Select FORWARD from the Symbols Library, Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions,
CA08100008E, Tab 37, identified by GB15 suffix.
4. Indicate on the order form in the order notes—suffix GB15, line item # ___ .
Terminal Type
Mounting
Location
Element
Type Voltage Catalog Number
Screw Front Resistor 12 42–60 Vac/Vdc M22-XLED60
220 Vdc M22-XLED220
Test 12–240 Vac/Vdc M22-XLED-T
85–264 Vac M22-XLED230-T
Description Inscription Catalog Number
Legend plate holder, without legend plate insert,
for pushbuttons
—M22S-ST-X
Legend plate holder, without legend plate insert,
for double pushbuttons
—M22S-STDD-X
Legend plate insert — M22-XST
Custom M22-XST-ETCH 4
STOP M22-XST-GB0
START M22-XST-GB1
OFF M22-XST-GB5
ON M22-XST-GB6
RUN M22-XST-GB7
FAULT M22-XST-GB8
OFF ON M22-XST-GB10
MAN. AUTO M22-XST-GB11
MAN. O AUTO M22-XST-GB12
HAND AUTO M22-XST-D11
HAND O AUTO M22-XST-D12
1M22-XST-X52
2M22-XST-X53
O I M22-XST-X88
O - I M22-XST-X89
I O II M22-XST-X93
M22-XLED60
M22S-ST-X
M22-XST-GB0
V9-T4-34 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.1
Operator Interface
Pushbutton and Pilot Devices
Legend Plates, Complete 1
Notes
1 Legend plates are IP66 and NEMA 4X/13.
2 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library (see Volume 7—
Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E, Tab 37) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-XD-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
Description Inscription Catalog Number
For use with pushbuttons
and indicating lights
Legend plate holder with insert STOP M22S-ST-GB0
START M22S-ST-GB1
OFF M22S-ST-GB5
ON M22S-ST-GB6
RUN M22S-ST-GB7
FAULT M22S-ST-GB8
1M22S-ST-X52
2M22S-ST-X53
Selector switches — OFF ON M22S-ST-GB10
MAN. AUTO M22S-ST-GB11
MAN. O AUTO M22S-ST-GB12
HAND AUTO M22S-ST-D11
HAND O AUTO M22S-ST-D12
O I M22S-ST-X88
O - I M22S-ST-X89
I O II M22S-ST-X93
Emergency-stop operators Rectangular yellow legend plate — M22-XZK
Custom M22-XZK-ETCH 2
EMERGENCY-STOP M22-XZK-GB99
Square yellow legend plate — M22-XYK
—M22-XYK-ETCH 2
EMERGENCY-STOP four-language M22-XYK1
EMERGENCY-STOP (top and bottom) M22-XYK5
Round yellow legend plate, 90 mm — M22-XAK
Custom M22-XAK-ETCH 2
EMERGENCY-STOP four-language M22-XAK1
EMERGENCY-STOP (top and bottom) M22-XAK5
Round yellow legend plate, 60 mm — M22-XBK
Custom M22-XBK-ETCH 2
EMERGENCY-STOP four-language M22-XBK1
EMERGENCY-STOP (top and bottom) M22-XBK5
Four-way pushbutton,
joystick and four-position
selector switches
Silver square legend plate — M22-XCK
Custom M22-XCK-ETCH 2
Four directional arrows M22-XCK1
0-1-0-2-0-3-0-4 M22-XCK2
Two directional arrows M22-XCK3
M22S-ST-GB0
M22-XZK
M22-XBK1
M22-XCK1
M22-XYK
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-35
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.1
Operator Interface
Pushbutton and Pilot Devices
Surface Mounting Enclosures 1
Flush Mounting Plates, Aluminum
Shrouds, Plastic
Selector Switch Accessories
Emergency Stop Operator Accessories
Blanking Plugs
Notes
1Requires use of base mounted contact blocks.
2Plunger needed to actuate center-mounted contact blocks. Used for non-illuminated
three-position selector switches only.
3Enables a keyed selector switch to be set to user-selected key withdraw position.
Description Catalog Number
Yellow top, black base for
emergency-stop operators
M22-IY1-PG
One-element enclosure M22-I1-PG
Two-element enclosure M22-I2-PG
Three-element enclosure M22-I3-PG
Four-element enclosure M22-I4-PG
Six-element enclosure M22-I6-PG
M20 connecting screw M22-XI
M20 cord grip V-M20
Finish Rating Catalog Number
One Hole
Yellow paint for
emergency-stop
operators
—M22-EY1
Gray anodized IP65 M22-E1
Tw o H o l e s
Gray anodized IP65 M22-E2
Three Holes
Gray anodized IP65 M22-E3
Four Holes
Gray anodized IP65 M22-E4
Five Holes
Gray anodized IP65 M22-E5
Six Holes
Anodized IP40 M22-E6
Description Rating Catalog Number
One-element IP55 M22-H1
Two-element IP55 M22-H2
Three-element IP55 M22-H3
Four-element IP40 M22-H4
Five-element IP40 M22-H5
Six-element IP40 M22-H6
Mounting plate — M22-XE5
Plaster keys for
flush mounting
—M22-UPE
M22-IY1-PG
M22-IY-PG
M22-EY1
M22-H1
Description Catalog Number
Plunger bridge 2M22-XW
Key cover M22-XWS
Key withdraw adapter 3M22-XC-R
Coding adapter M22-XC-Y
Guard ring M22-XGWK
Description Catalog Number
Yellow guard ring M22-XGPV
Gray guard ring M22G-XGPV
Sealing shroud M22-PL-PV
Color Catalog Number
Gray M22-B
Black M22S-B
M22-XC-Y
M22-XWS
M22-XC-R
M22-XW
M22-XGWK
M22-XGPV
M22G-XGPV
M22-PL-PV
M22-B
V9-T4-36 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.1
Operator Interface
Pushbutton and Pilot Devices
Mounting Accessories Protective Diaphragm
Dust Covers
Kits
Description Catalog Number
Telescopic clip with top-hat rail M22-TC
Telescopic clip M22-TA
Telescopic clip extension M22-TCV
DIN rail mounting adapter M22-IVS
Mounting ring M22-GR
Mounting ring tool M22-MS
Adapter ring set for 30 mm holes M22S-R30
M22-TC and M22-TA
M22-IVS
M22-GR
M22-MS
M22S-R30
For Use with … Catalog Number
Flush pushbuttons and indicating lights M22-T-D
Double pushbuttons M22-T-DD
Description Catalog Number
Contact block dust cover M22-XKDP
Operator dust cover, max three
contact blocks
M22-ADC
Operator dust cover, max four
contact blocks
M22-ADC4
Description Catalog Number
Includes one each: M22-XW, M22-XC-R,
M22-XC-Y,
M22S-B, M22-A, M22-XD-SWRGYB
M22-KT1
M22-T-D and
M22-T-DD
M22-ADC4
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-37
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.1
Operator Interface
Pushbutton and Pilot Devices
10250T—30 mm Pushbuttons
Features
●Heavy-duty zinc die-cast construction
●Enclosed silver contacts with reliability nibs
●Diaphragm seals with drainage holes
●Grounding nibs on the operator casing
Product Selection
10250T—30 mm Pushbuttons
Non-Illuminated Pushbutton Units—UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Note
1 Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use in ultraviolet light applications.
Contact
Type Button Color
Catalog Number
Flush Button Extended Button Mushroom Button Jumbo Mushroom 1
1NO Black 10250T23B 10250T25B 10250T26B 10250T27B
Red 10250T23R 10250T112-53 10250T122-53 10250T172-53
Green 10250T23G 10250T25G 10250T26G 10250T27G
Yellow 10250T23Y 10250T25Y 10250T26Y 10250T27Y
Red—Engraved EMERG. STOP — — — 10250T17213-53
1NC Black 10250T101-51 10250T111-51 10250T121-51 10250T171-51
Red 10250T102-51 10250T25R 10250T26R 10250T27R
Green 10250T103-51 10250T113-51 10250T123-51 10250T173-51
Yellow 10250T104-51 10250T120-51 10250T124-51 10250T174-51
Red—Engraved EMERG. STOP — — — 10250T29
1NO-1NC Black 10250T30B 10250T31B 10250T32B 10250T33B
Red 10250T30R 10250T31R 10250T32R 10250T33R
Green 10250T30G 10250T31G 10250T32G 10250T33G
Yellow 10250T30Y 10250T31Y 10250T32Y 10250T33Y
Red—Engraved EMERG. STOP — — — 10250T33
2NO Black 10250T101-2 10250T111-2 10250T121-2 10250T171-2
Red 10250T102-2 10250T112-2 10250T122-2 10250T172-2
Green 10250T103-2 10250T113-2 10250T123-2 10250T173-2
Yellow 10250T104-2 10250T120-2 10250T124-2 10250T174-2
Red—Engraved EMERG. STOP — — — 10250T17213-2
2NC Black 10250T101-3 10250T111-3 10250T121-3 10250T171-3
Red 10250T102-3 10250T112-3 10250T122-3 10250T172-3
Green 10250T103-3 10250T113-3 10250T123-3 10250T173-3
Yellow 10250T104-3 10250T120-3 10250T124-3 10250T174-3
Red—Engraved EMERG. STOP — — — 10250T17213-3
Flush Button
Extended Button
Mushroom Button
Jumbo Mushroom
V9-T4-38 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.1
Operator Interface
Pushbutton and Pilot Devices
Illuminated Pushbutton Units—UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Note
1 For flashing module catalog number 10250TFL1, add suffix code FM to listed catalog number. Example: 10250T75RFM.
Type Voltage Color
LED/Lamp
Number
Catalog Number
Illuminated Pushbutton
1NO 1NO-1NC 1NC
LED Lamp
Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc Red Bayonet
base
10250T397LRD24-53 10250T397LRD24-1 10250T397LRD24-51
Green 10250T397LGD24-53 10250T397LGD24-1 10250T397LGD24-51
Amber 10250T397LAD24-53 10250T397LAD24-1 10250T397LAD24-51
Yellow 10250T397LYD24-53 10250T397LYD24-1 10250T397LYD24-51
Blue 10250T397LLD24-53 10250T397LLD24-1 10250T397LLD24-51
White 10250T397LWD24-53 10250T397LWD24-1 10250T397LWD24-51
120 Vac Red 10250T397LRD2A-53 10250T397LRD2A-1 10250T397LRD2A-51
Green 10250T397LGD2A-53 10250T397LGD2A-1 10250T397LGD2A-51
Amber 10250T397LAD2A-53 10250T397LAD2A-1 10250T397LAD2A-51
Yellow 10250T397LYD2A-53 10250T397LYD2A-2 10250T397LYD2A-51
Blue 10250T397LLD2A-53 10250T397LLD2A-1 10250T397LLD2A-51
White 10250T397LWD2A-53 10250T397LWD2A-1 10250T397LWD2A-51
Transformer 120 Vac Red 10250T411LRD06-53 10250T411LRD06-1 10250T411LRD06-51
Green 10250T411LGD06-53 10250T411LGD06-1 10250T411LGD06-51
Amber 10250T411LAD06-53 10250T411LAD06-1 10250T411LAD06-51
Yellow 10250T411LYD06-53 10250T411LYD06-1 10250T411LYD06-51
Blue 10250T411LLD06-53 10250T411LLD06-1 10250T411LLD06-51
White 10250T411LWD06-53 10250T411LWD06-1 10250T411LWD06-51
Incandescent Lamp
Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc Red #757 10250T476C21-53 10250T476C21-1 10250T476C21-51
Green 10250T476C22-53 10250T476C22-1 10250T476C22-51
Amber 10250T476C43-53 10250T476C43-1 10250T476C43-51
Yellow 10250T476C23-53 10250T476C23-1 10250T476C23-51
Blue 10250T476C24-53 10250T476C24-1 10250T476C24-51
Clear 10250T476C25-53 10250T476C25-1 10250T476C25-51
White 10250T476C26-53 10250T476C26-1 10250T476C26-51
Resistor 120 Vac/Vdc Red 120MB 10250T471C21-53 10250T471C21-1 10250T471C21-51
Green 10250T471C22-53 10250T471C22-1 10250T471C22-51
Amber 10250T471C43-53 10250T471C43-1 10250T471C43-51
Yellow 10250T471C23-53 10250T471C23-1 10250T471C23-51
Blue 10250T471C24-53 10250T471C24-1 10250T471C24-51
Clear 10250T471C25-53 10250T471C25-1 10250T471C25-51
White 10250T471C26-53 10250T471C26-1 10250T471C26-51
Transformer 120 Vac Red #755 10250T75R 110250T76R 110250T77R 1
Green 10250T75G 110250T76G 110250T77G 1
Amber 10250T75A 110250T76A 110250T77A 1
Yellow 10250T75Y 110250T76Y 110250T77Y 1
Blue 10250T75B 110250T76B 110250T77B 1
Clear 10250T75C 110250T76C 110250T77C 1
White 10250T75W 110250T76W 110250T77W 1
24V Full Voltage
Illuminated Pushbutton
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-39
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.1
Operator Interface
Pushbutton and Pilot Devices
Indicating Light Units
Indicating Light Units—UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 1
Notes
1 Standard indicating lights are rated UL (NEMA) 3S as well.
2 For flashing lamp, add letter F to listed catalog number. Example: 10250T34RF.
Type Voltage Color
LED/Lamp
Number
Catalog Number Catalog Number
24V Full Voltage
Indicating Light—Red
Catalog Number 10250T206NC1N
120V AC Transformer
PresTest—Green
Catalog Number 10250T74NG
LED Lamp
Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc Red Bayonet
base
10250T197LRP24 10250T297LRP24
Green 10250T197LGP24 10250T297LGP24
Amber 10250T197LAP24 10250T297LAP24
Yellow 10250T197LYP24 10250T297LYP24
Blue 10250T197LLP24 10250T297LLP24
White 10250T197LWP24 10250T297LWP24
120 Vac Red 10250T197LRP2A 10250T297LRP2A
Green 10250T197LGP2A 10250T297LGP2A
Amber 10250T197LAP2A 10250T297LAP2A
Yellow 10250T197LYP2A 10250T297LYP2A
Blue 10250T197LLP2A 10250T297LLP2A
White 10250T197LWP2A 10250T297LWP2A
Transformer 120 VAC Red 10250T181LRP06 10250T221LRP06
Green 10250T181LGP06 10250T221LGP06
Amber 10250T181LAP06 10250T221LAP06
Yellow 10250T181LYP06 10250T221LYP06
Blue 10250T181LLP06 10250T221LLP06
White 10250T181LWP06 10250T221LWP06
Incandescent Lamp
Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc Red #757 10250T206NC1N 10250T235NC21
Green 10250T206NC2N 10250T235NC22
Amber 10250T206NC19N 10250T235NC43
Yellow 10250T206NC3N 10250T235NC23
Blue 10250T206NC4N 10250T235NC24
Clear 10250T206NC5N 10250T235NC25
White 10250T206NC6N 10250T235NC26
Resistor 120 Vac/Vdc Red 120MB 10250T201NC1N 10250T231NC21
Green 10250T201NC2N 10250T231NC22
Amber 10250T201NC19N 10250T231NC43
Yellow 10250T201NC3N 10250T231NC23
Blue 10250T201NC4N 10250T231NC24
Clear 10250T201NC5N 10250T231NC25
White 10250T201NC6N 10250T231NC26
Transformer 2120 VAC Red #755 10250T34R 10250T74NR
Green 10250T34G 10250T74NG
Amber 10250T34A 10250T74NA
Yellow 10250T34Y 10250T74NY
Blue 10250T34B 10250T74NB
Clear 10250T34C 10250T74NC
White 10250T34W 10250T74NW
24V Full Voltage
Illuminated Light
120 Vac Transformer
PresTest
V9-T4-40 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.1
Operator Interface
Pushbutton and Pilot Devices
Two-Position Push-Pull Units—UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Three-Position Push-Pull Units—UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Note
1 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
Operator Position 1
Button Type/Color
Contact
Type Catalog Number
Pull Push Mounting Location
AB
Two-Position Maintained Push, Maintained Pull
O
X
X
O
40 mm/red 1NO 10250T5B62-1X
1NC
O
X
X
O
40 mm engraved
EMERG. STOP/red
1NO 10250T5B63-1X
1NC
O
X
X
O
65 mm aluminum engraved
EMERG. STOP/red
1NO 10250T5J63-1X
1NC
O
X
X
O
65 mm aluminum engraved
EMERG. STOP/red
1NO 10250ED1080-2
Special security
jumbo mushroom head
1NC
Operator Position 1
Button Type/Color
Contact
Type Catalog Number
Pull Intermediate Push Mounting Location
AB
Three-Position Maintained Push, Momentary Pull
X
X
O
X
O
O
40 mm/black 1NC 10250T9B60-3X
1NC40 mm/red 10250T9B62-3X
40 mm engraved
EMERG. STOP/red
10250T9B63-3X
Three-Position Momentary Push, Momentary Pull
X
X
O
X
O
O
40 mm/black 1NC 10250T4B60-3X
1NC40 mm/red 10250T4B62-3X
O
X
O
O
X
O
40 mm/black 1NO 10250T10B60-1X
1NC40 mm/red 10250T10B62-1X
10250T5B63-1X
10250T5J63-1X
10250T5B62-1X
10250ED1080-2
10250T_
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-41
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.1
Operator Interface
Pushbutton and Pilot Devices
Two-Position Illuminated Maintained Push, Maintained Pull—UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Three-Position Illuminated Momentary Push, Momentary Pull—UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Note
1 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
Operator Position 1
Lamp Type Voltage
Contact
Type
LED/Lamp
Number
Red Standard
Push-Pull
Catalog Number
Maintained—
Pull
Maintained—
Push Mounting Location
AB
O
X
X
O
LED Full Voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO Bayonet
base
10250T597LRD24-1X
1NC120 Vac/Vdc 10250T597LRD2A-1X
Transformer 24 Vac 10250T589LRD06-1X
120 Vac 10250T563LRD06-1X
O
X
X
O
Incandescent Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO #757 10250T579C47-1X
1NCResistor 120 Vac/Vdc 120MB 10250T580C47-1X
Transformer 24 Vac #755 10250T589C47-1X
120 Vac 10250T563C47-1X
Operator Position 1
Lamp Type Voltage
Contact
Type
LED/
Lamp
Number
Red Standard
Push-Pull
Catalog Number
Momentary—
Pull
Maintained—
Intermediate
Momentary—
Push Mounting Location
AB
O
X
O
O
X
O
LED Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO Bayonet
base
10250T1097LRD24-1X
1NC120 Vac 10250T1097LRD2A-1X
Transformer 24 Vac 10250T1089LRD06-1X
120 Vac 10250T1063LRD06-1X
X
X
O
X
O
O
Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NC Bayonet
base
10250T497LRD24-3X
1NC120 Vac 10250T497LRD2A-3X
Transformer 24 Vac 10250T489LRD06-3X
120 Vac 10250T463LRD06-3X
O
X
O
O
X
O
Incan-
descent
Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO #757 10250T1079C47-1X
1NCResistor 120 Vac 120MB 10250T1080C47-1X
Transformer 24 Vac #755 10250T1089C47-1X
120 Vac 10250T1063C47-1X
X
X
O
X
O
O
Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NC #757 10250T479C47-3X
1NCResistor 120 Vac 120MB 10250T480C47-3X
Transformer 24 Vac #755 10250T489C47-3X
120 Vac 10250T463C47-3X
Two-Position Push-
Pull Operator
Three-Position Push-
Pull Operator
V9-T4-42 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.1
Operator Interface
Pushbutton and Pilot Devices
Three-Position Illuminated Maintained Push, Momentary Pull—UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Potentiometers
Potentiometer with Knob and Standard Dial Plate—Linear Type ±10%—
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 12, 13
Notes
1 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
2 Shown with standard aluminum dial plate.
3 Large dial plate with space for legend is available at no charge. To order, add suffix 36 to catalog number.
Example: 10250T33136. To order separately, see footnote 4 below.
4 Large dial plate has space at top for 15 letters. 3/32 in high. For custom stamped legend plates,
order legend plate as separate item 10250TR30 and specify stamping.
5 For use with commercially purchased potentiometers having shaft dimensions per dimension drawing
Operator Position 1
Lamp Type Voltage
Contact
Type
LED/
Lamp
Number
Red Standard
Push-Pull
Catalog Number
Momentary—
Pull
Maintained—
Intermediate
Momentary—
Push Mounting Location
AB
X
X
O
X
O
O
LED Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NC Bayonet
base
10250T997LRD24-3X
1NC120 Vac 10250T997LRD2A-3X
Transformer 24 Vac 10250T989LRD06-3X
120 Vac 10250T963LRD06-3X
X
X
O
X
O
O
Incan-
descent
Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NC #757 10250T979C47-3X
1NCResistor 120 Vac 120MB 10250T980C47-3X
Transformer 24 Vac #755 10250T989C47-3X
120 Vac 10250T963C47-3X
Potentiometer
Ohms Catalog Number
2 Watt (60V Max.) Single Potentiometer with Standard Aluminum Dial Plate 34
1000 10250T331
2500 10250T332
5000 10250T338
10000 10250T333
25000 10250T334
50000 10250T335
Operator only 510250T330
Alternative—black plastic large legend with standard markings E34LP99
Three-Position Push-
Pull Operator
Vertical or Horizontal 2
One-Hole Mounting
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-43
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.1
Operator Interface
Pushbutton and Pilot Devices
Selector Switch Units
Two-Position Selector Switch—UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Three-Position Selector Switch—UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Four-Position Selector Switch—UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Color Selection
Notes
1 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
2 M = Maintained.
3 To order different type or color selector switch, substitute the underlined character with appropriate suffix code from the Color Selection table. Example: 10250T20KG.
Operator Position 1
Operator
Action 2
Contact
Type
Non-Illuminated Illuminated—120V Transformer
Mounting Location Black Knob
Catalog Number 3
Black Lever
Catalog Number 3
Red Knob
Catalog Number 3
Red Lever
Catalog Number 3
AB
XO 1NC 10250T20KB 10250T20LB 10250ED1117-KR 10250ED1117-LR
OX 1NO
Operator Position 1
Operator
Action 2
Contact
Type
Non-Illuminated Illuminated—120V Transformer
Mounting Location Black Knob
Catalog Number 3
Black Lever
Catalog Number 3
Red Knob
Catalog Number 3
Red Lever
Catalog Number 3
AB
XOO 1NO 10250T21KB 10250T21LB 10250ED1117-2KR 10250ED1117-2LR
OOX 1NO
XOO 1NO 10250T22KB 10250T22LB 10250ED1117-3KR 10250ED1117-3LR
O X O 2NC (Series)
OOX 1NO
Operator Position 1
Operator
Action 2
Contact
Type
Non-Illuminated Illuminated—120V Transformer
Mounting Location Black Knob
Catalog Number 3
Black Lever
Catalog Number 3
Red Knob
Catalog Number 3
Red Lever
Catalog Number 3
AB
XOOO 1NC 10250T46KB 10250T46LB 10250ED1117-4KR 10250ED1117-4LR
OXOO 1NO
OOXO 1NO
OOOX 1NC
Illuminated Non-Illuminated
Color
Code
Letter Color
Code
Letter Color
Code
Letter Color
Code
Letter Color
Code
Letter Color
Code
Letter
Red
Green
R
G
White
Blue
W
B
Amber
Clear
A
C
Black
Red
B
R
Green
White
G
W
Blue
Orange
L
O
Two-Position
Maintained Switch
MM
Three-Position
Maintained Switch
MM
M
Four-Position
Maintained Switch
MM
MM
V9-T4-44 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.1
Operator Interface
Pushbutton and Pilot Devices
Legend Plates
For Pushbutton Operators and Indicating Lights—Standard
Blank Plastic Legend Plates—Square
Notes
1 Square legend plates have a satin aluminum field. Color is on lower portion.
2 Cannot be used on cast enclosures except for top row. Suitable for most sheet metal enclosures.
3 If legend plate is to be engraved, specify field color required.
Legend
Color of
Field
Square 1
Catalog Number
1/2 Round
Catalog Number Legend
Color of
Field
Square 1
Catalog Number
1/2 Round
Catalog Number
Blank—see table on Page V9-T4-46.
Letters on Legend Plates Below are 3/16 in High
CLAMP Black 10250TS90 10250TM90 OFF Red 10250TS24 10250TM24
CLOSE 10250TS73 10250TM11 ON Black 10250TS25 10250TM25
DOWN 10250TS74 10250TM12 OPEN 10250TS26 10250TM26
EMERG. STOP Red 10250TS13 10250TM13 OUT 10250TS27 10250TM27
FAST Black 10250TS75 10250TM14 POWER ON 10250TS80 10250TM80
FASTER 10250TS87 10250TM87 RAISE 10250TS28 10250TM28
FEEDER ON 10250TS94 10250TM94 READY 10250TS86 10250TM86
FEEDER OFF 10250TS95 10250TM95 RESET 10250TS29 10250TM29
FORWARD 10250TS15 10250TM15 REVERSE 10250TS30 10250TM30
HIGH 10250TS16 10250TM16 RUN 10250TS31 10250TM31
IN 10250TS17 10250TM17 SAFE 10250TS85 10250TM85
INCH 10250TS18 10250TM18 SLOW 10250TS32 10250TM32
JOG 10250TS19 10250TM19 SLOWER 10250TS88 10250TM88
JOG FOR. 10250TS20 10250TM20 START 10250TS33 10250TM33
JOG REV. 10250TS21 10250TM21 STOP Red 10250TS34 10250TM34
LOW 10250TS22 10250TM22 TEST Black 10250TS83 10250TM83
LOWER 10250TS23 10250TM23 TRANSFER 10250TS93 10250TM93
LUBE-FAIL 10250TS92 10250TM92 TRIP 10250TS84 10250TM84
MOTOR RUN 10250TS81 10250TM81 UNCLAMP 10250TS91 10250TM91
MOTOR STOP 10250TS82 10250TM82 UP 10250TS35 10250TM35
Color Standard
Catalog Number
Jumbo 2
Catalog Number
Extra Large
Catalog NumberLettering Field
Black White or silver 310250TSP76 10250TLP76 10250TEP76
White Red or black 310250TSP77 10250TLP77 10250TEP77
Square Legend Plate
1/2 Round Legend Plate
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-45
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.1
Operator Interface
Pushbutton and Pilot Devices
For Selector Switch and Roto-Push Operators—Standard Size
45 mm and 70 mm Plastic—Round
For Push-Pull Units 3
Notes
1 Square legend plates have a satin aluminum field. Color is on lower portion.
2 If legend plate is to be engraved, specify field color required.
3 All push-pull legend plates include the symbols Þ[in the center of the plate.
Legend
Color of
Field
Square 1
Catalog Number
1/2 Round
Catalog Number Legend
Color of
Field
Square 1
Catalog Number
1/2 Round
Catalog Number
Blank—see table on Page V9-T4-46.
Two-Position—5/32 in High Lettering Three-Position—1/8 in High Lettering
FOR. REV. Black 10250TS38 10250TM38 AUTO OFF HAND Black 10250TS49 10250TM49
HAND AUTO 10250TS39 10250TM39 FOR. OFF REV. 10250TS50 10250TM50
HIGH LOW 10250TS40 10250TM40 FOR. SAFE REV. 10250TS69 10250TM69
JOG RUN 10250TS41 10250TM41 HAND OFF AUTO 10250TS51 10250TM51
MAN. AUTO 10250TS67 10250TM67 MAN. OFF AUTO 10250TS68 10250TM68
OFF ON 10250TS42 10250TM42 OPEN OFF CLOSE 10250TS53 10250TM53
OPEN CLOSE 10250TS43 10250TM43 RUN SAFE JOG 10250TS70 10250TM70
RUN JOG 10250TS44 10250TM44 UP OFF DOWN 10250TS54 10250TM54
SAFE RUN 10250TS45 10250TM45 ON STOP SAFE Red 10250TS71 10250TM71
START JOG 10250TS46 10250TM46
START STOP 10250TS47 10250TM47
UP DOWN 10250TS48 10250TM48
Color
Lettering Field Catalog Number
45 mm
Blank Yellow or red 210250TRP78
70 mm
Blank Yellow or red 210250TRP76
Red EMERG. STOP Yellow 10250TRP79
Legend
Color of
Field
Square 1
Catalog Number
1/2 Round
Catalog Number
Standard Size—Letters on Legend Plates Below are 3/32 in High
PULL START/PUSH STOP Green/red 10250TPP2 10250TR2
PUSH ON/PULL OFF Black 10250TPP5 10250TR5
PULL OPEN/PUSH CLOSE Black 10250TPP8 10250TR8
PULL UP/PUSH DOWN Black 10250TPP11 10250TR11
Jumbo Size—Letters on Legend Plates Below are 1/8 in High
PULL START/PUSH STOP Green/red 10250TPP3 10250TR3
PULL ON/PUSH OFF Black 10250TPP6 10250TR6
PULL OPEN/PUSH CLOSE Black 10250TPP9 10250TR9
PULL UP/PUSH DOWN Black 10250TPP12 10250TR12
Square Legend Plate
1/2 Round Legend Plate
70 mm Round—Plastic
Legend Plate
V9-T4-46 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.1
Operator Interface
Pushbutton and Pilot Devices
Blank and Custom Engraved Legend Plates
Notes
1Cannot be used on cast enclosures except for top row. Suitable for most sheet metal enclosures.
2When used to meet Ford Motor Co. specifications, specify engraved legend. Cannot be used on standard cast or sheet metal enclosures.
3Slightly larger than standard size for legends requiring more space—fits cast enclosures.
4All push-pull legend plates include the symbols Þ[in the center of the plate.
5Square legend plates have a satin aluminum field. Color is on lower portion.
Style Color
Small
Catalog Number
Standard
Catalog Number
Jumbo 1
Catalog Number
Extra Large 2
Catalog Number
Four-Position Selector Switch Push-Pull with Symbols 4
Custom 3
Catalog Number
Standard
Catalog Number
Standard
Catalog Number
Jumbo 1
Catalog Number
Square 5Black 10250TMS36 10250TS36 10250TL36 — 10250TS76 10250TS72 10250TPP17 10250TPP18
Red 10250TMS3710250TS3710250TL37—————
Green/red ——————10250TPP20 10250TPP21
Satin alum. ———10250TNP99 ————
1/2 Round Black 10250TP36 10250TM36 10250TJ36 — — 10250TM72 10250TR17 10250TR18
Red 10250TP3710250TM3710250TJ37—————
Green/red ——————10250TR20 10250TR21
Satin alum. —10250TM8910250TJ89—————
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-47
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.1
Operator Interface
Pushbutton and Pilot Devices
Accessories
Accessories
Notes
1Should not be used on flush button for STOP function.
2Not suitable for single contact block depth cast enclosure. Cover is too thick.
Description Catalog Number
Padlock Attachments
Padlocking Attachment for
Flush Pushbutton Operators
Permits locking NC contacts in open position
with 1/4 in padlock. Will not lock NO contact.
10250TA2
Padlocking Attachment for Use with
Extended Pushbutton
Permits locking NC contacts in open position
with 1/4 in padlock.
10250TA26
Padlocking Cover Guard
Cover locked over flush button makes it
unaccessible or on extended button locks
NC contacts open. Takes 1/4 in shank size
padlock.
10250TA36
Padlock Hasp or Flip-Up Guard
When used with a 1/4 in padlock, makes flush
and long button and knob selector switch
unaccessible, but not locked down. Without
the padlock, it is a flip-up guard. Padlock hasp
can be removed before assembly.
10250TA38
Padlocking Attachment for Use with
Flexible Weather Resistant Boot
Used on long button operators. Stainless steel.
Use only for locking NC contacts open.
10250TA63
Padlock Attachment
For use with illuminated pushbuttons and
maintained push-pull operators having
standard button or lens only. Use 1/4 in
padlock. Locks in down position only.
10250TA64
Padlocking Attachment for Non-
Illuminated Knob Selector Switches
Provision for up to 5, 1/4 in padlocks.
10250TA11
Shrouds and Guards
Shroud for Mushroom Head Operator
Prevents accidental operation. (Not for
push-pull operators.)
10250TA6
Extended Retaining Nut
Replaces standard nut and provides guard
for flush head pushbutton operators.
10250TA12
Guard for Illuminated Pushbutton 10250TA15
Shroud
For jumbo mushroom head operator.
Gray 10250TA56
Yellow 10250TA56Y
Half Shroud—Yellow
For jumbo mushroom head operator.
10250ED1241
Fingerproof Shroud
10 per package
Fits new style contact blocks and light units.
10250TA101
10250TA2
10250TA26
10250TA36
10250TA38
10250TA63
10250TA64
10250TA11
10250TA6
10250TA12
10250TA15
10250TA56_
10250ED1241
10250TA101
Description Catalog Number
Boots
Flexible Weather Resistant Boot
For use with button operators
(extended buttons preferred).
Temperature to –25°F (–32°C).
(See Page V9-T4-48 for 10250TA96
Tightening Tool.)
Black 10250TA3
Red 10250TA4 1
Green 10250TA10
Transparent Boot
For regular illuminated pushbutton
operators and PresTest—Temperature to
–38°F (–39°C). 2
10250TA25
Boot for Flush Pushbutton
Clear 10250TA46
Black 10250TA47
Red 10250TA48
Green 10250TA49
Hardware and Kits
Thrust Washers
To meet Ford Motor Co. mounting
specifications.
10250TK3
Contact Block Tape Seal
Seals plunger openings on last contact block.
Order in multiples of 10 pieces.
10250TK5
Selector Switch Operator Gasket
Seals out dust from getting in between the
cam and contact block plungers. Supplied
as standard with all selector switches.
56-9337
Special Retaining Nut
To accommodate thick panel:
Indicating lights 10250TA30
PresTest, pushbuttons and selector switches 10250TA31
Terminal Block
Two terminals, each will accommodate two
wire terminations.
10250TA62
Spacer Ring
Used when legend plate is not required.
10250TA8
Stacking Screw
Replaces transformer mounting screws on
indicating light so terminal block 10250TA62
can be mounted to light to support and
connect a series resistor. This screw also fits
all contact blocks. Order in multiples of 10.
10250TA79
10250TA_
10250TA25
10250TA4_
10250TK3
10250TK5
56-9337
10250TA3_
10250TA62
10250TA8
10250TA79
V9-T4-48 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.1
Operator Interface
Pushbutton and Pilot Devices
Accessories, continued
Notes
1Component only. Not to be used for custom built (factory assembled) stations.
2Not suitable for single contact block depth cast enclosure. Cover is too thick.
Description Catalog Number
Hardware and Kits, continued
Base Mounting Spacers 1
Equivalent to contact block in depth—
complete with screws, washers, etc.
1 block deep 10250TA22
2 block deep 10250TA23
Grounding Kits
Kits consist of a ring connector and a #6
screw for mounting connector to rear of
contact block mounting screw.
All components except standard indicating
lights and PresTest indicating lights.
10250TKG1
Standard indicating lights 10250TKG2 2
PresTest indicating lights 10250TKG3 2
Contact Block Terminal Jumpers
Available in multiples of 100 only.
Terminal to terminal—within block (short)
100 per pkg. 10250TA70
1000 per pkg. 10250TA70-2
Terminal to terminal—block to block (long)
100 per pkg. 10250TA71
1000 per pkg. 10250TA71-2
Special Operators and Attachments
Wobble Stick
Complete with retaining nut—fits standard
button.
10250TA5
Lever Operator
For use with two vertically mounted flush
pushbuttons.
10250TA14
Maintained Contact Attachment Release
Button Assembly 1
Mechanically interlocks with another
pushbutton and contact block (not included).
Provides mode indication. Minimum hole
centers 1.62 in (41.1 mm), maximum
2.31 in (58.8 mm).
Black 10250TA17
Red 10250TA18
Green 10250TA19
Yellow 10250TA20
Same with long button—black 10250TA39
Maintained Contact Attachment 1
Mechanically interlocks two buttons and
provides position indication for one.
Use with two pushbutton operators and
one or more contact blocks.
10250TA1
Roto-Push Lever Operator
Used to provide lever operation for
Roto-Push operators.
10250TA13
10250TA2_
10250TKG_
10250TA7_
10250TA5
10250TA14
10250TA_
10250TA1
10250TA13
Description Catalog Number
Special Light Modules
Master Test (Dual Input) Module
Internal Form C relay suitable for either AC or
DC applications. Total electrical isolation
between monitored and test circuit. Fits all
illuminated 10250T, E22, E30 and E34 devices.
48 Vdc 10250TMT8
Flasher Module
Changes any AC illuminated device to a
controlled flashing light. Fits 10250T, E30
and E34 devices.
24V 10250TFL2
120V 10250TFL1
Flashing Incandescent Lamp
For use with 120V transformer type or 6V
full voltage type indicating lights including
PresTest and most E29 devices.
10250ED986-4
Hole Plugs
Plug
For unused holes—steel, painted gray
(stainless steel, use E30KT5)
10250TA7
Tools
Octagonal 10250T (notched to fit over
selector switch lever), E29 and E30
10250TA95
E22, E30, E34 and octagonal 10250T
(will not fit over selector switch levers)
E22CW
Tool for Tightening Boots
Used to install boot Catalog Numbers
10250TA3, A4, A10 and A25.
10250TA96
10250T, E34 Allen Wrench
Used for removal of jumbo mushroom head.
10250TA102
Lamp Removal Tools
For transformer type illuminated pushbuttons,
push-pull and selector switches. Fits #12 lamp.
10250TA74
For full voltage and resistor type illuminated
pushbuttons, push-pull and selector switches
and E30.
E30KV1
Standard indicating lights. Fits #44, #755,
#6S6 and #10S6.
E29KLT
10250TA79
10250TFL_
10250ED986-4
10250TA7
10250TA95
E22CW
10250TA96
10250TA102
10250TA74
E30KV1
E29KLT
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-49
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.2
Operator Interface
Stacklights
Product Overview
Product Selection Guide
For our complete product offering, see Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E.
Description E26
Page V9-T4-50
Standards and Certifications
CE 60947-5-1
UL 508—File #E131568
cUL C22.2 No. 14—File #E131568
Ingress protection Stacklight base and light units: IP65, Type 4, 4X and 13
Alarm units: IP20, Type 1
Electrical shock protection Stacklight base and light unit: IP2X
Alarm units: IP0X
Technical Data and Specifications
Mechanical ratings Shock (IEC 68-2-27): 11 ms, 15g
Vibration (IEC 68-2-6): 10 sweeps 10–150 Hz, 2g
Bump (IEC 68-2-29): 1000 pulses, 6 ms, 15g
Climate conditions Operating: maximum 104°F (40°C) at 95% RH,
Temperature –4° to 140°F (–20° to 60°C)
Storage: temperature –40° to 176°F (–40° to 80°C)
Materials Cover: polycarbonate
Lenses: polycarbonate
Stacklight base: nylon
Extension tubes: aluminum
Mounting base: zinc die cast
Terminals 14–30 AWG (2.5–0.05 mm2) for single conductors and 18–26 AWG (0.75–0.14 mm2)
for two conductors of the same size. Do not mix solid and stranded wire in the same terminal.
Recommended tightening torque is 4.4–5.3 lb-in (0.5–0.6 Nm)
Electrical ratings Insulation voltage (Ui): 690V
Operational voltage (Ue): 250V
Impulse withstand voltage (Uimp): 1.5 kV
Bulb specifications Incandescent lamp type: BA15d
Maximum lamp wattage: 6W
Bulbs—average life:
Incandescent: 7,000–12,000 hrs. (based on voltage)
Xenon flasher: 20,000 hrs.
LED: 60,000–100,000 hrs. (based on colors)
LED/Incandescent comparison Incandescent lamps
Average operating life of 7,000 hours
Each lamp can be used with any color lens
Low cost results in short-term savings
LED lamps
Average operating life of 60,000–100,000 hours
Low power consumption
Extended life results in long-term savings
V9-T4-50 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.2
Operator Interface
Stacklights
E26 Stacklights
Features
●Modular construction
●Six lens colors
●Variety of lamp types and voltages
●Mono-tonal, bi-tonal and intermittent audible alarms
●Combination of visible and audible alarms
●Modular components reduce inventory requirements,
increase flexibility
●Steady and flashing modes allow one light to signal multiple
conditions
●No-tools assembly permits easy lamp replacement
One, two and three-Light assembled stacklights:
●Base mountable
●Incandescent or LED versions
●24V and 120V versions
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-51
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.2
Operator Interface
Stacklights
Catalog Number Selection
E26 Stacklights
Voltage Codes
Notes
1Unless base mount is specified, an extension tube must be selected for a complete unit.
2Component catalog numbers for flashing bases, alarm units and light modules are incomplete and require the addition of a suffix code to specify the required voltage rating. See table above.
3Flashing base is for use with incandescent lamps.
4240V not available for cylindrical LEDs.
5If no voltage is specified, assembled stacklight will be supplied without lamps or LEDs.
Voltage Code Incandescent Lamp Cluster LED Cylindrical LED Xenon Flasher Flasher Base/Alarm
(Blank) No lamp supplied No LED supplied No LED supplied — —
V1 12 Vac/Vdc 12 Vac/Vdc 12 Vac/Vdc 12 Vac/Vdc 12 Vac/Vdc
V2 24 Vac/Vdc 24 Vac/Vdc 24 Vac/Vdc 24 Vac/Vdc 24 Vac/Vdc
V3 48 Vac/Vdc 48 Vac/Vdc 48 Vac/Vdc 48 Vac/Vdc 48 Vac/Vdc
V4 120 Vac/Vdc 120 Vac 120 Vac 120 Vac 120 Vac/Vdc
V5 240 Vac/Vdc 240 Vac — 240 Vac 240 Vac/Vdc
Voltage 5
Code Description
V1
V2
V3
V4
V5 4
12V
24V
48V
120V
240V
Alarm
Code Description
Component
Catalog No. 2
W
Q
N
P
None
Mono-tonal
Bi-tonal
Intermittent
—
E26BQ_
E26BN_
E26BP_
Light Module
Code Description
Component
Catalog No. 2
0
2
3
4
6
9
Clear incandescent
Red incandescent
Green incandescent
Yellow incandescent
Blue incandescent
Amber incandescent
E26B0_
E26B2_
E26B3_
E26B4_
E26B6_
E26B9_
W
R
G
Y
B
A
White cluster LED with clear lens
Red cluster LED with red lens
Green cluster LED with green lens
Yellow cluster LED with yellow lens
Blue cluster LED with blue lens
Amber cluster LED with amber lens
E26BW_
E26BR_
E26BG_
E26BY_
E26BB_
E26BA_
W1
R1
G1
Y1
B1
A1
White cylindrical LED with clear lens 4
Red cylindrical LED with red lens 4
Green cylindrical LED with green lens 4
Yellow cylindrical LED with yellow lens 4
Blue cylindrical LED with blue lens 4
Amber cylindrical LED with amber lens 4
E26BW1_
E26BR1_
E26BG1_
E26BY1_
E26BB1_
E26BA1_
M
E
U
V
K
Z
Flashing white cluster LED with clear lens
Flashing red cluster LED with red lens
Flashing green cluster LED with green lens
Flashing yellow cluster LED with yellow lens
Flashing blue cluster LED with blue lens
Flashing amber cluster LED with amber lens
E26BM_
E26BE_
E26BU_
E26BV_
E26BK_
E26BZ_
X0
X2
X3
X4
X6
X9
Xenon flasher with clear lens
Xenon flasher with red lens
Xenon flasher with green lens
Xenon flasher with yellow lens
Xenon flasher with blue lens
Xenon flasher with amber lens
E26BX0_
E26BX2_
E26BX3_
E26BX4_
E26BX6_
E26BX9_
Extension Tube
Code Description
Component
Catalog No.
WNone (base mount) —
Gray Aluminum
HM
JM
KM
MM
20 mm 3/4 in NPT
160 mm 3/4 in NPT
360 mm 3/4 in NPT
760 mm 3/4 in NPT
E26BHM
E26BJM
E26BKM
E26BMM
Black Aluminum
HU
JU
KU
MU
RU
20 mm 3/4 in NPT
160 mm 3/4 in NPT
360 mm 3/4 in NPT
760 mm 3/4 in NPT
Right angle 3/4 in NPT
E26BHU
E26BJU
E26BKU
E26BMU
E26BRU
Mounting Base 1
Code Description
Component
Catalog No.
W
4
8
9
None (base mount)
3/4 in NPT hub, chrome
Standard three-hole
Standard four-hole
—
E26S104
E26S108
E26S109
Stacklight Base
Code Description
Component
Catalog No. 2
L
F
Standard
Flashing 3
E26BL
E26BF_
E26X 9 KM L39R W–V 4
V9-T4-52 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.2
Operator Interface
Stacklights
Product Selection
Assembled Units
One-Light Unit Stacklight
Two-Light Unit Stacklight
Three-Light Unit Stacklight
Note
1LED modules have very low current draw and should not be used with triac output devices like PLC triac output modules.
It is recommended that dry contact outputs be used to switch 120 Vac modules.
Volts
AC/DC Alarm
First Level
Color Illumination Type Catalog Number
24V None Red Incandescent—steady E26XWWL2W-V2
24V None Red Cylindrical LED—steady E26XWWLR1W-V2
24V None Green Incandescent—steady E26XWWL3W-V2
24V None Green Cylindrical LED—steady E26XWWLG1W-V2
24V None Amber Incandescent—steady E26XWWL9W-V2
24V None Amber Cylindrical LED—steady E26XWWLA1W-V2
120V None Red Incandescent—steady E26XWWL2W-V4
120V 1None Red Cylindrical LED—steady E26XWWLR1W-V4
120V None Green Incandescent—steady E26XWWL3W-V4
120V 1None Green Cylindrical LED—steady E26XWWLG1W-V4
120V None Amber Incandescent—steady E26XWWL9W-V4
120V 1None Amber Cylindrical LED—steady E26XWWLA1W-V4
Volts
AC/DC Alarm
First Level
Color Illumination Type
Second Level
Color Illumination Type Catalog Number
24V None Green Incandescent—steady Red Incandescent—steady E26XWWL32W-V2
24V None Green Cylindrical LED—steady Red Cylindrical LED—steady E26XWWLG1R1W-V2
120V None Green Incandescent—steady Red Incandescent—steady E26XWWL32W-V4
120V 1None Green Cylindrical LED—steady Red Cylindrical LED—steady E26XWWLG1R1W-V4
Volts
AC/DC Alarm
First
Level
Color Illumination Type
Second
Level
Color Illumination Type
Third
Level
Color Illumination Type Catalog Number
24V None Green Incandescent—steady Amber Incandescent—steady Red Incandescent—steady E26XWWL392W-V2
24V None Green Cylindrical LED—steady Amber Cylindrical LED—steady Red Cylindrical LED—steady E26XWWLG1A1R1W-V2
120V None Green Incandescent—steady Amber Incandescent—steady Red Incandescent—steady E26XWWL392W-V4
120V 1None Green Cylindrical LED—steady Amber Cylindrical LED—steady Red Cylindrical LED—steady E26XWWLG1A1R1W-V4
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-53
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.2
Operator Interface
Stacklights
Replacement Parts
Stacklight Replacement Parts Typical Stacklight Assemblies
Notes
1Sold in packages of 5 pieces.
2Sold in packages of 10 pieces.
3Mounting gaskets have two sets of mounting holes—one set with center-to-center spacing of 1.75 in (44.5 mm) and another set with center-to-center spacing of 1.65 in (42 mm).
Description Notes Diagram Catalog Number
Replacement
cover
Normally included with
stacklight base
1 E26S68
Replacement
lens O-ring
Normally included with light
modules
2 E26S106 1
Replacement lenses Clear 3 E26S38
Red E26S39
Green E26S40
Yellow E26S41
Blue E26S42
Amber E26S43
Replacement Xenon
strobe dual high
(does not include lenses)
12 Vac/Vdc 4 E26S33
24 Vac/Vdc E26S34
48 Vac/Vdc E26S35
120 Vac E26S36
240 Vac E26S37
Replacement diffusers White—normally supplied
with incandescent light
modules
4 E26S31
Clear—normally supplied
with LED light modules
E26S32
Replacement lamps 12V 5 E26S8
24V E26S9
48V E26S10
120V E26S11
240V E26S12
Replacement extension
tube O-rings
Normally included with
extension tubes
6 E26S107 2
Replacement mounting
gasket 3
Normally included with
stacklight base
7 E26S105
Lamp removal tool For E26 and E22
incandescent lamps
E22BA3
a Cover Alarm
b O-Ring
d
Light
Diffuser
Terminal
Board
Set Screw
Recommended
Tightening
Torque
Is 7 in-lb
(0.79 Nm)
g
Mounting
Gasket
Lens c
Lamp e
O-Ring b
Mounting
Base
Stacklight
Base
Typical Stacklight Assembly
(Exploded View)
Alternate Conduit Hub
Myers Type
ST-2 or
ST-2CP Hub
Panel
Extension
Tube
O-Rings f
V9-T4-54 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.3
Operator Interface
Panel Meters
Product Overview
Product Selection Guide
For our complete product offering, see Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E.
Description E5 Panel Meters Eclipse Series Panel Meters
Page V9-T4-55 Page V9-T4-55
Number of digits 5 4
Display technology 7-segment LED 7-segment LED
Display character height 8 mm 14 mm
Panel cut-out size 1/32 DIN (25 x 50 mm) 1/8 DIN (45 x 92 mm)
Available outputs None Dual relay, analog, RS-485
Available inputs 0–10V/2–10V/0–20 mA/4–20 mA DC volt, AC volt, DC amp, AC amp, 5A AC,
Temperature (J, K, T, PT100 RTD), 4–20 mA/0–10V/1–5V
Front panel protection IP65 NEMA 4X
Connection method Screw terminal Depluggable screw terminals
Scaling Programmable end points, linear interpolation Programmable end points, linear interpolation
Input power options 10–30 Vdc 9–30 Vdc or 85–264 Vac
Update time 500 ms 400 ms
Automatic min/max capture Yes Yes
Input for display-hold Yes —
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-55
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.3
Operator Interface
Panel Meters
Digital Panel Meters
Features
E5-324-E digital panel meters
●Galvanic isolation with protection against incorrect polarity
●Automatic min/max value detection
●Freely programmable characteristic curve end points
●Input range:
●Single current measuring input (0/4–20 mA)
●Single voltage measuring input (0/2–10V)
Eclipse Series digital panel meters
●Four full digits
●1/8 DIN size
●Red, LED display
●Scalable display
●Flashing alarms
●Min/max data hold
●Optional analog, relay and RS-485 outputs
●Type 4X
Catalog Number Selection
Digital Panel Meters
Eclipse Series
Product Selection
E5-324-E0402
Eclipse Series
Note
1 Output options 0, 2, 4 are not available for models -41X and -43X.
Description Catalog Number
LED digital panel meter, 24 x 48 mm E5-324-E0402
Description Catalog Number
Digital ammeter—5A AC, 85–264 Vac power 57701440
Digital ammeter—5A AC, 85–264 Vac power, 2 relay outputs 57701441
Digital process meter—4–20 mA/0–10V, 85–264 Vac power 57701450
Digital process meter—4–20 mA/0–10V, 85–264 Vac power, 2 relay outputs 57701451
Digital process meter—4–20 mA/0–10V, 85–264 Vac power, 2 relay outputs and analog retransmission 57701453
Digital temperature meter, 85–264 Vac power 57701460
Digital temperature meter, 85–264 Vac power, 2 relay outputs 57701461
Power Supply
0 = DC (9–30 Vdc)
1 = AC (85–265 Vac)
Output Option 1
0 = No option
1 = Dual relay
2 = Analog output (4–20 mA and 0–10V)
3 = Dual relay, analog output (4–20 mA and 0–10V)
4 = RS-485 communications
5 = Dual relay, RS-485
6 = Analog, RS-485 (4–20 mA and 0–10V)
7 = Dual relay, analog, RS-485 (4–20 mA and 0–10V)
Input Option
0 = DC volt
1 = AC volt TRMS
2 = DC amp
3 = AC amp TRMS
4 = 5A AC TRMS
5 = Process (4–20 mA, 0–10V, 1–5V)
6 = Temperature (J, K, T, PT100 RTD)
5770 X –4XX
E5-324-E0402
Eclipse Series
V9-T4-56 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.4
Operator Interface
Operator Interfaces and Programming Software
Product Overview
Operator Interfaces and Programming Software Selection Guide
Operator Interfaces and Programming Software Selection Guide, continued
For our complete product offering, see Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E.
Description ELC-GP Graphics Panel HMi Operator Interface
Page V9-T4-59 Page V9-T4-60
Screen size Two-line and four-line 3.5 in, 5.7 in, 8.0 in and 10.4 in
Screen options Monochrome Blue mode, grey scale, 256 color STN or 65k color TFT
Interface Keypad only Resistive touchscreen only or touchscreen and keypad
Communication ports 2 serial 3 serial; 1 or 2 USB; Expansion port for Ethernet Modbus TCP or Local I/O
Simultaneous protocols 1 3 or 4
Ethernet drivers — Yes
Upload/download Serial cable Serial, Ethernet, and/or USB
Operating system Proprietary Proprietary
Third-party software support — —
Screen saver — Yes
Description XV Operator Interface XP Operator Interface
Page V9-T4-62 Page V9-T4-65
Screen size 3.5 in, 5.7 in, 7.0 in, 8.4 in and 10.4 in 8.4 in, 10.4 in, 12.1 in, 15.0 in and blind node (no screen)
Screen options Color TFT, 64k colors; resolutions from QVGA (320 x 240) to
WVGA (800 x 480)
Color TFT, 16 million colors; resolutions from SVGA (800 x 600) to
UVGA (1600 x1200)
Interface Resistive touchscreen Infrared, non-reflective safety glass
Communication ports Ethernet, RS-232 and/or RS-485, USB 2 serial; 2 Ethernet; removable CompactFlash; 4 USB; VGA
Simultaneous protocols 3 5 or 8
Ethernet drivers Yes Yes
Upload/download Serial, Ethernet, USB Serial, Ethernet, USB
Operating system Windows CE 5.0 Professional Windows XP Embedded (protected)
Third-party software support — Yes
Screen saver Yes Yes
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-57
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.4
Operator Interface
Operator Interfaces and Programming Software
Software Product Selection Guide
Description Visual Designer Galileo HMiSoft ELCSoftGP
Overview Feature-rich software package
with SCADA functionality and
web serving capabilities that can
be run on XV, XP, ePro PS operator
interfaces or personal computers
Intuitive visualization tool. Use
Galileo on XV-102-H_ units
or on XV units running CoDeSys
when a stronger visualization
package is needed
Use HMi Soft to create, edit,
upload and download applications
to the HMi family of operator
interfaces
Use ELCSoftGP to create, edit,
upload and download applications
to ELC Graphics Panels
Catalog ID
Development software seat license VISUALDCE (CE hardware)
VISUALDXP5 (5-pack of VISUALDXP)
VISUALDCE5 (5-pack of VISUALDCE)
VISUALDXP (PCs, XPe, and CE
hardware)
SW-GALILEO-S
SW-GALILEO-M
HMISOFT ELCSOFTGP
Runtime software for a PC VISUALRTPC • N/A N/A
Time-Saving Editor Features
Online and offline simulation•••—
Macro capability •••—
VB scripting • — — —
Math and Logic•••—
Multi-language •••—
System/internal variables•••—
Auto-scale application to different
resolution/screen size
•••—
Scripting (IF, THEN, ELSE, GOTO) •••—
Symbol factory/library•••—
Master pages • Screen groups • Screen groups • —
User-created controls • • — —
Customizable application symbols • • — —
Action lists/math worksheets • • With macros • With macros —
Reusable controls, images and pages • Via indirect tag and/
or PLC assignments
•——
Advanced search and replace • • — —
Advanced context sensitive help • • — —
Conversion of legacy PanelMate™
configurations
• ———
Optional PanelBuilder™ conversion utility • — — —
Online configuration/editing • — — —
V9-T4-58 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.4
Operator Interface
Operator Interfaces and Programming Software
Software Product Selection Guide, continued
Description Visual Designer Galileo HMiSoft ELCSoftGP
Runtime Features
Clock synchronization••••
Sound actions or control••••
Security • Advanced multi-level • • Multi-level •
Pop-up screens • And group screens • • —
Animated graphics•••—
Real-time trending•••—
Recipes •••—
Report generation • • — —
Timer scheduling•••—
Calendar scheduling • — — —
Notification of data and events via
e-mail/text messaging
• ———
Data archiving•••—
Archive to shared network drive • No (–) — —
Alarm and event archiving • • — —
Historical trending•••—
Import/export from XML • • — —
Database interface • ADO.net compliant — — —
Vision system interfaces • • — —
Secure document and Web network
browser
• ———
Remote access and control without having
to install software on the remote PC
• Web Thin Client with Internet
Explorer
———
Automatic scaling of Web clients • — — —
Remote desktop • With UltraVNC and RemoteClient • VNC and RemoteClient — —
Launch/control third-party applications • — — —
2-touch controls for safety • — — —
Embedded PLC logic — — • —
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-59
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.4
Operator Interface
Operator Interfaces and Programming Software
ELC-GP Graphics Panel
Features
●Simple to program and easily connects to ELC products
●Protocols—include Modbus ASCII/RTU, ASCII Slave and
vendor-specific protocols from Allen-Bradley®, Siemens®,
Mitsubishi®, Koyo® and many more
Catalog Number Selection
ELC-GP Graphics Panel
ELC-GP
Product Selection
Graphics Panels
Accessories
Software and Accessories
Description Catalog Number
160 x 32 pixels, 10 function keys, monochrome ELC-GP02
128 x 64 pixels, 10 function keys, monochrome ELC-GP04
Description Catalog Number
Programming software for GP units ELCSOFTGP
Program transfer module ELC-GPXFERMOD
Cable, PC to ELC-GPxx, 9.8 ft (3m) ELC-CBPCGP3
Power supply, 24 watt, 1 amp ELC-PS01
Power supply, 48 watt, 2 amp ELC-PS02
ELC-GP 02
Series
ELC-GP = ELC Graphics Panel
Display
02 = Monochromatic, two-line
04 = Monochromatic, four-line
V9-T4-60 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.4
Operator Interface
Operator Interfaces and Programming Software
HMi Operator Interface
Features
●All units offer RS-232, RS-485 and RS-422 communications
●6-, 8- and 10-inch models offer Ethernet communication
options
●Retentive internal data storage
Catalog Number Selection
HMi Operator Interface
HMi
Product Selection
HMi Operator Interface
Series
HMi = Operator interface
HMiVU = Advanced operator interface
Options
EUNB = No Ethernet
UNBE = Ethernet onboard
Display
04 = 4 in LCD
06 = 6 in LCD
08 = 8 in LCD
10 = 10 in LCD
Options
C = Color TFT
HMI 04 CUNB
Description Catalog Number
4-inch color TFT without expansion slot HMI04CU
6-inch color TFT, no Ethernet HMIVU06CUNB
8-inch color TFT, with Ethernet HMIVU08CUNBE
10-inch color TFT, with Ethernet HMIVU10CUNBE
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-61
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.4
Operator Interface
Operator Interfaces and Programming Software
Accessories
Software and Accessories
Kits
Cable
Power Supply
Description Catalog Number
Programming software HMISOFT
Description Catalog Number
HMi spare parts kits (includes several power connectors,
battery doors, gaskets, mounting clips, etc.)
HMI-SPKIT
Description Catalog Number
1 meter cable to connect between the HMi and Eaton Logic
Controller (ELC)
ELC-CBPCELC1
3 meter cable to connect between the HMi and Eaton Logic
Controller (ELC)
ELC-CBPCELC3
Description Catalog Number
1 amp 24 Vdc power supply ELC-PS01
2 amp 24 Vdc power supply ELC-PS02
V9-T4-62 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.4
Operator Interface
Operator Interfaces and Programming Software
XV Operator Interface
Features
●All XV models have a Microsoft Windows CE operating
system
●Pre-licensed with Visual Designer runtime for up to 1500 tags,
three simultaneous communication drivers, and
one Web session
●Field upgrades are available for up to 4000 tags, three drivers,
and two, four or eight simultaneous Web sessions
Catalog Number Selection
XV Operator Interface
XV
Product Selection
XV Operator Interface with Visual Designer
Notes
1 All 1xx performance class units have 400 MHz processor, 64 MB DRAM, 1 x 10/100 Ethernet, and 1 x USB device.
2 Standard software on embedded hardware. These XV models have a Microsoft Windows CE 5.0 Professional operating
system and are pre-licensed with Visual Designer runtime for up to 1500 tags, 3 simultaneous communication drivers,
and 1 Web session. Field upgrades are available for up to 4000 tags, 3 drivers, and 2, 4 or 8 simultaneous Web sessions.
Description Catalog Number
XV 3.5-inch TFT, plastic housing, resistive touch, Ethernet and RS-232 XV-102-B3-35TQRG-10
XV 3.5-inch TFT, plastic housing, resistive touch, Ethernet and RS-485 XV-102-B4-35TQRG-10
XV 5.7-inch TFT, plastic housing, resistive touch, Ethernet, RS-232, RS-485 XV-102-D4-57TVRG-10
XV 7.0-inch TFT wide screen, plastic housing, resistive touch, Ethernet, RS-232, RS-485 XV-102-D4-70TWRG-10
XV 5.7-inch TFT, metal housing, resistive touch, Ethernet, RS-232, RS-485 XV-152-D4-57TVRG-10
XV 8.4-inch TFT, metal housing, resistive touch, Ethernet, RS-232, RS-485 XV-152-D4-84TVRG-10
XV 10.4-inch TFT, metal housing, resistive touch, Ethernet, RS-232, RS-485 XV-152-D4-10TVRG-10
XV –102–B3–35TQRG–10
Family
XV = Microsoft Windows
CE operating system
Branding and Bezel
10 = Standard blank front bezel with
Eaton branded product label
Display Size Display Technology OS Build
35 = 3.5-inch
57 = 5.7-inch
70 = 7.0-inch
84 = 8.4-inch
10 = 10.4-inch
TQR = TFT (QVGA) resistive
TVR = TFT (VGA) resistive
TWR = TFT (widescreen)
resistive
C = XSoft-CoDeSys/Galileo
G = CE Professional OS and
Visual Designer runtime
1500 tags 2
L = Galileo only unit
Features
Base Unit Variant 1
Features
Additional COMM Options
B = Retentive memory
D = Retentive memory, USB
host, RS-232
E = Retentive memory, USB
host, SmartWire-DT
H = Galileo only unit, USB host
3 = 1-RS-232
4 = 1-RS-485
6 = 1-CANopen
8 = 1-PROFIBUS
E = 1-SmartWire-DT
Performance Class
102 = CE, plastic housing, 2nd gen
152 = CE, metal housing, 2nd gen
XV Operator Interface
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-63
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.4
Operator Interface
Operator Interfaces and Programming Software
XV Operator Interface with XSoft-CoDeSys
XV Operator Interface with Galileo Only
Description Catalog Number
XV 3.5-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, CANopen XV-102-B6-35TQRC-10
XV 3.5-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, PROFIBUS XV-102-B8-35TQRC-10
XV 3.5-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, SmartWire-DT XV-102-BE-35TQRC-10
XV 5.7-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, CANopen XV-102-D6-57TVRC-10
XV 5.7-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, PROFIBUS XV-102-D8-57TVRC-10
XV 5.7-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, CANopen, SmartWire-DT XV-102-E6-57TVRC-10
XV 5.7-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, PROFIBUS, SmartWire-DT XV-102-E8-57TVRC-10
XV 7.0-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, CANopen XV-102-D6-70TWRC-10
XV 7.0-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, PROFIBUS XV-102-D8-70TWRC-10
XV 7.0-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, CANopen, SmartWire-DT XV-102-E6-70TWRC-10
XV 7.0-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, PROFIBUS, SmartWire-DT XV-102-E8-70TWRC-10
XV 5.7-inch TFT metal housing, resistive touch, CANopen XV-152-D6-57TVRC-10
XV 5.7-inch TFT metal housing, resistive touch, PROFIBUS XV-152-D8-57TVRC-10
XV 5.7-inch TFT metal housing, resistive touch, CANopen, SmartWire-DT XV-152-E6-57TVRC-10
XV 5.7-inch TFT metal housing, resistive touch, PROFIBUS, SmartWire-DT XV-152-E8-57TVRC-10
XV 8.4-inch TFT metal housing, resistive touch, CANopen XV-152-D6-84TVRC-10
XV 8.4-inch TFT metal housing, resistive touch, PROFIBUS XV-152-D8-84TVRC-10
XV 8.4-inch TFT metal housing, resistive touch, CANopen, SmartWire-DT XV-152-E6-84TVRC-10
XV 8.4-inch TFT metal housing, resistive touch, PROFIBUS, SmartWire-DT XV-152-E8-84TVRC-10
XV 10.4-inch TFT metal housing, resistive touch, CANopen XV-152-D6-10TVRC-10
XV 10.4-inch TFT metal housing, resistive touch, PROFIBUS XV-152-D8-10TVRC-10
XV 10.4-inch TFT metal housing, resistive touch, CANopen, SmartWire-DT XV-152-E6-10TVRC-10
XV 10.4-inch TFT metal housing, resistive touch, PROFIBUS, SmartWire-DT XV-152-E8-10TVRC-10
Description Catalog Number
XV 3.5-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, Ethernet RS-232 XV-102-H3-35TQRL-10
XV 3.5-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, Ethernet RS-485 XV-102-H4-35TQRL-10
XV 5.7-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, Ethernet RS-232 XV-102-H3-57TVRL-10
XV 5.7-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, Ethernet RS-485 XV-102-H4-57TVRL-10
XV 7.0-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, Ethernet RS-232 XV-102-H3-70TWRL-10
XV 7.0-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, Ethernet RS-485 XV-102-H4-70TWRL-10
V9-T4-64 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.4
Operator Interface
Operator Interfaces and Programming Software
Visual Designer Software
Galileo Development Software
XSoft-CoDeSys-2 Software
Accessories
XV Family Accessories
Description Catalog Number
Visual Designer Development Software License Key
For CE hardware VISUALDCE
For PCs, XPe and CE hardware VISUALDXP
For CE hardware, 5-pack of VISUALDCE VISUALDCE5
For PCs, XPe hardware, 5-pack of VISUALDXP VISUALDXP5
Description Catalog Number
Single-seat license SW-GALILEO-S
Multiple-seat license SW-GALILEO-M
Description Catalog Number
Single Seat License SW-XSOFT-CODESYS-2-S
Multiple Seat License (3) SW-XSOFT-CODESYS-2-M
Description Catalog Number
SD memory card for all XV models MEMORY-SD-A1-S
Spare part kit for XV-102 models—1 power connector, 8 mounting brackets,
1 sealing strip, 1 touch pen
ACC-TP-57-KG-1 XV-102
Spare part kit for XV-152 models—1 power connector, 8 mounting brackets,
1 sealing strip, 1 touch pen
ACC-TP-10-12-RES-1
Visual Designer
Galileo Software
XSoft-CoDeSys-2
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-65
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.4
Operator Interface
Operator Interfaces and Programming Software
XP Operator Interface
Features
●All XP models have a Microsoft Windows XP embedded
operating system
●Pre-licensed with Visual Designer runtime
●Standard models are licensed for 4000 tags, five
simultaneous communication drivers, and one Web session
●Enterprise models are licensed for 64,000 tags, eight
simultaneous communication drivers, and one Web session
●Field upgrades are available for up to 64,000 tags, eight
drivers, and 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, or 256 simultaneous
Web sessions
Catalog Number Selection
XP Operator Interface
XP
Notes
1All 7xx Performance Class units have 1 x 10/100, 1 x 10/100/1000 Ethernet, 4 x USB Host V2.0, 2 x RS-232.
2Standard software on embedded hardware.
Family
XP = X86 Microsoft Windows
XPe operating system
Branding and Bezel
10 = Standard blank front bezel with
Eaton branded product label
Display Size Display Technology OS Build 2
84 =8.4 in
10 =10.4 in
12 =12.1 in
15 =15.0 in
BOX = Blind node
(no display)
TSI = TFT (SVGA) Infrared
TXI = TFT (XVGA) Infrared
Blank = No display
J = XPe OS and License
Visual Designer Runtime
4000 tags
K = XPe OS and License Visual
Designer Runtime 64,000
tags
Features
Base Unit Variant 1
Features
Additional COMM Options
E = 1 GHz Celeron with 1 GB RAM
4 GB C drive CF and 1 GB D drive CF
F = 1.8 GHz Pentium with 2GB RAM
4 GB C drive CF and 1 GB D drive CF
0 = No additional
communication options
Performance Class
702 = XPe, metal housing,
2nd gen
XP – 702 –F0–84TSIK–10
V9-T4-66 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.4
Operator Interface
Operator Interfaces and Programming Software
Product Selection
XP Operator Interface
Visual Designer Software
Galileo Development Software
XSoft-CoDeSys-2 Software
Description Catalog Number
XP 8.4 in TFT, 1 GHz Celeron, 1 GB RAM, 4 GB C drive, 1 GB D drive, 4000 tags, 5 drivers, 1 Web session XP-702-E0-84TSIJ-10
XP 10.4 in TFT, 1 GHz Celeron, 1 GB RAM, 4 GB C drive, 1 GB D drive, 4000 tags, 5 drivers, 1 Web session XP-702-E0-10TSIJ-10
XP 12.1 in TFT, 1 GHz Celeron, 1 GB RAM, 4 GB C drive, 1 GB D drive, 4000 tags, 5 drivers, 1 Web session XP-702-E0-12TXIJ-10
XP 15.0 in TFT, 1 GHz Celeron, 1 GB RAM, 4 GB C drive, 1 GB D drive, 4000 tags, 5 drivers, 1 Web session XP-702-E0-15TXIJ-10
XP blind node (no display), 1 GHz Celeron, 1 GB RAM, 4 GB C drive, 1 GB D drive, 4000 tags, 5 drivers, 1 Web session XP-702-E0-BOXJ-10
XP 8.4 in TFT, 1.8 GHz Pentium, 2 GB RAM, 4 GB C drive, 1 GB D drive, 64k tags, 8 drivers, 1 Web session XP-702-F0-84TSIK-10
XP 10.4 in TFT, 1.8 GHz Pentium, 2 GB RAM, 4 GB C drive, 1 GB D drive, 64k tags, 8 drivers, 1 Web session XP-702-F0-10TSIK-10
XP 12.1 in TFT, 1.8 GHz Pentium, 2 GB RAM, 4 GB C drive, 1 GB D drive, 64k tags, 8 drivers, 1 Web session XP-702-F0-12TXIK-10
XP 15.0 in TFT, 1.8 GHz Pentium, 2 GB RAM, 4 GB C drive, 1 GB D drive, 64k tags, 8 drivers, 1 Web session XP-702-F0-15TXIK-10
XP blind node (no display), 1.8 GHz Pentium, 2 GB RAM, 4 GB C drive, 1 GB D drive, 64k tags, 8 drivers, 1 Web session XP-702-F0-BOXK-10
Description Catalog Number
Visual Designer Development Software License Key
For PCs, XPe and CE hardware VISUALDXP
For PCs, XPe hardware, 5-pack of VISUALDXP VISUALDXP5
For a PC Runtime software license with a maximum of 64k tags, 8 drivers, 1 Web session VISUALRTPC
Visual Designer development software and PC runtime software licenses for a max of 64k tags, 8 drivers, 1 Web session VISUALRTDEVPC
Description Catalog Number
Single-seat license SW-GALILEO-S
Multiple-seat license SW-GALILEO-M
Description Catalog Number
Single Seat License SW-XSOFT-CODESYS-2-S
Multiple Seat License (3) SW-XSOFT-CODESYS-2-M
XP Operator Interface
Visual Designer
Galileo Software
XSoft-CoDeSys-2
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T5-1
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
Sensors and Limit Switches
Limit Switches
Photoelectric Sensors
Inductive Sensors
Connectivity
5.1 Limit Switches
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T5-2
E47 Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T5-3
Compact Prewired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T5-4
E49 Mini Metal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T5-5
E50 Heavy-Duty Plug-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T5-6
LS-Titan Miniature DIN Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T5-7
5.2 Photoelectric Sensors
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T5-9
Enhanced 50 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T5-10
SM Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T5-12
Comet Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T5-13
E58 Harsh-Duty Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T5-15
5.3 Inductive Sensors
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T5-17
iProx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T5-19
E57 Premium+ Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T5-20
E57 Premium+ Series Short Barrel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T5-21
Global Proximity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T5-22
E52 Cube Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T5-23
5.4 Connectivity
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T5-24
Global Plus Connector Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T5-25
For our complete product offering, see Volume 8—Sensing Solutions, CA08100010E,
V9-T5-2 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5.1
Sensors and Limit Switches
Limit Switches
Product Overview
Limit Switches Selection Guide
For our complete product offering, see Volume 8—Sensing Solutions, CA08100010E,
Description
E47 Precision
Switches
Compact Prewired
Switches
E49 Mini Metal
Switches
E50 Heavy-Duty
Plug-in Switches
LS-Titan Miniature
DIN Switches
Page V9-T5-3 Page V9-T5-4 Page V9-T5-5 Page V9-T5-6 Page V9-T5-7
Overview Specified when accurate
repeatability, choice of
operating forces and travel
characteristics and tightly
controlled action of cam or
target in space restricted areas
is of prime importance. Cost-
effective and compact
Designed to be a versatile, slim
device for hard-to-fit
applications where sealing
integrity is required; stackable
ridge for ganged operations
Suitable for OEMs who require
a small, cost-effective solution
but cannot sacrifice durability
and mechanical life as would
be the case with a plastic IEC
style switch
Versatile in design; high
reliability; low maintenance
costs with installation ease;
best choice for heavy-duty limit
switch applications; withstands
physical and chemical abuse of
harsh industrial environments
Eaton’s LS-Titan limit switch
line is a complete offering of
safety position switches
designed for worldwide
application; economical
insulated plastic or rugged
metal enclosures and modular,
plug-in operating heads and
bodies make LS-Titan a flexible
switching solution
Applications Overhead, folding and elevator
doors, sliding gates, automated
guided vehicles and
commercial instrumentation
Machine tool, food processing
and packaging
Automatic vending machines,
electronic assembly machines,
elevators and lifts, injection
molding, packaging
Punch presses, waste water
treatment, machine tool,
automotive, retrieval systems,
industrial truck, car wash lines
Packaging, material handling,
conveying, sorting and
counting, positioning, and
safety applications requiring
positive opening contacts
Product features Self-contained switches or with
an enclosed cast housing for
increased durability and
conduit connection (1/2 in NPT)
High current capacity for power
load switching and motor
handling capability
Screw and solder terminations
Rugged aluminum alloy die cast
housing
Sealed construction with
enclosure ratings of Type
4, 6 and 13
Prewired with 3M of 18 AWG,
AWM 2517, 300V cable
Long life—rated for 10 million
operations
Pre-wired units with custom
cable lengths available for high
volume customers
“Fingerproof” terminals protect
against accidental shock
Modular operating heads,
switch bodies and receptacles
are interchangeable without
field adjustment
Order as complete assemblies
or components for stocking and
manufacturing flexibility
90 degree total travel, 5 degree
pretravel characteristics are
standard features
Modular, plug-in system (head
and body components)
Positive opening NC contacts
for safety applications
Wide variety of economical
plastic and rugged metal
versions available
Operating heads can be rotated
90 degrees to suit specific
direction of operation
Unique electronic safety
position switches (LSE models)
provide analog (0–10 Vdc or 4–
20 mA) outputs proportional to
the actuator position and allow
for easy configuration of a
custom trip point
Can be ordered as separate
components (head and body) or
as completely assembled
switches
Contact ratings NEMA A600, R300,
AC-15, DC-13
15A/20A, 125 or 250 Vac
NEMA B300 5A at 250 Vac
5A at 30 Vdc
NEMA A600, R300
Lighted versions A150, R150
6A, 120 Vac; 10A continuous
AC-15, DC-13
6A at 240 Vac
3A at 24 Vdc
200 mA at 24 Vdc (LSE models)
Enclosure ratings Enclosed—Type 1 Type 4, 6 and 13
IP67
IP65 Type 1, 3, 3S, 4, 4X, 6, 6P, 13
IP67
IP66, IP67
Construction Basic—phenolic
Enclosed—aluminum die cast
Aluminum alloy die cast Zinc alloy Zinc die cast TBD
Approvals UL® recognized
CSA® certified
cULus UL recognized UL listed
CSA certified
IEC 947-5-1
TUV
Safety function by positive
opening contacts per IEC/EN
60947-5-1 up to Category 4 per
EN 954-1
TÜV-Rheinland certified for
functional-safety (LSE models)
CSA certified
ULT listed
CE
CCC
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T5-3
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5.1
Sensors and Limit Switches
Limit Switches
E47 Precision
Features
●The cost-effective solution for highly accurate switching
applications
●Compact housings are ideal for use where space is restricted
●Precision, snap-action operators provide accurate repeatability
of electrical and mechanical operating characteristics
●High current capacity (up to 20A) allows power load switching
and motor handling capability
●Enclosed boot versions (shown on the left, in gray) shield
actuators from debris
●Solder and spade terminals available
●15A models shown, 20A models also available
Product Selection
E47 Precision
Basic Switches Enclosed Switches
Description Type
Catalog
Number 15A Specifications 1Description Catalog Number Specifications 1
Straight lever Screw terminal E47BMS22 OF max.—2.47 oz (70g) Roller lever E47BLS32 OF max.—20.1 oz (570g)
RF min.—0.49 oz (14g) RF min.—6.0 oz (1700g)
PT max.—0.394 in (10 mm) PT max.—0.157 in (4.0 mm)
OT max.—0.220 in (5.6 mm) OT max.—0.236 in (6.0 mm)
MD max.—0.051 in (1.3 mm) MD max.—0.016 in (0.4 mm)
FP max.—1.11 in (28.2 mm) Booted roller lever E47BLS33 OF max.—22.57 oz (640g)
OP—0.748 in (19 mm) RF min.—8.11 oz (230g)
Standard lever Screw terminal E47BMS20 OF max.—3.53 oz (100g) PT max.—0.197 in (5.0 mm)
RF min.—0.99 oz (28g) OT max.—0.236 in (6.0 mm)
PT max.—0.197 in (5.0 mm) MD max.—0.016 in (0.4 mm)
OT max.—0.079 in (2.0 mm) Booted roller plunger E47BLS08 OF max.—17.64 oz (500g)
MD max.—0.039 in (1.0 mm) E47BLS12
(cross roller unit)
RF min.—3.53 oz (100g)
FP max.—0.976 in (24.8 mm) PT max.—0.039 in (1.0 mm)
OP—0.748 in (19 mm) OT max.—0.138 in (3.5 mm)
Cross roller
plunger
Screw terminal E47BMS11 OF max.—12.3 oz (350g) MD max.—0.005 in (0.12 mm)
RF max.—4.02 oz (114g) OP—1.957 in (49.7 mm)
PT max.—0.016 in (0.4 mm) Booted wobble E47BLS14 OF max.—2.11 oz (60g)
OT max.—0.14 in (3.58 mm) RF min.—0.88 oz (25g)
MD max.—0.002 in (0.05 mm) PT max.—0.520 in (13.2 mm)
OP—1.315 in (33.4 mm) OT max.—0.315 in (8.0 mm)
Extended roller
lever
Screw terminal E47BMS42 OF max.—5.64 oz (160g) MD max.—0.039 in (1.0 mm)
RF min.—0.78 oz (22g) Note
1OF = Operating Force; RF = Return Force; PT = Pre-Travel; OT = Overtravel;
MD = Movement Differential; FP = Free Position; OP = Operating Position.
PT max.—0.28 in (7.1 mm)
OT max.—0.16 in (4 mm)
MD max.—0.04 in (1.02 mm)
FP max.—1.437 in (36.5 mm)
OP—1.189 in (30.2 mm)
Roller lever Screw terminal E47BMS30 OF max.—5.64 oz (160g)
RF min.—1.48 oz (42g)
PT max.—0.106 in (2.7 mm)
OT max.—0.094 in (2.4 mm)
MD max.—0.02 in (0.5 mm)
FP Mmax.—1.28 in (32.5 mm)
OP—1.189 in (30.2 mm)
V9-T5-4 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5.1
Sensors and Limit Switches
Limit Switches
Compact Prewired
Features
●Rugged and dependable compact limit switch
●Rugged aluminum alloy die cast housing
●Sealed construction with enclosure ratings of Type 4, 6 and 13
●Prewired with 3m of 18 AWG, AWM 2517, 300V cable
●Stackable ridge for ganged operation
Product Selection
Compact Prewired
Compact Prewired
Actuator Type
Operating Force
(Maximum)
Reset Force
(Minimum)
Overtravel
(Minimum) Pre-Travel
Movement
Differential
(Maximum) Operating Position Catalog Number
Pin plunger 42.3 oz (1.2 kg) 15.9 oz (450g) 0.118 in (3 mm) 0.07 in (1.8 mm) 0.008 in (0.2 mm) 0.62 ± 0.04 in (15.7 ± 1 mm) E47BCC05
Sealed plunger 63.5 oz (1.8 kg) 15.9 oz (450g) 0.118 in (3 mm) 0.07 in (1.8 mm) 0.008 in (0.2 mm) 0.99 ± 0.04 in (24.9 ± 1 mm) E47BCC06
Roller plunger 42.3 oz (1.2 kg) 15.9 oz (450g) 0.118 in (3 mm) 0.07 in (1.8 mm) 0.008 in (0.2 mm) 1.12 ± 0.04 in (28.5 ± 1 mm) E47BCC07
Sealed roller plunger 63.5 oz (1.8 kg) 15.9 oz (450g) 0.118 in (3 mm) 0.07 in (1.8 mm) 0.008 in (0.2 mm) 1.35 ± 0.04 in (34.3 ± 1 mm) E47BCC08
Cross roller plunger 42.3 oz (1.2 kg) 15.9 oz (450g) 0.118 in (3 mm) 0.07 in (1.8 mm) 0.008 in (0.2 mm) 1.12 ± 0.04 in (28.5 ± 1 mm) E47BCC11
Sealed cross roller plunger 63.5 oz (1.8 kg) 15.9 oz (450g) 0.118 in (3 mm) 0.07 in (1.8 mm) 0.008 in (0.2 mm) 1.35 ± 0.04 in (34.3 ± 1 mm) E47BCC12
Bevel plunger 42.3 oz (1.2 kg) 15.9 oz (450g) 0.118 in (3 mm) 0.07 in (1.8 mm) 0.008 in (0.2 mm) 1.12 ± 0.04 in (28.5 ± 1 mm) E47BCC13
Roller lever 20.5 oz (580g) 5.3 oz (150g) 40° 25° max. 3° — E47BCC15
Wobble stick 5.3 oz (150g) — — 15° max. — — E47BCC20
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T5-5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5.1
Sensors and Limit Switches
Limit Switches
E49 Mini Metal
Features
●Long life—rated for 10 million operations
●“Fingerproof” terminals protect against accidental shock
●Double-spring mechanism for contact reliability
●Captive screws on enclosure cover make wiring hassle-free
●SPDT double break
Product Selection
E49 Mini Metal
E49 Mini Metal
Specifications Catalog Number—Assembled Units
(Switch Body and Head)
1NO-1NC ContactsOperating Head Type
Travel to Operate
Contacts
Travel to Reset
Contacts Total Travel
Force to Operate
Contacts
Minimum Return
Force
Side rotary lever 20° 12° 70° 750g 100g E49G31AP3
Adjustable side rotary lever 20° 12° 70° 750g 100g E49G31UP3
Top pushbutton 0.06 in (1.5 mm) 0.04 in (1 mm) 0.22 in (5.5 mm) 900g 150g E49G31BP3
Top push roller 0.06 in (1.5 mm) 0.04 in (1 mm) 0.22 in (5.5 mm) 900g 150g E49G31CP3
Top push roller (90 degree roller) 0.06 in (1.5 mm) 0.04 in (1 mm) 0.22 in (5.5 mm) 900g 150g E49G31C1P3
Adjustable rod lever 20° 12° 70° 750g 100g E49G31DP3
Wobble stick (nylon coil) 1.18 in (30 mm) — — 150g — E49G31NP3
Wobble stick (metal coil) 1.18 in (30 mm) — — 150g — E49G31VP3
Wobble stick (metal rod) 1.18 in (30 mm) — — 150g — E49G31MP3
Wobble stick (whisker) 1.18 in (30 mm) — — 150g — E49G31XM3
V9-T5-6 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5.1
Sensors and Limit Switches
Limit Switches
E50 Heavy-Duty Plug-In
Features
●Modular, plug-in components (head, body and receptacle)
provide application flexibility, reduced inventory and less
downtime
●Manufactured to take the physical and environmental abuse
(including cutting fluids and chemicals) of harsh industrial
environments
●Chemical-resistant Viton® gaskets, seals and boots are
standard, and so are captive, posi-drive screws
●600V rating, ridge-topped contacts and wiping action assure
continuity even to logic level circuits
●Rotary heads are field convertible clockwise,
counterclockwise or both, without special tools
Product Selection
E50 Heavy-Duty Plug-In
Assembled Switches—Standard
Note: Order assembled (as shown in this product guide) or as head, body, receptacle and lever components.
Notes
1CW (clockwise) and CCW (counterclockwise) operation, easily convertible to CW only or CCW only operation.
2Roller can be converted in the field between horizontal and vertical.
Operating Head Type Catalog Number
Side rotary (requires an operating lever) Standard spring return—E50DR1 1E50AR1
Low force spring return—E50DL1 1E50AL1
Maintained two-position—E50DM1 E50AM1
Side pushbutton, spring return—E50DS1 E50AS1
Side pushbutton, adjustable spring return—E50DS2 E50AS2
Side push roller, spring return—E50DS3 2E50AS3
Side pushbutton, maintained—E50DH1 E50AH1
Top pushbutton, spring return—E50DT1 E50AT1
Top pushbutton, adjustable spring return—E50DT2 E50AT2
Top push roller, spring return—E50DT3 2E50AT3
Wobble head, spring return (requires a wobble operator) Standard duty—E50DW1 E50AW1
Heavy-duty high strength steel—E50DW2 E50AW2
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T5-7
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5.1
Sensors and Limit Switches
Limit Switches
LS-Titan Miniature DIN Switches
Features
●Modular, plug-in system (head and body components)
●Safety rated, with positive opening contacts and TUV
certification on electronic (LSE) models
●Wide variety of economical plastic and rugged metal versions
available
●Operating heads can be rotated 90 degrees to suit specific
direction of operation
●Unique electronic safety position switches (LSE models)
provide analog (0–10 Vdc or 4–20 mA) outputs proportional to
the actuator position and allow for easy configuration of a
custom trip point
●Can be ordered as separate components (head and body) or
as completely assembled switches
Product Selection
LS-Titan Miniature DIN Switches
Plastic Safety Switches
Notes
1Cage clamp versions available. Contact Application Engineering.
2Not to be used as a safety position switch. Use only in conjunction with snap-action contact.
Switch Body Catalog Number LS-S02 LS-S20A LS-S11S
Output Function 2NC with
positive opening contacts
2NC with
slow make/break
1NO and 1NC with
positive opening contact
Terminal Connection Screw terminal 1Screw terminal 1Screw terminal 1
Contact Sequence
Description
Operating Head Type
Catalog Number—Heads Only Catalog Number—Assembled Switches
Top push roller plunger LS-XP LS-S02-P LS-S20A-P LS-S11S-P
Short roller lever LS-XLS LS-S02-LS LS-S20A-LS LS-S11S-LS
Angled roller LS-XLA LS-S02-LA LS-S20A-LA LS-S11S-LA
Rotary lever LS-XRL LS-S02-RL LS-S20A-RL LS-S11S-RL
Adjustable roller lever
(with 18 mm roller)
LS-XRLA LS-S02-RLA LS-S20A-RLA LS-S11S-RLA
Adjustable roller lever
(with 40 mm roller)
LS-XRLA40 LS-S02-RLA40 LS-S20A-RLA40 LS-S11S-RLA40
Spring rod (wobble) 2LS-XS LS-S02-S LS-S20A-S LS-S11S-S
12 22
21
11
13
14 24
23
14 22
21
13
V9-T5-8 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5.1
Sensors and Limit Switches
Limit Switches
Plastic Electronic Safety Position Switches
Note
1Not to be used as a safety position switch. Use only in conjunction with snap-action contact.
Switch Body Catalog Number LSE-AI LSE-AU
Output Function Analog 4–20 mA Analog 0–10V
Safety Functions and Approvals
Additional diagnostic output that registers a 0V signal in the event of a fault. Self-test function
continuously tests both outputs for overloads, short circuits to 0V and short circuits to +Ue.
Certified by TÜV to EN 954-1, Category 3 or 4. Suitable for protection of people or processes.
Contact Sequence Analog 4–20 mA Analog 0–10V
Description
Operating Head Type
Catalog Number—Heads Only Catalog Number—Assembled Switches
Top push roller plunger LS-XP LSE-AI-P LSE-AU-P
Short roller lever LS-XLS LSE-AI-LS LSE-AU-LS
Angled roller LS-XLA LSE-AI-LA LSE-AU-LA
Rotary lever LS-XRL LSE-AI-RL LSE-AU-RL
Adjustable roller lever (with 18 mm Roller) LS-XRLA LSE-AI-RLA LSE-AU-RLA
Adjustable roller lever (with 40 mm roller) LS-XRLA40 LSE-AI-RLA40 LSE-AU-RLA40
Spring rod (wobble) 1LS-XS LSE-AI-S LSE-AU-S
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T5-9
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5.2
Sensors and Limit Switches
Photoelectric Sensors
Product Overview
Photoelectric Sensors Selection Guide
Description Enhanced 50 Series SM Series Comet Series E58 Harsh-Duty Series
Page V9-T5-10 Page V9-T5-12 Page V9-T5-13 Page V9-T5-15
Overview Provides outstanding optical
performance and application
flexibility in a self-contained,
industry-standard compact
rectangular
Provides high performance and ease
of use in an economical, miniature
package
This high-performance, 18 mm flat
tubular sensor family features a
wide variety of models in all sensing
modes
Designed to withstand the harshest
physical, chemical and optical
environments; available in 18 and
30 mm tubular enclosures
Sensing types and ranges Thru-beam: 200 and 500 ft
Reflex: 30 ft
Polarized reflex: 16 ft
Diffuse reflective: 5 and 10 ft
Clear object detector: 45 in
Infrared fiber optic: range varies
with fiber
Visible fiber optic: range varies
with fiber
Thru-beam: 50 ft
Polarized reflex: 10 ft
Diffuse reflective: 8 in
Perfect Prox® background
rejection: 2 and 4 in
Thru-beam: 20 and 80 ft
Reflex: 25 ft
Polarized reflex: 15 and 10 ft
Diffuse reflective: 8 and 24 in
Focused diffuse reflective: 1.6 in
Wide single diffuse: 6 in
Fine spot Perfect Prox: 2 in
Perfect Prox background rejection:
2, 4, 6 and 9 in
Glass and plastic fiber optic: range
varies with fiber
Thru-beam: 800 ft
Reflex: 59 ft
Polarized reflex: 34 ft
Perfect Prox background rejection:
2, 4, 6 and 11 in
Product features High optical performance,
including 10-ft diffuse and
500-ft thru-beam versions
Output options include a high-
current 10A SPDT relay
Built-in light/dark selection on all
models
Highly visible LED indicators for
power, output and alignment
(TargetLock)
TargetLock simplifies setup and
ensures that the sensor operates
at the highest level of reliability
possible
Perfect Prox models sense
different colored targets at the
same range and ignore objects in
the background
The 18 mm tubular body has flat
sides for added mounting
flexibility
Available in universal voltage
AC/DC versions as well as DC only
models
Short circuit protection on all
models
Designed to be the most rugged
photoelectric sensor available
Perfect Prox background rejection
technology for unmatched optical
performance
Output status indictor is the
brightest available and is visible
from any angle and in any lighting
condition
Operating voltage 24–240 Vac and 12–240 Vdc
10–40 Vdc
18–264 Vac and 18–50 Vdc
10–30 Vdc
90–132 Vac and 18–50 Vdc
20–264 Vac and 15–30 Vdc
10–30 Vdc
Two-wire models:
90–132 Vac and 18–50 Vac
Three- and four-wire models:
20–132 Vac and 15–30 Vdc
10–30 Vdc
Output function Selectable light or dark operate Light and dark operate models
available
Selectable light or dark operate Light and dark operate models
available
Maximum load current DC units: 250 mA
AC/DC units: 300 mA to 10A
AC/DC units—200 mA
DC units—100 mA
(NPN or PNP)
AC/DC units—300 mA
DC units—250 mA (NPN),
100 mA (PNP)
AC/DC units—300 mA (100 mA
for 18 mm diameter units)
DC units—250 mA (NPN),
100 mA (PNP)
Enclosure ratings IP67 Type 1, 3, 4, 4X, 6, 6P, 12 and 13
IP68
Type 1, 2, 3, 4, 4X, 6, 12 and 13 Type 1, 2, 3, 3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 6, 6P,
12, 12K and 13
IP69K
Response time range DC operation: 2 ms
AC operation: 15 ms
DC operation: 1 ms
AC operation: 16 ms
DC operation: 1 ms
AC operation: 10 ms
2W AC/DC operation: 32 ms
2 ms to 35 ms
Approvals CSA approved
Certified to
UL standard, UL 508
UL listed
cUL listed
UL recognized
cUL recognized
UL listed
cUL listed
V9-T5-10 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5.2
Sensors and Limit Switches
Photoelectric Sensors
Enhanced 50 Series
Features
●High-optical performance models, including a 500 ft (152m)
thru-beam and a 10 ft (3m) diffuse reflective unit
●Output options include a 3A SPDT relay
●All units offer light/dark selection
●Logic options include ON-delay, OFF-delay and one-shot delay
●Fully potted construction for use in areas subject to
washdown, high shock and/or vibration
●Choice of pre-wired power cable, built-in mini-connector,
built-in micro-connector and pigtail micro-connector versions;
standard pre-wired cable length is 6 ft (1.8m)
Product Selection
Enhanced 50 Series
Enhanced 50 Series Sensors
Description
Voltage
Range
Sensing
Range
Optimum
Range
Sensing
Beam
Thru-Beam
Component Output Type
Time
Delay Connection Type
Catalog
Number
Thru-beam
standard range
10–40 Vdc 200 ft (61m) 0.1–100 ft
(0.03–31m)
Infrared Source N/A N/A 4-pin Euro (micro)
connector
1150E-6547
Detector NPN/PNP 250 mA No 1250E-6547
12–240 Vdc
24–240 Vac
200 ft (61m) 0.1–100 ft
(0.03–31m)
Infrared Source N/A N/A 4-pin micro connector 1150E-6543
Detector Isolated output solid-state relay
300 mA at 240 Vac/Vdc
No 1250E-6543
Source N/A N/A 4-pin mini-connector 1150E-6504
Detector SPDT EM relay 3A at 120 Vac No 5-pin mini-connector 1250E-6504
Thru-beam
extended range
10–40 Vdc 500 ft (152m) 0.1–250 ft
(0.03–77m)
Infrared Source N/A N/A 4-pin Euro (micro)
connector
1151E-6547
Detector NPN/PNP 250 mA No 1251E-6547
12–240 Vdc
24–240 Vac
500 ft (152m) 0.1–250 ft
(0.03–77m)
Infrared Source N/A N/A 4-pin micro connector 1151E-6543
Detector Isolated output solid-state relay
300 mA at 240 Vac/Vdc
No 1251E-6543
N/A N/A 4-pin mini-connector 1151E-6504
SPDT EM relay 3A at 120 Vac No 5-pin mini-connector 1251E-6504
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T5-11
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5.2
Sensors and Limit Switches
Photoelectric Sensors
Reflex, Diffuse, and Clear Object Sensors
Notes
1Ranges based on 3 in retroreflector for reflex sensors.
2Polarized sensors may not operate with reflective tape. Test tape selection before installation.
3Ranges based on 90% reflectance white card for diffuse reflective sensors.
Description
Voltage
Range
Sensing
Range 1
Optimum
Range 1
Sensing
Beam Output Type
Time
Delay Connection Type
Catalog
Number
Standard reflex 10–40 Vdc 30 ft (9m) 0.5–15 ft
(0.2–4.6m)
Visible red NPN/PNP 250 mA No 4-pin Euro (micro)
connector
1450E-6547
12–240 Vdc
24–240 Vac
30 ft (9m) 0.5 5 ft
(0.2–4.6m)
Visible red isolated output solid-state relay
300 mA at 240 Vac/Vdc
No 4-pin micro connector 1450E-6543
SPDT EM relay 3A at 120 Vac No 5-pin mini-connector 1450E-6504
Polarized reflex 210–40 Vdc 16 ft (4.9m) 0.5–8 ft
(0.2–2.5m)
Visible red NPN/PNP 250 mA No 4-pin Euro (micro)
connector
1451E-6547
Yes 1451E-8547
12–240 Vdc
24–240 Vac
16 ft (4.9m) 0.5–8 ft
(0.2–2.5m)
Visible red Isolated output solid-state relay
300 mA at 240 Vac/Vdc
No 4-pin micro connector 1451E-6543
SPDT EM relay 3A at 120 Vac No 5-pin mini-connector 1451E-6504
Diffuse reflective
extended range
10–40 Vdc 10 ft (3m) 31–60 in
(25–1520 mm) 3
Infrared NPN/PNP 250 mA No 4-pin Euro (micro)
connector
1351E-6547
12–240 Vdc
24–240 Vac
10 ft (3m) 31–60 in
(25–1520 mm) 3
Infrared Isolated output solid-state relay
300 mA at 240 Vac/Vdc
No 4-pin micro connector 1351E-6543
SPDT EM relay 3A at 120 Vac No 5-pin mini-connector 1351E-6504
Clear object
detector
10–40 Vdc 45 in (1.2m) 1–24 in
(25–610 mm)
Visible red NPN/PNP 250 mA No 4-pin Euro (micro)
connector
1452E-6547
12–240 Vdc
24–240 Vac
45 in (1.2m) 1–24 in
(25–610 mm)
Visible red Isolated output solid-state relay
300 mA at 240 Vac/Vdc
No 4-pin micro connector 1452E-6543
SPDT EM relay 3A at 120 Vac No 5-pin mini-connector 1452E-6504
V9-T5-12 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5.2
Sensors and Limit Switches
Photoelectric Sensors
SM Series
Features
●TargetLock technology makes SM Series™ the easiest
photoelectric sensor to set up and use
●Highly visible LED indicators for power, output and TargetLock
●TargetLock simplifies setup and ensures the sensor operates
at the highest level of reliability possible
●Perfect Prox models sense different colored targets at the
same range and ignore objects in the background
●Visible beam on all models lets you see exactly where the
sensor is pointing
●Compact size to fit in tight spaces
●Multiple mounting options, including industry-standard 18 mm
threads
●Reverse polarity, overload and short circuit protection
●Full family includes thru-beam, polarized reflex, diffuse
reflective and Perfect Prox background rejection
Product Selection
SM Series
SM Series Sensors
Notes
1Sensor will detect a 90% reflectance white card at this range.
2Sensor will ignore a 90% reflectance white card at this range.
Description
Operating
Voltage
Sensing
Range 1
Optimum
Range 2
Cutoff
Range Field of View
Thru-Beam
Component Connection Type
Light Operate
Catalog Number
Dark Operate
Catalog Number
Three-Wire and Four-Wire Sensors
Thru-beam 10–30 Vdc 50 ft (1m) 0.1–25 ft
(30 mm–7.5m)
— 10 in (254 mm)
diameter at
10 ft (3m)
Source 4-pin micro DC connector E65-SMTS15-HAD —
Detector 4-pin micro DC connector — E65-SMTD15-HDD
Polarized
reflex
18–264 Vac
50/60 Hz or
18–50 Vdc
10 ft (3m) 0.1–5 ft
(30 mm–1.5m)
— 1 in (25 mm)
diameter at
50 in (1.3m)
— 4-pin micro AC connector — E65-SMPR3-GDD
10–30 Vdc 10 ft (3m) 0.1–5 ft
(30 mm–1.5m)
— 1 in (25 mm)
diameter at
50 in (1.3m)
— 4-pin micro AC connector — E65-SMPR3-HDD
Diffuse
reflective
18–264 Vac
50/60 Hz or
18–50 Vdc
8 in (200 mm) 0.25–5 in
(6–127 mm)
— 2 in (50 mm)
diameter at
5 in (127 mm)
— 4-pin micro AC connector E65-SMSD200-GLD —
10–30 Vdc 8 in (200 mm) 0.25–5 in
(6–127 mm)
— 2 in (50 mm)
diameter at
5 in (127 mm)
— 4-pin micro DC connector E65-SMSD200-HLD —
Perfect Prox 18–264 Vac
50/60 Hz or
18–50 Vdc
2 in (50 mm) 0.4–1.8 in
(10–45 mm)
2.3 in (58 mm)
and beyond
0.25 in (6 mm)
diameter at
2.25 in (57 mm)
— 4-pin micro AC connector E65-SMPP050-GLD —
10–30 Vdc 2 in (50 mm) 0.4–1.8 in
(10–45 mm)
2.3 in (58 mm)
and beyond
0.25 in (6 mm)
diameter at
2.25 in (57 mm)
— 4-pin micro DC connector E65-SMPP050-HLD —
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T5-13
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5.2
Sensors and Limit Switches
Photoelectric Sensors
Comet Series
Features
●Industry-standard 18 mm diameter threaded body has flat
sides allowing it to be mounted like a tubular sensor or
against any flat surface
●Right-angle viewing models mount in a depth of only 6/10th of
an inch
●Perfect Prox technology provides exceptional background
rejection and application problem-solving
●Visible sensing beams let you see where the beam is aimed
for quick setup and alignment
●Solid polyurethane housing completely encapsulates internal
circuits for high resistance to shock and vibration
Product Selection
Comet Series
Reflex Sensors
Diffuse Reflective and Focused Diffuse Reflective Sensors
Notes
1Ranges based on a 3 in diameter retroreflector.
2Polarized reflex sensors may not operate with retroreflective tape. Test selected tape prior to installation.
3Right-angle viewing polarized reflex models are rated Type 1 only.
4Sensor will detect a 90% reflective white card at this range.
Description
Operating
Voltage
Sensing
Range 1
Optimum
Range 1Field of View
Sensing
Beam
Connection
Type
Catalog
Number
Three-Wire and Four-Wire Sensors
Standard reflex
forward viewing
20–264 Vac 50/60 Hz or
15–30 Vdc
(NPN)
25 ft (7.6m) 0.1–15 ft
(0.03–4.5m)
1 in (25 mm) diameter
at 50 in (1.3m)
Visible red beam 4-pin micro
AC connector
14102AQD03
10–30 Vdc
(NPN and PNP)
25 ft (7.6m) 0.1–15 ft
(0.03–4.5m)
1 in (25 mm) diameter
at 50 in (1.3m)
Visible red beam 4-pin micro
DC connector
14102AQD07
Polarized reflex
forward viewing 2
20–64 Vac 50/60 Hz or
15–30 Vdc (NPN)
15 ft (4.5m) 0.1–15 ft
(0.03–4.5m)
1 in (25 mm) diameter
at 50 in (1.3m)
Visible red beam 4-pin micro
AC connector
14101AQD03
10–30 Vdc
(NPN and PNP)
15 ft (4.5m) 0.1–10 ft
(0.03–4.5m)
1 in (25 mm) diameter
at 50 in (1.3m)
Visible red beam 4-pin micro
DC connector
14101AQD07
Polarized reflex
right-angle
viewing 23
20–264 Vac 50/60 Hz or
15–30 Vdc (NPN)
10 ft (3m) 0.1–15 ft
(0.03–4.5m)
1 in (25 mm) diameter
at 50 in (1.3m)
Visible red beam 4-pin micro
AC connector
14101RQD03
15–30 Vdc 10 ft (3m) 0.1–15 ft
(0.03–1.5m)
1 in (25 mm) diameter
at 50 in (1.3m)
Visible red beam 4-pin micro
DC connector
14101RQD07
Description
Operating
Voltage
Sensing
Range 4
Optimum
Range Field of View
Sensing
Beam
Connection
Type
Catalog
Number
Three-Wire and Four-Wire Sensors
Diffuse reflective
forward viewing
20–264 Vac 50/60 Hz or
15–30 Vdc (NPN)
24 in (610 mm) 0.1–15 in
(3–380 mm)
5 in (127 mm) diameter
at 15 in (380 mm)
Infrared beam 4-pin micro
AC connector
13100AQD03
10–30 Vdc
(NPN and PNP)
13100AQD07
Diffuse reflective right-
angle viewing
20–264 Vac 50/60 Hz or
15–30 Vdc (NPN)
24 in (610 mm) 0.1–15 in
(3–380 mm)
5 in (127 mm) diameter
at 15 in (380 mm)
Infrared beam 4-pin micro
AC connector
13100RQD03
10–30 Vdc
(NPN and PNP)
13100RQD07
V9-T5-14 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5.2
Sensors and Limit Switches
Photoelectric Sensors
Perfect Prox Background Rejection Sensor
Notes
1Sensor will detect a 90% reflectance card at this range.
2Sensor will ignore a 90% reflectance card at this range.
Description
Operating
Voltage
Nominal
Range 1
Optimum
Range
Cutoff
Range 2Field of View
Sensing
Beam Type
Connection
Type
Catalog
Number
Three-Wire and Four-Wire Sensors
Perfect Prox
forward viewing
20–264 Vac
50/60 Hz or
15–30 Vdc (NPN)
2 in (50 mm)
sharp cutoff
0.4–1.8 in
(10–45 mm)
2.25 in 57 mm)
and beyond
0.25 in (6 mm)
diameter at
2.25 in (64 mm)
Visible red 4-pin micro
AC connector
13104AQD03
4 in (100 mm)
sharp cutoff
0.5–3 in
(13–76 mm)
5 in (127 mm)
and beyond
0.35 in (9 mm)
diameter at
5 in (127 mm)
Visible red 13101AQD03
10–30 Vdc
(NPN and PNP)
2 in (50 mm)
sharp cutoff
0.4–1.8 in
(10–45 mm)
2.25 in (57 mm)
and beyond
0.25 in (6 mm)
diameter at
2.25 in (64 mm)
Visible red 4-pin micro
DC connector
13104AQD07
4 in (100 mm)
sharp cutoff
0.5–3 in
(13–76 mm)
5 in (127 mm)
and beyond
0.35 in (9 mm)
diameter at
5 in (127 mm)
Visible red 13101AQD07
Perfect Prox
right-angle
viewing
20–264 Vac
50/60 Hz or
15–30 Vdc (NPN)
2 in (50 mm)
sharp cutoff
0.4–1.8 in
(10–45 mm)
2.25 in (57 mm)
and beyond
0.25 in (6 mm)
diameter at
2.25 in (64 mm)
Visible red 4-pin micro
AC connector
13104RQD03
4 in (100 mm)
sharp cutoff
0.5–3 in
(13–76 mm)
5 in (127 mm)
and beyond
0.35 in (9 mm)
diameter at
5 in (127 mm)
Visible red 13104RS5003
10–30 Vdc
(NPN and PNP)
2 in (50 mm)
sharp cutoff
0.4–1.8 in
(10–45 mm)
2.25 in (57 mm)
and beyond
0.25 in (6 mm)
diameter at
2.25 in (64 mm)
Visible red 4-pin micro
DC connector
13104RQD07
4 in (100 mm)
sharp cutoff
0.5–3 in
(13–76 mm)
5 in (127 mm)
and beyond
0.35 in (9 mm)
diameter at
5 in (127 mm)
Visible red 13104RS5007
Fine spot
Perfect Prox
forward viewing
20–264 Vac
50/60 Hz or
15–30 Vdc (NPN)
2 in (50 mm)
sharp cutoff
0.9–1.8 in
(23–45 mm)
2.25 in (57 mm)
and beyond
0.05 in (1.3 mm)
diameter at
1.7 in (43 mm)
Visible red 4-pin micro
AC connector
13105AQD03
10–30 Vdc
(NPN and PNP)
2 in (50 mm)
sharp cutoff
0.9–1.8 in
(23–45 mm)
2.25 in (57 mm)
and beyond
0.05 in (1.3 mm)
diameter at
1.7 in (43 mm)
Visible red 4-pin micro
DC connector
13105AQD07
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T5-15
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5.2
Sensors and Limit Switches
Photoelectric Sensors
E58 Harsh-Duty Series
Features
●Sensors are available in 18 mm and 30 mm diameters
●Refined optics provide long range detection through high
levels of lens or airborne contamination
●Perfect Prox technology provides exceptional background
rejection and extremely high excess gain
●Resistant to the wide range of chemicals used in the
automotive, food processing and forest products industries
●Suitable for high-temperature, high-pressure washdown
(1200 psi)
●Visible sensing beam on all models lets you see where the
beam is aimed for quick setup and alignment
●Output status indicator is the brightest available and is visible
from any angle and in any lighting condition
Product Selection
E58 Harsh-Duty Series
Thru-Beam and Reflex Sensors
Description
Operating
Voltage
Sensing
Range
Optimum
Range Field of View
Thru-Beam
Component
Connection
Type
Catalog
Number
Three-Wire and Four-Wire Sensors
30 mm diameter
thru-beam
20–132 Vac
50/60 Hz or 15–30 Vdc
800 ft (250m) 0.1–300 ft
(0.03–90m)
33 in (830 mm) diameter
at 25 ft (7.6m)
Source 4-pin micro
AC connector
E58-30TS250-GAP
Detector 4-pin micro
AC connector
E58-30TD250-GDP
10–30 Vdc 800 ft (250m) 0.1–300 ft
(0.03–90m)
33 in (830 mm) diameter
at 25 ft (7.6m)
Detector 4-pin micro
DC connector
E58-30TD250-HDP
30 mm diameter reflex 20–132 Vac
50/60 Hz or 15–30 Vdc
59 ft (18m) 1–40 ft
(0.03–12m)
6 in (150 mm) diameter
at 20 ft (6m)
—4-pin micro
AC connector
E58-30RS18-GDP
10–30 Vdc 59 ft (18m) 1–40 ft
(0.03–12m)
6 in (150 mm) diameter
at 20 ft (6m)
—4-pin micro
DC connector
E58-30RS18-HDP
30 mm diameter
polarized reflex
20–132 Vac
50/60 Hz or 15–30 Vdc
34 ft (10m) 1–20 ft
(0.03–6m)
6 in (150 mm) diameter
at 20 ft (6m)
—4-pin micro
AC connector
E58-30RP10-GDP
10–30 Vdc 34 ft (10m) 1–20 ft
(0.03–6m)
6 in (150 mm) diameter
at 20 ft (6m)
—4-pin micro
DC connector
E58-30RP10-HDP
V9-T5-16 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5.2
Sensors and Limit Switches
Photoelectric Sensors
Perfect Prox Background Rejection Sensors
Notes
1Sensor will detect a 90% reflectance card at this range.
2Sensor will ignore a 90% reflectance card at this range
Description
Operating
Voltage
Nominal
Range 1
Optimum
Range 2
Cutoff
Range Field of View
Connection
Type
Catalog
Number
Two-Wire Sensors
18 mm diameter
Perfect Prox
90–132 Vac
50/60 Hz
or 18–50 Vdc
4 in
(100 mm)
0.5–3 in
(13–76 mm)
5 in
(127 mm)
and beyond
0.38 in (10 mm) diameter at
4 in (100 mm)
2m cable E58-18DP100-EL
Three-Wire and Four-Wire Sensors
18 mm diameter
Perfect Prox
10–30 Vdc 4 in
(100 mm)
0.5–3 inches
(13–76 mm)
5 in
(127 mm)
and beyond
0.38 in (10 mm) diameter at
4 in (100 mm)
4-pin micro
DC connector
E58-18DP100-HLP
30 mm diameter
Perfect Prox
20–132 Vac
50/60 Hz
or 15–30 Vdc
11 in
(280 mm)
1–9 in
(26–228 mm)
12.5 in
(318 mm)
1.0 in (26 mm) diameter at
11 in (280 mm)
4-pin micro
AC connector
E58-30DPS280-GLP
10–30 Vdc 11 in
(280 mm)
1–9 in
(26–228 mm)
12.5 in
(318 mm)
1.0 in (26 mm) diameter at
11 in (280 mm)
4-pin micro
DC connector
E58-30DPS280-HLP
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T5-17
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5.3
Sensors and Limit Switches
Inductive Sensors
Product Overview
Inductive Sensors Selection Guide
Description iProx E57 Premium+ Series E57 Premium+ Series Short Barrel
Page V9-T5-19 Page V9-T5-20 Page V9-T5-21
Overview Standard features include extended sensing
ranges, high noise-immunity, extreme
durability and includes autoconfigure
technology. Optional advanced features
include output delay, speed detection and
cloning with the ProxView Software
High-performance inductive sensors include
stainless steel models, extended ranges
and right-angle sensing
Full featured sensors with shorter overall
length than standard tubular sensors
Applications Automotive, machine tool, material
handling where high sensing performance
and inventory consolidation is a priority
A wide variety of applications, including
those where customers require AC/DC
universal inventory sensors
Automation, robotics, transfer lines,
conveyors, material handling
Product features Auto-configure technology automatically
detects a sinking (NPN) or sourcing (PNP)
connection and switches the sensor
accordingly, without any user intervention
Optional computer programming cable and
windows-based ProxView configuration
software makes it easy to customize sensors
Clone the sensor to match the characteristics of
more than 4,800 competitive models, or configure
it to match your specific application needs
12, 18 and 30 mm diameters
Two-wire and three-wire AC and DC sensors
AC/DC models operate on 20–250 Vac or Vdc
Available in 12, 18 and 30 mm diameters
Two-wire sensors offer 20–250 Vac or Vdc
operation; AC only 20–135 Vac
Three-wire models operate on 6–30 Vdc
Output ratings AC—250–500 mA
DC—300–500 mA
AC mode—250–500 mA
DC mode—200 mA
AC—200–500 mA continuous
DC—500 mA continuous
Enclosure ratings Type 4, 4X, 6, 6P, 12, 13
IEC—IP67
Type 4, 4X, 6, 6P, 12, 13
IEC—IP67
Type 4, 4X, 6, 6P, 12, 13
IEC—IP67
Construction Stainless steel Stainless steel Stainless steel
Semi-shielded models: nickel-plated brass
Approvals cUL listed cUL listed UL listed
CSA certified
V9-T5-18 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5.3
Sensors and Limit Switches
Inductive Sensors
Product Selection Guide, continued
Description Global Proximity E52 Cube Style
Page V9-T5-22 Page V9-T5-23
Overview This full-line, tubular proximity sensor family
provides a cost-effective solution for high
volume OEM use
A family of industry-standard, cube-sized
inductive sensors with long range capabilities
Applications Machine tool detection, press applications,
cam detection, material handling, valve and
shaft position, automotive assembly
Automotive, manufacturing, machinery OEMs
Product features 8, 12, 18 and 30 mm diameters
Two-wire sensors available in AC or DC
versions
Three-wire sensors available in DC versions
Long inductive proximity ranges available (up
to 40 mm sensing distance)
Four-wire DC models have complementary
outputs (1NO-1NC)
Four-wire DC models use auto-configure
technology, which allows the sensor to
automatically adapt for NPN or PNP without
user intervention
Output ratings AC mode—200 mA
DC mode—100 mA
AC—400 mA maximum
DC—300 mA maximum
Enclosure ratings IP67 Type 4, 4X, 6, 6P, 12, 13
IEC—IP67
Construction Nickel-plated brass
8 mm nano stainless steel
Zinc alloy
PPS, PL
Approvals cCSAus cULus
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T5-19
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5.3
Sensors and Limit Switches
Inductive Sensors
iProx
Features
●Available in AC two-wire, DC three-wire and unique DC four-
wire with complementary (NO-NC) or dual NO outputs
●Auto-configure technology automatically detects a sinking
(NPN) or sourcing (PNP) connection and switches the sensor
accordingly, without any user intervention
●Reliably detect metal targets at ranges superior to
conventional shielded or unshielded tubular sensors
●Quality construction using a stainless steel barrel, 360-degree
dual-color LED indicator, Ryton® impact-resistant face cap
and vibration-absorbing potting compound
●Resistant to extreme temperatures (–40°C)
Product Selection
iProx
iProx Sensors
iProx Complementary and Dual Output
Note
1Sensors are ordered with pre-set outputs from the factory, but can be later programmed either NO or NC using ProxView software.
Description
Operating
Voltage
Sensing
Range Shielding Connection Type
NO Output 1
Catalog Number
Three-Wire Sensors
12 mm diameter 6–48 Vdc 4 mm Shielded 4-pin micro DC connector E59-M12A105D01-D1
10 mm Unshielded 4-pin micro DC connector E59-M12C110D01-D1
18 mm diameter 6–48 Vdc 8 mm Shielded 4-pin micro DC connector E59-M18A108D01-D1
18 mm Unshielded 4-pin micro DC connector E59-M18C116D01-D1
30 mm diameter 6–48 Vdc 15 mm Shielded 4-pin micro DC connector E59-M30A115D01-D1
29 mm Unshielded 4-pin micro DC connector E59-M30C129D01-D1
Description
Operating
Voltage
Sensing
Range Shielding
Output
Type Connection Type
Complementary Outputs
(1NO-1NC)
Catalog Number
Four-Wire Sensors
12 mm diameter 6–48 Vdc 4 mm Shielded NPN (sinking) 4-pin micro DC connector E59-M12A105D01-D3NN
PNP (sourcing) 4-pin micro DC connector E59-M12A105D01-D3PP
18 mm diameter 6–48 Vdc 18 mm Unshielded NPN (sinking) 4-pin micro DC connector E59-M18C116D01-D3NN
PNP (sourcing) 4-pin micro DC connector E59-M18C116D01-D3PP
V9-T5-20 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5.3
Sensors and Limit Switches
Inductive Sensors
E57 Premium+ Series
Features
●High-performance inductive sensors include stainless steel
models, extended ranges and right angle sensing
●New expanded offering of two-wire, three-wire, AC, DC,
and AC/DC multiple range sensor models
●Designed with stainless steel barrel and new potting
compound for robust, high-temperature, high-pressure
washdown, as well as intense shock and vibration
applications
●360° output status indicator is visible from any angle and in
any light condition
●Resettable short circuit protection and reverse polarity in
select models
●Wide temperature range –13° to 158°F (–25° to 70°C) on
cable, micro-style connections
Product Selection
E57 Premium+ Series
E57 Premium+ Series
Note
1For cable lengths longer than 2 meters, add the number of the desired length in meters to the end of the listed catalog number (for catalog
numbers ending with a number, add an S and then the length). Examples for a 5-meter cable: E57-18LE12-A becomes E57-18LE12-A5;
E57LAL12A2 becomes E57LAL12A2S5.
Description
Operating
Voltage
Sensing
Range (Sn) Shielding Connection Type 1
NO Output
Catalog Number
Three-Wire Sensors
12 mm diameter end sensing 6–48 Vdc 2 mm (standard range) Shielded (NPN) 4-pin micro DC connector E57LAL12T110SD
2 mm (standard range) Shielded (PNP) 4-pin micro DC connector E57LAL12T111SD
4 mm (standard range) Unshielded (NPN) 4-pin micro DC connector E57LAL12T110ED
4 mm (standard range) Unshielded (PNP) 4-pin micro DC connector E57LAL12T111ED
18 mm diameter end sensing 6–48 Vdc 5 mm (standard range) Shielded (NPN) 4-pin micro DC connector E57LAL18T110SD
5 mm (standard range) Shielded (PNP) 4-pin micro DC connector E57LAL18T111SD
8 mm (standard range) Unshielded (NPN) 4-pin micro DC connector E57LAL18T110ED
8 mm (standard range) Unshielded (PNP) 4-pin micro DC connector E57LAL18T111ED
20 mm (extended range) Non-embeddable (PNP) 4-pin micro DC connector E57-18LE20-BD
5 mm Shielded (PNP) 4-pin micro DC connector E57RAL18T111SD
30 mm diameter end sensing 6–48 Vdc 10 mm (standard range) Shielded (PNP) 4-pin micro DC connector E57LAL30T111SD
15 mm (standard range) Unshielded (PNP) 4-pin micro DC connector E57LAL30T111ED
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T5-21
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5.3
Sensors and Limit Switches
Inductive Sensors
E57 Premium+ Series Short Barrel
Features
●The same quality constructions of the E57 Premium+
standard models, but much shorter
●Designed with stainless steel barrel and impact-absorbing
new potting compound for robust, high-temperature, high-
pressure washdown, as well as intense shock and vibration
applications
●360° output status indicator is visible from any angle and in
any light condition
●Resettable short circuit protection in AC/DC and DC models
●Reverse polarity protection in three-wire DC versions
●Small size to fit in tight spaces
Product Selection
E57 Premium+ Series Short Barrel
Short Barrel Length Proximity Sensors
Note
1Cable models are supplied as standard with a 2-meter cable. A 5-meter cable is available by adding S5 to the catalog number.
Example: E57SAL12T110 becomes E57SAL12T110S5.
Description
Operating
Voltage
Sensing
Range (Sn) Shielding Connection Type 1
NO Output
Catalog Number
Three-Wire Sensors
12 mm diameter 6–48 Vdc 2 mm Shielded (NPN) 4-pin micro DC connector E57SAL12T110SD
Shielded (PNP) 4-pin micro DC connector E57SAL12T111SD
4 mm Unshielded (NPN) 4-pin micro DC connector E57SAL12T110ED
Unshielded (PNP) 4-pin micro DC connector E57SAL12T111ED
18 mm diameter 6–48 Vdc 5 mm Shielded (NPN) 4-pin micro DC connector E57SAL18T110SD
Shielded (PNP) 4-pin micro DC connector E57SAL18T111SD
8 mm Unshielded (NPN) 4-pin micro DC connector E57SAL18T110ED
Unshielded (PNP) 4-pin micro DC connector E57SAL18T111ED
30 mm diameter 6–48 Vdc 10 mm Shielded (NPN) 4-pin micro DC connector E57SAL30T110SD
Shielded (PNP) 4-pin micro DC connector E57SAL30T111SD
15 mm Unshielded (NPN) 4-pin micro DC connector E57SAL30T110ED
Unshielded (PNP) 4-pin micro DC connector E57SAL30T111ED
V9-T5-22 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5.3
Sensors and Limit Switches
Inductive Sensors
Global Proximity
Features
●Features solid performance and a basic feature set for
reliable, cost-effective sensing
●Available in a variety of sizes to fit all applications: 8 mm,
12 mm, 18 mm and 30 mm diameters
●Operate on 10–30 Vdc in two-wire and three-wire
(NPN or PNP) configurations
●Switching frequency of 2 kHz for DC models
●Shielded and unshielded versions available
●Terminations include 2m cable, micro-connector and
nano-connector
Product Selection
Global Proximity
Global Proximity Sensors
Description
Operating
Voltage
Sensing
Range Shielding
Output
Type Connection Type Catalog Number
Three-Wire Sensors
8 mm diameter 10–30 Vdc 3 mm (extended range) Shielded NO (NPN) 4-pin micro DC connector E57-08GE03-CDB
NO (PNP) 4-pin micro DC connector E57-08GE03-GDB
6 mm (extended range) Unshielded NO (NPN) 4-pin micro DC connector E57-08GE06-CDB
NO (PNP) 4-pin micro DC connector E57-08GE06-GDB
12 mm diameter 10–30 Vdc 5 mm (extended range) Shielded NO (NPN) 4-pin micro DC connector E57-12GE05-CDB
NO (PNP) 4-pin micro DC connector E57-12GE05-GDB
10 mm (extended range) Unshielded NO (NPN) 4-pin micro DC connector E57-12GE10-CDB
NO (PNP) 4-pin micro DC connector E57-12GE10-GDB
18 mm diameter 10–30 Vdc 8 mm (extended range) Shielded NO (NPN) 4-pin micro DC connector E57-18GE08-CDB
NO (PNP) 4-pin micro DC connector E57-18GE08-GDB
18 mm (extended range) Unshielded NO (NPN) 4-pin micro DC connector E57-18GE18-CDB
NO (PNP) 4-pin micro DC connector E57-18GE18-GDB
30 mm diameter 10–30 Vdc 15 mm (extended range) Shielded NO (NPN) 4-pin micro DC connector E57-30GE15-CDB
NO (PNP) 4-pin micro DC connector E57-30GE15-GDB
29 mm (extended range) Unshielded NO (NPN) 4-pin micro DC connector E57-30GE29-CDB
NO (PNP) 4-pin micro DC connector E57-30GE29-GDB
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T5-23
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5.3
Sensors and Limit Switches
Inductive Sensors
E52 Cube
Features
●Rugged inductive sensors in industry-standard cube package
●Long inductive proximity ranges available (up to 40 mm
sensing distance)
●Four-wire DC models have complementary outputs
(1NO-1NC)
●Four-wire DC models use auto-configure technology, which
allows the sensor to automatically adapt for NPN or PNP
without user intervention
●Robust design featuring vibration and impact-absorbing
potting compound
●Ideal for extreme temperatures or high-pressure washdown
environments
Product Selection
Note: Micro-connector models shown; mini-connector models also available.
E52 Cube Style
E52 Cube Inductive Proximity Sensors
Note
1Autoconfigure technology allows the sensor to automatically adapt to NPN or PNP without user intervention.
Description Voltage Type
Output
Configuration Shielding Output Type Sensing Range Connector Style Catalog Number
DC Four-Wire Sensors
Cube package
(40 x 40 x 40 mm)
10–48 Vdc NPN/PNP
autoconfigure 1
Shielded 1NO-1NC 15 mm DC 4-pin micro E52Q-DL15SAD01
Unshielded 1NO-1NC 15 mm DC 4-pin micro E52Q-DL15UAD01
Shielded 1NO-1NC 20 mm DC 4-pin micro E52Q-DL20SAD01
Unshielded 1NO-1NC 20 mm DC 4-pin micro E52Q-DL20UAD01
Unshielded 1NO-1NC 25 mm DC 4-pin micro E52Q-DL25UAD01
Unshielded 1NO-1NC 30 mm DC 4-pin micro E52Q-DL30UAD01
Unshielded 1NO-1NC 35 mm DC 4-pin micro E52Q-DL35UAD01
Unshielded 1NO-1NC 40 mm DC 4-pin micro E52Q-DL40UAD01
V9-T5-24 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5.4
Sensors and Limit Switches
Connectivity
Product Overview
Connectivity Selection Guide
Description Global Plus Connector Cables
Page V9-T5-25
Overview Includes a wide variety of single- and double-connector cables in a variety of sizes
(mini, micro, nano), lengths and jacket materials to fit any application
Sensing types and ranges Nano (M8)
Micro (M12)
Mini
Product features Industry standard connector types
Industrial-duty polymer jackets consisting of PVC, PUR, or irradiated PUR
Stranded copper conductors and polymer jackets provide a high resistance
to bending motions
Right angle units for applications that have constricted space
Enclosure ratings Type 6P, IP68
Approvals UL, cUL, CSA
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T5-25
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5.4
Sensors and Limit Switches
Connectivity
Global Plus Connector Cables
Features
●Cost effective and reliable quick-disconnect cables
●A wide variety of single- and double-connector cables
available
●Custom lengths are available upon request from the factory
●A full offering of nano, micro and mini connector cables in a
variety of lengths and jacket materials available
●Field wireable accessories
●Straight and right-angle connector ends
Catalog Number Selection
Global Plus Connector Cables
Global Plus
Note: This is a representative guide to the catalog numbering system. All possible combinations.may not be available for ordering.
CS D S 4 A 4 C Y 22 02 – D
Cable Length
01 = 1m (3.2 ft)
01.5 = 1.5m (4.9 ft)
02 = 2m (6.5 ft)
03 = 3m (9.8 ft)
04 =4m (13 ft)
05 = 5m (16.4 ft)
10 = 10m (32.8 ft)
Product
CS = Cordset
Jacket Material
C=PVC
R=PUR
Electrical Version/
Connector Type
D= Euro (micro) connector
A= AC micro connector
M= AC/DC mini connector
Connector Type
S=Straight
R= Right angle
Pin Configuration
2=2-pin
3=3-pin
4=4-pin
5=5-pin
9=9-pin
Wire Color Code
A= IEC color code
F= North American color code
D= Industrial color code
Wire Configuration
2=2-wire
3=3-wire
4=4-wire
5=5-wire
9=9-wire
Jacket Color
Y= Yellow
B=Black
Wire Gauge
24 =24 AWG
22 =22 AWG
16 =16 AWG
Connector Type
D= Double-ended
LN = LED NPN
LP = LED PNP
V9-T5-26 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5.4
Sensors and Limit Switches
Connectivity
Product Selection
Micro Style, Single-Connector Cables
Mini Style, Single-Connector Cables
Description Voltage Style Number of Pins Gauge Length
PVC Jacket
Catalog Number
Pin Configuration/Wire Colors
(Face View Female Shown)
Standard Cables
Micro style
straight female
DC 4-pin
3-wire
22 AWG 6 ft (2m) CSDS4A3CY2202
4-pin
4-wire
22 AWG 6 ft (2m) CSDS4A4CY2202
5-pin
5-wire
22 AWG 6 ft (2m) CSDS5A5CY2202
Micro style
straight female
DC 4-pin
3-wire
22 AWG 6 ft (2m) CSDR4A3CY2202
4-pin
4-wire
22 AWG 6 ft (2m) CSDR4A4CY2202
5-pin
5-wire
22 AWG 6 ft (2m) CSDR5A5CY2202
Description Voltage Style Number of Pins Gauge Length
PVC Jacket
Catalog Number
Pin Configuration/Wire Colors
(Face View Female Shown)
Standard Cables
Mini style
straight female
AC/DC 4-pin
4-wire
16 AWG 6 ft (2m) CSMS4A4CY1602
AC/DC 4-pin
5-wire
16 AWG 6 ft (2m) CSMS5D5CY1602
1-Brown
2-No wire
3-Blue
4-Black
1-Brown
2-White
3-Blue
4-Black
1-Brown
2-White
3-Blue
4-Black
5-Green/yellow
12
3
4
5
1-Brown
2-No wire
3-Blue
4-Black
1-Brown
2-White
3-Blue
4-Black
1-Brown
2-White
3-Blue
4-Black
5-Green/yellow
12
3
4
5
1-Black
2-Blue
3-Brown
4-White
1-White
2-Red
3-Green
4-Orange
5-Black
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T5-27
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5.4
Sensors and Limit Switches
Connectivity
Nano Style, Single-Connector Cables
Micro and Mini Style, Double-Ended Connector Cables
Description Voltage Style Number of Pins Gauge Length
PVC Jacket
Catalog Number
Pin Configuration/Wire Colors
(Face View Female Shown)
Standard Cables
Nano style
straight female
—3-pin
3-wire
24 AWG 6 ft (2m) CSNS3A3CY2402
Nano style
right angle female
—3-pin
3-wire
24 AWG 6 ft (2m) CSNR3A3CY2402
Description Voltage Style Number of Pins Gauge Length
PVC Jacket
Catalog Number
Pin Configuration/Wire Colors
(Face View Female Shown)
Standard Cables
Micro style
straight female/male
DC 4-pin 22 AWG 6 ft (2m) CSDS4A4CY2202-D
Micro style
straight female/
right angle male
DC 4-pin 22 AWG 6 ft (2m) CSDR4A4CY2202-D
Mini style
straight female/male
AC/DC 3-pin 16 AWG 6 ft (2m) CSMS3F3CY1602-DP
1-Brown
3-Blue
4-Black
1-Brown
3-Blue
4-Black
Face View
Female
Face View
Male
Face View
Female
Face View
Male
Face View
Male
Face View
Female
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T6-1
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
Machine Integration
Modular Bus System
XB Terminal Blocks
General Purpose Transformer
PSG Power Supplies
CHDB Series Power Distribution
6.1 Modular Bus System for Hydraulic Magnetic Circuit Breakers
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T6-2
MDBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T6-3
PDMB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T6-4
6.2 General Purpose and Industrial Control Transformers
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T6-5
General Purpose Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T6-6
Industrial Control Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T6-8
6.3 Power Supplies
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T6-10
PSG Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T6-11
ELC Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T6-12
6.4 Power Distribution Blocks
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T6-13
CHDB Series—Power Distribution Blocks, Enclosed and Open . . . . . V9-T6-14
CH160 Series—Power Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T6-15
6.5 Terminal Blocks and Accessories
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T6-16
XB Series IEC Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T6-17
For our complete product offering, see Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and
Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E
V9-T6-2 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.1
Machine Integration
Modular Bus System for Hydraulic Magnetic Circuit Breakers
Product Overview
Modular Bus System Selection Guide
Note
1With busbars.
Description Modular Distribution Busbar System (MDBS) Power Distribution Busbar Module (PDBM)
Page V9-T6-3 Page V9-T6-4
Technical Data
Voltage
Type AC or DC or both DC
Vdc to 110 Vdc nominal (77–137.5 Vdc) to 72 Vdc nominal (55–90 Vdc)
Vac to 380 Vac nominal (342–424 Vac); 50/60 Hz —
Busbars 4 busbars 1, additional negative return busbar possible
Busbar rating 300A output 100A total output (up to 30A per breaker)
Mounting Front panel Front or rear panel
Breaker specifications
Type Hydraulic-magnetic Hydraulic-magnetic
Series AMR, AM1P (three-pole AMR in parallel) J Series
Ratings to 100A (single-pole), 300A (three-pole) to 30A
Terminals Plug-in bullet terminals Fast-on
Number of breakers 3 and 5 breaker modules (any combination) Maximum 12 positions (using 4-position modules)
Auxiliary contact Via individual connections via trim trio connector Individual signals via SMS, SUBD, or DT connectors
Dual control Available Available
Dimensions
Module only—H x W x D in (mm)
3-Breaker 3.31 x 2.25 x 4.095 (84 x 57.15 x 104) —
4-Breaker — 3.94 x 3.00 x 1.10 (100 x 76 x 28)
5-Breaker 3.31 x 3.74 x 4.095 (84 x 95 x 104) —
Module including mounting blade, busbar, auxiliary switch—
H x W x D in (mm)
3-Breaker 4.53 x 2.25 x 5.52 (115 x 57.15 x 140) —
4-Breaker — 3.94 x 3.00 x 1.46 (100 x 76 x 37)
5-Breaker 4.53 x 3.74 x 5.52 (84 x 95 x 104) —
Weight
Weight (without busbars)
3-Breaker 200g (7 oz) —
4-Breaker 1— 160g (5.65 oz)
5-Breaker 300g (10.6 oz) —
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T6-3
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.1
Machine Integration
Modular Bus System for Hydraulic Magnetic Circuit Breakers
Modular Bus System for Hydraulic Magnetic Circuit Breakers—MDBS
Features
●Compact power distribution bus system design
●Number, type (AC vs. DC) and location of loads can be easily
changed by adjusting the busbar components
●Saves installation time
●Available with or without individual alarm auxiliary switches
●Utilizes pluggable breakers for quick connection and ability
to disconnect
Catalog Number Selection
Modular Bus System for Hydraulic Magnetic Circuit Breakers—MDBS
Modular Bus System—MDBS Model
Product Selection
Modular Bus System—MDBS Model
Note
1These are typical catalog numbers that could be built using the modular system.
Products are built-to-order according to specifications and can be provided with any number of positions.
Individual
Auxiliary Alarm Voltage
Number of Breaker
Positions (Poles) Catalog Number 1
Yes AC and DC 10 MDBS-10-1-AD-200
13 MDBS-13-1-AD-200
15 MDBS-15-1-AD-200
No AC only 10 MDBS-10-N-AD-200
13 MDBS-13-N-AD-200
15 MDBS-15-N-AD-200
MDBS 16 I AD 200
Type
MDBS = Modular distribution busbar system
Number of Positions
10 = 10 positions
13 = 13 positions
15 = 15 positions
Auxiliary Alarm
I= Individual auxiliary alarm
N= No auxiliary alarm
Voltage Ratings
AC = AC only
DC = DC only
AD =AC/DC
Ratings
200 = Busbar current rating
V9-T6-4 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.1
Machine Integration
Modular Bus System for Hydraulic Magnetic Circuit Breakers
Modular Bus System for Hydraulic Magnetic Circuit Breakers—PDMB
Features
●Compact power distribution bus system design
●Number, type (AC vs. DC) and location of loads can be easily
changed by adjusting the busbar components
●Saves installation time
●Available with or without individual alarm auxiliary switches
●Utilizes pluggable breakers for quick connection and ability
to disconnect
Catalog Number Selection
Modular Bus System for Hydraulic Magnetic Circuit Breakers—PDMB
Modular Bus System—PDMB Model
Product Selection
Modular Bus System—PDMB Model
Note
1These are typical catalog numbers that could be built using the modular system.
Products are built-to-order according to specifications and can be provided with any number of positions.
Auxiliary Alarm Busbar Current Rating
Number of Breaker
Positions (Poles) Catalog Number 1
Common 100A 4 PDMB-4-C-100
8PDMB-8-C-100
12 PDMB-12-C-100
Individual 100A 4 PDMB-4-1-100
8PDMB-8-1-100
12 PDMB-12-1-100
No auxiliary alarm 100A 4 PDMB-4-N-100
8PDMB-8-N-100
12 PDMB-12-N-100
PDMB 12 C 100
Type
PDMB = Power distribution busbar module
Number of Positions
4= 4 positions
8= 8 positions
12 = 12 positions
Auxiliary Alarm
I= Individual auxiliary alarm
C= Common auxiliary alarm
N= No auxiliary alarm
Ratings
100 = Busbar current rating
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T6-5
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.2
Machine Integration
General Purpose and Industrial Control Transformers
Product Overview
General Purpose and Industrial Control Transformers Selection Guide
Description General Purpose Transformers Industrial Control Transformers
Page V9-T6-6 Page V9-T6-8
General applications Typically used to step-down voltage from a high voltage to
a lower, safer voltage. Commonly installed in or on other
electrical equipment, such as machinery, switchboards, and
motor control centers. Also installed as loose equipment.
Typically used to step-down voltage to a level suitable to
operate a variety of electrically controlled devices. Must be
installed inside an enclosure, panel, or other structure to
provide protection from the surroundings.
Maximum primary voltage rating 600 Vac 600 Vac
Frequency 60 Hz standard (50/60 Hz optional) 50/60 Hz
Enclosure rating Type 3R raintight Open
Insulation system 180°C (356°F) 105°C (221°F)/130°C (266°F)/180°C (356°F)
Temperature rise
Standard 115°C (239°F) 55°C (131°F)/80°C (176°F)/120°C (248°F)
Optional 80°C (176°F) —
Approvals UL® 506, UL 1561, CSA® C22.2 UL 506, CSA C22.2
Ratings
50 VA 37.5 kVA single-phase 50 to 5,000 VA
3 kVA 75 kVA three-phase —
V9-T6-6 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.2
Machine Integration
General Purpose and Industrial Control Transformers
General Purpose Transformers
Features
●Totally enclosed non-ventilated Type 3R enclosure
●180°C insulation system
●Suitable for indoor or outdoor applications
●UL listed and CSA certified
Catalog Number Selection
General Purpose Transformers
General Purpose
Notes
1Model number is not used on newly
designed/redesigned transformers.
2Copper windings.
3Stainless steel enclosure (uses 316
stainless steel, does not imply a NEMA
4X rating).
4Open type core and coil assembly.
5Totally enclosed non-ventilated DS-3
or DT-3.
650/60 Hz.
7Low sound design. LS47 indicates low
sound equal to 47 dB; LS42 indicates
42 dB.
8Fungus proof.
9Certified test report of standard
production tests for the specific serial
number to be shipped.
jCertified sound level report.
kCE Marked.
lThermal indicator embedded in center
coil. Suffix “TT” indicates two thermal
indicators of different temperature
ratings, are installed.
mNEMA TP-1 Energy Star energy efficient.
n0º phase-shift (used with HMTs).
o+15º phase-shift (used with HMTs).
p–15º phase-shift (used with HMTs).
q–30° phase-shift (used with HMTs).
T S 20 N 11 S 05 A
Prefix Options
C= CSA labeled ventilated transformer
Marine Duty
QS = EPM marine (1-Ph encapsulated)
LY = EPTM Marine (3-Ph encapsulated)
RT = DS-3M marine (1-Ph ventilated)
MV = DT-3M marine (3-Ph ventilated)
Taps
D= 2 at +2.5%, 2 at –2.5%
E= 1 at +5%, 1 at –5%
F= 1 at –10%
G=2 at –5%
J=4 at –2.5%
K= 1 at –10% x 2 at –5%
L= 2 at –5% x 4 at –2.5%
M= 2 at +2.5%, 4 at –2.5%
N= None
R= 1 at +5%, 2 at –5%
P= 1 at +5%, 2 at –5% x
2 at +2.5%, 4 at –2.5%
T= 1 at +4.2%, 1 at –4.2%
U= 1 at +2.5%, 3 at –2.5%
W= 1 at +3.5%, 1 at –3.5%
X= 2 at +3.1%, 2 at –3.1%
Primary Voltage
13 = 110 x 220
12 = 120
10 = 120 x 240
29 = 208
72 = 200
25 = 220
23 = 230
24 = 240
20 = 240 x 480
27 = 277
38 = 380
39 = 400
43 = 416
44 = 440
45 = 450
48 = 480
57 = 575
60 = 600
42 = 2400
46 = 4160
49 = 4800
40 = Export model
54 = 120/208/240/277
Suffix Options
A...Y =1
CU =2
SS =3
ZZ =4
NV =5
X=6
LS_ _ =7
AF =8
TR =9
SR =j
CE =k
T=l
EE =m
NON =n
POS =o
NEG =p
THR =q
Secondary Voltage
04 =12/24
06 =16/32
08 =24/48
14 =110/220
12 =120
10 =120 x 240
11 =120/240
54 =127/254
19 = 190Y/110
28 = 208Y/120
29 =208
25 = 220 delta
31 = 220Y/127
26 = 220 delta/110 midtap
22 = 240 delta/120 midtap
64 = 240Y/139
24 = 240 delta
20 =240 x 480
21 = 240/480
27 =277
38 = 380 delta
37 = 380Y/220
34 = 400Y/231
51 = 416Y/240
35 = 440Y/254
62 = 460Y/266
47 = 480Y/277
48 = 480 delta
60 = 600 delta
61 = 600Y/346
42 =2400
41 = 4160Y/2400
46 =4160
49 =4800
Phase
A= Buck and boost
B=80°C rise
F= 115°C rise
E= Electrostatic shield
S=Single
T= Three
kVA
81 =0.05
85 =0.075
82 =0.10
83 =0.15
26 =0.25
51 =0.50
76 =0.75
01 =1
16 =1.5
02 =2
03 =3
05 =5
06 =6
07 =7.5
09 =9
10 =10
15 =15
21 =22.5
25 =25
30 =30
37 = 37.5
45 =45
50 =50
75 =75
99 = 100
12 = 112.5
49 = 150
67 = 167
22 = 225
52 =250
33 =300
54 =333
55 =500
60 =600
77 =750
11 =1000
14 = 1500
Type
S= EP (single-phase encapsulated)
Y= EPT (three-phase encapsulated)
T= DS-3 (single-phase ventilated)
V= DT-3 (three-phase ventilated)
P= Mini–power center
Z= Class 1 Division 2 Groups C and D
X= Harmonic mitigating (three-phase ventilated)
Nonlinear
(three-phase ventilated)
Nonlinear
(single-phase ventilated)
H=KT-4
B=KT-9
N= KT-13
G= KT-20
J= KT-30
A= KT-40
K= KT-50
HT = KT-4
NT = KT-13
GT = KT-20
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T6-7
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.2
Machine Integration
General Purpose and Industrial Control Transformers
Product Selection
Single-Phase Encapsulated, 240 x 480—120/240, 115°C Rise
Single-Phase Transformer Sizing Chart
Line current = (kVA x 1000)/line voltage.
kVA Catalog Number Outline # Wiring Diagram
0.05 S20N11S81N 52 3A
0.075 S20N11S85N 53 3A
0.1 S20N11S82N 54 3A
0.15 S20N11S83N 55 3A
0.25 S20N11S26N 56 3A
0.5 S20N11S51N 57 3A
0.75 S20N11S76N 58A 3A
1S20N11S01N 59A 3A
1.5 S20N11S16N 67 3A
2S20N11S02N 68 3A
3S20N11S03N 176 3A
5S20N11S05N 177 3A
7.5 S20N11S07N 178 3A
10 S20N11S10N 179 3A
15 S20N11S15N 180 3A
25 S20L11S25N 182 23A
37.5 S20L11S37 300A 248A
Rated Line Voltage
kVA 120 208 240 277 480 600 2400 4160 4800
0.5 4.2 2.4 2.1 1.8 1 0.8 0.2 0.1 0.1
1 8.3 4.8 4.2 3.6 2.1 1.7 0.4 0.2 0.2
1.5 12.5 7.2 6.3 5.4 3.1 2.5 0.6 0.4 0.3
2 16.7 9.6 8.3 7.2 4.2 3.3 0.8 0.5 0.4
3 25 14.4 12.5 10.8 6.3 5 1.3 0.7 0.6
5 41.7 24 20.8 18.1 10.4 8.3 2.1 1.2 1
7.5 62.5 36.1 31.3 27.1 15.6 12.5 3.1 1.8 1.6
10 83.3 48.1 41.7 36.1 20.8 16.7 4.2 2.4 2.1
15 125 72.1 62.5 54.2 31.3 25 6.3 3.6 3.1
25 208.3 120.2 104.2 90.3 52.1 41.7 10.4 6 5.2
37.5 312.5 180.3 156.3 135.4 78.1 62.5 15.6 9 7.8
50 416.7 240.4 208.3 180.5 104.2 83.3 20.8 12 10.4
75 625 360.6 312.5 270.8 156.3 125 31.3 18 15.6
100 833.3 480.8 416.7 361 208.3 166.7 41.7 24 20.8
167 1391.7 802.9 695.8 602.9 347.9 278.3 69.6 40.1 34.8
250 2083.3 1201.9 1041.7 902.5 520.8 416.7 104.2 60.1 52.1
333 2775 1601 1387.5 1202.2 693.8 555 138.8 80 69.4
V9-T6-8 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.2
Machine Integration
General Purpose and Industrial Control Transformers
Industrial Control Transformers
Features
●Epoxy encapsulated
●130ºC insulation system
●50/60 Hz operation
●UL listed and CSA certified
Catalog Number Selection
Industrial Control Transformers
Industrial Control
Note
1Type AP only.
Modifications
Type MTE/MTK
CE = CE marked control transformer
FB = Factory-mounted two-pole primary fuse block
for rejection type fuses
FBN = Factory-mounted two-pole primary fuse block
for non-rejection type fuses
Q= Secondary fuse clips for 1/4 x 1-1/4 in fuses
XX = No secondary fuse clips
RT = Ring type terminals for connection to fuse block
ES = Electrostatic shield
FS = Factory-mounted finger-safe terminal shields
Type AP
B= Bottom mounted
S= Side/wall mounted
ES = Electrostatic shield
CU = Copper windings
Type MTA/MTC
FB = Factory-mounted three-pole fuse block
(two-pole primary rejection type with
single-pole secondary non-rejection type)
ES = Electrostatic shield
L= Lead terminations
Type
C= Industrial control transformer
CE = CE Marked control transformer
VA Rating
0025 =25
0050 =50
0075 =75
0100 =100
0150 =150
0200 =200
0250 =250
0300 =300
0350 =350
0500 =500
0750 =750
1000 =1000
1500 =1500
2000 =2000
3000 =3000
5000 =5000
Type AP Only:
0003 =3000
0005 =5000
0007 =7500
0010 = 10000
0015 = 15000
Transformer
Design
E=MTE
K=MTK
P=AP
Voltage
Primary Secondary
AC
AG
1B
2A
2B
2C
2F
2G
2U
2V
2W
3A
3B
3C
3D
4B
4C
4D
4E
4H
4W
5E
6U
7G 1
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
380 x 415
208/240/277/380/480
120 x 240
240 x 480, 230 x 460,
220 x 440
240 x 480
240 x 480
230/460
230/460
220/380/440/550,
230/400/460/575,
240/416/480/600
208/230/400/460/575
208/230/400/460/575
208/277
115
230/460/575
208/380/416
208/230/460/575
550/575/600
380/400/415
208/230/460/575
380/400/415
550/575/600
200/220/440,
208/230/460,
240/480
240/416/480/600,
230/400/460/575,
220/380/440/550,
208/500
240 x 480
24
24
24
120/115/110
24
120 x 240
115
115/230
23/110, 24/115,
25/120
24/115/230
115/230
120
24
115/95
115/95
24
110/115/120
110 x 220
115
22/23/24
22/23/24
23/110, 24/115,
25/120
99/120/130,
95/115/125,
91/110/120,
85/100/110
120/240
CE 0250 E2F CE
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T6-9
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.2
Machine Integration
General Purpose and Industrial Control Transformers
Product Selection
Primary 240 x 480,
230 x 460, 220 x 440—
Secondary 120/115/110
Primary 240 x 480—
Secondary 24
Primary 120 x 240—
Secondary 24
VA Catalog Number
25 C0025E2A
50 C0050E2A
75 C0075E2A
100 C0100E2A
150 C0150E2A
200 C0200E2A
250 C0250E2A
300 C0300E2A
350 C0350E2A
500 C0500E2A
750 C0750E2A
1000 C1000E2A
1500 C1500E2A
VA Catalog Number
50 C0050E2B
75 C0075E2B
100 C0100E2B
150 C0150E2B
200 C0200E2B
250 C0250E2B
300 C0300E2B
350 C0350E2B
500 C0500E2B
750 C0750E2B
VA Catalog Number
50 C0050E1B
75 C0075E1B
100 C0100E1B
150 C0150E1B
200 C0200E1B
250 C0250E1B
300 C0300E1B
350 C0350E1B
500 C0500E1B
V9-T6-10 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.3
Machine Integration
Power Supplies
Product Overview
Power Supplies Selection Guide
Description PSG Power Supplies ELC Power Supplies
Page V9-T6-11 Page V9-T6-12
Technical Data
Output voltage 24 Vdc 24 Vdc
Input voltage 100–240 Vac/120–375 Vdc or 400–500 Vac/450–800 Vdc 100–240 Vac
Mounting DIN rail DIN rail/panel
Outrush current (current boost/surge) 150% of nominal 110% of nominal
Class 1, Division 2 Yes Yes
Semi 47 approved Yes —
Housing material Metal Plastic
Adjustable output voltage 22–28 Vdc —
Redundancy allowed Yes —
Connection Large screw terminals Large screw terminals
Overload/short circuit protection Yes Yes
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T6-11
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.3
Machine Integration
Power Supplies
PSG Power Supplies
Features
●Universal input voltages:
●100–240 Vac for single-phase units, 400–500 Vac
for three-phase units
●Rugged aluminum housing stands up to harsh
environments
●Compact size, with common depth and height across all
models allows for common panel depths and family
consistency
●Heavy-duty screw terminals with finger-safe protective
cover allow use of ring-lug terminals
●Class 1, Division 2 hazardous location rated
Catalog Number Selection
PSG Power Supplies
PSG
Product Selection
Semi F47 Certified for Voltage Sag Immunity PSG Power Supply
Description Catalog Number
Single-phase 100–240 Vac input, 24 Vdc/2.5A output PSG60E
Three-phase 400–500 Vac input, 24 Vdc/2.5A output PSG60F
Single-phase 100–240 Vac input, 24 Vdc/2.5A output PSG120E
Three-phase 400–500 Vac input, 24 Vdc/2.5A output PSG120F
Single-phase 100–240 Vac input, 24 Vdc/2.5A output PSG240E
Three-phase 400–500 Vac input, 24 Vdc/2.5A output PSG240F
Single-phase 100–240 Vac input, 24 Vdc/2.5A output PSG480E
Three-phase 400–500 Vac input, 24 Vdc/2.5A output PSG480F
PSG 120 E
Model
PSG = General purpose power supply
Wattage Rating
60 = 60 Watts
120 = 120 Watts
240 = 240 Watts
480 = 480 Watts
Nominal Input Voltage
E= 100–240 Vac single-phase
F= 400–500 Vac three-phase
V9-T6-12 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.3
Machine Integration
Power Supplies
ELC Power Supplies
Features
●Compact and low-cost source for 24 Vdc power
●Universal input voltage: 100–240 Vac
●Compact size, with common depth and height across models
allows for common panel depths and family consistency
●Power On indication LED
●Integrated mounting hardware for panel mounting or DIN rail
mounting
Product Selection
ELC Power Supplies
ELC
Description Catalog Number
24W, 1A power supply ELC-PS01
48W, 2A power supply ELC-PS02
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T6-13
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.4
Machine Integration
Power Distribution Blocks
Product Overview
Power Distribution Blocks Selection Guide
Description CHDB Series (Open Style) CHDB Series (Enclosed Style) CH160 Series
Page V9-T6-14 Page V9-T6-14 Page V9-T6-15
UL listing UL 1953 for feeder circuits UL 1953 for feeder circuits UL 1059 for branch circuits
Protection degree N/A—covers available IP20 finger-safe N/A—covers available
Number of poles 3 1 1, 2 or 3
Maximum current 310A 570A 840A
High SCCR Yes Yes No
V9-T6-14 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.4
Machine Integration
Power Distribution Blocks
CHDB Series—Power Distribution Blocks, Enclosed and Open
Features
●High short-circuit current rating (SCCR) applications up to
200,000 amperes
●600 Vac or Vdc (UL 1953), 690 Vac or Vdc
●DIN rail or panel mount (CHDB330F is panel mount only)
●Captive termination screws prevent lost screws
●Single-pole, gang mountable for multi-pole applications
●UL listed 1953, guide QPQS, file E256146
●CSA certified, class 6228-01, file 15364 (enclosed style)
●CE component IEC 60947-7-1 (enclosed style)
●IEC 60529, IP20 (finger-safe) under specific wiring conditions
(enclosed style)
Product Selection
CHDB Series—Power Distribution Blocks, Enclosed and Open
CHDB Series
Note
1Finger-safe.
Line Connection Load Connection Configuration Amperes Style Poles Catalog Number
2/0–#8 AWG (4) #4–#14 AWG 175 Open 3 CHDB2203
2/0–#8 AWG (6) #4–#14 AWG 175 Open 3 CHDB3213
300 kcmil–#4 AWG (6) #4–#12 AWG 310 Open 3 CHDB3233
300 kcmil–#4 AWG (12) #4–#14 AWG 310 Open 3 CHDB3703
300 kcmil–#4 AWG (6) #2–#12 AWG 310 Open 3 CHDB3713
(3) 1/0–#12 AWG 310 Open 3 CHDB3713
2/0–#8 AWG 2/0–#8 AWG 175 Enclosed 11CHDB204F
500 kcmil–#6 AWG (6) #2–#14 AWG 380 Enclosed 11CHDB330F
300 kcmil–#4 AWG (12) #4–#14 AWG 570 Enclosed 11CHDB377F
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T6-15
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.4
Machine Integration
Power Distribution Blocks
CH160 Series—Power Terminal Blocks
Features
●Ratings to 840A, 600V
●Molded material, black; UL rated 94V-0 thermoplastic
●Operating temperature: 302°F (150°C)
●Optional cover
●UL recognized
●CSA certified
Product Selection
CH160 Series—Power Terminal Blocks
CH160 Series
Note
1Incomplete catalog number—add code suffix -1, -2, -3 for number of poles.
Example: For a 150A 1/0–#14 Cu to 1/0–#14 Cu three-pole PDB, order CH16201-3.
Line Connection Load Connection
Connector Material
and Ampacity Catalog Number 1
CH162 Series
#2–#14 Cu/#8 Al #2–#14 Cu/#8 Al Al 115A CH16200_
1/0–#14 Cu 1/0–#14 Cu Cu 150A CH16201_
2/0–#8 Cu/Al 2/0–#8 Cu/Al Al 175A CH16204_
2/0–#14 Cu/#8 Al (4) #4–#14 Cu/#8 Al Al 175A CH16220_
CH163 Series
250 MCM-#6 Cu 250 MCM-#6 Cu Cu 255A CH16301_
350 MCM-#6 Cu/Al 350 MCM-#6 Cu/Al Al 310A CH16303_
500 MCM-#6 Cu/Al 500 MCM-#6 Cu/Al Al 380A CH16306_
2/0–#14 Cu/Al (6) #4–#14 Cu/#8 Al Al 175A CH16321_
350 MCM-#6 Cu/Al (6) #4–#14 Cu/#8 Al Al 310A CH16323_
(2) 2/0–#14 Cu/#8 Al (6) #4–#14 Cu/#8 Al Al 350A CH16325_
500 MCM-#6 Cu/Al (6) #2–#14 Cu/#8 Al Al 380A CH16330_
350 MCM-#6 Cu/Al (3) #2–#14 Cu/#8 Al Al 310A CH16332_
(2) 1/0–#14 Cu/#8 Al Al 310A CH16332_
350 MCM-#6 Cu/Al (12) #4–#14 Cu/#8 Al Al 310A CH16370_
350 MCM-#6 Cu/Al (6) #2–#14 Cu/#8 Al Al 310A CH16371_
(3) 1/0–#14 Cu/#8 Al Al 310A CH16371_
350 MCM-#6 Cu/Al (21) #10–#14 Cu/#10 Al Al 310A CH16372_
350 MCM-#6 Cu/Al (3) 1/0–#14 Cu/#8 Al Al 310A CH16373_
(14) #10–#14 Cu/#8 Al Al 310A CH16373_
600 MCM-#2 Cu/Al (12) #4–#14 Cu/#8 Al Al 420A CH16375_
600 MCM-#2 Cu/Al (6) #2–#14 Cu/#8 Al Al 420A CH16376_
(3) 1/0–#14 Cu/#8 Al Al 420A CH16376_
CH165 Series
(2) 350 MCM-4 Cu/Al (2) 350 MCM-4 Cu/Al Al 620A CH16500_
(2) 500 MCM-#6 Cu/Al (2) 500 MCM-#6 Cu/Al Al 760A CH16504_
(2) 600 MCM-#2 Cu/Al (4) 3/0–#8 Cu/Al Al 840A CH16528_
(4) #4–#14 Cu/#8 Al Al 840A CH16528_
(2) 500 MCM-#6 Cu/Al (12) #4–#14 Cu/#8 Al Al 760A CH16530_
V9-T6-16 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.5
Machine Integration
Terminal Blocks and Accessories
Product Overview
Terminal Blocks and Accessories Selection Guide
Description XB Series IEC Terminal Blocks
Page V9-T6-17
Available connections Screw terminal, spring cage, insulation displacement (IDC)
Insulation material Polyamide 6.6
Dielectric strength 600 kV/cm
Creep resistance 600 CTI
Flammability rating UL 94 V0
Continuous operating temperature –40° to 257°F (–40° to 125°C)
UL recognized Yes
CE approved Yes
ATEX approved Yes
Jumpers/bridging Flexible jumper system with dual channel configurations
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T6-17
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.5
Machine Integration
Terminal Blocks and Accessories
XB Series IEC Terminal Blocks
Features
●Maintenance-free connections
●Multi-conductor connections
●Flexible plug-in bridge system
●UL and cUL® recognized, CE approved
●LVD1 (Not all standards apply to all terminal blocks.
Contact Eaton for details)
●
EN-60947-7-1; EN-60947-7-2; EN-60998-2-3; EN-60352-4/A1
●ATEX approval (EExe applications)
Product Selection
XB Series IEC Terminal Blocks
Screw Connection Single Level—Through-Feed Terminal Blocks
Note
1EU type—examination certificate number: KEMA 05ATEX2158 U.
Terminal Width
Maximum Wire Size
IEC 60 947-7-1 in V/A/AWG
EN 50 019 1 in V/A/AWG
UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Number of
Positions
5.2 mm
12 AWG/2.5 mm2
800/32/26-12
750/22/28/26-12
600/20/26-12
6.2 mm
10 AWG/4 mm2
800/41/26-10
750/30/38/26-10
600/30/26-10
8.2 mm
8 AWG/6 mm2
800/57/24-8
750/40/50/24-8
600/50/24-8
Description Color Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
Product Selection
Screw connection single level—through-feed Gray — XBUT25 XBUT4 XBUT6
Blue — XBUT25BU XBUT4BU XBUT6BU
Orange — — XBUT4OR —
Yellow — — XBUT4YE —
Red — — XBUT4RD —
White — — XBUT4WH —
Black — — XBUT4BK —
Green — — XBUT4GN —
Accessories
End cover Gray — XBACUT10 XBACUT10 XBACUT10
Partition plate Gray — XBATUT10 XBATUT10 XBATUT10
Plug-in bridge—for cross connections in the bridge shaft Red 2 XBAFBS25 XBAFBS26 XBAFBS28
3XBAFBS35 XBAFBS36 —
5XBAFBS55 XBAFBS56 —
10 XBAFBS105 XBAFBS106 —
50 XBAFBS505 XBAFBS506 —
V9-T6-18 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.5
Machine Integration
Terminal Blocks and Accessories
Screw Connection Single Level—Through-Feed Terminal Blocks, continued
Notes
1EU type—examination certificate number: KEMA 05ATEX2158 U.
2XBUT35 has an enclosed design. The use of an end cover is not required.
Terminal Width
Maximum Wire Size
IEC 60 947-7-1 in V/A/AWG
EN 50 019 1 in V/A/AWG
UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Number of
Positions
5.2 mm
12 AWG/2.5 mm2
800/32/26-12
750/22/28/26-12
600/20/26-12
6.2 mm
10 AWG/4 mm2
800/41/26-10
750/30/38/26-10
600/30/26-10
8.2 mm
8 AWG/6 mm2
800/57/24-8
750/40/50/24-8
600/50/24-8
Description Color Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
Product Selection
Screw connection single level—through-feed Gray — XBUT10 XBUT16 XBUT35
Blue — XBUT10BU XBUT16BU XBUT35BU
Orange — XBUT10OR — —
Yellow — XBUT10YE — —
Red — XBUT10RD — —
White — ———
Black — ———
Green — ———
Accessories
End cover Gray — XBACUT10 XBACUT16 2
Partition plate Gray — XBATUT10 — —
Plug-in bridge—for cross connections in the bridge shaft Red 2 XBAFBS210 XBAFBS212 XBAFBS216
3———
5———
10 ———
50 ———
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T6-19
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.5
Machine Integration
Terminal Blocks and Accessories
Screw Connection Single Level—Ground Blocks
Screw Connection Single Level—Ground Blocks, continued
Notes
1EU type—examination certificate number: KEMA 05ATEX2158 U.
2XBUT35PE has an enclosed design. The use of an end cover is not required.
Terminal Width
Maximum Wire Size
IEC 60 947-7-2 in V/A/AWG
EN 50 019 1 in V/A/AWG
UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Number of
Positions
10.2 mm
12 AWG/2.5 mm2
—/—/26-12
—/—/26-12
—/—/26-12
6.2 mm
10 AWG/4 mm2
—/—/26-10
—/—/26-10
—/—/26-10
8.2 mm
8 AWG/6 mm2
—/—/24-8
—/—/24-8
—/—/24-8
Description Color Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
Product Selection
Screw connection single level ground block Green/
yellow
—XBUT25PE XBUT4PE XBUT6PE
Accessories
End cover Gray — XBACUT10 XBACUT10 XBACUT10
Partition plate Gray — XBATUT10 XBATUT10 XBATUT10
Plug-in bridge—for cross connections in the bridge shaft Red 2 XBAFBS25 XBAFBS26 XBAFBS28
3XBAFBS35 XBAFBS36 —
5XBAFBS55 XBAFBS56 —
10 XBAFBS105 XBAFBS106 —
50 XBAFBS505 XBAFBS506 —
Terminal Width
Maximum Wire Size
IEC 60 947-7-2 in V/A/AWG
EN 50 019 1 in V/A/AWG
UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Number of
Positions
10.2 mm
12 AWG/2.5 mm2
—/—/26-12
—/—/26-12
—/—/26-12
6.2 mm
10 AWG/4 mm2
—/—/26-10
—/—/26-10
—/—/26-10
8.2 mm
8 AWG/6 mm2
—/—/24-8
—/—/24-8
—/—/24-8
Description Color Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
Product Selection
Screw connection single level ground block Green/
yellow
—XBUT10PE XBUT16PE XBUT35PE
Accessories
End cover Gray — XBACUT10 XBACUT16 2
Partition plate — — XBATUT10 — —
Plug-in bridge—for cross connections in the bridge shaft Red 2 XBAFBS210 XBAFBS212 XBAFBS212
3———
5———
10 ———
50 ———
V9-T6-20 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.5
Machine Integration
Terminal Blocks and Accessories
Screw Connection Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks
Screw Connection Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks
Terminal Width
Maximum Wire Size
IEC 60 947-7-1 in V/A/AWG
UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Number of
Positions
5.2 mm
12 AWG/2.5 mm2
500/28/26-12
150/20/26-12
6.2 mm
10 AWG/4 mm2
500/39/26-10
150/30/26-10
Description Color Catalog Number Catalog Number
Product Selection
Screw connection multi-conductor Gray — XBUT25D12 XBUT4D12
—XBUT25D22 XBUT4D22
Blue — XBUT25D12BU XBUT4D12BU
—XBUT25D22BU XBUT4D22BU
Accessories
End cover Gray — XBACUT4D12 XBACUT4D12
—XBACUT4D22 XBACUT4D22
End cover segment Gray — XBASUT4 XBASUT4
Partition plate XBATUTD12 XBATUTD12
XBATUTD22 XBATUTD22
Plug-in bridge—for cross connections in the bridge shaft Red 2 XBAFBS25 XBAFBS26
3XBAFBS35 XBAFBS36
5XBAFBS55 XBAFBS56
10 XBAFBS105 XBAFBS106
50 XBAFBS505 XBAFBS506
Terminal Width
Maximum Wire Size
IEC 60 947-7-2 in V/A/AWG
UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Number of
Positions
5.2 mm
12 AWG/2.5 mm2
—/—/26-12
—/—/26-12
6.2 mm
10 AWG/4 mm2
—/—/26-10
—/—/26-10
Description Color Catalog Number Catalog Number
Product Selection
Screw connection multi-conductor ground block Green/
yellow
—XBUT25D12PE XBUT4D12PE
—XBUT25D22PE XBUT4D22PE
Accessories
End cover Gray — XBACUT4D12 XBACUT4D12
—XBACUT4D22 XBACUT4D22
End cover segment Gray — XBASUT4 XBASUT4
Partition plate — — XBATUTD12 XBATUTD12
Plug-in bridge—for cross connections in the bridge shaft Red 2 XBAFBS25 XBAFBS26
3XBAFBS35 XBAFBS36
5XBAFBS55 XBAFBS56
10 XBAFBS105 XBAFBS106
50 XBAFBS505 XBAFBS506
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T6-21
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.5
Machine Integration
Terminal Blocks and Accessories
Screw Connection Double Level Terminal Blocks
Screw Connection Triple Level Sensor/Actuator Terminal Blocks
Note
1For information on Printed Marking Tag Options, see Page V9-T6-33.
Terminal Width
Maximum Wire Size
IEC 60 947-7-1 in V/A/AWG
UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Number of
Positions
6.2 mm
10 AWG/4 mm2
800/36/26-10
300/30/26-10
6.2 mm
10 AWG/4 mm2
—/—/26-10
—/—/26-10
Description Color Catalog Number Catalog Number
Product Selection
Screw connection double level Gray — XBUTT4 —
Blue — XBUTT4BU —
Red — XBUTT4RD —
Screw connection double level—terminal block
with potential distribution between the levels
Gray — XBUTT4PV —
Screw connection double level—ground block Green/
yellow
—— XBUTT4PE
Accessories
End cover Gray — XBACUTT4 XBACUTT4
Spacer plate Gray — XBDPUTT4 XBDPUTT4
Partition plate — — XBATUTT4 XBATUTT4
Plug-in bridge—for cross connections in the bridge shaft Red 2 XBAFBS26 XBAFBS26
3XBAFBS36 XBAFBS36
5XBAFBS56 XBAFBS56
10 XBAFBS106 XBAFBS106
50 XBAFBS506 XBAFBS506
Terminal Width
Maximum Wire Size
Connection Data in V/A/AWG
IEC 60 947-7-1 in V/A/AWG
UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Number of
Positions
6.2 mm
14 AWG/2.5 mm2
250/26/24-12
—
300/15/30-14
6.2 mm
14 AWG/2.5 mm2
—
250/30/24-12
300/15/30-14
Description Color Catalog Number Catalog Number
Product Selection
Screw connection triple level Gray blue — XB3UKA25 XB3UKF25
Screw connection triple level w/red LED, 15–30 Vdc, 2.5–7.5A Gray — XB3UKA25L24 —
Screw connection with ground connection Gray — XB3UKA24PE XB3UKF24PE
Screw connection with ground connection and LED indicator Gray — XB3UKA24PEL24 —
Accessories
Insertion bridge Blue 80 XBAEB80DIKB XBAEB80DIKB
Red 80 XBAEB80DIKR XBAEB80DIKR
Blue 10 XBAEB10DIKB XBAEB10DIKB
Red 10 XBAEB10DIKR XBAEB10DIKR
Blank marker strip (strip of 10) White — XBMZB6 1XBMZB6 1
V9-T6-22 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.5
Machine Integration
Terminal Blocks and Accessories
Screw Connection Fuse Terminal Blocks
Notes
Max. power dissipation at 23°C (based on DIN EN 60 947-7-3: 2003-7. When selecting cartridge
fuse inserts, please ensure that the maximum power dissipation specified above is not exceeded.
Details can be obtained from the fuse suppliers. Cartridge fuse inserts 5 x 20 mm based
on DIN EN 60 947-7-3: 2003-7.
If the fuse is defective, the downstream circuit is not off load.
1As disconnect terminal block 400V, as fuse terminal block 250V.
2The current is determined by the fuse used, the voltage by the selected light indicator.
3XBUT4FBE and XBUT6FBN have an enclosed design. The use of an end cover is not required.
Terminal Width
Maximum Wire Size
IEC 60 947-7-3 in V/A/AWG
IEC 60 947-7-3 as Disconnected Terminal Block in V/A/AWG
UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Number of
Positions
6.2 mm
10 AWG/4 mm2
1/6.3/26-10
—
600/6.3/26-10
8.2 mm
8 AWG/6 mm2
1/10/24-8
—
400/10/24-8
12 mm
6 AWG/16 mm2
2/2/20-4
800/10/20-6
300/20/22-6
Description Color Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
Product Selection
Fuse terminal block for 5 x 20 mm fuse Black — XBUT4FBE — XBUK10FBCE
Fuse terminal block for 6.3 x 32 mm (1/4 x 1-1/4 in) fuse Black — — XBUT6FBN XBUK10FBCN
Fuse terminal block w/LED 12–30V, 1–2.5 mA Black — XBUT4FBEL24 XBUT6FBNL24 —
Fuse terminal block w/LED 30–60V, 0.8–2.0 mA Black — XBUT4FBEL60 XBUT6FBNL60 —
Fuse terminal block w/LED 110–250V, 0.5–2.5 mA Black — XBUT4FBEL250 XBUT6FBNL250 —
Fuse terminal block w/LED 15–30V, 1–2.5 mA, 5 x 20 mm Black — — — XBUK10FBCEL24
Fuse terminal block w/LED 15–30V, 1–2.5 mA, 6.3 x 32 mm Black — — — XBUK10FBCNL24
Fuse terminal block w/LED 110–250V, 0.5–1.1A, 5 x 20 mm Black — — — XBUK10FBCEL250
Fuse terminal block w/LED 110–250V, 0.5–1.1A, 6.3 x 32 mm Black — — — XBUK10FBCNL250
Accessories
End cover — — 33—
Plug-in bridge—for cross connections in the bridge shaft Red 2 XBAFBS26 XBAFBS28 —
3XBAFBS36 XBAFBS38 —
5XBAFBS56 XBAFBS58 —
10 XBAFBS106 XBAFBS108 —
50 XBAFBS506 XBAFBS508 —
Overload Protection
Terminal Block U (V) Individual Interconnected Imax. (A)
XBUT4FBE 250 1.6W 1.6W 6.3
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T6-23
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.5
Machine Integration
Terminal Blocks and Accessories
Spring Cage Single Level—Through-Feed Terminal Blocks
Spring Cage Single Level—Through-Feed Terminal Blocks, continued
Notes
1EU type—examination certificate number: KEMA 05ATEX2154 U (XBPT25), KEMA 05ATEX2155 U (XBPT4), KEMA 05ATEX2155 U (XBPT6), KEMA 05ATEX2156 U (XBPT10).
2XBPT35 has an enclosed design. The use of an end cover is not required.
Terminal Width
Maximum Wire Size
IEC 60 947-7-1 in V/A/AWG
EN 50 019 1 in V/A/AWG
UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Number of
Positions
5.2 mm
12 AWG/2.5 mm2
800/31/28-12
550/25/21/24-12
600/20/26-12
6.2 mm
10 AWG/4 mm2
800/40/28-10
550/34/30/24-10
600/30/20-10
8.2 mm
8 AWG/6 mm2
800/52/24-8
550/45/36/20-8
600/50/20-8
Description Color Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
Product Selection
Spring cage single level—through-feed Gray — XBPT25 XBPT4 XBPT6
Blue — XBPT25BU XBPT4BU XBPT6BU
White — XBPT25WH — —
Red — XBPT25RD — —
Black — XBPT25BK — —
Accessories
End cover Gray — XBACPT25 XBACPT4 XBACPT6
Partition plate — — XBATPT4 XBATPT4 XBATPT6
Plug-in bridge—for cross connections in the terminal center Red 2 XBAFBS25 XBAFBS26 XBAFBS28
3XBAFBS35 XBAFBS36 —
5XBAFBS55 XBAFBS56 —
10 XBAFBS105 XBAFBS106 —
50 XBAFBS505 XBAFBS506 —
Terminal Width
Maximum Wire Size
IEC 60 947-7-1 in V/A/AWG
EN 50 019 1 in V/A/AWG
UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Number of
Positions
10.2 mm
6 AWG/10 mm2
800/65/24-6
550/50/63/16-6
600/65/16-6
12 mm
4 AWG/16 mm2
800/90/24-4
550/65/82/16-4
600/50/16-4
16 mm
2 AWG/35 mm2
800/125/14-2
750/108/14-2
600/115/14-2
Description Color Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
Product Selection
Spring cage single level—through-feed Gray — XBPT10 XBPT16 XBPT35
Blue — XBPT10BU XBPT16BU XBPT35BU
White — ———
Red — ———
Black — ———
Accessories
End cover Gray — XBACPT10 XBACPT16 2
Partition plate — — ———
Plug-in bridge—for cross connections in the terminal center Red 2 XBAFBS210 XBAFBS212 XBAFBS216
3———
5———
10 ———
50 ———
V9-T6-24 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.5
Machine Integration
Terminal Blocks and Accessories
Screw Connection Single Level—Ground Blocks
Screw Connection Single Level—Ground Blocks, continued
Notes
1EU type—examination certificate number: KEMA 05ATEX2154 U (XBPT25PE), KEMA 05ATEX2155 U (XBPT4PE, XBPT6PE), KEMA 05ATEX2156 U (9XBPT10PE).
2XBPT35PE has an enclosed design. The use of an end cover is not required.
Terminal Width
Maximum Wire Size
IEC 60 947-7-2 in V/A/AWG
EN 50 019 1 in V/A/AWG
UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Number of
Positions
5.2 mm
12 AWG/2.5 mm2
—/—/28-12
—/—/24-12
—/—/26-12
6.2 mm
10 AWG/4 mm2
—/—/28-10
—/—/24-10
—/—/20-10
8.2 mm
8 AWG/6 mm2
—/—/24-8
—/—/20-8
—/—/20-8
Description Color Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
Product Selection
Spring cage single level ground block Green/
yellow
—XBPT25PE XBPT4PE XBPT6PE
Accessories
End cover Gray — XBACPT25 XBACPT4 XBACPT6
Plug-in bridge—for cross connections in the terminal center — 2 ———
Terminal Width
Maximum Wire Size
IEC 60 947-7-2 in V/A/AWG
EN 50 019 1 in V/A/AWG
UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Number of
Positions
10.2 mm
6 AWG/10 mm2
—/65/24-6
—/—/16-6
—/—/16-6
12 mm
4 AWG/16 mm2
—/90/24-4
—/—/16-4
—/—/16-4
16 mm
2 AWG/35 mm2
—/125/14-2
—/—/14-2
—/—/14-2
Description Color Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
Product Selection
Spring cage single level ground block Green/
yellow
—XBPT10PE XBPT16PE XBPT35PE
Accessories
End cover Gray — XBACPT10 XBACPT16 2
Plug-in Bridge — for cross connections in the terminal center — 2 XBAFBS210 XBAFBS212 XBAFBS216
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T6-25
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.5
Machine Integration
Terminal Blocks and Accessories
Spring Cage Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks
Spring Cage Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks
Note
1EU type—examination certificate number: KEMA 05ATEX2154 U (XBPT25D12, XBPT25D22), KEMA 05ATEX2155 U (XBPT4D12, XBPT4D22).
Terminal Width
Maximum Wire Size
IEC 60 947-7-1 in V/A/AWG
EN 50 019 1 in V/A/AWG
UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Number of
Positions
5.2 mm
12 AWG/2.5 mm2
800/28/28-12
550/25/21/24-12
600/20/26-12
6.2 mm
10 AWG/4 mm2
800/40/28-10
550/34/29/24-10
600/30/20-10
Description Color Catalog Number Catalog Number
Product Selection
Spring cage multi-conductor Gray — XBPT25D12 XBPT4D12
—XBPT25D22 XBPT4D22
Blue — XBPT25D12BU XBPT4D12BU
—XBPT25D22BU XBPT4D22BU
Spring cage multi-conductor with interrupted busbar Gray — XBPT25D22U XBPT4D22U
Accessories
End cover Gray — XBACPT25D12 XBACPT4D12
—— XBACPT24D22 XBACPT4D22
End cover segment Gray — XBASPT25 XBASPT4
Partition plate XBATPTD12 XBATPTD12
XBATPTD22 XBATPTD22
Plug-in bridge—for cross connections in the terminal center Red 2 XBAFBS25 XBAFBS26
3XBAFBS35 XBAFBS36
5XBAFBS55 XBAFBS56
10 XBAFBS105 XBAFBS106
50 XBAFBS505 XBAFBS506
Terminal Width
Maximum Wire Size
IEC 60 947-7-2 in V/A/AWG
EN 50 019 1 in V/A/AWG
UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Number of
Positions
5.2 mm
12 AWG/2.5 mm2
—/—/28-12
—/—/24-12
—/—/26-12
6.2 mm
10 AWG/4 mm2
—/—/28-10
—/—/24-10
—/—/20-10
Description Color Catalog Number Catalog Number
Product Selection
Spring cage multi-conductor ground block Green/
yellow
—XBPT25D12PE XBPT4D12PE
XBPT25D22PE XBPT4D22PE
Accessories
End cover Gray — XBACPT25D12 XBACPT4D12
XBACPT25D22 XBACPT4D22
End cover segment Gray — XBASPT25 XBASPT4
V9-T6-26 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.5
Machine Integration
Terminal Blocks and Accessories
Spring Cage Double Level Blocks
Spring Cage Triple Level Blocks
Note
1EU type—examination certificate number: KEMA 05ATEX2154 U (XBPTT25, XBPTT25PE), KEMA 05ATEX2155 U (XBPTT4, XBPTT4PE).
Terminal Width
Maximum Wire Size
IEC 60 947-7-1 in V/A/AWG
EN 50 019 1 in V/A/AWG
UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Number of
Positions
5.2 mm
12 AWG/2.5 mm2
500/26/28-12
420/23/19/24-12
600/20/26-12
6.2 mm
10 AWG/4 mm2
500/32/28-10
420/32/27/24-10
300/30/20-10
Description Color Catalog Number Catalog Number
Product Selection
Spring cage double level block Gray — XBPTT25 XBPTT4
Blue — XBPTT25BU XBPTT4BU
Spring cage double level ground block Green/
yellow
—XBPTT25PE XBPTT4PE
Spring cage double level—terminal block with potential
distribution between the levels
Gray — XBPTT25PV XBPTT4PV
Accessories
End cover Gray — XBACPTT25 XBACPTT4
Partition plate — — XBATPTT4 XBATPTT4
Plug-in bridge—for cross connections in the terminal center Red 2 XBAFBS25 XBAFBS26
3XBAFBS35 XBAFBS36
5XBAFBS55 XBAFBS56
10 XBAFBS105 XBAFBS106
50 XBAFBS505 XBAFBS506
Terminal Width
Maximum Wire Size
IEC 60 947-7-1 in V/A/AWG
UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Number of
Positions
5.2 mm
12 AWG/2.5 mm2
500/28/28-12
600/20/26-12
Description Color Catalog Number
Product Selection
Spring cage triple level block Gray — XBPTK25
Spring cage triple level—terminal block with potential
distribution between the levels
Gray — XBPTK25PV
Accessories
End cover Gray — XBACPT25K
Plug-in bridge—for cross connections in the terminal center Red 2 XBAFBS25
3XBAFBS35
5XBAFBS55
10 XBAFBS105
50 XBAFBS505
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T6-27
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.5
Machine Integration
Terminal Blocks and Accessories
Spring Cage Fuse Terminal Block
Notes
The cartridge fuse holders should be selected according to the maximum power dissipation (self-heating) of the cartridge fuse inserts. The thermal
conditions in closed fuse holes should be checked according to the application and installation. Higher ambient temperatures are an additional strain
on fuse inserts. In applications of this kind, the shift of the rated current should be taken into consideration accordingly. Max. power dissipation at
23°C (in acc. with IEC 60 947-7-3). When selecting cartridge fuse inserts, please ensure that the maximum power dissipation specified at right is
not exceeded. Details can be obtained from the fuse suppliers. Cartridge fuse inserts 5 x 20 and 6.3 x 32 mm in acc. with IEC 60 947-7-3.
1The current is determined by the fuse used, the voltage by the selected light indicator. See table above.
Terminal Width
Maximum Wire Size
IEC 60 947-7-3 with Fuse in V/A/AWG
IEC 60 947-7-3 as Disconnect Terminal Block in V/A/AWG
UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Number of
Positions
6.2 mm
10 AWG/4 mm2
1/1/28-10
250/6.3/28-10
300/6.3/24-10
8.2 mm
10 AWG/4 mm2
400/10/28-10
400/10/28-10
300/10/24-10
Description Color Catalog Number Catalog Number
Product Selection
Fuse terminal block for 5 x 20 mm fuse Black — XBPT4FBE —
Fuse terminal block w/LED 15–30V, 3.5–8.1A Black — XBPT4FBEL24 —
Fuse terminal block w/LED 30–60V, 0.8–2.0A Black — XBPT4FBEL60 —
Fuse terminal block w/LED 110–250V, 0.5–1.0A Black — XBPT4FBEL250 —
Fuse terminal block for 6.3 x 32 mm (1/4 x 1-1/4 in) fuse Black — — XBPT4FBN
Fuse terminal block w/LED 12–30V, 1.0–2.5 mA Black — — XBPT4FBNL24
Fuse terminal block w/LED 110–250V, 0.5–2.5 mA Black — — XBPT4FBNL250
Accessories
Partition plate — — XBATPT4 XBATQTD12
Plug-in bridge—for cross connections in the terminal center Red 2 XBAFBS26 XBAFBS28
3XBAFBS36 —
5XBAFBS56 —
10 XBAFBS106 —
Terminal Block U (V) Individual Interconnected
Overload Protection
XBPT4FBN 400 1.6W 1.6W
XBPT4FBE 250 1.6W 1.6W
Short Circuit Protection Only
XBPT4FBN 400 4W 2.5W
XBPT4FBE 250 4W 2.5W
V9-T6-28 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.5
Machine Integration
Terminal Blocks and Accessories
Insulation Displacement Connection—Single Level Terminal Blocks
Insulation Displacement Connection—Multi-Conductor
Note
1EU type—examination certificate number: KEMA 05ATEX2157 U (XBQT15, XBQT15PE), KEMA 05ATEX2160 U (XBQT25, XBQT25PE).
Terminal Width
Maximum Wire Size
Connection Data in V/A/AWG
EN 50 019 1 in V/A/AWG
UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Number of
Positions
5.2 mm
16 AWG/1.5 mm2
800/17.5/24-16
550/16/24-16
600/10/24-16
5.2 mm
16 AWG/1.5 mm2
—/—/24-16
—/—/24-16
—/—/24-16
6.2 mm
14 AWG/2.5 mm2
800/24/20-14
—
600/15/20-14
6.2 mm
14 AWG/2.5 mm2
—/—/20-14
—
—/—/20-14
Description Color Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
Product Selection
IDC terminal block—single level Gray — XBQT15 — XBQT25 —
Blue — XBQT15BU — XBQT25BU —
IDC ground block—single level Green/
yellow
—— XBQT15PE — XBQT25PE
Accessories
End cover Gray — XBACQT15 XBACQT15 XBACQT25 XBACQT25
Partition plate — — XBATQT25 XBATQT25 XBATQT25 XBATQT25
Plug-in bridge Red 2 XBAFBS25 XBAFBS25 XBAFBS26 XBAFBS26
3XBAFBS35 XBAFBS35 XBAFBS36 XBAFBS36
5XBAFBS55 XBAFBS55 XBAFBS56 XBAFBS56
10 XBAFBS105 XBAFBS105 XBAFBS106 XBAFBS106
50 XBAFBS505 XBAFBS505 XBAFBS506 XBAFBS506
Terminal Width
Maximum Wire Size
Connection Data in V/A/AWG
EN 50 019 1 in V/A/AWG
UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Number of
Positions
5.2 mm
16 AWG/1.5 mm2
800/17.5/24-16
550/16/24-16
600/10/24-16
5.2 mm
16 AWG/1.5 mm2
—/—/24-16
—/—/24-16
—/—/24-16
6.2 mm
14 AWG/2.5 mm2
800/24/20-14
—
600/15/20-14
6.2 mm
14 AWG/2.5 mm2
—/—/20-14
—
—/—/20-14
Description Color Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
Product Selection
IDC terminal block—multi-conductor Gray — XBQT15D12 — XBQT25D12 —
—XBQT15D22 — XBQT25D12BU —
Blue
—
—XBQT15D12BU — — —
—XBQT15D22BU — — —
IDC ground block—multi-conductor Green/
yellow
—— XBQT15D12PE — XBQT25D12PE
— XBQT15D22PE — —
Accessories
End cover Gray — XBACQT15D12 XBACQT15D12 XBACQT25D12 XBACQT25D12
XBACQT15D22 XBACQT15D22 — —
End cover segment Gray — XBASQT15 XBASQT15 XBASQT25 XBASQT25
Partition plate XBATQTD12 XBATQTD12 XBATQTD12 XBATQTD12
XBATQTD22 XBATQTD22 — —
Plug-in bridge Red 2 XBAFBS25 XBAFBS25 XBAFBS26 XBAFBS26
3XBAFBS35 XBAFBS35 XBAFBS36 XBAFBS36
5XBAFBS55 XBAFBS55 XBAFBS56 XBAFBS56
10 XBAFBS105 XBAFBS105 XBAFBS106 XBAFBS106
50 XBAFBS505 XBAFBS505 XBAFBS506 XBAFBS506
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T6-29
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.5
Machine Integration
Terminal Blocks and Accessories
Insulation Displacement Connection—Double Level
Insulation Displacement Connection Fuse Terminal Blocks
Notes
1EU type—examination certificate number: KEMA 05ATEX2157 U.
2As disconnect terminal block, 400V; as fuse terminal block, 250V.
Terminal Width
Maximum Wire Size
Connection Data in V/A/AWG
EN 50 019 1 in V/A/AWG
UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Number of
Positions
5.2 mm
16 AWG/1.5 mm2
800/17.5/24-16
420/15/24-16
600/10/24-16
5.2 mm
16 AWG/1.5 mm2
—/—/24-16
—/—/24-16
—/—/24-16
Description Color Catalog Number Catalog Number
Product Selection
IDC terminal block—double level Gray — XBQTT15 —
Blue — XBQTT15BU —
IDC ground block—double level Green/
yellow
—— XBQTT15PE
Accessories
End cover Gray — XBACQTT15 XBACQTT15
Partition plate — — XBATQTT15 XBATQTT15
Plug-in bridge Red 2 XBAFBS25 XBAFBS25
3XBAFBS35 XBAFBS35
5XBAFBS55 XBAFBS55
10 XBAFBS105 XBAFBS105
20 XBAFBS505 XBAFBS505
Terminal Width
Maximum Wire Size
Connection Data in V/A/AWG
UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Number of
Positions
6.2 mm
14 AWG/2.5 mm2
2/6.3/20-14
300/15/20-14
Description Color Catalog Number
Product Selection
IDC fuse terminal block Black — XBQT25FBE
With LED 12–30V, 1–2.5 mA XBQT25FBEL24
With LED 30–60V, 0.8–2.0 mA XBQT25FBEL60
With LED 110–250, 0.5–2.5 mA XBQT25FBEL250
Accessories
End cover Gray — XBACQT25D12
Partition plate — — XBATQTD12
Plug-in bridge Red 2 XBAFBS26
3XBAFBS36
5XBAFBS56
10 XBAFBS106
V9-T6-30 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.5
Machine Integration
Terminal Blocks and Accessories
Insulation Displacement Connection Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks
Miniature Circuit Breakers
Terminal Width
Maximum Wire Size
Connection Data in V/A/AWG
UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Number of
Positions
5.2 mm
16 AWG/1.5 mm2
400/16/24-16
600/10/24-16
5.2 mm
16 AWG/1.5 mm2
400/16/24-16
600/10/24-16
Description Color Catalog Number Catalog Number
Product Selection
IDC disconnect and component terminal block Gray — XBQT15MT XBQT15TG
Accessories
End cover Gray — XBACQT15D12 XBACQT15D12
End cover segment Gray — XBASQT15 XBASQT15
Partition plate — — XBATQTD12 XBATQTD12
Plug-in bridge Red 2 XBAFBS25 XBAFBS25
3XBAFBS35 XBAFBS35
5XBAFBS55 XBAFBS55
10 XBAFBS105 XBAFBS105
Component plug Gray — —XBPCO
Fuse plug Black — —XBPFU
Fuse plug with light indicator for 12–30V Black — — XBPFUL24
Fuse plug with light indicator for 110–250V Black — — XBPFUL250
Connection Data in Vac/Vdc Number of
Positions
250/65
Description Color Catalog Number
Product Selection
Thermal miniature circuit breaker
Nominal current 0.1A Black — XBATCPT
Nominal current 0.25A Black — XBATCPQ
Nominal current 0.5A Black — XBATCPH
Nominal current 1.0A Black — XBATCP1
Nominal current 2.0A Black — XBATCP2
Nominal current 3.0A Black — XBATCP3
Nominal current 4.0A Black — XBATCP4
Nominal current 6.0A Black — XBATCP6
Nominal current 8.0A Black — XBATCP8
Nominal current 10.0A Black — XBATCP10
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T6-31
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.5
Machine Integration
Terminal Blocks and Accessories
Flat-Type Fuse Terminal Blocks
Spring Cage Fuse Terminal Blocks
Terminal Width
Maximum Wire Size
Connection Data in V/A/AWG
UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Number of
Positions
8.2 mm
8 AWG/6 mm2
250/—/24-8
300/30/26-8
8.2 mm
8 AWG/6 mm2
250/—/24-8
300/30/26-8
Description Color Catalog Number Catalog Number
Product Selection
Flat-type fuse terminal block Black — XBUK6FSI —
Flat-type fuse terminal block with …
LED Red 12 Vdc, 2.0 mA Black — — XBUK6FSIL12
LED Red 24 Vdc, 2.0 mA Black — — XBUK6FSIL24
Terminal Width
Maximum Wire Size
Connection Data in V/A/AWG
UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Number of
Positions
8.2 mm
10 AWG/4 mm2
400/30/28-10
300/30/24-10
8.2 mm
10 AWG/4 mm2
400/30/28-10
300/30/24-10
Description Color Catalog Number Catalog Number
Product Selection
Spring cage fuse terminal block Black — XBPT4FSI —
Spring cage fuse terminal block with …
LED red 12 Vdc, 2.0 mA Black — —XBPT4FSIL12
LED red 24 Vdc, 2.0 mA Black — —XBPT4FSIL24
V9-T6-32 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.5
Machine Integration
Terminal Blocks and Accessories
Accessories
End-Stops
DIN Rails—35 x 7.5 mm x 2m
Marker Strips (Strip of 10)
Marker Sheets
Test Plugs
Note
1All markers are strips of 10, except XBMZB15 which is a strip of 5.
Description Size
Std.
Pack
Catalog
Number
Snap-on end stops 35 mm 50 XBAES35N
Universal end stops 35 mm 50 XBAES35T
35 mm 50 XBAES35C
Size
Std.
Pack
Catalog
Number
25 Slotted XBANS3575P
Terminal
Width (mm)
Std.
Pack
Catalog
Number
5.2 10 XBMZB5
6.2 10 XBMZB6
8.2 10 XBMZB8
10.2 10 XBMZB10
12 10 XBMZB12
16 10 XBMZB15 1
Flat
5.2 10 XBMZBF5
6.2 10 XBMZBF6
8.2 10 XBMZBF8
10.2 10 XBMZBF10
12 10 XBMZBF12
16 10 XBMZBF15
End-Stop
DIN Rails
Marker Strips
Terminal
Width (mm) Color
Std.
Pack
Catalog
Number
Marker Sheets (10 rows of 12)
5.2 White 50 XBMPZB5
5.2 Blue 50 XBMPZB5BU
5.2 Red 50 XBMPZB5RD
5.2 Yellow 50 XBMPZB5YE
5.2 Green 50 XBMPZB5GN
Marker Sheets (10 rows of 10)
6.2 White 50 XBMPZB6
6.2 Blue 50 XBMPZB6BU
6.2 Red 50 XBMPZB6RD
6.2 Yellow 50 XBMPZB6YE
6.2 Green 50 XBMPZB6GN
Flat Marker Sheets (10 rows of 10)
5.2 White 10 XBMPZBF5
5.2 Orange 10 XBMPZBF5OG
6.2 White 10 XBMPZBF6
6.2 Orange 10 XBMPZBF6OG
8.2 White 10 XBMPZBF8
Color
Std.
Pack
Catalog
Number
2.3 mm
—10XBATSMPSMT
Blue 10 XBATSMPSIHBU
White 10 XBATSMPSIHWH
Red 10 XBATSMPSIHRD
Black 10 XBATSMPSIHBK
4 mm
—10XBATSPSMT
Blue 10 XBATSPSIHBU
White 10 XBATSPSIHWH
Red 10 XBATSPSIHRD
Black 10 XBATSPSIHBK
Blank Marker Sheets
Flat Marker Sheets
Test Plugs
Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T6-33
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.5
Machine Integration
Terminal Blocks and Accessories
Printed Marking Tags
Marking Tags for 5.2 mm Wide Terminal Blocks
Marking Tags for 6.2 mm Wide Terminal Blocks
Notes
See Page V9-T6-34 for marking tags for 8.2–16 mm wide terminal blocks.
1 For text printed horizontally, change “V” in catalog number to “H.”
Description
Catalog
Number
ZB5 tags vertically numbered 1–10 1XBMZB5V/1
11–20 XBMZB5V/11
21–30 XBMZB5V/21
31–40 XBMZB5V/31
41–50 XBMZB5V/41
51–60 XBMZB5V/51
61–70 XBMZB5V/61
71–80 XBMZB5V/71
81–90 XBMZB5V/81
91–100 XBMZB5V/91
ZBF5 tags vertically numbered 1–10 1XBMZBF5V/1
11–20 XBMZBF5V/11
21–30 XBMZBF5V/21
31–40 XBMZBF5V/31
41–50 XBMZBF5V/41
51–60 XBMZBF5V/51
61–70 XBMZBF5V/61
71–80 XBMZBF5V/71
81–90 XBMZBF5V/81
91–100 XBMZBF5V/91
Description
Catalog
Number
ZB6 tags vertically numbered 1–10 1XBMZB6V/1
11–20 XBMZB6V/11
21–30 XBMZB6V/21
31–40 XBMZB6V/31
41–50 XBMZB6V/41
51–60 XBMZB6V/51
61–70 XBMZB6V/61
71–80 XBMZB6V/71
81–90 XBMZB6V/81
91–100 XBMZB6V/91
ZBF6 tags vertically numbered 1–10 1XBMZBF6V/1
11–20 XBMZBF6V/11
21–30 XBMZBF6V/21
31–40 XBMZBF6V/31
41–50 XBMZBF6V/41
51–60 XBMZBF6V/51
61–70 XBMZBF6V/61
71–80 XBMZBF6V/71
81–90 XBMZBF6V/81
91–100 XBMZBF6V/91
Terminal Block
Marking Tag
Horizontal Printed
Marking Tag
V9-T6-34 Volume 9—OEM—Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.5
Machine Integration
Terminal Blocks and Accessories
Marking Tags for 8.2 mm Wide Terminal Blocks
Marking Tags for 10.2 mm Wide Terminal Blocks
Marking Tags for 12 mm Wide Terminal Blocks
Marking Tags for 16 mm Wide Terminal Blocks
Note
1 For text printed horizontally, change “V” in catalog number to “H.”
Description
Catalog
Number
ZB8 tags vertically numbered 1–10 1XBMZB8V/1
11–20 XBMZB8V/11
21–30 XBMZB8V/21
31–40 XBMZB8V/31
41–50 XBMZB8V/41
51–60 XBMZB8V/51
61–70 XBMZB8V/61
71–80 XBMZB8V/71
81–90 XBMZB8V/81
91–100 XBMZB8V/91
ZBF8 tags vertically numbered 1–10 1XBMZBF8V/1
11–20 XBMZBF8V/11
21–30 XBMZBF8V/21
31–40 XBMZBF8V/31
41–50 XBMZBF8V/41
51–60 XBMZBF8V/51
61–70 XBMZBF8V/61
71–80 XBMZBF8V/71
81–90 XBMZBF8V/81
91–100 XBMZBF8V/91
Description
Catalog
Number
ZB10 tags vertically numbered 1–10 1XBMZB10V/1
11–20 XBMZB10V/11
21–30 XBMZB10V/21
ZBF10 tags vertically numbered 1–10 1XBMZBF10V/1
11–20 XBMZBF10V/11
21–30 XBMZBF10V/21
Description
Catalog
Number
ZB12 tags vertically numbered 1–10 1XBMZB12V/1
11–20 XBMZB12V/11
21–30 XBMZB12V/21
ZBF12 tags vertically numbered 11–10 1XBMZBF12V/1
11–20 XBMZBF12V/11
21–30 XBMZBF12V/21
Description
Catalog
Number
ZB15 tags vertically numbered 11–10 1XBMZB15V/1
11–20 XBMZB15V/11
21–30 XBMZB15V/21
ZBF15 tags vertically numbered 1–10 1XBMZBF15V/1
11–20 XBMZBF15V/11
21–30 XBMZBF15V/21
Terminal Block
Marking Tag
Horizontal Printed
Marking Tag
Volume 9—OEM Product Guide CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-A1-1
Appendix 1—Eaton Terms & Conditions
Effective Date: November 1, 2008
Eaton Terms & Conditions
Contents
Description Page
Terms and Conditions of Sale. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-A1-1
Terms of Payment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-A1-2
Freight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-A1-3
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-A1-3
Selling Policy (Supersedes Selling Policy 25-000, dated February 20, 2006)
Terms and Conditions of Sale
The Terms and Conditions of
Sale set forth herein, and any
supplements which may be
attached hereto, constitute
the full and final expression
of the contract for the sale
of products or services
(hereinafter referred to as
Product(s) or Services by
Eaton Corporation
(hereinafter referred to as
Seller) to the Buyer, and
supersedes all prior
quotations, purchase orders,
correspondence or
communications whether
written or oral between the
Seller and the Buyer.
Notwithstanding any contrary
language in the Buyer’s
purchase order,
correspondence or other
form of acknowledgment,
Buyer shall be bound by
these Terms and Conditions
of Sale when it sends a
purchase order or otherwise
indicates acceptance of this
contract, or when it accepts
delivery from Seller of the
Products or Services.
THE CONTRACT FOR SALE
OF THE PRODUCTS OR
SERVICES IS EXPRESSLY
LIMITED TO THE TERMS
AND CONDITIONS OF SALE
STATED HEREIN. ANY
ADDITIONAL OR DIFFERENT
TERMS PROPOSED BY
BUYER ARE REJECTED
UNLESS EXPRESSLY
AGREED TO IN WRITING BY
SELLER. No contract shall
exist except as herein
provided.
Complete Agreement
No amendment or
modification hereto nor any
statement, representation or
warranty not contained herein
shall be binding on the Seller
unless made in writing by an
authorized representative of
the Seller. Prior dealings,
usage of the trade or a course
of performance shall not be
relevant to determine the
meaning of this contract even
though the accepting or
acquiescing party had
knowledge of the nature
of the performance and
opportunity for objection.
Quotations
Written quotations are valid
for 30 days from its date
unless otherwise stated in
the quotation or terminated
sooner by notice.
Verbal quotations, unless
accepted, expire the same
day they are made.
A complete signed order
must be received by Seller
within 20 calendar days of
notification of award,
otherwise the price and
shipment will be subject to
re-negotiation.
Termination and Cancellation
Any order may be terminated
by the Buyer only by written
notice and upon payment
of reasonable termination
charges, including all costs
plus profit.
Seller shall have the right to
cancel any order at any time
by written notice if Buyer
breaches any of the terms
hereof, becomes the subject
of any proceeding under state
or federal law for the relief
of debtors, or otherwise
becomes insolvent or
bankrupt, generally does not
pay its debts as they become
due or makes an assignment
for the benefit of creditors.
V9-A1-2 Volume 9—OEM Product Guide CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
Appendix 1—Eaton Terms & Conditions
Effective Date: November 1, 2008
Prices
All prices are subject to
change without notice. In the
event of a price change, the
effective date of the change
will be the date of the new
price or discount sheet, letter
or telegram. All quotations
made or orders accepted
after the effective date will be
on the new basis. For existing
orders, the price of the
unshipped portion of an order
will be the price in effect at
time of shipment.
Price Policy—Products and
Services
When prices are quoted as
firm for quoted shipment, they
are firm provided the following
conditions are met:
1. The order is released
with complete
engineering details.
2. Shipment of Products are
made, and Services
purchased are provided
within the quoted
lead time.
3. When drawings for
approval are required
for any Products, the
drawings applicable to
those Products must be
returned within 30*
calendar days from the
date of the original
mailing of the drawings
by Seller. The return
drawings must be
released for manufacture
and shipment and must
be marked “APPROVED”
or “APPROVED AS
NOTED.” Drawing
re-submittals which are
required for any other
reason than to correct
Seller errors will not
extend the 30-day period.
* 60 days for orders
through contractors
to allow time for their
review and approval
before and after
transmitting them
to their customers.
If the Buyer initiates or in
any way causes delays
in shipment, provision of
Services or return of approval
drawings beyond the periods
stated above, the price of the
Products or Services will be
increased 1% per month
or fraction thereof up to a
maximum of 18 months from
the date of the Buyer’s order.
For delays resulting in
shipment or provision of
Services beyond 18 months
from the date of the Buyer’s
order, the price must be
renegotiated.
Price Policy—BLS
Refer to Price Policy 25-050.
Minimum Billing
Orders less than $1,000 will
be assessed a shipping and
handling charge of 5% of the
price of the order, with a
minimum charge of $25.00
unless noted differently on
Product discount sheets.
Taxes
The price does not include
any taxes. Buyer shall be
responsible for the payment
of all taxes applicable to, or
arising from the transaction,
the Products, its sale, value,
or use, or any Services
performed in connection
therewith regardless of
the person or entity
actually taxed.
Terms of Payment
Products
Acceptance of all orders is
subject to the Buyer meeting
Seller’s credit requirements.
Terms of payment are subject
to change for failure to meet
such requirements. Seller
reserves the right at any time
to demand full or partial
payment before proceeding
with a contract of sale as a
result of changes in the
financial condition of the
Buyer. Terms of Payment are
either Net 30 days from the
date of invoice of each
shipment or carry a cash
discount based on Product
type. Specific payment terms
for Products are outlined in
the applicable Product
discount schedules.
Services
Terms of payment are net
within 30 days from date of
invoice for orders amounting
to less than $50,000.00.
Terms of payment for orders
exceeding $50,000.00 shall
be made according to the
following:
1. Twenty percent (20%) of
order value with the
purchase order payable
30 days from date of
invoice.
2. Eighty percent (80%) of
order value in equal
monthly payments over
the performance period
payable 30 days from
date of invoice.
Except for work performed (i)
under a firm fixed price basis
or (ii) pursuant to terms of a
previously priced existing
contract between Seller and
Buyer, invoices for work
performed by Seller shall
have added and noted on
each invoice a charge of 3%
(over and above the price of
the work) which is related
to Seller compliance with
present and proposed
environmental, health, and
safety regulations associated
with prescribed requirements
covering hazardous materials
management and employee
training, communications,
personal protective
equipment, documentation
and record keeping
associated therewith.
Adequate Assurances
If, in the judgment of Seller,
the financial condition of the
Buyer, at any time during the
period of the contract, does
not justify the terms of
payment specified, Seller
may require full or partial
payment in advance.
Delayed Payment
If payments are not made in
accordance with these terms,
a service charge will, without
prejudice to the right of Seller
to immediate payment, be
added in an amount equal to
the lower of 1.5% per month
or fraction thereof or the
highest legal rate on the
unpaid balance.
Volume 9—OEM Product Guide CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-A1-3
Appendix 1—Eaton Terms & Conditions
Effective Date: November 1, 2008
Freight
Freight policy will be listed on
the Product discount sheets,
or at option of Seller one of
the following freight terms
will be quoted.
F.O.B.—P/S—Frt./Ppd. and
Invoiced
Products are sold F.O.B. point
of shipment freight prepaid
and invoiced to the Buyer.
F.O.B.—P/S—Frt./Ppd.
and Allowed
Products sold are delivered
F.O.B. point of shipment,
freight prepaid and included
in the price.
F.O.B. Destination—Frt./Ppd.
and Allowed
At Buyer’s option, Seller will
deliver the Products F.O.B.
destination freight prepaid
and 2% will be added to the
net price.
The term “freight prepaid”
means that freight charges
will be prepaid to the
accessible common carrier
delivery point nearest the
destination for shipments
within the United States and
Puerto Rico unless noted
differently on the Product
discount sheets. For any
other destination contact
Seller’s representative.
Shipment and Routing
Seller shall select the point of
origin of shipment, the
method of transportation, the
type of carrier equipment and
the routing of the shipment.
If the Buyer specifies a
special method of
transportation, type of carrier
equipment, routing, or
delivery requirement, Buyer
shall pay all special freight
and handling charges.
When freight is included in
the price, no allowance will
be made in lieu of
transportation if the Buyer
accepts shipment at factory,
warehouse, or freight station
or otherwise supplies its own
transportation.
Risk of Loss
Risk of loss or damage to the
Products shall pass to Buyer
at the F.O.B. point.
Concealed Damage
Except in the event of F.O.B.
destination shipments, Seller
will not participate in any
settlement of claims for
concealed damage.
When shipment has been
made on an F.O.B. destination
basis, the Buyer must unpack
immediately and, if damage is
discovered must:
1. Not move the Products
from the point of
examination.
2. Retain shipping container
and packing material.
3. Notify the carrier in
writing of any apparent
damage.
4. Notify Seller
representative within
72 hours of delivery.
5. Send Seller a copy of
the carrier’s inspection
report.
Witness Tests/Customer
Inspection
Standard factory tests may be
witnessed by the Buyer
at Seller’s factory for an
additional charge calculated
at the rate of $2,500 per day
(not to exceed eight (8) hours)
per Product type. Buyer may
final inspect Products at the
Seller’s factory for $500 per
day per Product type.
Witness tests will add one (1)
week to the scheduled
shipping date. Seller will
notify Buyer fourteen (14)
calendar days prior to
scheduled witness testing
or inspection. In the event
Buyer is unable to attend, the
Parties shall mutually agree
on a rescheduled date.
However, Seller reserves
the right to deem the witness
tests waived with the right to
ship and invoice Products.
Held Orders
For any order held, delayed
or rescheduled at the request
of the Buyer, Seller may, at
its sole option (1) require
payment to be based on any
reasonable basis, including
but not limited to the contract
price, and any additional
expenses, or cost resulting
from such a delay; (2) store
Products at the sole cost and
risk of loss of the Buyer; and/
or (3) charge to the Buyer
those prices under the
applicable price policy.
Payment for such price,
expenses and costs, in any
such event, shall be due by
Buyer within thirty (30) days
from date of Seller’s invoice.
Any order so held delayed or
rescheduled beyond six (6)
months will be treated as a
Buyer termination.
Drawing Approval
Seller will design the
Products in line with, in
Seller’s judgment, good
commercial practice. If at
drawing approval Buyer
makes changes outside of
the design as covered in their
specifications, Seller will then
be paid reasonable charges
and allowed a commensurate
delay in shipping date based
on the changes made.
Drawing Re-Submittal
When Seller agrees to do so
in its quotation, Seller shall
provide Buyer with the first
set of factory customer
approval drawing(s) at Seller’s
expense. The customer
approval drawing(s) will be
delivered at the quoted
delivery date. If Buyer
requests drawing changes
or additions after the initial
factory customer approval
drawing(s) have been
submitted by Seller, the
Seller, at its option, may
assess Buyer drawing
charges. Factory customer
approval drawing changes
required due to
misinterpretation by Seller
will be at Seller’s expense.
Approval drawings generated
by Bid Manager are excluded
from this provision.
Warranty
Warranty for Products
Seller warrants that the
Products manufactured by
it will conform to Seller’s
applicable specifications and
be free from failure due to
defects in workmanship and
material for one (1) year from
the date of installation of
the Product or eighteen (18)
months from the date of
shipment of the Product,
whichever occurs first.
In the event any Product fails
to comply with the foregoing
warranty Seller will, at its
option, either (a) repair or
replace the defective
Product, or defective part or
component thereof, F.O.B.
Seller’s facility freight
prepaid, or (b) credit Buyer
for the purchase price of the
Product. All warranty claims
shall be made in writing.
Seller requires all non-
conforming Products be
returned at Seller’s expense
for evaluation unless
specifically stated otherwise
in writing by Seller.
This warranty does not
cover failure or damage
due to storage, installation,
operation or maintenance not
in conformance with Seller’s
recommendations and
industry standard practice
or due to accident, misuse,
abuse or negligence. This
warranty does not cover
reimbursement for labor,
gaining access, removal,
installation, temporary power
or any other expenses, which
may be incurred in connection
with repair or replacement.
This warranty does not
apply to equipment not
manufactured by Seller.
Seller limits itself to
extending the same warranty
it receives from the supplier.
V9-A1-4 Volume 9—OEM Product Guide CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
Appendix 1—Eaton Terms & Conditions
Effective Date: November 1, 2008
Extended Warranty for Products
If requested by the Buyer and
specifically accepted in
writing by Seller, the
foregoing standard warranty
for Products will be extended
from the date of shipment for
the period and price indicated
below:
●24 months—2% of
Contract Price
●30 months—3% of
Contract Price
●36 months—4% of
Contract Price
Special Warranty (In and Out)
for Products
If requested by the Buyer
and specifically accepted in
writing by Seller, Seller will,
during the warranty period
for Products, at an additional
cost of 2% of the contract
price, be responsible for the
direct cost of:
1. Removing the Product
from the installed
location.
2. Transportation to the
repair facility and return
to the site.
3. Reinstallation on site.
The total liability of Seller for
this Special Warranty for
Products is limited to 50%
of the contract price of the
particular Product being
repaired and excludes
expenses for removing
adjacent apparatus, walls,
piping, structures, temporary
service, etc.
Warranty for Services
Seller warrants that the
Services performed by it
hereunder will be performed
in accordance with generally
accepted professional
standards.
The Services, which do not
so conform, shall be
corrected by Seller upon
notification in writing by the
Buyer within one (1) year
after completion of the
Services.
Unless otherwise agreed to in
writing by Seller, Seller
assumes no responsibility
with respect to the suitability
of the Buyer’s, or its
customer’s, equipment or
with respect to any latent
defects in equipment not
supplied by Seller. This
warranty does not cover
damage to Buyer’s, or its
customer’s, equipment,
components or parts
resulting in whole or in part
from improper maintenance
or operation or from their
deteriorated condition. Buyer
will, at its cost, provide Seller
with unobstructed access
to the defective Services,
as well as adequate free
working space in the
immediate vicinity of the
defective Services and such
facilities and systems,
including, without limitation,
docks, cranes and utility
disconnects and connects,
as may be necessary in order
that Seller may perform its
warranty obligations. The
conducting of any tests shall
be mutually agreed upon and
Seller shall be notified of, and
may be present at, all tests
that may be made.
Warranty for Power Systems
Studies
Seller warrants that any
power systems studies
performed by it will conform
to generally accepted
professional standards. Any
portion of the study, which
does not so conform, shall
be corrected by Seller upon
notification in writing by the
Buyer within six (6) months
after completion of the study.
All warranty work shall be
performed in a single shift
straight time basis Monday
through Friday. In the event
that the study requires
correction of warranty items
on an overtime schedule,
the premium portion of such
overtime shall be for the
Buyer’s account.
Limitation on Warranties for
Products, Services and Power
Systems Studies
THE FOREGOING
WARRANTIES ARE
EXCLUSIVE EXCEPT FOR
WARRANTY OF TITLE.
SELLER DISCLAIMS ALL
OTHER WARRANTIES
INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
CORRECTION OF NON-
CONFORMITIES IN THE
MANNER AND FOR THE
PERIOD OF TIME PROVIDED
ABOVE SHALL CONSTITUTE
SELLER’S SOLE LIABILITY
AND BUYER’S EXCLUSIVE
REMEDY FOR FAILURE OF
SELLER TO MEET ITS
WARRANTY OBLIGATIONS,
WHETHER CLAIMS OF
THE BUYER ARE BASED
IN CONTRACT, IN TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR STRICT LIABILITY), OR
OTHERWISE.
Asbestos
Federal Law requires that
building or facility owners
identify the presence,
location and quantity of
asbestos containing material
(hereinafter “ACM”) at work
sites. Seller is not licensed to
abate ACM. Accordingly, for
any contract which includes
the provision of Services,
prior to (i) commencement of
work at any site under a
specific Purchase Order, (ii) a
change in the work scope of
any Purchase Order, the
Buyer will certify that the
work area associated with the
Seller’s scope of work
includes the handling of Class
II ACM, including but not
limited to generator wedges
and high temperature gaskets
which include asbestos
materials. The Buyer shall, at
its expense, conduct
abatement should the
removal, handling,
modification or reinstallation,
or some or all of them, of said
Class II ACM be likely to
generate airborne asbestos
fibers; and should such
abatement affect the cost
of or time of performance
of the work then Seller shall
be entitled to an equitable
adjustment in the schedule,
price and other pertinent
affected provisions of
the contract.
Compliance with Nuclear
Regulation
Seller’s Products are sold as
commercial grade Products
not intended for application in
facilities or activities licensed
by the United States Nuclear
Regulatory Commission for
atomic purposes. Further
certification will be required
for use of the Products in any
safety-related application in
any nuclear facility licensed
by the U.S. Nuclear
Regulatory Commission.
Volume 9—OEM Product Guide CA08100011E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-A1-5
Appendix 1—Eaton Terms & Conditions
Effective Date: November 1, 2008
Returning Products
Authorization and shipping
instructions for the return
of any Products must be
obtained from Seller before
returning the Products.
When return is occasioned
due to Seller error, full credit
including all transportation
charges will be allowed.
Product Notices
Buyer shall provide the user
(including its employees) of
the Products with all Seller
supplied Product notices,
warnings, instructions,
recommendations, and
similar materials.
Force Majeure
Seller shall not be liable for
failure to perform or delay
in performance due to fire,
flood, strike or other labor
difficulty, act of God, act of
any governmental authority or
of the Buyer, riot, embargo,
fuel or energy shortage, car
shortage, wrecks or delays in
transportation, or due to any
other cause beyond Seller’s
reasonable control. In the
event of delay in performance
due to any such cause, the
date of delivery or time for
completion will be extended
by a period of time reasonably
necessary
to overcome the
effect of such delay.
Liquidated Damages
Contracts which include
liquidated damage clauses for
failure to meet shipping or job
completion promises are not
acceptable or binding on
Seller, unless such clauses
are specifically accepted in
writing by an authorized
representative of the Seller at
its headquarters office.
Patent Infringement
Seller will defend or, at its
option, settle any suit or
proceeding brought against
Buyer, or Buyer’s customers,
to the extent it is based upon
a claim that any Product or
part thereof, manufactured by
Seller or its subsidiaries and
furnished hereunder,
infringes any United States
patent, other than a claim of
infringement based upon use
of a Product or part thereof in
a process, provided Seller is
notified in reasonable time
and given authority,
information and assistance
(at Seller’s expense) for the
defense of same. Seller shall
pay all legal and court costs
and expenses and court-
assessed damages awarded
therein against Buyer
resulting from or incident to
such suit or proceeding. In
addition to the foregoing, if at
any time Seller determines
there is a substantial question
of infringement of any United
States patent, and the use of
such Product is or may be
enjoined, Seller may, at its
option and expense: either (a)
procure for Buyer the right to
continue using and selling the
Product; (b) replace the
Product with non-infringing
apparatus; (c) modify the
Product so it becomes non-
infringing; or (d) as a last
resort, remove the Product
and refund the purchase
price, equitably adjusted for
use and obsolescence. In no
case does Seller agree to pay
any recovery based upon its
Buyer’s savings or profit
through use of Seller’s
Products whether the use be
special or ordinary. The
foregoing states the entire
liability of Seller for patent
infringement.
The preceding paragraph
does not apply to any claim of
infringement based upon: (a)
any modification made to a
Product other than by Seller;
(b) any design and/or
specifications of Buyer to
which a Product was
manufactured; or (c) the use
or combination of Product
with other products where
the Product does not itself
infringe. As to the above-
identified claim situations
where the preceding
paragraph does not apply,
Buyer shall defend and hold
Seller harmless in the same
manner and to the extent as
Seller’s obligations described
in the preceding paragraph.
Buyer shall be responsible for
obtaining (at Buyer’s
expense) all license rights
required for Seller to be able
to use software products in
the possession of Buyer
where such use is required in
order to perform any Service
for Buyer.
With respect to a Product or
part thereof not manufactured
by Seller or its subsidiaries,
Seller will attempt to obtain
for Buyer, from the supplier(s),
the patent indemnification
protection normally provided
by the supplier(s) to
customers.
Limitation of Liability
THE REMEDIES OF THE
BUYER SET FORTH IN THIS
CONTRACT ARE EXCLUSIVE
AND ARE ITS SOLE
REMEDIES FOR ANY
FAILURE OF SELLER
TO COMPLY WITH ITS
OBLIGATIONS HEREUNDER.
NOTWITHSTANDING
ANY PROVISION IN THIS
CONTRACT TO THE
CONTRARY, IN NO EVENT
SHALL SELLER BE LIABLE
IN CONTRACT, IN TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR STRICT LIABILITY) OR
OTHERWISE FOR DAMAGE
TO PROPERTY OR
EQUIPMENT OTHER THAN
PRODUCTS SOLD
HEREUNDER, LOSS OF
PROFITS OR REVENUE,
LOSS OF USE OF
PRODUCTS, COST OF
CAPITAL, CLAIMS OF
CUSTOMERS OF THE
BUYER OR ANY SPECIAL,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES WHATSOEVER,
REGARDLESS OF WHETHER
SUCH POTENTIAL
DAMAGES ARE
FORESEEABLE OR IF
SELLER HAS BEEN ADVISED
OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES.
THE TOTAL CUMULATIVE
LIABILITY OF SELLER
ARISING FROM OR
RELATED TO THIS
CONTRACT WHETHER
THE CLAIMS ARE BASED
IN CONTRACT, IN TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR STRICT LIABILITY) OR
OTHERWISE, SHALL NOT
EXCEED THE PRICE OF THE
PRODUCT OR SERVICES
ON WHICH SUCH LIABILITY
IS BASED.
